M.tech. First Year Syllabus - 2020

SAINTGITS COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
Kottukulam Hills, Pathamuttom, Kottayam
AUTONOMOUS COLLEGE AFFILIATED TO APJ ABDUL KALAM

TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY, THIRUVANANTHAPURAM
FIRST YEAR SYLLABUS 2020

PG Programme - Master of Technology (M.Tech.)
SAINTGITS COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING (AUTONOMOUS)
M. Tech. Syllabus 2020
INDEX
Sl No Course Code Course Name Page No
COMPUTER SCIENCE AND SYSTEMS ENGINEERING
1 20CSSET101 Discrete Structures for Computer Science 2
2 20CSSET103 Advanced Algorithmic Concepts 4
3 20CSSET105 Automata Theory and Computability 6
4 20CSSET107 Distributed Systems and Advanced Computing 8
5 20CSSET111 Advanced Database Concepts 10
6 20CSSET121 Linear Algebra and Topology 12
7 20CSSET131 Computer Systems Engineering 14
8 20CSSET141 Number Theory 16
9 20GNGNT101 Research Methodology 19
10 20CSSEQ101 Seminar - I 21
11 20CSSEL101 Distributed Systems and Advanced Computing Lab 22
12 20CSSET102 Computer System Design and Architecture 23
13 20CSSET104 Computer Aided Software Engineering 25
14 20CSSET112 Approximation Algorithms 27
15 20CSSET122 Automated Verification 29
16 20CSSET132 Program Analysis and Verification 31
17 20CSSET142 Statistical Foundations of Machine Learning 33
18 20CSSET114 Engineering System Architectures 35
19 20CSSET124 Foundations of Crypto Systems 37
20 20CSSET134 Graph theory 40
21 20CSSET144 Foundations of Machine Learning Techniques 42

22 20CSSET116 Operating System Kernel Design 44
23 20CSSET126 Randomized Algorithms 47
24 20CSSET136 Mathematical Foundations of Digital Image Processing 49
25 20CSSET146 Big Data Management and Analytics 51
26 20CSSEP101 Mini Project 53
27 20CSSEL102 Computer Aided Software Engineering Lab 54
28 20CSSED101 Industrial Training 55
GEOMECHANICS AND STRUCTURES
29 20CEGST101 Applied Mathematics for Civil Engineers 57
30 20CEGST103 Theoretical Geomechanics 59
31 20CEGST105 Advanced Soil Mechanics 62
32 20CEGST107 Advanced Design of Concrete Structures 65
33 20CEGST111 Soil Exploration and Field Testing 67
34 20CEGST121 Soil- Structure Interaction 70
35 20CEGST131 Critical State Soil Mechanics 72
36 20CEGST141 Prestressed Concrete Structures 74
38 20CEGSQ101 Seminar – I 78
39 20CEGSL101 Advanced Geotechnical and Structural Lab 79
40 20CEGST102 Design of Reinforced Concrete Foundations 80
41 20CEGST104 Foundation Analysis and Design 82
42 20CEGST106 Dynamics of Soil and Design of Machine Foundations 85
43 20CEGST112 Ground Water Engineering 87
44 20CEGST122 Ground Improvement Techniques 90
45 20CEGST132 Applied Soil Mechanics 93

46 20CEGST142 Earthquake Analysis and Design of Structures 96
47 20CEGST114 Environmental Geotechniques 98
48 20CEGST124 Advanced Steel Structures 101
49 20CEGST134 Analysis and Design of Pavements 103
50 20CEGST144 Modern Construction Practices 106
51 20CEGSP101 Mini Project 109
52 20CEGSL102 Civil Engineering Design Studio 110
53 20CEGSD101 Industrial Training 111
MACHINE DESIGN
54 20MEMDT101 Advanced Engineering Mathematics 113
55 20MEMDT103 Theory of Vibration 115
56 20MEMDT105 Advanced Mechanics of Solids 117
57 20MEMDT107 Design of Power Transmission Elements 119
58 20MEMDT111 Industrial Tribology 121
59 20MEMDT121 Additive Manufacturing 123
60 20MEMDT131 Composite Materials and Mechanics 125
61 20MEMDT141 Engineering Optimization 127
63 20MEMDQ101 Seminar - I 131
64 20MEMDL101 Advanced Measurements Lab 132
65 20MEMDT102 Finite Element Analysis 133
66 20MEMDT104 Design Engineering 135
67 20MEMDT106 Advanced Theory of Mechanisms 137
68 20MEMDT112 Industrial Instrumentation 139
69 20MEMDT122 Computer Aided Design in Manufacturing 141

70 20MEMDT132 Principles of Robotics and Applications 143
71 20MEMDT142 Experimental Stress Analysis 145
72 20MEMDT114 Numerical Methods 147
73 20MEMDT124 Oil Hydraulics and Pneumatics 149
74 20MEMDT134 Advanced Machine Tool Design 151
75 20MEMDT144 Fracture Mechanics and Design 153
76 20MEMDP101 Mini Project 155
77 20MEMDL102 Computer Aided Engineering Design 156
78 20MEMDD101 Industrial Training 157
POWER SYSTEMS
79 20EEPST101 Applied Mathematics 159
80 20EEPST103 Optimization of Power System Operation 163
81 20EEPST105 Computer Applications in Power Systems 166
82 20EEPST107 Power Electronic Circuits 169
83 20EEPST111 System Theory 172
84 20EEPST121 Power Quality 175
85 20EEPST131 High Voltage Generation and Testing Techniques 178
86 20EEPST141 Advanced Relaying and Protection 182
88 20EEPSQ101 Seminar - I 188
89 20EEPSL101 Power Systems Simulation Lab 189
90 20EEPST102 Power System Control and Security 191
91 20EEPST104 Flexible AC Transmission Systems 194
92 20EEPST106 Power System Dynamics and Stability 197
93 20EEPST112 Power Electronic System Control and Applications 201

94 20EEPST122 Power System Voltage Stability 204
95 20EEPST132 Power System Transients and Insulation Coordination 207
96 20EEPST142 Industrial Energy Conservation and Management 210
97 20EEPST114 Soft Computing Techniques in Power Systems 213
98 20EEPST124 EHV AC and DC Transmission 216
99 20EEPST134 Power System Monitoring and Instrumentation 219
100 20EEPST144 Power System Reliability 221
101 20EEPSP101 Mini Project 224
102 20EEPSL102 Power Systems Lab 225
103 20EEPSD101 Industrial Training 226
ROBOTICS AND AUTOMATION
104 20ECRAT101 Advanced Mathematics and Optimization Techniques 228
105 20ECRAT103 Robotic System Configuration 230
106 20ECRAT105 Fluid Power Automation 233
107 20ECRAT107 Measurements and Sensors for Automation 235
108 20ECRAT111 Advanced Control Systems 238
109 20ECRAT121 Soft Computing Techniques 241
110 20ECRAT131 Artificial Intelligence and Expert Systems in Automation 243
111 20ECRAT141 Human Robo Interface 245
113 20ECRAQ101 Seminar - I 249
114 20ECRAL101 Automation Lab 250
115 20ECRAT102 Industrial Automation 251
116 20ECRAT104 Programmable Logic Control and Computer Numerical 253

Control
117 20ECRAT106 Control, Programming and Calibrations of Robots 256
118 20ECRAT112 System Analysis and Design 260
119 20ECRAT122 Condition Monitoring and Maintenance Engineering 263
120 20ECRAT132 Control of Industrial Drives 265
121 20ECRAT142 Design of Power Electronic System 267
122 20ECRAT152 Sustainable and Translational Engineering 269
123 20ECRAT162 Design of Embedded Systems 271
124 20ECRAT172 Digital Image Processing and Computer Vision 273
125 20ECRAT114 Advanced Finite Element Methods 275
126 20ECRAT124 Mechanism and Machine Theory 279
127 20ECRAT134 Robotics 282
128 20ECRAT144 Nonlinear Control Systems 284
129 20ECRAT154 Adaptive Control 287
130 20ECRAT164 Non Linear and Adaptive Control Systems 290
131 20ECRAP101 Mini Project 292
132 20ECRAL102 Robotics Lab 293
STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING AND CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT
133 20CESCT101 Analytical Methods in Engineering 296
134 20CESCT103 Theory of Elasticity 298
135 20CESCT105 Construction Management 300
136 20CESCT107 Advanced Design of Concrete Structures 302
137 20CESCT111 Construction and Contracts Management 304
138 20CESCT121 Structural Dynamics 306
139 20CESCT131 Construction Planning, Scheduling and Control 308
140 20CESCT141 Prestressed Concrete Structures 310
142 20CESCQ101 Seminar - I 314

143 20CESCL101 Computer Application Lab 315
144 20CESCT102 Project Planning and Implementation 316
145 20CESCT104 Finite Element Analysis 318
146 20CESCT106 Theory of Plates and Shells 320
147 20CESCT112 Advanced Analysis of Structures 322
148 20CESCT122 Design of Reinforced Concrete Foundations 324
149 20CESCT132 Earthquake Analysis and Design of Structures 326
150 20CESCT142 Construction Methods and Equipments 328
151 20CESCT114 Advanced Concrete Technology 330
152 20CESCT124 Advanced Steel Structures 332
153 20CESCT134 Quantitative Methods in Construction 334
154 20CESCT144 Project Formulation and Appraisal 336
155 20CESCP101 Mini Project 338
156 20CESCL102 Structural Engineering Lab 339
157 20CESCD101 Industrial Training 340
TELECOMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
158 20ECTET101 Applied Linear Algebra 342
159 20ECTET103 Random Processes and Applications 344
160 20ECTET105 Advanced Digital Communication 346
161 20ECTET107 Advanced Digital Signal Processing 348
162 20ECTET111 Optical Communication Systems 350
163 20ECTET121 Modelling and Simulation of Communication Systems 352
164 20ECTET131 Spread Spectrum and CDMA Systems 354
166 20ECTEQ101 Seminar - I 358
167 20ECTEL101 Telecommunication Lab - I 359

168 20ECTET102 Estimation and Detection Theory 360
169 20ECTET104 Antenna Theory and Design 362
170 20ECTET106 Wireless Communication and Networks 364
171 20ECTET112 Adaptive Signal Processing 366
172 20ECTET122 Digital Microwave Communication 368
173 20ECTET132 Embedded Systems for Communication 370
174 20ECTET114 Information Theory 372
175 20ECTET124 Image and Video Processing 374
176 20ECTET134 High Performance Communication Networks 376
177 20ECTEP101 Mini Project 378
178 20ECTEL102 Telecommunication Lab - II 379
VLSI AND EMBEDDED SYSTEMS
179 20ECVET101 VLSI Technology 381
180 20ECVET103 Advanced Digital Design 384
181 20ECVET105 CMOS VLSI Design 387
182 20ECVET107 Design with ARM Microcontrollers 390
183 20ECVET111 ASIC and FPGA 392
184 20ECVET121 VLSI Design Automation 394
185 20ECVET131 Embedded Network Controllers 397
186 20ECVET141 Embedded Software Design 400
188 20ECVEQ101 Seminar - I 405
189 20ECVEL101 VLSI and Embedded Systems Lab - I 406
190 20ECVET102 Analog Integrated Circuits 407
191 20ECVET104 Advanced CMOS VLSI 410
192 20ECVET106 Embedded Operating Systems and RTOS 412

193 20ECVET112 VLSI Testing 414
194 20ECVET122 Introduction to MEMS 416
195 20ECVET132 DSP Based System Design 418
196 20ECVET142 Hardware Software Co-Design 421
197 20ECVET114 VLSI Digital Signal Processing 424
198 20ECVET124 Reconfigurable Computing 426
199 20ECVET134 Embedded Control Systems 429
200 20ECVET144 Electronic Packaging 431
201 20ECVEP101 Mini Project 433
202 20ECVEL102 VLSI and Embedded Systems Lab - II 434

M. Tech. Syllabus 2020 – Computer Science and Systems Engineering
M. Tech. DEGREE PROGRAMME

IN
COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
WITH SPECIALIZATION
COMPUTER SCIENCE AND SYSTEMS ENGINEERING
1
SEMESTER 1
COURSE CODE COURSE NAME L-T-P-C YEAR

Discrete Structures for Computer
20CSSET101 3-1-0-4 2020
Science
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course
Objectives:
To give the Student:-
1. The foundation of various areas of study in the Computer Science is Discrete Structures.
The topics here are selected to serve as the base for other subjects essential for a PG course
in Computer Science and Systems Engineering.
2. The contents of the first module are a prerequisite for subjects like Automata Theory,
Algorithms, and Verification etc. Second module is a prerequisite for subjects like Formal
Verification, Program Analysis etc.
3. Third module is a prerequisite for subjects like Algorithms, Cryptography, Security, Computer
Vision etc. Fourth module is essential for understanding various algebraic structures used in
many other subjects.
Syllabus
Sets, Relations, Functions and Lattices, Partial orders; Hasse Diagram. Propositional Logic:
Semantics of Propositional Logic. Meaning Soundness of Propositional Logic, Completeness of
Propositional Logic. Counting and Probability; Permutations and Combinations, Binomial Theorem,
Combinations with Repetition. Discrete Probability, Bayes Theorem. Bernoulli, random variables,
Expectation, Linearity of Expectation. Groups, Homeomorphisms, Isomorphism’s, and Cyclic Groups.
Cosets and Lagrange's Theorem. Ring - Definition and Examples, Properties of Rings.
Outcome:
1. Gain greater knowledge of some key areas of discrete mathematics;

2. Develop mathematical skills, analytical and critical thinking abilities, ability to apply these
capabilities to practical problems; and
3. Develop ability to communicate the knowledge of these areas.
Text Books:
1. Ralph P. Grimaldi, Rose-Hulman Institute of Technology: Discrete and Combinatorial

Mathematics, 5/E, Pearson, 2004.
2. Michael Huth, Mark Ryan: Logic in Computer Science: Modelling and Reasoning about Systems,
Cambridge University Press, 2004.
References:
1. Nielson, Nielson, and Hankin, "Principles of Program Analysis", Springer-Verlag.
2
Course plan
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20CSSET101 Discrete Structures for Computer Science 3-1-0-4
Contact ESE
MODULES
Hours Marks
(%)
MODULE : 1 9 15
Sets, Relations, Functions and Lattices: Sets, Relations. Functions, Different Types of
Functions, Composition and Inverse, Properties of Relations.
MODULE : 2 10 15
Partial orders: Hasse Diagram, Equivalence Relation and Partitions, Lattices,

Complete Lattice. Propositional Logic: Semantics of Propositional Logic. Meaning of
Logical Connectives, Mathematical Induction.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE : 3 9 15
Soundness of Propositional Logic, Completeness of Propositional Logic. Counting

and Probability : The Rules of Sum and Product, Permutations and Combinations
MODULE : 4 9 15
Binomial Theorem, Combinations with Repetition. Discrete Probability: Axioms of

Probability, Conditional Probability, Bayes Theorem.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE : 5 10 20
Discrete Random Variables-Bernoulli, binomial and geometric random variables,

Expectation, Linearity of Expectation. Abstract Algebra: Groups – Definition,
Examples and Elementary Properties, Homomorphisms, Isomorphisms, and Cyclic
Groups.
MODULE : 6 9 20
Cosets and Lagrange's Theorem. Ring - Definition and Examples, Properties of

Rings, Integers Modulo n, Structure of the ring Zn and the unit group Zn*.
3
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C YEAR
CODE
20CSSET103 Advanced Algorithmic Concepts 3-1-0-4 2020
Course Objectives:
1. To provide a solid foundation in asymptotic and amortized algorithm analysis.

2. To introduce advanced data structures and their operations so as to use them for formulating
efficient solutions to various real world problems.
3. To introduce the foundations of Computational Complexity Theory.
Syllabus:
Apriori Analysis, Asymptotic Notations, Master's Theorem, Recurrence Equations. Methods for
solving Recurrence Equations, Amortized Analysis. Advanced Data Structures :Heaps, B Trees, B+ Trees
, Red Black Trees, String Pattern Matching, Flow Networks: - Network Flow , Max-Flow Min Cut
Theorem, Methods for finding Maximum Bipartite Matching, Konig's Egravary Theorem. Theoretical
Foundation for Greedy algorithms. Complexity Theory: Classes P and NP, Polynomial Time Reductions,
NP- Complete class, Examples, Class NP- Hard and examples.
Course Outcome:
1. Know the different notions of asymptotic complexity. Determine the asymptotic complexity of
algorithms including the solving of recurrence relations.
2. Implement, analyze, and compare algorithms; determine the practical implications of asymptotic
notations.
3. Efficiently implement both basic as well as advanced data structures including heaps,
trees,etc.,Know and use basic and advanced graph algorithms
Text Books:
1. CLRS: Cormen, T. H., Leiserson, C. E., Rivest, R. L.,&Stein, C. (2001). Introduction to

Algorithms ( Vol. 2, pp. 531-549). Cambridge: MIT press.
2. KT: Kleinberg, J.,&Tardos, _E. (2006). Algorithm Design. Pearson Education India
4
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20CSSET103 Advanced Algorithmic Concepts 3-1-0-4
Contact ESE
MODULES
Hours Marks
(%)
MODULE : 1 9 15
Review of Algorithm Analysis: Apriori Analysis, Asymptotic Notations, Master's

Theorem, Recurrence Equations. Methods for solving Recurrence Equations
(Substitution Method, Iteration Method, Recurrence Tree Method).
MODULE : 2 10 15
Amortized Analysis, Aggregate Analysis, Accounting Method, Potential Method,

Illustrative examples. Advanced Data Structures: - Binomial Heaps, Fibonacci
Heaps, Disjoint Sets. B Trees, B+ Trees, Red Black Trees.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE : 3 9 15
String Pattern Matching:- Pattern matching algorithms ( Pattern matching using

finite Automata, Rabin, Karp algorithm , KMP algorithm)Flow Networks: -
Network Flow , Max-Flow Min-Cut Theorem,
MODULE : 4 9 15
Methods for finding Flow (Ford-Fulkerson Method, Edmond Karp algorithm

(Heuristics I and II). Dinic's Method, MPM Algorithm), Maximum Bipartite
Matching, Konig's Egravary Theorem.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE : 5 9 20
Theoretical Foundation for Greedy algorithms: Matroid theory, Greedy

Strategy vs Dynamic Programing. Complexity Theory: Classes P and NP,
Polynomial Time Reductions.
MODULE : 6 10 20
NP- Complete class, Examples SAT Problem, 3-SAT Problem. Clique Problem,
Vertex Cover Problem, Independent Set Problem, Integer Programming
Problem, Graph Coloring Problem, Class NP- Hard and examples.
5
COURSE
CODE
Automata Theory and
20CSSET105 3-0-0-3 2020
Computability
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
1. This subject is the corner stone of many other core subjects like Compiler, Algorithms,
Formal Verification and Program Analysis in Computer Science. The topics covered are
also important for Digital Circuit Design for state minimization and analysis.
2. The subject introduces rigorous formal methods for the specification and analysis of a
software.
Syllabus:
Finite Automata : DFA, NFA – Examples, homomorphism’s, Limitations of Finite Automata, Myhill-
Nerode Relations, Myhill-Nerode Theorem; Pattern Matching and Regular Expressions. Pushdown
Automata and Context-Free Languages: Chomsky Normal Form, Pumping Lemma for CFL, Parikh's
theorem, Pushdown Automata. Turing Machines and Effective Computability: Decidable and
Undecidable Problems, Reduction-problems. Rice's Theorems.
Course Outcome:
1. Ability to represent regular languages in different formal ways.

2. Knowledge about the application of regular languages in the design of system software,
formal specifications etc.
3. Sound understanding of context-free languages and the class of automata recognizing
context-free languages.
4. Confidence in writing formal proofs.
5. Knowledge about the notion of computability
6. Ability to prove that certain problems are undecidable.
Text Books:
1. Dexter Kozen: Automata and Computability. Springer 1999.

2. Hopcroft J.E. and Ullman J.D.: Introduction to Automata, Languages and Computation.
Addison Wesley, 1979.
References:
1. H. R. Lewis and C. H. Papadimitriou: Elements of the Theory of Computation. Prentice Hall,

1981.
2. Note on Buchi's MSO characterization of regular languages

(http://drona.csa.iisc.ernet.in/~deepakd/atc-2011/atc.html)
6
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20CSSET105 Automata Theory and Computability 3-0-0-3
ESE
Contact
MODULES Marks
hours
(%)
MODULE : 1 9 20
Finite Automata : DFA, NFA – Examples, Equivalence (subset construction),

Closure Properties (proof), homomorphism’s. DFA State Minimization (quotient
construction).
MODULE : 2 4 10
Regular Expressions and Logical Characterization of Regular Languages: Pattern

Matching and Regular Expressions, Regular Expressions and Finite Automata.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE : 3 9 15
Pumping Lemma and Ultimate Periodicity, Myhill-Nerode Relations, Myhill-

Nerode Theorem; problems.
MODULE : 4 9 15
Pushdown Automata and Context-Free Languages: Context-Free Grammars and

Languages, examples (proving correctness with mathematical induction),
Chomsky Normal Form. Pumping Lemma for CFL, Parikh's theorem, Pushdown
Automata, Final State Versus Empty Stack.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE : 5 9 20
Turing Machines: Turing machine, examples, Equivalent Models, Universal Turing

Machine.
MODULE : 6 8 20
Undesirability: Diagonalization. Decidable and Undecidable Problems,

Reduction-problems. Rice's Theorems -Proof, Undecidable problems about
Context Free Languages.
7
COURSE
CODE
Distributed Systems and
20CSSET107 Advanced Computing 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
1. The use of computer and related technology is rapidly increasing.

2. Heavy application domains demand more power for computation.
3. A number of technologies are devised for meeting this requirement.
Syllabus:
Architectures , Types of Distributed systems, Remote Method Invocation , Consistency and

Replication, Overview of Hadoop , Need of Hadoop , Hadoop Eco System , Block vs Split Size ,Input
output format , Key, Text, Sequence, NLine file format, XML file format, Algorithms using MapReduce,
Introduction to Cloud Computing ,Types of Cloud infrastructure , Cloud Computing Architecture
Outcome:
1. Explain why you would design a distributed system and what the desired properties of such
systems are;
2. List the principles underlying the functioning of distributed systems, describe the problems and
challenges associated with these principles, and evaluate the effectiveness and shortcomings of
their solutions
3. Understand the concepts of MapReduce and cloud computing.
Text Books:
1. Distributed and Cloud Computing: Clusters, Grids, Clouds, and the Future Internet (DCC) by
Kai Hwang, Jack Dongarra & Geoffrey C. Fox, 2011.
2. Tom White, Hadoop The Definitive Guide, O'Reilly, 2012
References:
1. Alex Holmes, Hadoop in Practice, Manning Shelter Island, 2012.
8
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20CSSET107 Distributed Systems and Advanced Computing 3-0-0-3
Contact ESE
MODULES
hours Marks (%)
MODULE : 1 9 15
Introduction to Distributed Systems: Architectures , Types of Distributed

systems, Distributed Computing Paradigms , Distributed Objects ,
Remote Method Invocation , Consistency and Replication
MODULE : 2 8 15
Hadoop Introduction : Overview of Hadoop , Need of Hadoop , Hadoop

Eco System, The Distributed File System: HDFS, The Design of HDFS ,
HDFS Concepts , Working HDFS
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE : 3 9 15
Hadoop Architecture and MapReduce Programming: Components of

Hadoop Nodes, Hadoop Cluster Architecture, Working principle of
Hadoop, MapReduce , Map and Reduce Phase, Job Processing in Hadoop,
Developing MapReduce Program
MODULE : 4 9 15
Block vs Split Size ,Input output format , Key, Text, Sequence, NLine file
format, XML file format, Algorithms using MapReduce.
Cloud Infrastructure and Computing: Introduction to Cloud Computing
,Types of Cloud infrastructure , Cloud Computing Architecture,
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE : 5 8 20
Infrastructure as a Service, Platform as a Service, Software as a service

OpenStack Deployment with DevStack Creation of Flavours.
MODULE : 6 9 20
Concepts of Neutron Networking , Images management ,User managing

with keystone , concepts of object store , compute of Nova , networking
of neutron
9

20CSSET111 Advanced Database Concepts 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
2. To provide a basic knowledge in Distributed Databases so as to serve as an

aid in studying Big data processing
3. To impart the essential foundations on modern databases which include XML and Internet
Databases
Syllabus:
Distributed Databases Introduction and Query Processing Distributed Database Concepts, Query
Processing, Query Decomposition and Data Localization, Optimization of distributed queries,
Distributed Concurrency Control Reliability in Distributed Databases, XML and Internet Databases:
Structured, Semi structured, and Unstructured Data, Dtd, and xml Schema, Mobile Databases,
Multimedia Databases.
Course Outcome:
1. Have a sound knowledge on distributed database concepts.

2. Gain a basic knowledge in XML and Internet Databases.
3. Achieve the necessary knowledge for the study of big-data management and cloud computing
Text Books:
1. Özsu, M. Tamer, and Patrick Valduriez. Principles of distributed database systems.

Springer Science & Business Media, 2011.
2. Ramez Elmasri & Shamkant B.Navathe, ―Fundamentals of Database Systems,
Fourth Edition, Pearson Education, 2004.
10
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20CSSET111 Advanced Database Concepts 3-0-0-3
Contact ESE
MODULES
hours Marks (%)
MODULE : 1 9 15
Distributed Databases Introduction and Query Processing Distributed

Database Concepts, Data Fragmentation, Allocation Techniques for
Distributed Database Design
MODULE : 2 8 15
Query Processing ,Query Decomposition and Data Localization,

Optimization of distributed queries, Distributed Databases Transaction
Management and Concurrency Control, Introduction to Transaction
Management
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE : 3 9 15
Distributed Concurrency Control Reliability in Distributed Databases,

Data Replication
MODULE : 4 8 15
XML and Internet Databases: Structured, Semi structured, and

Unstructured Data, xml Hierarchical (Tree) Data Model ,xml Documents.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE : 5 9 20
Dtd, and xml Schema ,xml Documents and Databases ,xml Querying,
Emerging Database Technologies and Applications: Mobile Databases,
Multimedia Databases
MODULE : 6 9 20
Geographic Information Systems (GIS), Temporal Databases, Spatial

Databases, Genome Data Management. NoSQL Databases
11
COURSE
CODE
20CSSET121 Linear Algebra and Topology 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
1. To provide the mathematical foundation for Digital Image Processing and Analysis.
2. To form the linear algebra foundation for the detailed study of machine learning and pattern
recognition.
3. To impart the essential linear algebra for a detailed study on approximation algorithms
4. To discuss the basic concepts in topological space that aid advanced studies on Theoretical
Computer Science
Syllabus:
Linear Combination and Linear independence, Orthogonal Basis ,Norm and Normed Spaces ,
Orthonormal Basis, Metric and Metric Spaces, Banach spaces and Hilbert spaces. Kernel and Range of a
Linear Transformation, Rank Nullity Theorem, Isomorphism, Invertible linear transformations, Cones
and Convex Sets in the Eucledian space: Definition of Cone and Convex Set , Convex Hull, Uni-modular
and Totally Uni-modular Constraint Matrices , Sufficient condition for Integer Optimal Solutions.
Course Outcome:
1. Have a concrete knowledge in vector spaces and linear transformations which form the
theoretical foundation for the study of Digital Image Transforms and Machine Learning
2. Have sound knowledge Geometrical Notions for the study of linear Programming
3. Have a strong foundation in Primal-Dual Theory which forms the platform for Primal dual based
approximation algorithm design.
Text Books:
1. Kenneth Hoffman, Ray Kunze- Linear Algebra- Second Edition- Prentice Hall of India Private
Limited, New Delhi.
2. Peter D. Lax- Linear Algebra and its Applications -Second Edition -Wiley Publishers
References:
1. G.F. Simmons- Introduction to Topology and modern analysis- Tata McGraw Hill Company
2. S. Kumaresan- Linear Algebra- A Geometric Approach – Prentice Hall of India Private Limited,
New Delhi.
3. Christos H. Papadimitriou, Kenneth Steiglitz- Combinatorial Optimization-Algorithms and
Complexity- Prentice Hall of India
4. Christopher Grin - Linear Programming: Penn State Math 484 Lecture Notes Version 1.8.3 2009-2014
5. http://www.personal.psu.edu/cxg286/Math484_V1.pdf
12
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20CSSET121 Linear Algebra and Topology 3-0-0-3
Contact ESE
MODULES
hours Marks (%)
MODULE : 1 7 15
Vector Spaces: Definition and Examples,. Linear Combination and Linear
independence, Span, Basis and Dimension , Steinitz exchange lemma ,
Subspaces
MODULE : 2 10 15
Inner Product and Inner Product Spaces , Examples Orthogonal Basis -
Norm and Normed Spaces - Examples -Orthonomal Basis- Metric and
Metric Spaces – Examples - Banach spaces and Hilbert spaces (Basic idea
only)
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE : 3 8 15
Linear Transformations : Definition and Examples , Representation of
Linear Transformations by Matrices , Linear Functional, Kernel and Range
of a Linear Transformation- Rank Nullity Theorem - Isomorphism-
Invertible linear transformations
MODULE : 4 11 15
Introduction to Topology : Limit Points and Closure Points , Closed and
Open Sets, Examples, Bounded Sets , Bolzano Weierstrass Theorem ,
Compact Sets - Heine Borel Theorem(Proof not required), Continuous
Functions in Compact Sets - Extreme Value Theorem
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE : 5 7 20
Cones and Convex Sets in the Eucledian space: Definition of Cone and
Convex Set , Convex Hull , Recession Directions and Extreme Directions
of Convex sets (Basic ideas only)
MODULE : 6 9 20
Linear Programming Foundations:- General, Canonical and Standard
Forms of LP and their equivalence , Infeasible and unbounded linear
programs, Geometry of LP, Caratheodory Characterization Theorem
(Proof not required) , Fundamental Theorem of LP, Uni-modular and
Totally Uni-modular Constraint Matrices , Sufficient condition for Integer
Optimal Solutions
13

20CSSET131 Computer Systems Engineering 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
1. Computer System Engineering allows to develop the skills and expertise needed to design computer
systems.
2. To acquaint the students with the concepts of Systems Engineering and the techniques for controlling
complexity; strong modularity using client-server
Syllabus:
Origins of Systems Engineering. Power of Systems Engineering, Sources of Complexity. Coping

with Complexity, Domain Name System (DNS). Virtualizing Memory. Multilevel Memories, Networks:
Three-layer Model. Congestion Control, Atomicity: All-or-nothing and Before-or-after. Case Study:
Machine Language Atomicity, Secure Systems. Authenticating Principals. Security Protocols. Case Study:
Secure Socket Layer (SSL) protocol
Course Outcome:
1. Enforce modularity with clients and services

2. Learn key concepts of fault tolerance and atomicity.
3. Gain insight into information Security.
Text Books:
Jerome H. Saltzer and M. Frans Kaashoek” Principles of Computer System Design: An

Introduction” Morgan Kaufmann Publishers. 2009
References:
1. Alexander Kossiakoff, William N. Sweet, Sam Seymour, Steven M. Biemer “ Systems Engineering
Principles and Practice”, (Wiley Series in Systems Engineering and Management) ,2nd
Edition,2011.
2. Buede, Dennis M., John " The Engineering Design of Systems : Models and Methods", John Wiley
&Sons, Inc., 2000
14
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20CSSET131 Computer Systems Engineering 3-0-0-3
Contact ESE
MODULES
Hours Marks (%)
MODULE : 1 8 15
Systems Engineering Basics: Origins of Systems Engineering. Power of
Systems Engineering. Software Systems Engineering. Complexity in
computer systems.
MODULE : 2 5 15
Sources of Complexity. Coping with Complexity, Enforcing Modularity

with Clients and Services: Client/Service, Organization. RPC. Case
Study: The Internet Domain Name System (DNS)., Enforcing
Modularity with Virtualization. Enforcing Modularity in Memory
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE : 3 9 15
Virtualizing Memory. Multilevel Memories. Case Study: Evolution of

Enforced Modularity in the Intel x86, Networks: Three-layer Model.
Congestion Control.
MODULE : 4 8 15
Case Study: Mapping the Internet to the Ethernet, Fault tolerance:

Reliable Systems from Unreliable Components.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE : 5 5 20
Case Study: Fault tolerance in memory systems. Atomicity: All-or-

nothing and Before-or-after. Case Study: Machine Language Atomicity,
Consistency: Constraints and Interface Consistency
MODULE : 6 8 20
Cache Coherence. Durable Storage. Reconciliation Information

Security: Secure Systems. Authenticating Principals. Security Protocols.
Case Study: Secure Socket Layer (SSL) protocol
15
COURSE
CODE
20CSSET141 Number Theory 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
1. To explore the foundations of Number Theory and thereby strengthening the ability to
solve several recreational problems.
2. To provide the mathematical platform for the detailed study on cryptographic systems
Syllabus:
Eulers' Theorem, Wilson's Theorem, Fermat's Theorem, Existence of Primitive Roots, Quadratic
Congruence, Law of Quadratic Reciprocity, Definition and properties of Elliptic Curves, Operations of
Elliptic Curves, Elliptic curves as Group, Computational Diffie Hellman Problem(CDH), Decisional Diffie
Hellman Problem(DDH)
Course Outcome:
1. Have a concrete knowledge on the properties of Prime numbers which are of great
importance in the study of information security systems.
2. Have sound mathematical foundation for the study of cryptosystems
3. Gain the essential mathematical background knowledge for the development of number
theoretic algorithms
Text Books:
S.G. Telang (edited by M.G.Nadkarni, J.S. Dani) -Number Theory -Tata-McGraw-Hill Publishing
ComapnyLimited
References:
1. K. Rosen: Elementary Theory of Numbers, Fourth edition, Addison Wesley Longman, Inc
2000.
2. Niven, H.S.Zuckerman and H.L.Montgomery: An Introduction to the Theory of Numbers, fifth
Edition, John Wiley &Sons, Inc 2001.
3. T.M. Apostol, Introduction to Analytic Number Theory, Narosa Publishers, 1998
4. William Stein - Elementary Number Theory: Primes, Congruences, and Secrets URL :-
http://wstein.org/ent/ent.pdf
5. Wissam Raji- An Introductory Course in Elementary Number Theory.
6. http://www.saylor.org/site/wp-content/uploads/2013/05/An-Elementary-Number- Theory.pdf
16
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20CSSET141 Number Theory 3-0-0-3
Contact ESE
MODULES
hours Marks (%)
MODULE : 1 10 15
Divisibility Theory:-Prime Numbers and Composite Number, division

Theorem, Greatest Common Divisor and properties, Euclid's
Algorithm , Extended Euclid's algorithm, Lame's Theorem- Least
Common Multiple and properties ,Fundamental Theorem of
Arithmetic,
MODULE : 2 7 15
Modular Arithmetic:-Linear Congruence -Properties-Linear

Diophantine Equations – System of Linear Congruence- Chinese
Remainder Theorem
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE : 3 5 15
Number Theoretic Functions and related Theorems:-Euler's phi

Function and its properties, Sum of Divisors function, Number of
Divisors Function, Eulers' Theorem, Wilson's Theorem, Fermat's
Theorem- Fermat Numbers- Pseudoprimes and Carmichael numbers
MODULE : 4 8 15
Primitive Roots and Quadratic Residues, Order of integers Primitive

Roots, Existence of Primitive Roots, Quadratic Congruence, Quadratic
Residues and Non-residues, Legendre symbol-Law of Quadratic
Reciprocity
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE : 5 7 20
Introduction to Elliptic Curves:- Definition and properties of Elliptic

Curves-Operations of Elliptic Curves- Elliptic curves as Group-Integer
Factorization using Elliptic Curves (Pollard'sp-1method,Lenstra's
Factorization Method)
17
MODULE : 6 5 20
Number Theoretic Problems in Cryptography:-Discrete Logarithm

Problem(DLP),Computational Diffie-Hellman Problem(CDH),
Decisional Diffie Hellman Problem(DDH), Relative Hardness of DLP,
CDH and DDH Elliptic Curve Discrete Logarithm problem(ECDLP)
(Basic idea only)
18

20GNGNT101 Research Methodology 1-1-0-2 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
To enable the students:
• To get introduced to research philosophy and processes in general.

• To formulate the research problem and prepare research plan
• To apply various numerical /quantitative techniques for data analysis
• To communicate the research findings effectively
Syllabus:
Introduction to the Concepts of Research Methodology, Research Proposals, Research Design, Data
Collection and Analysis, Quantitative Techniques and Mathematical Modeling, Report Writing.
Course Outcome:
The student will be able to:

1. Apply the basic aspects of the Research methodology to formulate a research problem and its plan.
2. Deploy numerical/quantitative techniques for data analysis.
3. Have good technical writing and presentation skills.
Text Books:
1. Research Methodology: Methods and Techniques’, by Dr. C. R. Kothari, New Age International
Publisher, 2004
2. Research Methodology: A Step by Step Guide for Beginners’ by Ranjit Kumar, SAGE Publications
Ltd; Third Edition
References:
1. Research Methodology: An Introduction for Science & Engineering Students’, by Stuart Melville
and Wayne Goddard, Juta and Company Ltd, 2004
2. Research Methodology: An Introduction’ by Wayne Goddard and Stuart Melville, Juta and
Company Ltd, 2004
3. Research Methodology, G.C. Ramamurthy, Dream Tech Press, New Delhi
4. Management Research Methodology’ by K. N. Krishnaswamy et al, Pearson Education
19
COURSE CODE COURSE NAME L-T-P-C

20GNGNT101 Research Methodology 1-1-0- 2
Contact
MODULES Hours
MODULE : 1
Introduction to Research Methodology: Concepts of Research, Meaning and

Objectives of Research, Research Process, Types of Research, Type of research: 5
Descriptive vs. Analytical, Applied vs. Fundamental, Quantitative vs. Qualitative, and
Conceptual vs. Empirical
MODULE :2
Criteria of Good Research, Research Problem, Selection of a problem, Techniques 4

involved in definition of a problem, Research Proposals – Types, contents, Ethical
aspects, IPR issues like patenting, copyrights.
INTERNAL TEST 1 (MODULE 1 & 2)
MODULE: 3
Research Design : Meaning, Need and Types of research design, Literature Survey 5
and Review, Identifying gap areas from literature review, Research Design Process,
Sampling fundamentals, Measurement and scaling techniques, Data Collection –
concept, types and methods, Design of Experiments.
MODULE 4:
Quantitative Techniques: Probability distributions, Fundamentals of Statistical
analysis, Data Analysis with Statistical Packages, Multivariate methods, Concepts of 5
correlation and regression - Fundamentals of time series analysis and spectral
analysis.

MODULE: 5
5
Report Writing: Principles of Thesis Writing, Guidelines for writing reports &
papers, Methods of giving references and appendices, Reproduction of published
material, Plagiarism, Citation and acknowledgement.
MODULE: 6
Documentation and presentation tools – LaTeX, Office with basic presentations 4

skills, Use of Internet and advanced search techniques.
20

20CSSEQ101 Seminar - I 0-0-2-2 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
• To improve written and oral presentation skills and to develop confidence in making public technical
presentations
• To introduce a new relevant topic and share it to the peer group
Syllabus:
Each student shall prepare a seminar paper on any topic of interest related to the core/elective courses
being undergone in the first semester of the M.Tech. Programme. He/she shall get the paper approved by
the Programme Coordinator/Faculty Members in the concerned area of specialization and shall present it
in the class in the presence of Faculty in-charge of seminar class. Every student shall participate in the
seminar. Grade will be awarded on the basis of the student’s paper, presentation and his/her participation
in the seminar.
Goals:
This course is designed to improve written and oral presentation skills and to develop confidence
in making public presentations, to provide feedback on the quality and appropriateness of the work
experience, and to promote discussions on design problems or new developments or ethical and safety
issues in the workplace.
Course Outcome:
At the end of the course, the student will be able to present advanced topics related to Computer
Science and Engineering based on recent journal papers. Students should report effectively the topic of
seminar as a bound volume.
21

Distributed Systems and
20CSSEL101 0-0-2-1 2020
Advanced Computing Lab
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
1. Setting up of cluster using Hadoop Framework
2. GUI Interface design and integration for Hadoop

3. Implementation of algorithms using MapReduce in Hadoop.
4. Database handling using HBase
5. Deploying a cloud using OpenStack
6. Performance Metrics evaluation of cluster using Ganglia
7. Parallel code development and data access using Pig, Spark and Scala or any other suitable
tools.
22
SEMESTER II
COURSE
CODE
Computer System Design and
20CSSET102 Architecture 4-0-0- 4 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
• To understand the basic principles and issues involved in the design and architecture of modern
computer systems.
• To understand the need for parallelism in computer system architecture
• To get an insight into the design of computer systems with emphasis on high performance
• To impart the idea behind multi core systems and their architecture
Syllabus
Pipelining; Instruction Level Parallelism; Memory hierarchy design; Multicore and multiprocessor
systems
Course Outcome:
On completion of the course, the student will be able to have a concrete knowledge in advanced
concepts in Computer Architecture; Gain the background knowledge for the design and
implementation of Operating System Kernel; Have a basic knowledge on the design of latest
multicore processors.
Text Books:
1. John L. Hennessey and David A. Patterson, “Computer Architecture – A quantitative approach”,

Morgan Kaufmann / Elsevier, 4th. Edition, 2007.
2. David E. Culler, Jaswinder Pal Singh, “Parallel Computing Architecture: A hardware/software
approach” , Morgan Kaufmann / Elsevier, 1997
References:
1. William Stallings, “Computer Organization and Architecture – Designing for Performance”,

Pearson Education, Seventh Edition, 2006.
2. BehroozParhami, “Computer Architecture”, Oxford University Press, 2006.
23
COURSE CODE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
Computer System Design and

20CSSET102 4-0-0-4
Architecture
Contact ESE
MODULES
hours Marks (%)
MODULE : 1
Introduction:-Overview of computer architecture-processor 8 15
architecture – performance evaluation of processors
MODULE : 2
Pipelining:- Pipelining- super- pipelines- advanced pipelines- pipeline

hazards- issues in pipelined processor implementation ,Instruction Level
Parallelism:-Instruction level parallelism-static and dynamic scheduling- 12 15
hardware and compilers support for branch prediction, Tomasulo
algorithm-out-of-order instruction issue-speculative execution-VLI
Wand super scalar processors
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE : 3
Vector processing and array processing-GPU-Architecture Introduction 9 15

to GPU programming–CUDA, Memory hierarchy design
MODULE : 4
Instruction and data cache organizations-Cache performance-Reducing 9 15

cache miss penalty and miss rate-Reducing hit time- Advanced
optimizations for cache performance-Main memory and performance-
Memory technology-memory bandwidth issues-multilevel caches-
parallel memory systems
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE : 5
Support for virtual memory-Types of storage devices-Buses-RAID- 9 20

Reliability, availability and dependability-I/O performance measures-
Designing an I/O system. Multi-core and multiprocessor systems
MODULE : 6
Symmetric and distributed shared memory architectures- Performance 9 20

issues-Synchronization issues Models of memory consistency- Software
and hardware multithreading-SMT and CMP architectures-Design issues-
Case studies- Intel Multi-core architecture IBM cell architecture- hp
architecture.
24
COURSE
CODE
Computer Aided Software
20CSSET104 3-0-0-3 2020
Engineering
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
• Object Oriented Systems Engineering paves a way for more effectively and efficiently interface
with Software Engineering throughout full system lifecycles.
• To develop the student’s ability to analyze and model requirements, as well as to develop
software using Object-Oriented Methodology.
• To be familiar with UML models and finally to experiment using CASE tools for software
analysis and design.
Syllabus
Project Organization; Life Cycle Models; Requirements Elicitation; UML Diagrams; Analysis Object Model;
Design Patterns; Model Transformation; Mapping Associations
Course Outcome:
Execute the software project using software engineering methodologies; Define, assess and tailor
software quality practices, and software processes and methodologies for appropriate application on
software development projects in a variety of domain areas
Text Books:
1. Bernd Bruegge, Alan H Dutoit, “Object-Oriented Software Engineering,” 2nd ed, Pearson
Education, 2004.
2. Craig Larman, “Applying UML and Patterns” 3rd ed, Pearson Education, 2005.
References:
1. Stephen Schach,“ Software Engineering”7thed, McGraw-Hill,2007.Sergeyev, G.B.,

Nanochemistry, Elsevier, 2007
2. Ivar Jacobson, Grady Booch, James Rumbaugh, “The Unified Software Development Process”,
Pearson Education, 1999.
3. Alistair Cockburn, “Agile Software Development”2nded, Pearson Education, 2007
25

20CSSET104 3-0-0-3
Engineering
Contact ESE
MODULES
hours Marks (%)
MODULE : 1 4 15
System Concepts– Project Organization– Communication– Project

Management
MODULE : 2 9 15
Life cycle models –Unified Process- Iterative and Incremental–

Workflow–Agile Processes, Requirements Elicitation – Use Cases –
Unified Modeling language
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE : 3 7 15
Introduction, UM Diagrams – Class diagrams, Sequence diagrams,

Object diagrams,
Deploymentdiagrams,Usecasediagrams,Statediagrams,Activitydiagram,
Component diagrams – Case Study
MODULE : 4 8 15
Analysis Object Model (Domain Model)– Analysis Dynamic Models–Non-

functionalrequirements–AnalysisPatterns.SystemDesign,Architecture–
Design Principles
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE : 5 12 20
Design Patterns–Dynamic Object Modeling – Static Object Modeling–

Interface Specification– Object Constraint Language. Mapping Design
(Models) to Code–Model Transformation-Refactoring -Mapping
Associations - Mapping Activities
MODULE : 6 8 20
Testing-Usability–Deployment– Configuration Management–

Maintenance process- System documentation-program evolution
dynamics.
26
COURSE
CODE
20CSSET112 Approximation Algorithms 3-0-0- 3 2020
Course Objectives:
• To learn the fundamental aspects of approximation algorithms and their application to

real world problems.
• To introduce the application of linear programming and topology to build up efficient

approximation algorithms for several NP-Complete combinatorial problems.
Syllabus
Definition and Features of approximation algorithms; Primal Dual Theory; Approximation Algorithms
using Primal Dual Schema; Approximation Algorithms using Semi definite Programming
Course Outcome:
On completion of the course, the student will be able to have a sound knowledge in the design of
approximation algorithms; Gain the application of linear programming in the design of computer
algorithms; Achieve the necessary knowledge to do research on designing approximation algorithms for
NP-Complete problems.
Text Books:
1. Vijay V. Vazirani - Approximation Algorithms –Springer

2. David P. Williamson, David B. Shmoys- The Design of Approximation Algorithms- Cambridge
University Press
References:
1. Thomas H. Coreman et al. - Introduction to Algorithms- 3/e-The MIT Press
27
20CSSET112 Approximation Algorithms 3-0-0-3
Contact ESE
MODULES hours Marks (%)
MODULE : 1
Introduction to Approximation Algorithms:-Definition and Features of

approximation algorithms-approximation ratio-Polynomial Time
Approximation Scheme(PTAS)- Fully Polynomial Time Approximation 8 15
Scheme(FPTAS)-Approximation algorithm for Maximum Matching using
Maximal Matching-Approximation algorithm for k-center problem
MODULE : 2
Approximation algorithms for TSP (Nearest Neighborhood algorithm, 8 15

Double Tree algorithm, Christofides’ algorithm)-FPTAS for knapsack
problem Primal Dual Theory:-Primal and Dual Programs
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE : 3
Weak Duality Theorem-Strong Duality Theorem (proof not required) 8 15

Complementary Slackness conditions-Primal Dual Schema–MAX-Flow Min-
Cut Theorem using Primal Dual Theory.
MODULE : 4
Approximation Algorithms using Primal Dual Schema:-Primal Dual

approximation algorithm for Maximum Matching, Minimum Vertex Cover 8 15
Problem, Set Cover Problem and Steiner Forest Problem
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE : 5
Assignment Problem and Hungarian Matching, Approximation Algorithms 8 20

using Semi definite Programming:- Semi definite Programming Problem-
Properties of Semi definite matrices.
MODULE : 6
Semi definite Approximation algorithm for MAX-CUT, Semi definite 8 20

Approximation algorithm for vertex coloring of 3-colorablegraphs
28

20CSSET122 Automated Verification 3-0-0- 3 2020
Pre-requisites: Automata Theory and Computability Course

Objectives:
Formal verification is used in proving the correctness of systems such as: software expressed as
source code, cryptographic protocols, combinational circuits, and digital circuits with internal
memory. The verification of these systems is done by providing a formal proof on an abstract
mathematical model of the system. There are various tools (Alloy, Rodin, Spin, NuSMV, Pex,
FindBug etc) developed by R&D organizations to help the different stages in Software
development. The content of this course introduces the formal methods which serve as the
foundation for all such kind of tools. Hence studying this subject is essential for understanding,
improving and developing such tools. This is an active research area with research group in
various Universities and R&D groups in the industry. This subject is relevant for a PG course in
Computer Science and Systems Engineering.
Syllabus
Transition System Models of Systems; Linear Time Properties; Regular Properties; LTL and CTL,
Model Checking omega-regular properties, Model Checking Tool, Applying model checking
tools on example systems.
Course Outcome:
1. Knowledge about formal techniques and tool for proving properties about a system.
2. Ability to use mathematical objects for system modeling
3. Ability to write formal (mathematical) specification.
4. Experience with industry standard tools for formal verification.
Text Books:
ChristelBaier, Joost-Pieter Katoen: Principles of Model Checking, MIT Press, 2008.
References:
Michael Huth, Mark Ryan: Logic in Computer Science: Modelling and Reasoning about Systems,
29
20CSSET122 Automated Verification 3-0-0-3
Contact ESE
MODULES
hours Marks (%)
MODULE : 1
Introduction, Transition System as system Model, Model Checking 8 15

process, Modeling Hardware and Software Systems, State-Space
Exploration Problem, Binary Decision Diagrams, application.
MODULE : 2
Linear Time Properties: Linear-Time Behavior, Safety Properties and 6 15

Invariants, Liveness Properties.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE : 3
Regular Properties: Automata on Finite Words, Regular Safety Properties,

Model Checking Regular Safety Properties, Automata on Infinite Words, 12 15
w-Regular Languages and Properties. Buchi Automata, Generalized Buchi
Automata, Model Checking w-Regular Properties.
MODULE : 4
Linear Temporal Logic (LTL) – Syntax, Semantics, Automata-Based LTL 8 15

model checking, Complexity Analysis.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE : 5
Computation Tree Logic (CTL): Syntax, Semantics, Example properties 8 20

specified in CTL.
MODULE : 6
LTL model checker: Sal, Modeling in Sal, Specifying LTL properties in Sal, 4 20
Running Sal on example problems.
30
COURSE
CODE
20CSSET132 Program Analysis and Verification 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Automata Theory and Computability

Course Objectives:
The major hurdle in the software development process is ensuring the promised functionality.
Most real softwares have lots of defects. They are difficult to handle for the software industry
and often they cause catastrophes. Defect detection is hard because of the difficulty in
exhaustive testing and because of the limitations of analysis tools. This subject introduces formal
and rigorous ways of specifying the requirements and performing different analysis on a
software wrt requirements specified.
Syllabus
Objectives of program analysis; Abstract Interpretation; Inter-procedural analysis; Pointer

Analysis and Hoare-Logic- based program verification.
Course Outcome:
1. Knowledge about different program analysis techniques

2. Ability to perform various analysis on softwares
3. Ability to propose new methods for program analysis
4. Prepares one for a good career in software industry
Text Books:
Nielson, Nielson, and Hankin, "Principles of Program Analysis", Springer-Verlag on Principles of

programming languages, pages 238-- 252, New York, NY, USA, 1977. ACM Press.
References:
1. Lecture Notes/slides on Pointer Analysis http://drona.csa.iisc.ernet.in/~raghavan/pav2011/ptr-
analysis-1.pdf
2. Lecture Notes/slides on Hoare Logic
http://drona.csa.iisc.ernet.in/~raghavan/pav2011/hoare-logic-
2011.pdf
3. Lecture Notes/slides on Abstract Interpretation:
http://drona.csa.iisc.ernet.in/~raghavan/pav2011/abstract-interpretation-
intro.pdf http://drona.csa.iisc.ernet.in/~raghavan/pav2011/abstract-
interpretation.pdf
4. Patrick Cousot and RadhiaCousot, Abstract interpretation: a unified lattice model for static
analysis of programs by construction or approximation of fixpoints, In POPL '77: Proceedings
of the 4th ACM SIGACT-SIGPLAN symposium.
31

Program Analysis and
20CSSET132 3-0-0-3
Verification
Contact ESE
MODULES
hours Marks (%)
MODULE : 1
Introduction: Program analysis, objectives of program analysis; Data flow 8 15

Analysis, Examples of data flow analysis - Available Expressions, Reaching
Definitions and Live Variable analysis.
MODULE : 2
Abstract Interpretation: Lattices, Fixed points, Transfer functions, join, 8 15

monotone and distributive transfer functions – examples.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE : 3
Abstract join-over-all-paths analysis of a program, Correctness of 8 15

abstract interpretation, Galois connections, Kildall's algorithm.
MODULE : 4
Inter-procedural analysis: Example problems – Call-strings method, 8 15

Approximate call-strings method, bounded call-strings method.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE : 5
Pointer Analysis and Hoare Logic: Points-to Analysis, Alias Analysis, 6 20

Correctness and Precision, Andersen's Analysis, Steensgaards Analysis.
MODULE : 6
Hoare Logic: Hoare Tripple, partial and total correctness, Weakest 8 20

preconditions, analyzing a program based on weakest preconditions.
32
COURSE
CODE
Statistical Foundations of Machine
20CSSET142 3-0-0- 3 2020
Learning
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
• To form a foundation in various statistical concepts used in the study of machine learning
techniques
• To illustrate the application of Probability Theory in the field of pattern recognition and machine
learning
Syllabus
Probability axioms; CDF/PMF/PDF; Random processes; Markov property; Sampling distributions

and Inference concerning means; Inference concerning variances proportions; Hypothesis
Course Outcome:
On completion of the course, the student will be able to have a concrete knowledge in
Continuous Probability Theory which is essential for the study of various machine learning
techniques; Gain a basic knowledge on random process which is not only useful in the study of
machine learning but also in Random Signal Processing theory achieve the necessary knowledge
in Statistics which eases the study advanced machine learning techniques
Text Books:
1. A.Papoulis and S. U. Pillai, Probability, Random Variables and Stochastic Processes, 4thEdition,
McGraw Hill 2002
2. Henry Stark and John W. Woods, Probability and Random Processes with Applications to Signal
Processing, Prentice Hall, 3rd Edition 2001
3. Johnson R. A., Miller & Freund’s - Probability and Statistics for Engineers, 6th Edn, PHI , ( 2004)
New Delhi.
References:
1. Hines W. H, Montgomery, et. al. - Probability and Statistics for Engineering - John Wiley & Sons,
Inc., 2003.
2. Milton J. S. and Arnold J. C., Introduction to Probability and Statistics, 4th Edn, Tata McGraw-
Hill, 2003.
3. S.M. Ross, Introduction to Probability and statistics for Engineers, 3rd Edn,
Academic Press(Elsevier), Delhi, 2005
33

Statistical Foundations of
20CSSET142 3-0-0-3
Machine Learning
Contact ESE
MODULES
hours Marks (%)
MODULE : 1
Probability axioms, conditional probability, discrete and continuous
random variables, cumulative distribution function(CDF), Probability mass 10 15
function (PMF), probability density function(PDF), conditional PMF/PDF,
Expected value, variance, functions of a random variable, expected value
of the derived random variable, multiple random variables, joint
CDF/PMF/PDF
MODULE : 2
Functions of multiple random variables, multiple functions of multiple
random variables, independent/uncorrelated random variables, sums of 8 15
random variables, moment generating function, random sums of random
variables. The sample mean, laws of large numbers, central limit theorem,
convergence of sequence of random variables
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE : 3
Introduction to random processes, specification of random processes, nth
order joint PDFs, independent increments, stationary increments- Markov
property, Markov process and martingales- Gaussian process, Poisson
process and Brownian motion. 9 15
MODULE : 4
Sampling distributions and Inference concerning means:-Population and
samples, The sampling distribution of the mean, Sampling distribution of 6 15
the variance, Point estimation and interval estimation,
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE : 5
Tests of hypothesis, Hypothesis concerning one mean, Inference
concerning two means, paired t-test Inference concerning variances 7 20
proportions:-Estimation of variances, Hypothesis concerning one variance
MODULE : 6
Hypothesis concerning two variances, Estimation of proportions,
Hypothesis concerning one proportion- Hypothesis concerning two 8 20
proportions, Hypothesis concerning several proportions- Hypothesis
concerning two proportions, Hypothesis concerning several proportions
34
COURSE
CODE
20CSSET114 Engineering System Architectures 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
• The first module describes the foundation of architecture and systems engineering.
• Different modeling languages are explained in the second module. The third module discusses
functional, physical and operational architecture developments.
• The last module considers the software and informational technology systems.
Syllabus
Foundations of Architecture and Systems Engineering; Modeling Languages; Functional

Architecture Development; Physical Architecture Development; Operational Architecture
Development; Software and Information Technology Systems
Course Outcome:
Apply basic principles and practices of Computer System Architecture to productively engage in
the research; Identify, analyze, formulate and solve engineering problems.
Text Books:
1. Charles Dickerson, Dimitri N. Mavris.” Architecture and Principles of Systems Engineering”,

Auerbach Publications, 2009.
2. Mark W. Maier,” The Art of Systems Architecting, Third Edition” 2009 by CRC Press.
References:
1. Buede, Dennis M. "The Engineering Design of Systems : Models and Methods", John Wiley
&Sons, Inc., 2000
2. Alexander Kossiakoff, William N. Sweet, Sam Seymour, Steven M. Biemer“ Systems Engineering
Principles and Practice”, (Wiley Series in Systems Engineering and Management) ,2nd
Edition,2011.
35
20CSSET114 Engineering System Architectures 3-0-0-3
Contact ESE
MODULES
hours Marks (%)
MODULE : 1
Foundations of Architecture and Systems Engineering: Classical 6 15

Architecting Paradigm, Logical and Scientific Approach
MODULE : 2
Structured Analysis and Design. Waterfall Model of Systems 7 15

Acquisition. Modeling Languages: Architecture Modeling language.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE : 3
System Modeling Language (SysML). Graphical Tool (DFD, IDEF0). 7 15

Systems Engineering use of IDEF0Models.
MODULE : 4
Functional Architecture Development –Functional Decomposition- 9 15

Relating Requirements of Functions –Physical Architecture Development-
Definition of Elements of a System- Relating Functions and Requirements
to Physical Elements.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE : 5
Operational Architecture Development- Input/ Output Requirements-

System/Subsystem Qualification Requirements
9 20
Software and Information Technology Systems: Status of Software
Architecting.
MODULE : 6
Software as a System Component. Systems, Software, and Process 10 20

Models. Architecture in Software-Centered Systems. Case Study: Global
Positioning System
36
COURSE
CODE
20CSSET124 Foundations of Crypto Systems 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
• To familiarize the students with cryptography which include classical cryptosystems,

secret key and public key cryptosystems.
• To create an understanding of Authentication functions the manner in which Message
Syllabus
Security; Cryptography; Traditional Secret Key Ciphers; Modern Secret Key Ciphers;
Cryptographic Hash Functions; Message Integrity and Message Authentication; Digital Signature;
Public Key Cryptosystems
Course Outcome:
On completion of the course, the student will be able to have a sound knowledge in the design
of public and private key cryptosystems; understand the application of Number Theory in
designing crypto systems; achieve a basic knowledge on security attacks on various
cryptosystems.
Text Books:
1. Hans Delfs, Helmut knebl- Introduction to Cryptography – Principles and Applications- Springer
2. Behrouz A. Forouzan, Debdeep Mukhopadhyay - Cryptography & Network Security, - Tata-
McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited
3. Bernard Menezes – Network Security and Cryptography -Cengage Learning India
References:
1. William Stallings - Cryptography And Network Security, 4/E - Pearson Education India
2. Daniel Bleichenbacher, Chosen ciphertext attacks against protocols based on theRSA
encryption standard PKCS#1, Springer Berlin Heidelberg 1998
37
20CSSET124 Foundations of Crypto Systems 3-0-0-3
Contact ESE
MODULES
hours Marks (%)
MODULE : 1
Introduction to Security:-Security Goals – Security services 8 15

(Confidentiality, Integrity, Authentication ,Non-repudiation, Access
control) – Security Mechanisms (Encipherment, Data Integrity, Digital
Signature, Authentication Exchange, Traffic Padding, Routing Control,
Notarization, Access control) - Security Principles. Introduction to
Cryptography:-Kerckoff's Principle -Classification of Cryptosystems-
Cryptanalytic attacks-Block ciphers – Stream Ciphers - Cipher Properties
(Confusion, Diffusion).
MODULE : 2
Traditional Secret Key Ciphers:- Substitution Ciphers (mono alphabetic 9 15

ciphers, poly alphabetic ciphers)-Transposition Ciphers-Stream and Block
Ciphers. Modern Secret Key Ciphers:- – Substitution Box-Permutation
Box-Product Ciphers-Linear and Differential cryptanalysis.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE : 3
Data Encryption Standard (DES)( Fiestel and Non- Fiestel Ciphers, 5 15

Structure of DES, Modes of operations, DES Attacks,2-DES,3-DES)-
Advanced Encryption Standard(AES) (Structure, Analysis).
MODULE : 4
Cryptographic Hash Functions:-Introduction – Properties-Birthday

Paradox-MD hash family – Whirlpool – SHA-1( Applications,
Implementation)- Performance estimates - Birthday attacks on hash 9 15
schemes (Attack on SHA1and its complexity) Message Integrity and
Message Authentication:-Message Authentication Code (MAC) - DES
based and Hash based MAC.
Digital Signature:-Signing – Verification Services( Authentication, Integrity,

Non-repudiation, Confidentiality) - Digital signature forgery ( Existential
forgery, Selective forgery, Universal forgery)
38
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE : 5
Public Key Cryptosystems (PKC): -Model of PKC-Trapdoor-one way

functions-Knapsack Cryptosystem (Knapsack Trapdoor, Key Generation,
Encryption, Decryption).
RSA Cryptosystem(Integer Factorisation Trapdoor ,Key Generation,
Encryption, Decryption, RSA Digital Signature Scheme, Attacks on RSA- 8 20
Timing Attack, Bleichenbacher Choosen Cipher Text Attack)
MODULE : 6
El Gamal Cryptsystem (Discrete Logarithm Trapdoor, Diffie-Hellman Key

Exchange Protocol, MiM attack on Diffie-Hellman Protocol, Encryption,
Decryption and Digital Signature Scheme of El-Gamal Cryptosystem) - 5 20
Elliptic Curve Cryptosystem (ECDLP Trapdoor, Encryption, Decryption
and Digital Signature Scheme of Elliptic Curve Cryptosystem.
39

20CSSET134 Graph Theory 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
Graph theory is an essential subject for a PG course in Computer Science. Different types of
graphs, theorems and techniques selected have profound applications in different areas of study
in Computer Science and Engineering. Examples include Algorithms, Complexity Theory,
Networks, etc. Graph theory has enormous application is modeling problems in Computer
Science. Solution to such problems can be easily obtained by appeal to the known results in
Graph Theory.
Syllabus
Basic of Graph theory, Matching; Connectivity; Coloring; Perfect Graphs; Planarity; Planar
Graph Coloring
Course Outcome:
On completion of the course, the student will be able to apply basic principles and practices of
Graph Theory to productively engage in the research;Identify, analyze, formulate and solve
engineering problems using concept of Graph Theory.
Text Books:
1. D. B. West: Introduction to Graph Theory, Prentice Hall of India, 2001.

2. J. A. Bondy and U. S. R. Murty: Graph Theory, Springer 2008.
References:
1. ReinhardDiestel: Graph Theory, Electronic Edition 2010.

2. B. Bollobas: Modern Graph Theory, Springer, 1998.
40

20CSSET134 Graph Theory 3-0-0-3
Contact ESE
MODULES
hours Marks (%)
MODULE : 1
Review of Basic Concepts, Bipartite Matching Hall's Matching Condition, 8 15

Konig's Min-Max theorems, Gallai's Min-Max Theorem, Maximum
Bipartite Matching using augmenting path algorithm.
MODULE : 2
Matching’s in general graphs – Tutte's 1-factor theorem. Connectivity: 7 15

Cuts and Separators, Edge connectivity, Vertex Connectivity.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE : 3
Block-Cut Point Graph, Menger's theorem, Applications, Properties of 2- 7 15

connected and 3-connected graphs.
MODULE : 4
Coloring: Vertex Coloring – Greedy Coloring, Brook's Theorem. Edge

Coloring – Vizing's Theorem. List Coloring., Perfect Graphs – Weak
Perfect Graph Theorem Statement of Strong Perfect Graph Theorem. 10 15
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE : 5
Planarity: Euler's Formula, Minors, Kuratowski's Theorem. Planar Graph 7 20

Coloring- Six Color Theorem.
MODULE : 6
Kempe's Attempt of 4 Color Theorem, Heawood's 5-Color Theorem, 7 20

Thomassen's List Coloring Theorem.
41
COURSE
CODE
Foundations of Machine Learning
20CSSET144 Techniques 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
• To illustrate the application of Probability and statistics for machine learning and pattern
recognition.
• To impart a basic knowledge about the key algorithms and theory that form the foundation of
machine learning
Syllabus
Applications of Machine Learning; Bayesian Decision Theory; Parameter Estimation

Methods; Supervised Learning; Kernel Methods; Clustering; Dimensionality Reduction
Techniques
Course Outcome:
On completion of the course, the student will be able to understand a number of models for
supervised, unsupervised, and reinforcement machine learning; Understand the application of
Linear Algebra, Statistics, and Probability Theory used in various machine learning models; Gain
the ability to form new machine learning algorithms.
Text Books:
1. Sergios Theodoridis, Konstantinos Koutroumbas - Pattern Recognition – Elsevier

2. Christopher M Bishop - Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning- Springer
References:
1. Kevin P Murphy - Machine Learning- A probablisitic perspective - MIT Press

2. Simon S Haykin - Neural Networks and Learning Machines – Prentice Hall of India
42
COURSE
COURSE NAME
CODE L-T-P-C
20CSSET144 Foundations of Machine Learning Techniques 3-0-0-3
ESE
Contact
MODULES Marks;
hours
%
MODULE : 1
Introduction:-Applications of Machine Learning-Supervised Learning,

Unsupervised Learning, Reinforcement Learning. Bayesian Decision Theory:-
Classifiers, Discriminant Functions, Decision Surfaces, Optimality of Bayes 6 15
Classifier.
MODULE : 2
Parameter Estimation Methods: – Maximum Likelihood Estimation- 6 15

Expectation Maximization Algorithm, Maximum aposteriori Estimation
Supervised Learning:– Linear Regression, kNN classification, Logistic
Regression.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE : 3
Artificial Neural Networks – Perceptron Learning Algorithm, Multilayer

Perceptron-Back propagation Algorithm. Kernel Methods:-Reproducing
Kernel Hilbert Spaces – Representor Theorem, Kernel Trick – Support 8 15
Vector Machines-Linearly Separable Classes, Non-separable classes-Kernal
Formulation of support vector learning
MODULE : 4
Clustering:-Introduction, Gaussian Mixture Model and EM algorithm- K- 10 15

Means Clustering-Hierarchical Clustering
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE : 5
Expectation Maximization algorithm-Mean Shift clustering algorithm 11 20

Dimensionality Reduction Techniques: – Subset Selection, Principal
Component Analysis-Fisher's Linear Discriminant.
MODULE : 6
Factor Analysis-Independent Component Analysis-Locally Linear Embedding 7 20

Kernal PCA-Kernal ICA-Kernal Linear Discriminant Analysis.
43
COURSE
CODE
20CSSET116 Operating System Kernel Design 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
• To understand the basic structure and architecture of operating system kernels.

• To gain an in depth knowledge on the UNIX kernel
• To get an insight into the design of operating system kernels
• To impart the idea behind multiprocessing and the issues associated with it
Syllabus
The UNIX kernel; Kernel modules; Processes and Tasks; Inter-process communication;
Memory Management; Linux File systems; Device drivers; Multiprocessing
Course Outcome:
On completion of the course, the student will be able to have an in-depth knowledge on the
design of Linux Kernel; Gain a sound knowledge on the implementation of concepts like
semaphore, system calls, virtual memory, file systems etc.; Achieve the necessary knowledge for
the study of virtual machines.
Text Books:
1. Linux Kernel Internals 2nd edition – Beck (Pearson Education Asia)

2. Linux Kernel Development – Robert Love (Addison-Wesley)
References:
1. Linux Device Drivers – Rubini A. (O’Reilly)

2. Understanding the Linux Kernel – Daniel P Bovet and Marco Cesati (O’Reilly)
3. Linux Kernel Online Book– David ARusling (http://www.linuxdoc.org/LDP/tlk/tlk.html)
44
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20CSSET116 Operating System Kernel Design 3-0-0-3
Contact ESE
MODULES
hours Marks (%)
MODULE : 1
Introduction:-Operating system – Basic structure – Kernel – Monolithic

and microkernel architectures. The UNIX kernel:-Overview of UNIX
kernels – Booting procedure – Compiling the kernel – Process kernel
model – Reentrant kernels – Kernel data structures(Linked lists –
kernel implementation, manipulation, traversals – Queues – k-fifo, 8 15
creation, operations, destroying queue – Maps – Binary trees) – Signals
– Interrupts – Implementation and control – Timer interrupts – System
calls – Implementation of simple system calls – Binding system calls –
Access from User space
MODULE : 2
Kernel modules:-Kernel modules – Implementation in the kernel –

Parameter passing – Kernel daemon-Loadable kernel modules(LKM)-
Debugging Processes and Tasks:-Process relationship – Process creation
– Process Scheduling – Policy – Scheduling algorithm – SMP Scheduler –
Process termination – Orphan and Zombie processes-Linux 9 15
implementation of threads-
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE : 3
Inter process communication:-Synchronization in kernel –

Communication via files – pipes IPC using semaphores, message queues
and shared memory – IPC using sockets 10 15
MODULE : 4
Memory Management:–The architecture independent memory model in

Linux – memory pages – Virtual address space and linear address
calculation – Virtual address space for a process ,User segment– Virtual 6 15
memory areas – Kernel segment – Memory allocation in kernel segment
– Block device caching mechanisms in Linux , paging – Page cache and
management – handling page faults.
INTERNAL TEST - II
45
MODULE : 5
Linux File systems:- Basic principles – Kernel representation of file

systems – Virtual file system(Proc files system) – file system
registration – mounting. The Ext2 File system – Directories in Ext2 – 7 20
block allocation and addressing – extensions in Ext2 file system
MODULE : 6
Device drivers:–Character and block devices – Polling – Interrupt 8 20

sharing – Hardware detection – Automatic interrupt detection –
Implementing a driver.
Concurrency and race conditions (Concurrency and its management,
Semaphores and mutexes, Completions, Spin locks, Locking traps) USB
drivers (USB Basics, USB and Sysfs, USB Urbs, Writing a USB driver,
USB transfers without Urbs) Multiprocessing:-Problems with
multiprocessor systems – Changes to the UNIX kernel – Compiling
LINUX SMP
46
COURSE
CODE
20CSSET126 Randomized Algorithms 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
To provide the Student:-
• To impart detailed knowledge about applications of randomization and elementary probability

theory in the design and analysis of algorithms
• To develop the ability to design randomized algorithms for various real-world problems.
Syllabus
Probability Concepts; Discrete Probability Theory; Randomized Algorithms; Advanced

Randomized Algorithms; Randomized Approximation Algorithms
Course Outcome:
On completion of the course, the student will be able to have a sound knowledge in the design
of randomized algorithms; Gain the application of discrete probability theory in the analysis of
computer algorithms; Achieve the necessary knowledge to do research on designing
randomized algorithms for NP-Complete problems.
Text Books:
1. Rajeev Motwani and PrabhakarRaghavan- Randomized Algorithms- Cambridge University Press
References:
1. Thomas H.Coremanet. al-Introductionto Algorithms- 3/e-The MIT Press

2. Gilles Brassard,PaulBratley- Fundamentals of Algorithms- Prentice Hall of India- 1/e
47
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20CSSET126 Randomized Algorithms 3-0-0-3
Contact ESE Marks
MODULES
hours (%)
MODULE : 1
Review of Probability Concepts:--Random Experiment and Sample 10 15

Space. Basic Probability Axioms-- Mutually Exclusive and Independent
Events –Conditional Probability – Bayes Theorem
MODULE : 2
Discrete Probability Theory:--Random Variables – Classification – 6 15

Probability Distribution Function. Joint Probability Distribution
function –Cumulative Distribution Function
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE : 3
Expectation – Independent Random Variables – Properties of 8 15

Expectation –Variance and Standard Deviation. Markov's Inequality --
Chebyshev's Inequality-Jensen's Inequality-- Chern off Bound--
Example Problems
MODULE : 4
Introduction to Randomized Algorithms:-Features of Randomized 7 15

algorithms –Classification of Randomized algorithms (Las Vegas
Algorithms and Monte Carlo algorithms)Zero Sided Error –One Sided
Error-Both Sided Error-Amplification of stochastic advantage.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE : 5
Randomized matrix multiplication verification --Randomized selection 10 20

and Median finding – Randomized Quick Sort. Advanced Randomized
Algorithms:- Miller Rabin's Primality Testing and analysis –
Randomized Binary Search Trees and operations.
MODULE : 6
Introduction to Randomized Approximation Algorithms:-- 7 20

Approximation ratio for Randomized Approximation Algorithms --
Randomized Approximation Algorithms for MAX-CUT Problem, MAX-
SAT Problem and Maximum Independent Set Problem.
48
COURSE
CODE
Mathematical Foundations of
20CSSET136 3-0-0-3 2020
Digital Image Processing
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
• To set up the mathematical platform for studying various digital image processing techniques.
• To develop a concrete knowledge in signal processing theory to serve as an aid in digital image
processing.
Syllabus
Signals; Fourier Expansion of Signals; Image Transforms; Wavelet Theory
Course Outcome:
On completion of the course, the student will be able to gain the basic knowledge on Signals and
Systems which is required for the study of Digital Image Processing; Analyze 2D signals in the
frequency domain through the Fourier transform; Identify and exploit analogies between the
mathematical tools used for 1D and 2D signal analysis and processing ;Have a concrete
knowledge on various transforms which are of great importance in classical image processing
applications; Gain the applications of vector spaces and functional analysis in the field of Signal
Processing; Understand the problems of fourier expansions and gain a basic knowledge on
Wavelet Transform.
Text Books:
1. Rafael C.Gonzalez, Richard E. Woods, etl, Digital Image Processing, TMH , 2nd Edition 2010.
2. Anil K. Jain, Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing, Pearson Education, 2001.
References:
1. B.Chanda and D. Dutta Majumdar, Digital Image Processing and Analysis ,PHI, 2003.
2. S. Jayaraman, S Esakkirajan, TVeerakumar - Digital Image Processing- McGraw Hill
Education(India) Private Limited
3. K.P. Soman, K.I Ramachandran, N.G. Resm i- Insight into Wavelets From Theory to
Practice 3/e – Prentice Hall of India
49
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
Mathematical Foundations of Digital Image
20CSSET136 3-0-0-3
Processing
Contact ESE
MODULES
hours Marks (%)
MODULE : 1
Introduction to Signals :- Continuous and Discrete Signals — Periodic
and Aperiodic Signals–-One Dimensional and Two Dimensional Signals—
Fundamental Signal Operations [Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication, 10 15
Scalar Multiplication, Folding, Shifting]
MODULE : 2
Other Signal Operations :.-- Sampling Operation —Up Sampling and
Down Sampling 1D and 2D Convolution—Properties of Convolution -–
1D and 2D Correlation and Properties--1D and 2D Autocorrelation and
Properties 7 15
Linear systems – Shift Invariant systems – Impulse response of Linear
Shift Invariant Systems
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE : 3
Fourier Expansion of Signals:--Fourier Series Expansion of Periodic
Continuous 1D and 2D Signals -- Fourier Transform of Continuous 1D
and 2D Signals and Properties –FourierTransformofDiscrete1Dand2D
Signals and Properties. Concept of Frequency Response – Examples on 8 15
various transforms
MODULE : 4
Image Transforms:-Discrete Fourier Transform(DFT):-1D and 2D DFT –
Properties of DFT—Illustrative Examples–Circular convolution --1D and 6 15
2DDiscrete Cosine and Sine Transforms and their properties
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE : 5
Hadamard Transform and Properties – Haar Transform and Properties --
KL Transform and Properties-- Singular Value Decomposition (SVD). 9 20
MODULE : 6
Wavelet Theory :-- Limitation of Fourier Expansions --Continuous
Wavelet Transform --Multi resolution Analysis Scaling Function – 8 20
Properties of Scaling Function Wavelet Function – Properties of Wavelet
Function – Discrete Wavelet Transform Signal Analysis and Synthesis
using Wavelet Transform
50
COURSE
CODE
Big Data Management and
20CSSET146 3-0-0-3 2020
Analytics
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
• To explore the concepts and tools on Big Data Management and Analytics.
• To understand the ideas on machine learning for big data.
Syllabus
Big data; Hadoop; MapReduce; NoSQL; Document Databases ;Machine Learning for Big Data
Course Outcome:
On completion of the course, the student will be able to have a strong foundation on big-data
management techniques; Gain a sound knowledge in Hadoop and Map-Reduce Programming
technique in Distributed Systems; Achieve sufficient knowledge on No-SQL databases and
machine learning techniques for big-data management.
Text Books:
1. Ghemawat, Sanjay, Howard Gobioff, and Shun-Tak Leung. "The Google file system." ACM
SIGOPS operating systems review. Vol. 37. No. 5. ACM, 2003.
2. Dean, Jeffrey, and Sanjay Ghemawat. "MapReduce: simplified data processing on large clusters."
Communications of the ACM 51.1 (2008): 107-113.
References:
1. White, Tom. Hadoop: the definitive guide: the definitive guide. " O'Reilly Media, Inc.", 2009.
2. Sadalage, Pramod J., and Martin Fowler. NoSQL distilled: a brief guide to the emerging world of
polyglot persistence. Pearson Education, 2012.
3. Jason Bell, Machine Learning for Big Data: Hands-on for Developers and Technical Professionals ,
Wiley 2014
51
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20CSSET146 Big Data Management and Analytics 3-0-0-3
Contact ESE
MODULES
hours Marks (%)
MODULE : 1
Introduction to Big data, Sources of Big Data, Vsin Big Data 6 15
Different kinds of Analytics --Predictive, Descriptive, Tools for Big Data

Processing – MapReduce, NoSQL, R
MODULE : 2
Distributed File Systems:-- GFS, HDFS 8 15
MapReduce:-- Introduction to MapReduce, MapReduce Programming

Model
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE : 3
How MapReduce Works:--Anatomy of MapReduce Job Run, failures, 9 15

Job Scheduling, Shuffle and Sort, MapReduce Programming Exercises.
MODULE : 4
Why NoSQL, Aggregate Data Models, Distribution Models, Consistency,

Key-Value Databases, Document Databases Column Family Stores,
Graph Databases 14 15
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE : 5
Introduction to Machine Learning – Algorithm Types for machine 7 20

Learning – supervised and unsupervised Learning
MODULE : 6
Uses of machine -learning, Languages for machine learning – R, python. 4 20
52

20CSSEP101 Mini Project 0-0-4-2 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
• To Understanding socially relevant problems and identify a suitable one.
• For applying critical thinking and problem solving methods, and select possible solutions.
• For Learning the design and implementation through minor research and engineering.
• To report the details as a bound volume
Course Outcome:
The student is expected to search various socially relevant problems and apply problem solving skills.
Suitable design and implementation of the selected method, after various testing. A project report as a
bound volume is expected to be submitted by the student.
53

20CSSEL102 Engineering Lab 0-0-2-1 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
1. Identify a software system that needs to be developed.

2. Document the Software Requirements Specification (SRS) for the identified system.
3. Identify use cases and develop the Use Case model.
4. Identify the conceptual classes and develop a Domain Model and also derive a Class Diagram
from that.
5. Using the identified scenarios, find the interaction between objects and represent them using
UML Sequence and Collaboration Diagrams
6. Draw relevant State Chart and Activity Diagrams for the same system.
7. Implement the system as per the detailed design
8. Test the software system for all the scenarios identified as per the usecase diagram
9. Improve the reusability and maintainability of the software system by applying appropriate
design patterns.
10. Implement the modified system and test it for various scenarios
References:
1. Bernd Bruegge, Alan H Dutoit, “Object-Oriented Software Engineering,” 2nd ed, Pearson
Education, 2004. ISBN-13: 9780130471109
2. Craig Larman, “Applying UML and Patterns” 3rd ed, Pearson Education,2005. ISBN-13: 978-
9332553941
54

Industrial Training
20CSSED101 0-0-4-0 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:

• To expose students experience and knowledge which is required in industry.
• Develop an appreciation of the structure and operation of industrial organizations.
• Understand the role of the engineer and engineering in industry.
• Appreciate the ethical basis of engineering practice in industry.
• Appreciate the importance of good communication and interpersonal skills, and to develop these skills.
Syllabus
The student shall undergo an industrial training as per academic regulation in company approved by
the institution and under the guidance of a staff member in the concerned field. The candidate is also
required to identify, define, formulate and offer an acceptable solution for a problem observed in the
organization. At the end of the training he/she has to submit a report on the work being carried out.
Course Outcome:
Upon completing this course, the students will be able to get familiarized with the general operations
happening in an industry. To get an experience in shaping oneself for entering an industry.
55
M. Tech. Syllabus 2020 – Geomechanics and Structures
M.Tech. DEGREE PROGRAMME

IN
CIVIL ENGINEERING
WITH SPECIALIZATION
GEOMECHANICS AND STRUCTURES
56
SEMESTER 1
COURSE
CODE
Applied Mathematics for
20CEGST101 3-0-0-3 2020
Civil Engineers
Pre-requisites:
Course Objectives:
 To define some special functions and find the recurrence relations.

 Study integral transforms and apply this to find the solution of differential equations and
also its application in integral equations.
 To find the solution of linear and non-linear equations by various numerical methods.
Syllabus
Beta Gamma functions, Integral transforms, Tensor Analysis, Integral Equations, Partial
differential equations
Course Outcome:
Familiarise with special functions, tensor analysis and solution of certain differential and
integral equations and its solutions.
Text Books:
1. Dr. B.S. Grewal, “Higher Engg. Mathematics”, Khanna Publishers, 2008.
2. SokolNikof, “Tensor Analysis”, John Wiley, Newyork, 1951
References:
1. S.Rajasekharan “Numerical Methods for Initial and Boundary value problems”.

2. Erwin Kreyzig ”Advanced Engineering Mathematics “John Wiley & Sons, 1994
3. SanthiSwaroop, “Integral equations”, Krishna Prakasan Media.
4. M.K. Venkataraman, “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, National Publishers
5. Sneddon I.N., “Partial Differential Equations”, McGrawHill, 1957.
6. S.C Chapra , R.P Canale' Numerical Method for Engineers.”
57
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
Applied Mathematics for Civil
20CEGST101 3-0-0-3
Engineers
ESE
Contact Marks
MODULES Hours (%)
MODULE: 1- Beta Gamma functions

Linear differential equations, Applications in vibratory motion. Bessel
functions, recurrence relations, generating functions, Legendre’s 7 15
equation and Legendre’s polynomials. Recurrence relations and
orthogonality
property.
MODULE: 2- Integral transforms
Laplace transforms, application to differential equations- Fourier 7 15
transforms, properties, derivatives, boundary value problems.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE: 3- Tensor Analysis
Summation conventions- transformations of coordinates, 7 15
basic transformations, Contra variant and mixed
tensors.
MODULE: 4- Integral Equations
Relation between integral and differential equations- solutions by 7 15
transforms of derivatives – solutions of initial and boundary value
problems.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE: 5- Partial differential equations
Non-linear equations of second order, D’Alembert’s method. 7 20
Applications, wave equation ,Laplace equation-solution-application
MODULE: 6
System of linear algebraic equations- elimination and factorization
methods. Gauss-Siedal iteration, solution of non-linear equation-
Newton Raphson method. Numerical Integration Gaussian
7 20
quadrature, Newton – cotes open quadrature Numerical method of
solution of partial differential equations in two dimensions-finite
differences-explicit and implicit methods- solution for irregular
boundaries.
END SEMESTER EXAM
58
COURSE
CODE
20CEGST103 Theoretical Geomechanics 3-1-0-4 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:

To analyze plane strain and plane stress problems.

To understand failure theories and constitutive models in Soil Mechanics
Syllabus
Analysis of stress and strain, Stresses in Soil, Westergaard’s analysis, Rheological

properties of material.
Course Outcome:
This course provides an introduction to the basic numerical methods and

constitutive laws used for the analysis of boundary value problems in Geomechanics.
Text Books:
1. Harr M.E, “Theoretical Soil Mechanics”, 1977
2. Timoshenko, S. and Goodier J.N., “Theory of Elasticity”, McGraw Hill Book Co.,
Newyork, 1988
References:
1. Sadhu Singh, “Theory of Elasticity”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 1988.

2. Slater R.A.C, “Engineering Plasticity”, John Wiley and Son, New York, 1977.
3. Chou P.C. and Pagano, N.J. “Elasticity Tensor, Dyadic and Engineering Approaches”,
D.Van Nostrand Co., Inc., London, 1967.
4. Scott R. F. “ Principles of Soil Mechanics”, Addison & Wesley, 1963
5. Selvadurai A.P.S., “Plasticity & Geomechanics”, Cambridge University Press,2002
6. Chen W.F., “Limit Analysis & Soil Plasticity”, Elsevier Scientific, 1975
7. Desai C.S. and Christian, J.T. “Numerical Methods in Geotechnical Engineering”,
McGrew Hill, New York, 1977.
59
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20CEGST103 Theoretical Geomechanics 3-1-0-4
Contact ESE
MODULES Hours Marks (%)
MODULE: 1
Analysis of stress and strain, Equilibrium equations - Compatibility
equations – stress strain relationship. Generalized Hooke’s law.
Octahedral shear, Stress function .Plane stress and plane strain - 12 15
Simple two dimensional problems in Cartesian and polar
coordinates.
Deviator stress
MODULE: 2
Stresses in Soil: Description of state of stress and strain at a point,
stress distribution problems in elastic half pace Boussinesq’s analysis
for concentrated force. Pressure bulb. 12 15
Uniformly loaded circular and rectangular areas. Newmark
influence diagram. Vertical and horizontal line loads. Uniform
vertical load over a strip. Principal stress and maximum shear.
Triangular and other loadings.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE: 3
Westergaard’s analysis. Burmister’s two layer theory. Stress 8 15
distribution around tunnels and vertical shafts.
MODULE: 4
Rheological properties of material-equation of state, models,
stress deformation behaviour of soil subject to loading, solution
of problems of linearly elastic solids. Deformation of Rheological 8 15
constants. Pore pressure developed, settlement computations
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE: 5
Failure theories, Yield criteria , Tresca, Von Mises , Mohr-
Coulomb failure conditions. Failure loci in deviatoric plane and 8 20
principal stress space, influence of intermediate principal stress on
failure.
60
MODULE: 6
Constitutive Models in Soil Mechanics: Isotropic Elastic,
Anisotropic Plasticity and Viscous Models. Representing Soil 8 20
Behaviour using these models. ; Advances in Constitutive models
END SEMESTER EXAM
61
COURSE
CODE
20CEGST105 Advanced Soil Mechanics 3-1-0-4 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 To understand clay mineralogy and effective stress principle of soil.

 To compute shear strength parameters and settlement of soil.
Syllabus:
Origin, nature and distribution of soil, Effective stress principle, consolidation, Shear
strength, stress history.
Course Outcome:
This course is designed to give an advanced thorough theoretical background to the

different aspects encountered in geotechnical design for example earth pressure analyses,
bearing capacity theories, assessments of settlements and displacements and so on.
Text Books:
1. Braja M Das " Advanced soil Mechanics" Taylor and Francis
2. Holtz, R.D and Kovacs W.D.(1981), “An Introduction to Geotechnical Engineering” ,
Prentice hall CO, N.J.
References:
1. R F Scott, Principles of Soil Mechanics, Addison & Wesley.

2. Lambe T.W, Whitman R.V , " Soil Mechanics" John Wiley & Sons
3. Mitchell, J. K. (1993), “Text book in Fundamentals of Soil Behaviour”, 2Ed, John Wiley
&Sons, New York
4. Hough, B. K (1957), “Basic Soil Engineering” The Ronald Press Co, New York.
62
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20CEGST105 Advanced Soil Mechanics 3-1-0-4
Contact ESE
MODULE: 1
Origin, nature and distribution of soil, classification of soil,
description of individual particle, clay mineralogy, atomic 12 15
bonds, clay-water electrolytes, soil fabric and structure. Clay
mineral identification. X-ray and Differential Thermal
Analysis.
MODULE: 2
Effective stress principle, steady state flow in soil, effect of 12 15
flow on effective stress, determination of coefficient of
permeability,
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE: 3
Consolidation, one, two, three and radial direction, variation
of effective stress during consolidation, consolidation tests
and determination of consolidation parameters - 8 15
measurement of swelling pressure- secondary consolidation
and its effect on pre-
consolidation pressure.
MODULE: 4
Shear strength- Stress path, Tri-axial ,direct shear, UCC and
vane shear tests, shear behaviour of granular soils, factors
affecting shear behaviour, determination of shear strength 8 15
parameters, shear behaviour of fine grained soils, pore
pressure parameters, UU,CU,CD tests, total and effective
shear strength parameters, total and effective stress paths
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE: 5
Stress history, rate of loading, structure and temperature,
anisotropy of strength, thixotropy, creep, determination of 8 20
in-situ undrained strength. Compaction- tests, effect on soil
structure, engineering behaviour on preloading
63
MODULE: 6
Soil settlement prediction in sand, simplified strain influence
factor, Skempton Bjerrum modification-settlement of clays– 8 20
precompression –stress path for settlement calculation.
END SEMESTER EXAM
64

Advanced Design of Concrete
20CEGST107 3-0-0-3 2020
Structures
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 To learn the fundamentals of design, analysis, and proportioning of reinforced

concrete members and structures.
 Methods for analysis and design of the elements under flexure, shear, and axial loads
will be examined.
Syllabus:
Calculation of deflection and crack width - Design of flat slabs and flat plates - Design of
RC walls - Inelastic behaviour of concrete beams
Course Outcome:
 The students will be familiar with advanced methods used for concrete structural design
 Identify underlying concepts in modern concrete design methods
Text Books:
1. Varghese, P.C, “Advanced Reinforced Concrete Design”, Prentice Hall of India, 2005.
2. Purushothaman, P, “Reinforced Concrete Structural Elements : Behaviour Analysis and
Design”, Tata McGraw Hill, 1986
References:
1. Varghese P.C, “Limit State Design of Reinforced Concrete, Prentice Hall of India, 2007.
2. Arthur.H.Nilson, David Darwin& Charles W Dolan, "Design of Concrete Structures",
Tata Mcgraw Hill, 2004
3. Sinha.N.C. and Roy S.K., “Fundamentals of Reinforced Concrete”, S.Chand and
Company Limited, New Delhi, 2003.
4. Park.R & Paulay T "Design of Concrete Structures",John Wiley & Sons, NewYork
65
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20CEGST107 Advanced Design of Concrete Structures 3-0-0-3
Contact ESE
MODULES
Hours Marks (%)
MODULE: 1
Calculation of deflection and crack width Design of columns, 7 15
slender column, corbels and deep-beams.
MODULE: 2
Design of flat slabs and flat plates- Design of spandrel beams. 7 15
Method of design of slabs- Yield line theory and Hillerborgs strip
method.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE: 3
Design of RC walls - ordinary and shear walls – Design of Grid 7 15
floors- a) by IS code method-b) by plate theory.
MODULE: 4
Analysis of Multi-Storey Buildings with Moment resistant Joints for
Lateral loads- Modified portal, Cantilever & Factor method- 7 15
Analysis of Multi- Storey Buildings with Moment resistant Joints for
Gravity loads(Vertical Loads)
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE: 5
Inelastic behaviour of concrete beams- limit state analysis of
concrete beams- moment rotation curves, Moment redistribution 7 20
in continuous beams.
MODULE: 6
Baker’s method of plastic design - Design of cast-in-situ joints in
frames. Detailing for ductility - Fire resistance of structural 7 20
members – Quality of control of concrete. Strengthening of
existing structures
END SEMESTER EXAM
66
COURSE
CODE
20CEGST111 Soil Exploration and Field Testing 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 To understand different methods of sampling and soil exploration

 To get a knowledge of various field tests and onshore and offshore investigation methods
Syllabus:
Principles of exploration, Modern methods of sampling, Various types of field tests, Field
testing for dynamic properties.
Course Outcome:
Able to plan and design a subsurface exploration program based on anticipated

geologic conditions and potential construction problems.
Text Books:
1. Bowles J.E., “Foundation Analysis and Design” (4Ed.), Mc.Graw –Hill, NY, 1996
2. Hunt R.E, Geotechnical Engineering investigation Manual, Mc Graw Hill, 1984
References:
1. N.P. Kurien, Design of Foundation Systems : Principles & Practices, Narosa, New Delhi
1992
2. M.J Tomlinson (1975) “Foundation Design and construction”, Pitman Publishing
Limited, London
3. H. F. Winterkorn and H Y Fang, Foundation Engineering Hand Book,
Galgotia Booksource
4. G.Ranjan and A S R Rao, Basic and Applied Soil Mechanics, New Age international
Publishers
67
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20CEGST111 Soil Exploration and Field Testing 3-0-0-3
Contact ESE Marks

MODULES Hours (%)
MODULE: 1
Principles of exploration; planning of investigation programmes ,
preliminary investigation-geophysical methods, electrical resistivity
and seismic refraction methods, sounding, methods of exploration- 7 15
open pits, trenches, shafts, tunnels, drifts, auger boring, rotary
drilling, depth and spacing of exploration, codal provisions.
MODULE: 2
Modern methods of sampling, different samplers- open drive
sampler, thin walled sampler, piston sampler: disturbed and 7 15
undisturbed samples in cohesionless and cohesive soils,
representative and non-representative samples, Preservation and
transportation of samples; Sampling records
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE: 3
Various types of field tests; ; standard penetration test, plate load
test, cyclic plate load test, static and dynamic cone penetration
test, pressure meter tests, dilatometer tests, in-situ permeability 7 15
tests, in-situ vane shear test, bore hole shear tests. Pile load test –
Pullout test, lateral
load test.
MODULE: 4
Field testing for dynamic properties- seismic cross hole test, SPT,
Cyclic plate load test, block vibration test, in Situ measurement of 7 15
K0. SPT correlation, uses of SPT value, Correlation of N value with
shear strength and relative density, correlation with SPT and CPT
values.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE: 5
Location of water table, soil profiles and bore log, interpretation of
exploration data and report preparation-Forensic analysis of 7 20
geotechnical failures, methodology of back analysis.
68
MODULE: 6
Geotechnical instrumentation – settlement, soil pressure, pore
water pressure. Investigation below sea/river bed, comparison 7 20
between onshore and offshore investigation, bathymetry, drillship
and sea bed investigations, under water sampling
END SEMESTER EXAM
69
COURSE
CODE
20CEGST121 Soil - Structure Interaction 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 To understand the theory of soil-structure interaction.

 To learn elastic analysis of pile and theoretical solutions for settlement and load
distributions.
Syllabus:
Soil-Foundation Interaction: Beam on Elastic Foundation, Plate on Elastic Medium:

Thin and thick plates, Analysis of finite plates, Numerical analysis of finite plates, simple
solutions ; Analysis of pile group, Interaction analysis, Load distribution in groups with rigid
cap, Laterally Loaded Pile: Load deflection prediction for laterally loaded piles
Course Outcome:
• To understand the fundamental concepts and theory of dynamic soil-structure

interaction (SSI), with special focus on the numerical tools currently available to model
such problems in earthquake engineering practice.
Text Books:
1. Nainan.P. Kurien, Design of Foundation Sytems:Principles & Practices, Narosa, New
Delhi 1992.
2. Cakmak,A.S, " Soil Structure Interaction" Elsevier, 1987.
References:
1. L.C. Reese, Single piles and pile groups under lateral loading, Taylor & Francis, 2000
2. E.S. Melerski, Design Analysis of Beams, Circular Plates and Cylindrical Tanks on
Elastic Foundation, Taylor and Francis, 2006.
3. G. Jones, Analysis of Beams on Elastic foundation, Thomas Telford, 1997.
70
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20CEGST121 Soil - Structure Interaction 3-0-0-3
ESE
Contact
MODULES Marks
Hours
(%)
MODULE: 1
Soil-Foundation Interaction: Introduction to soil-foundation
interaction problems, Soil behaviour, Foundation behaviour,
Interface behaviour, Scope of soil foundation interaction analysis, 7 15
soil response models, Winkler, Elastic continuum, Two parameter
elastic models, Elastic plastic behaviour, Time dependent
behaviour.
MODULE: 2
Beam on Elastic Foundation- Soil Models: Infinite beam, Two
parameters, Isotropic elastic half space, Analysis of beams of finite 7 15
length, Classification of finite beams in relation to their stiffness.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE: 3
Plate on Elastic Medium: Thin and thick plates, Analysis of finite 7 15
plates, Numerical analysis of finite plates, simple solutions.
MODULE: 4
Elastic Analysis of Pile: Elastic analysis of single pile, Theoretical 7 15
solutions for settlement and load distributions.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE: 5
Analysis of pile group, Interaction analysis, Load distribution in 7 20
groups with rigid cap.
MODULE: 6
Laterally Loaded Pile: Load deflection prediction for laterally
loaded piles, Subgrade reaction and elastic analysis, Interaction 7 20
analysis, Pile- raft system, Solutions through influence charts.
END SEMESTER EXAM
71
COURSE
CODE
20CEGST131 Critical State Soil Mechanics 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites:
Course Objectives:
 To understand the use of models in soil elasticity, plasticity and yielding.

 To understand the behaviour of over consolidated soil.
Syllabus:
Critical state concept, Constitutive relationships of soil, Stress and strain path and
invariant, models and soil mechanics; Consolidation, drained and undrained triaxial test;
Critical State Line and Roscoe surface- Drained and undrained loading, ; behaviour of over
consolidated soil, Hvorslev Surface, complete state boundary surface; Yield Surfaces: Modified
Cam-clay and Original Cam-clay, Special Topics: hypoelasticity-plasticity, disturbed state
concept; Failure theorems for soils.
Course Outcome:
 Able to understand the conceptual models that represent the mechanical behaviour of
saturated remoulded soil.
Text Books:
1. D.M. Wood, Soil Behaviour and Critical State Soil Mechanics, University of Glasgow
2. B M Das, Advanced Soil Mechanics, Taylor and Francis
References:
1. R F Scott, Principles of Soil Mechanics, Addison & Wesley
2. A.N, Schofield, C.P Wroth Critical State Soil Mechanics, Mc Graw Hill, London
3. R.O. Davis and A.P.S. Selvadurai, Elasticity and Geomechanics, Cambridge
University Press, New York.
4. Mitchell, J. K. (1993), “Text book in Fundamentals of Soil Behaviour”, 2Ed, John
Wiley &Sons, New York
5. J.H Atkinson & P.L Bransby , The Mechanics of soil –an introduction to critical state
soil mechanics, Mc Graw Hill, London 1978
72
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20CEGST131 Critical State Soil Mechanics 3-0-0-3
Contact ESE
MODULES
Hours Marks (%)
MODULE: 1
Critical state concept, Constitutive relationships of soil, Stress
and strain path and invariant, models and soil mechanics, use of 8 1
models in engineering, elasticity, soil elasticity, plasticity and 5
yielding, yielding in
combined tension and torsion, elastic volumetric strains,
MODULE: 2
Consolidation, drained and undrained triaxial test- Stress-
dilatancy theory; Work hardening plasticity theory: formulation 7 1
and implementation. 5
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE: 3
6 15
Critical State Line and Roscoe surface- Drained and undrained
loading
MODULE: 4
The behaviour of over consolidated soil, Hvorslev Surface,
complete state boundary surface ,elastic-plastic model for soil, 8 15
a particular elastic-plastic model cam-clay models, simulation of
single element
test using cam-clay
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE: 5
Yield Surfaces: Modified Cam-clay and Original Cam-clay, 6 20
Special Topics: hypoelasticity-plasticity, disturbed state concept.
MODULE: 6
Failure theorems for soils; Failure and plastic flow at critical 7 20
state Applications of elasto-plastic models
END SEMESTER EXAM
73
COURSE
CODE
20CEGST141 Prestressed Concrete Structures 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 To explain the effects of prestress on the behaviour of concrete beams and identify
situations when prestress is needed
 To determine the combined stresses induced by prestress and applied loads
 To define and determine the different types of losses of pre-stressed concrete
Syllabus
Analysis and design of simply supported (post and pre tensioned, Short term
deflections and long term deflections as per IS Code, Design of tension members.
Course Outcome:
 To introduce you the concepts of pre-stressed concrete, dealing with load analysis.
 You will also be introduced to types pre stressed concrete structures.
Text Books:
1. Krishna Raju N, “Prestressed Concrete” , 4th Edition TMH New Delhi , 2000
2. Rajagopalan N, “Prestressed Concrete”, Narora Publishing house, 2002
References:
1. Sinha N.C. & Roy, “Fundamentals of Prestressed Concrete”, S.Chand & Co, 1985
2. Lin T.Y, “Design of Prestressed Concrete Structures”, John Wiley & Sons , 1960
3. Pandit and Gupta, “Prestressed concrete”, CBS, 2002
4. F K Kong and R H Evans, “ reinforced and prestressed concrete”, TMH, 1999
74
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20CEGST141 Prestressed Concrete Structures 3-0-0-3
Contact ESE
MODULES
Hours Marks (%)
MODULE : 1 - Analysis and design of simply supported (post
and pre tensioned)
PSC flexural members – Basic concepts – Stresses at transfer and 8 15
service loads, ultimate strength in flexure.
MODULE : 2 - Short term deflections and long term
deflections 6 15
Deflection as per IS Code – Design and analysis of post and pre
tensioned PSC slabs.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE : 3 - Design for shear, bond and torsion
Design of end blocks (IS code method) – Design of prestressed 8 15
concrete cylindrical water tanks – Design of prestressed concrete
pipes.
MODULE : 4 - Design of tension members
Design of compression members – compression members with and 7 15
without flexure – Design of piles.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE : 5 - Composite construction with precast RC
beams 6 20
Analysis and design – Ultimate strength – Partial prestressing –
Definitions – principles and design approaches.
MODULE : 6 - Statically indeterminate structures
Analysis and design – Continuous beams – concept linear 7 20
transformation – concordant cable profile and cap cables.
END SEMESTER EXAM
75
COURSE
CODE
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:

Syllabus
Introduction to the Concepts of Research Methodology, Research Proposals, Research
Design, Data Collection and Analysis, Quantitative Techniques and Mathematical Modeling,
Report Writing.
Course Outcome:

1. Apply the basic aspects of the Research methodology to formulate a research problem and its
plan.
Text Books:
1. Research Methodology: Methods and Techniques’, by Dr. C. R. Kothari, New Age

International Publisher, 2004
2. Research Methodology: A Step by Step Guide for Beginners’ by Ranjit Kumar, SAGE
Publications Ltd; Third Edition
References:
1. Research Methodology: An Introduction for Science & Engineering Students’, by Stuart

Melville and Wayne Goddard, Juta and Company Ltd, 2004
2. Research Methodology: An Introduction’ by Wayne Goddard and Stuart Melville, Juta
and Company Ltd, 2004
76

20GNGNT101 Research Methodology 1-1-0-2
Contact
MODULES
Hours
MODULE : 1
Introduction to Research Methodology: Concepts of Research, Meaning

and 2 Objectives of Research, Research Process, Types of Research, Type 5
of research: Descriptive vs. Analytical, Applied vs. Fundamental,
Quantitative vs. Qualitative, and Conceptual vs. Empirical
MODULE :2
Criteria of Good Research, Research Problem, Selection of a problem,
Techniques involved in definition of a problem, Research Proposals – 4
Types, contents, Ethical aspects, IPR issues like patenting, copyrights.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE: 3
Research Design: Meaning, Need and Types of research design, Literature
Survey and Review, Identifying gap areas from literature review, Research 5
Design Process, Sampling fundamentals, Measurement and scaling
techniques, Data Collection – concept, types and methods, Design of
Experiments.
MODULE 4:
Quantitative Techniques: Probability distributions, Fundamentals of
Statistical analysis, Data Analysis with Statistical Packages, Multivariate 5
methods, Concepts of correlation and regression - Fundamentals of time
series analysis and spectral analysis.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE: 5
Report Writing: Principles of Thesis Writing, Guidelines for writing reports

5
& papers, Methods of giving references and appendices, Reproduction of
published material, Plagiarism, Citation and acknowledgement.
MODULE: 6
Documentation and presentation tools – LaTeX, Office with basic 4

presentations skills, Use of Internet and advanced search techniques.
77
COURSE
CODE
20CEGSQ101 Seminar – I 0-0-2-2 2020
Course Objectives:
1. Improve the technical presentation skills of the students.

2. To train the students to do literature review.
3. To impart critical thinking abilities.
Methodology
Individual students are required to choose a topic of their interest from related topics
to the stream of specialization, preferably from outside the M. Tech. syllabus. The students
are required to do a moderate literature review on the topic and give seminar. A committee
consisting of at least three faculty members (preferably specialized in the respective stream)
shall assess the presentation of the seminar and award marks to the students based on merits
of topic of presentation. Each student shall submit two copies of a write up of his seminar
topic. The seminar report shall not have any plagiarised content (all sources shall be properly
cited or acknowledged). One copy shall be returned to the student after duly certifying it by
the chairman of the assessing committee and the other shall be kept in the departmental
library. Internal continuous assessment marks are awarded based on the relevance of the
topic, presentation skill, quality of the report and participation. It is encouraged to do
simulations related to the chosen topic and present the results at the end of the semester.
78
COURSE
CODE
Advanced Geotechnical and Structural
20CEGSL101 0-0-2-1 2020
Lab
G eotechnical lab
Modified Proctor Compaction
Test Permeability of fine
grained soil Atterberg Limits
Soil Classification as per IS
Direct Shear Test
Triaxial Shear Test (CU, CD, UU)
Consolidation Test
Relative Density
Field Study of SPT/ Field vane shear test
SStructural Lab
Mix Design of Concrete with Admixtures
Testing of Simply Supported RCC beam for Flexural
failure Testing of Simply Supported RCC beam for
Shear Failure Testing of RCC Column
79
SEMESTER II
COURSE
CODE
Design of Reinforced Concrete
20CEGST102 3-1-0-4 2020
Foundations
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 To familiarise knowledge and understanding of soil behaviour, pertaining to different

types of foundations.
 To introduce detailed design issues related to both deep and shallow foundations.
 Develop the understanding of the role of modern soil mechanics.
Syllabus:
Introduction to Limit State Design of reinforced concrete in foundations, Combined

footings subjected to vertical loads, Structural design of mat foundation, Analysis of flexible
beams and grids on elastic foundations, Structural design of piles including pile caps, Special
foundations.
Course Outcome:
 To build the knowledge on soil behaviour and introduce to design issues

pertaining to different types of foundations
 An ability to identify & design various types of foundations according to field conditions
Text Books:
1. Varghese P.C, “Foundation Engineering” Prentice Hall of India,2005
2. Nainan P Kurien,Design of Foundation Sytems:Principles & Practices, Narosa, New Delhi
1992.
References:
2. Askok K Jain , “Reinforced Concrete Limit State Design”Nem Chand & Bros ,Roorkee
3. Shamsher prakash, Gopal Ranjan, & Swami Saran (1979), “Analysis and design of
foundations and retaining structures”, Sarita Prakashan New Delhi
4. Jain G.S & Dinesh Mohan “ Hand Book on Under reamed and Bored compaction pile
foundation “, CBRI Roorkee.
80
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20CEGST102 3-1-0-4
Foundations
Contact ESE
MODULES
Hours Marks (%)
MODULE: 1
Introduction to Limit State Design of reinforced concrete in
foundations; Soil pressure for structural design; Conventional 12 15
structural design of Spread footings, isolated footings, column
Pedestals
MODULE: 2
Combined footings subjected to vertical loads, lateral loads and
moments, Combined Footing, Strap footing, strip footings 12 15
under several columns
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE: 3
Structural design of mat foundation of various types subjected
to vertical and lateral loads and moments; Design of circular
rafts; Annular rafts. Soil structure interaction and 'flexible' 8 15
approach to the design of foundations; Structural design of
retaining walls.
MODULE: 4
Analysis of flexible beams and grids on elastic foundations, 8
Analysis of flexible plates on elastic foundations, ACI method of 15
analysis of beams on elastic foundation.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE: 5
Structural design of piles including pile caps, under-reamed piles,
piers and caissons; infilled virendal frame foundation- steel 8 20
column basis , structural design of well foundation.
MODULE: 6
Special foundations; Foundations For Towers-steel towers-
foundation to water tank, chimneys- shells for foundations- 8 20
hyperbolic paraboloid foundations, design of conical shell
foundation.
END SEMESTER EXAM
81
COURSE
CODE
20CEGST104 Foundation Analysis and Design 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 To analyze and estimate bearing capacity, settlement and lateral resistance of deep
foundation systems
 To study the effect of soil structure interaction on foundation design.
 To understand the various methods used for the determination of bearing capacity of
shallow foundations.
Syllabus:
Shallow Foundation, Bearing capacity of foundation based on in-situ tests; Pile

Foundations , Pile Groups – Consideration regarding spacing – Efficiency of pile groups –
Stresses on underlying soil strata – Approximate analysis of pile groups; Laterally loaded piles
– Modulus of sub grade reaction method – ultimate lateral resistance of piles; Soil -Structure
Interaction
Course Outcome:
 Able to comprehend the knowledge of foundation engineering and to establish the

framework for foundation design.
Text Books:
2. Poulose H.G. and Davis E.H., “Pile foundation Analysis and Design”, John-Wiley &
Sons, NY, 1980.
3. Braja M. Das, “Shallow Foundations: Bearing Capacity and Settlement”, CRC; 1st edition (18
June 1999).
References:
1. Fleming,W.G.K , Weltman A.J, Randolph M.F, Elson W.K, " Piling Engineering", Blackie
Academic & Professional.
2. N.P. Kurien, Design of Foundation Sytems : Principles & Practices, Narosa.
3. Winterkorn H.F. and Fang H.Y. Ed., “Foundation Engineering Hand Book”, Van-
Nostrand Reinhold, 1975.
4. Leonards G. Ed., “Foundation Engineering”, Mc.Graw-Hill,NY, 1962.
82
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20CEGST104 Foundation Analysis and Design 3-0-0-3
Contact ESE
MODULE: 1
Shallow Foundation-Bearing capacity- Mayerhoff, Hansen and
Vesic – bearing capacity factors, effect of water table, shape of
foundation, inclination. Settlement immediate and 7 15
consolidation –pressure bulb distribution.
MODULE: 2
Bearing capacity of foundation based on in-situ tests. Design of
spread footing, column footing , combined footing. Mat 7 15
foundations on cohesive and cohesion less soil- rigid beam
analysis- Winkler model
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE: 3
Pile Foundations Introduction – Estimation of pile capacity by
static and dynamic formulae – Wave equation method of analysis 7 15
of pile resistance – Load -Transfer method of estimating pile
capacity –
Settlement of single pile – Elastic methods.
MODULE: 4
Pile Groups – Consideration regarding spacing – Efficiency of pile
groups 7 15
– Stresses on underlying soil strata – Approximate analysis of
pile groups –Settlement of pile groups- Pile caps –Pile load tests
– Negative skin friction, Under reamed piles
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE: 5
Laterally loaded piles – Modulus of sub grade reaction method
– ultimate lateral resistance of piles. Well foundation- Design
and construction. Bearing capacity, settlement and lateral 7 20
resistance. Tilts and shifts
83
MODULE: 6
Soil -Structure Interaction Introduction to Soil -Structure
interaction problems -Contact pressure distribution – factors
influencing Contact pressure distribution beneath rigid and
7 20
flexible footings contact pressure distribution beneath rafts –
concentrically and eccentrically loaded cases –Modulus of Sub
grade reaction – Determination of modulus of sub grade
reaction – Factors influencing modulus of subgrade reaction
END SEMESTER EXAM
84
COURSE
CODE
Dynamics of Soil and Design of
20CEGST106 3-0-0-3 2020
Machine Foundation
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 To analyze SDOF system and MDOF system under dynamic loading.
 To familiarize different methods of analysis of machine foundation.
 To design machine foundation such that it neither endanger the satisfactory operation
of the machine nor disturb people working in the immediate vicinity
Syllabus:
Introduction to Soil Dynamics; Bearing capacity of dynamically loaded foundations;

Design of Machine Foundations; foundation of reciprocating machines -design criteria -
calculation of induced forces and moments -multi-cylinder engines; Foundations subjected to
impact loads; vibration isolation active and passive isolation -transmissibility -methods of
isolation in machine foundations.
Course Outcome:
 Able to understand the behaviour of soil and foundations under dynamic loads.
Text Books:
1. Das B M, “Principles of Soil Dynamics”, Thomsons Engineering, 1992.4. Saran S., “ Soil
Dynamics and Machine Foundations”, Galgotia Publications Private Ltd.,1999.
2. Sreenivasalu & Varadarajan, “Handbook of Machine Foundations”, Tata McGraw Hill
,2002
References:
1. Bowles J.E., “Foundation Analysis and Design” (4Ed.), Mc.Graw Hill, NY,19962.
Shamsher Prakash, “Soil Dynamics”, McGraw Hill, 1981.
2. A Major, “Vibration Analysis and Design of Foundations for Machines
3. and Turbines: Dynamical Problems in Civil Engineering”, Akademiai Kiado
Budapest Collets Holding Ltd, 1962
4. IS 2974 -Part I and II, “Design Considerations for Machine Foundations”
5. IS 5249: “Method of Test for Determination of Dynamic Properties Of Soils
85
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
Dynamics of Soil and Design of
20CEGST106 3-0-0-3
Machine Foundation
Contact ESE
MODULES
Hours Marks (%)
MODULE: 1- Introduction to Soil Dynamics
Vibration of elementary systems- free and forced vibration
with and without damping, Analysis of systems with Single 7 15
degree and multidegree of freedom. Natural frequencies of
continuous systems, resonance. Effect of vibration on soil
properties.
MODULE: 2
Bearing capacity of dynamically loaded foundations .Nature of
dynamic loads –stress conditions on soil elements under
earthquake loading -methods of analysis of machine
foundations -methods based on linear elastic weightless
7 15
springs methods based on linear theory of elasticity (elastic
half space theory) -nature of damping -geometric and internal
- Elastic Constants of soil and their experimental
determination.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE: 3- Design of Machine Foundations
Type of machine foundations special considerations for design
of machine .Vertical, sliding, rocking and yawing vibrations of a 7 15
block foundation –simultaneous rocking, sliding and vertical
vibrations of a block foundation
MODULE: 4
Foundation of reciprocating machines -design criteria -
calculation of induced forces and moments -multi-cylinder 7 15
engines –numerical example (IS code method)
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE: 5
Foundations subjected to impact loads - design criteria -
analysis of vertical vibrations computation of dynamic forces - 7 20
design of hammer foundations (IS code method)
MODULE: 6
Vibration isolation – active and passive isolation -transmissibility 7 20
- methods of isolation in machine foundations
END SEMESTER EXAM
86
COURSE
CODE
20CEGST112 Ground Water Engineering 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 To study groundwater flow in detail.

 To study the design and construction methods of various types of wells.
Syllabus:
Occurrence of ground water: origin -rock properties affecting ground water vertical
distribution
-geologic formations as aquifers; ground water flow -Darcy’s law -laplace equation –potential flow
lines; Ground water and well hydraulics; Tube wells, Quality of ground water: ground water
samples, ground water investigation
Course Outcome:
This course will give students a quantitative understanding of the hydraulics of

subsurface fluid flow and engineering applications and design.
Text Books:
1. F. W. Schwartz & H. Zhang, Fundamental of Ground Water, John Willey & Sons
2. Todd D.K., “ Ground Water Hydrology”, John Wiley
References:
1. H.M. Raghunath, Ground Water, New Age International Pvt. Ltd.

2. Garg S.P., “Ground Water & Tube wells”, Oxford & IBH
87
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20CEGST112 Ground Water Engineering 3-0-0-3
ESE
Contact
Marks
MODULES Hours
(%)
MODULE: 1-Occurrence Of Ground Water

Origin -rock properties affecting ground water vertical distribution -
geologic formations as aquifers -types of aquifers -aquifer parameters- 7 15
ground water basins -springs -ground water in permeable regions -
ground water balance.
MODULE: 2
Ground water flow -Darcy’s law -laplace equation -potential flow
lines -flow net -steady radial flow into a well -well in uniform flow -
steady flow in leaky aquifer -aquifer with percolation-seepage under a 7 15
dam -unsteady flow -general equation -confined and unconfined
Aquifers
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE: 3- Ground water and well hydraulics
Steady unidirectional flow -steady radial flow in to a well -well in
uniform flow -steady flow with uniform discharge -unsteady radial
flow in to a well -confined, unconfined and leaky aquifers -well near
aquifer boundaries -multiple well system -partially penetrating wells 7 15
-characteristics well losses -pumping tests -non equilibrium equation
for pumping tests -Thies’ method -Jacob method -Chow’s method
MODULE: 4-Tube wells

Design -screened wells -gravel packed wells -well loss-selection of
screen size yield of a well -test holes -well logs -methods of
construction -dug wells - shallow tube wells - deep wells - gravity 7 15
wells - drilling in rocks -screen installation -well completion well
development -testing wells for yield -collector -or radial wells –
infiltration galleries well point system -failure of tube wells
INTERNAL TEST - II
88
MODULE: 5- Quality of ground water

Ground water samples – measurement of water quality- chemical,
physical and bacterial analysis - quality for domestic use - quality for 7 20
agricultural use pumps - shallow well pumps.
MODULE: 6
Ground water investigation - geographical investigation electrical
resistivity method - seismic refraction method - gravity and magnetic
method - test drilling – resistivity logging – potential logging – 7 20
artificial recharge - recharge by water spreading -sewage recharge -
recharge through pits, shafts and wells
END SEMESTER EXAM
89
COURSE
CODE
Ground Improvement
20CEGST122 3-0-0-3 2020
Techniques
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 To study various methods of insitu densification and ground improvement by grouting

techniques.
 To understand various soil stabilization methods and familiarise different types of
geosynthetics.
Syllabus:
Introduction to ground improvement techniques: Soil Stabilization; Soil

Reinforcement; Soil fracturing techniques for terminating settlements and restoring levels of
buildings and structures, injection technology and its effects; Geosynthetics.
Course Outcome:
 Delegates will gain an understanding of the concepts behind a range of Ground

Improvement Techniques, and be able to identify appropriate techniques for a range
of ground and site conditions.
Text Books:
1. Moseley, M.P. (1994) “Ground Improvement”, Blackie Academic and Professional,
Glasgow
2. Raj, P. Purushothama, (2005) “Ground Improvement Techniques”, Laxmi
Publications, New Delhi
References:
1. N. V. Nayak, Foundation Design Manual, Dhanpat Rai and Sons, Delhi

2. Van Impe, W.F " Soil Improvement Techniques & their Evolution", AA Balkema
3. T.S Ingold (1982), “Reinforced Earth”, Thomas Telford Ltd, London
4. J.N Mandal (1988) “Reinforced Soil and Geotextiles”, Oxford and IBH Publishers
Co. Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi.
5. Robert M. Koerner (1990), “Designing with Geosynthetics”, Prentice Hall,
Englewood Cliffs
6. G Venkatappa Rao, GVS Surry Narayana Raju, (1990) “Engineering with
Geosynthetics”,Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishing Company Ltd, New Delhi
90
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20CEGST122 Ground Improvement Techniques 3-0-0-3
Contact ESE
MODULES
Hours Marks (%)
MODULE: 1-Introduction to ground improvement
techniques Economic considerations- Engineering properties
of soil, weak and compressible deposits. In situ densification –
Vibrofloatation, Compaction pile, Vibro C o m p a c t i o n Piles
Dynamic Compaction, Blasting Preloading with and without
vertical drains. Compressibility, vertical and radial 7 15
consolidation, preloading methods. Types of Drains, Design of
vertical Drains, construction techniques. Stone Column:
Function Design principles, load carrying capacity,
construction techniques, settlement of stone column
MODULE: 2
Ground Improvement by Grouting techniques, types of grout,
desirable characteristics, grouting pressure, grouting methods.
chemical grouting, principles of injection, grout systems, 7 15
grouting operations, applications, design methods, jet grouting,
the jet grouting process, geometry and properties of soil used,
properties of
treated ground, application of jet grouting.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE: 3- Soil Stabilization
Lime stabilization-Base exchange mechanism, Pozzolanic
reaction, lime-soil interaction, lime columns. Cement
stabilization: Mechanism, amount, age and curing. Fly-ash – 7 15
Lime Stabilization, Soil Bitumen Stabilization. deleterious effects
of organic substances and sulphates
on inorganic stabilization lime-sand columns, stone columns
MODULE: 4- Soil Reinforcement
Mechanism, Types of reinforcing elements, reinforcement-soil 7 15
interaction, Reinforcement of soil beneath the roads,
foundation.
INTERNAL TEST - II
91
MODULE: 5
Soil fracturing techniques for terminating settlements and
restoring levels of buildings and structures, injection 7 20
technology and its effects, typical examples, in situ soil mixing
techniques, construction
techniques, testing procedures
MODULE 6: Geosynthetics
Types and functions, Materials and manufacturing process,
Testing and valuations, Design and construction of 7 20
geosynthetics , reinforced soil retaining structures, walls and
slopes. Geosynthetics in pavements, Embankments on soft soils,
Geosynthetics in roads and railways, separators, drainage and
filtering in road pavements, railway tracks, overlay design and
constructions, trench drains. Geosynthetics in Environmental
control, liners for ponds and canals, covers and liners for
landfills, material aspects and stability considerations, landfills,
occurrences and methods of mitigation, Erosion causes and
techniques for control
END SEMESTER EXAM
92
COURSE
CODE
20CEGST132 Applied Soil Mechanics 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites:
Course Objectives:
 To design reinforced earth retaining structures.

 To study bulkheads, cofferdams and stability analysis of natural slopes.
Syllabus:
Earth Pressure, Design of retaining wall, Theory of arching in soils and its applications in
tunnel, conduits, silos; Bulkheads; Cellular Cofferdams; Slope stability.
Course Outcome:
 This inspiring course encourages students to solve geotechnical engineering

problems using traditional engineering solutions.
Text Books:
1. Shamsher prakash, Gopal Ranjan, & Swami Saran, “Analysis and design of foundations and
retaining structures”, Sarita Prakashan New Delhi, 1979
2. Das B. M., “Principles of Foundation Engineering”, Thomson, Indian Edition, 2003.
References:
1. Bowles J.E., “Foundation Analysis and Design” (4Ed.), Mc.Graw Hill, NY, 1996
2. Nainan P Kurian, “Design of foundation systems: principles and practices” ,Narosa
publish House New Delhi, 1992
3. Gregory. P. Tschebotarioff ,“Foundations, Retaining and Earth Structures”, McGraw Hill ,
1978.
4. Craig R F, “Soil Mechanics”, Chapman and Hall (ELBS) ,2004.
93
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20CEGST132 Applied Soil Mechanics 3-0-0-3
Contact ESE
MODULES
Hours Marks (%)
MODULE: 1- Earth Pressure
Fundamental relationships between the lateral pressures and the
strain with a back fill. Rankine and Coulomb theories. 7 15
Assumption and conditions. Point of application of passive earth
pressures
MODULE: 2- Design of retaining wall
Gravity wall, stability criteria. External stability and internal
stability. Reinforced earth retaining structures- Recent advances 7 15
in Earth retaining structures
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE: 3
Theory of arching in soils and its applications in tunnel,
conduits, silos. Braced excavation: Types, Construction
methods, Pressure distribution in sands and clays, stability, 7 15
bottom heave, seepage. Braced excavations, Earth pressure
against bracings in cuts, Heave of the bottom of cut in soft
clays.
MODULE: 4
Bulkheads: Definition and assumptions, conditions of end
supports and distribution of active earth pressure and bulkheads,
bulkheads with free and fixed earth supports, equivalent beam 7 15
method, Improvements suggested by Rowe, Tschebotarioff’s
method, Anchorage of bulkheads and resistance of anchor walls.
Diaphragm walls, Bored pile walls
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE: 5- Cellular Cofferdams
Stability and design of cellular cofferdams. TVA method, The 7 20
Cummings Method, Reinforced Soil walls, elements, construction
methods.
94
MODULE: 6- Slope stability

Stability analysis of natural slopes. Stability analysis models
.Stability analysis of finite and Infinite slopes: concept of factor of
safety. Culmann friction circle, Swedish, modified Bishop, Janbu’s 7 20
method and limit state analysis of slopes. Design of earth
embankments and slopes, Prestressed ground anchors, soil
nailing
END SEMESTER EXAM
95
COURSE
CODE
Earthquake Analysis and Design
20CEGST142 3-0-0-3 2020
of Structures
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 To assists analysing the interaction between civil infrastructure and the ground,
including the consequences of earthquakes on structures.
 For the proper design and construction of buildings in accordance with building codes,
so as to minimize damage due to earthquakes.
Syllabus:
Engineering Seismology, Dynamics of Structures, Structural Systems, Earthquake

Resistant Design of R.C.C. Buildings.
Course Outcome:
 Ensure proper design of buildings so they will resist damage due to earthquakes, but
at the same time not be unnecessarily expensive
Text Books:
1. S K Duggal, “Earthquake Resistant Design of Structures”, Oxford UniversityPress,
2007.49
2. Pankaj Agarwal and Manish Shrikhande, “Earthquake Resistant Design of Structures”,
Prentice Hall of India, 2006
References:
1. Course Notes "Design of Reinforced Concrete Buildings", IIT Kanpur, June 1999.
2. Paulay,T and Priestly, M.N.J., “A seismic Design of Reinforced Concrete and Masonry
buildings”, John Wiley and Sons, 1991.
3. Bruce A Bolt, “Earthquakes” W H Freeman and Company, New York, 2004
4. Bungale S.Taranath,"Structural Analysis and Design of Tall Buildings”, Mc Graw Hill
Book Company, New York, 1999.
5. StevenC. Kramer, “A text Book on Geotechnical Earthquake Engineering”,Prentice
hall International series,2004
6. Das B . M.,“A text Book on principles of soil Dynamics”, Brooks, Code,1993.
96
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
Earthquake Analysis and Design of
20CEGST142 Structures 3-0-0-3
Contact ESE
MODULE: 1- Engineering Seismology
Engineering Seismology (Definitions, Introduction to Seismic
hazard, Earthquake Phenomenon), Seismotectonics and Seismic
Zoning of India, Earthquake Monitoring and Seismic
7 15
Instrumentation, Characteristics of Strong Earthquake Motion,
Estimation of Earthquake Parameters, Microzonation
MODULE: 2-Dynamics of Structures

Dynamics of Structures (SDOFS/ MDOFS), Response Spectra -
Average Response Spectra -Design Response Spectra, Evaluation 7 15
of Earthquake Forces as per codal provisions, Effect of Earthquake
on Different Types of Structures, Lessons Learnt From Past
Earthquakes
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE: 3- Structural Systems
Structural Systems -Types of Buildings, Causes of damage,
Planning Considerations, Philosophy and Principle of Earthquake
Resistant Design, Guidelines for Earthquake Resistant Design, 7 15
Earthquake Resistant Earthen Buildings, Earthquake Resistant
Masonry Buildings -Design consideration
–Guidelines.
MODULE: 4- Earthquake Resistant Design of R.C.C.
Earthquake Resistant Design of R.C.C. Buildings - Material
properties - Lateral load analysis -Design and detailing –Rigid 7 15
Frames –Shear wall –
Coupled Shear wall
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE: 5- Mathematical modeling of multistoried RC
Buildings Mathematical modeling of multistoried RC Buildings –
Capacity based design. Vibration Control -Tuned Mass Dampers – 7 20
Principles and
Application
MODULE: 6- Basic Concept of Seismic Base Isolation
Basic Concept of Seismic Base Isolation –various Systems-Case 7 20
Studies, Important structures.
END SEMESTER EXAM
97
COURSE
CODE
20CEGST114 Environmental Geotechniques 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 To understand various methods of waste disposal.

 To understand geotechnical reuse of waste materials.
Syllabus:
Introduction: Forms of waste, engineering properties; Design of ash containment

system; Subsurface contamination and Contaminant transport through porous media; Design-
clay liners, geosynthetic clay liners for waste containment, cover and gas collection system;
Geotechnical Reuse of Waste materials; Contaminants of Slurry wastes.
Course Outcome:
 This course will focus on geotechnical aspects in the disposal of waste materials
and the remediation of environmentally contaminated sites.
Text Books:
1. Reddy K. R. and H D Sharma, “ Geoenvironmental Engineering: Site
Remediation, waste containment, and emerging waste management technologies”,
John Willey, 2004.
2. Reddy L N and Inyang H.I., “Geoenvironmental Engineering: Principles and
Applications”, Marcel Dek, 2000
References:
1. Yong R N., “Geo Environmental Engineering: Contaminated Ground: Fate of

pollutions and Remediation”, Thomson Telford, 2000.
2. Hsai yang Fang “Introduction to Environmental Geotechenology”, CRC press Newyork ,
1997
3. Cairmey .T. “Contaminated land problems and solutions”, Blackie Academic &
Professional, 1993
4. Ayyar ,R.S.R “Soil Engineering in relation to Environment”, LBS ,Thiruvananthapuram,
2000
5. Sivapullaiah ,P.V, ” Environmental Geotechnics”, IISC ,Bangalore, 1985.
98
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20CEGST114 Environmental Geotechniques 3-0-0-3
ESE
Contact
Marks
MODULES Hours
(%)
MODULE: 1
Introduction: Forms of waste, engineering properties
(determination and typical values). Selection of waste disposal 7 15
sites: Site selection – selection criteria and rating; Solid waste
disposal: Ash Disposal facilities- Dry disposal, waste disposal.
MODULE: 2
Design of ash containment system, Stability of ash dykes;
Reclaiming potentially combustible sites , combustion process,
combustion tests , use of combustion potential tests, Land fill 7 15
gases , principal gases and their properties, Gas monitoring
,Data assessment and remedial
solutions.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE: 3
Subsurface contamination and Contaminant transport through
porous media: mechanisms- advection and dispersion. 7 15
Contaminants of Solid Waste in Landfills: Types- Dry cell, wet
cell, bioreactor
MODULE: 4
Design- clay liners, geosynthetic clay liners for waste
containment, cover and gas collection system. Stability of
land fills. Land fill Instruction & operation, sustainable waste 7 15
management.
Remediation: Principle- planning, source control, soil
washing, bioremediation.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE: 5
Geotechnical Reuse of Waste materials: Waste reduction, use
in geotechnical construction, waste characteristics, 7 20
transportation consideration, Engineering properties of
Wastes, Waste material in Embankment and Fills
99
MODULE: 6
Contaminants of Slurry wastes: Slurry transported wastes,
slurry ponds, operation, Embankment construction and
raising, Design aspects, Environmental Impact and control.
7 20
Vertical Barriers for Contaminant: Contaminated sites,
Types of barriers, Soil-Bentonite slurry trench walls,
Cement-Bentonite slurry trench walls, construction,
material and design aspects
END SEMESTER EXAM
100
COURSE
CODE
20CEGST124 Advanced Steel Structures 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 To study and design members subjected to lateral loads and axial loads
 To focus on the study and design of various steel towers and steel chimneys
 To study the design concepts and design Light gauge steel structures
Syllabus:
Review of loads on structures, Types of connections, Design of self supporting chimney,

Theory of plastic bending, Behaviour of Compression Elements
Course Outcome:
 The student will also gain knowledge of designing different types of steel members
 The student will have an exposure to design of steel tower and chimneys
 The student will also gain the knowledge of designing light gauge steel structures
Text Books:
1. S.K Duggal “ Limit State Design of steel structures’ TMH publications
2. Subramanian.N, “Design of Steel Structures”, Oxford University Press, 2008.
References:
1. Dayaratnam.P, “Design of Steel Structures”, A.H.Wheeler, India, 2007.

2. Linton E. Grinter, “Design of Modern Steel Structures”, Eurasia Publishing House,
New Delhi, 1996.
3. John E. Lothers, “Design in Structural Steel”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 1990.
4. Lynn S. Beedle, “Plastic Design of Steel Frames”, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1990.
5. Wie Wen Yu, “Design of Cold Formed Steel Structures”, Mc Graw Hill Book
Company, New York, 1996.
6. S.S Bhavikatti “ Design of steel structures” I.K International Publishing house Pvt Ltd
101
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20CEGST124 Advanced Steel Structures 3-0-0-3
Contact ESE
MODULES
Hours Marks (%)
MODULE: 1- Review of loads on structures
Dead, live, wind and seismic loads as per IS 800-2007 , Design
of purlins, Louver rails, gable column and gable wind girder – 7 15
Analysis and design of gable frames – design of moment resisting
base plates.
MODULE: 2- Types of connections
Design requirement of bolted and welded connections– Seated
Connections – Unstiffened and Stiffened seated Connections – 7 15
Moment Resistant Connections – Semi rigid Connections –
Split beam Connections – Framed Connections
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE: 3- Design of self supporting chimney
Design of base plates, foundations and anchor bolts- Guyed
steel chimney – guy ropes – stresses due to wind. Along with 7 15
loadcalculation – gust factor method.
MODULE: 4- Theory of plastic bending
Plastic hinge concept- mechanism method- Application to 7 15
continuous beam and portal frames – plastic moment
distribution.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE: 5- Limit State Design –Ultimate and
serviceability limit states 7 20
Limit state design of axially loaded members- Design of beams.
MODULE: 6- Behaviour of Compression Elements
Effective width for load and deflection determination –
Behaviour of Unstiffened and Stiffened Elements – Design of
webs of beams – Flexural members – Lateral buckling of beams 7 20
– Shear Lag – Flange Curling – Design of Compression
Members – Wall Studs
END SEMESTER EXAM
102
COURSE
CODE
20CEGST134 Analysis and Design of Pavements 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 To get a knowledge of various factors affecting design and performance of pavements.

 To understand types of stresses in rigid pavements and its design.
Syllabus:
Introduction: Types and component parts of pavements, Materials for cement

concrete and semi-rigid pavements, Stresses and strains in an infinite elastic half space ,
use of Boussinesq's equations, Flexible pavement design methods for highways and airports,
Stresses in rigid pavements, Rigid pavement design.
Course Outcome:
 The purpose of this course is to introduce the concepts of design, performance, and
analysis of rigid and flexible pavements
Text Books:
1. E.J. Yoder, M.W. Witczak, “Principles of Pavement Design” Wiley India Pvt Ltd; Second edition
(26 April 2011).
2. Yang Huang, “Pavement Analysis and Design”, Pearson; 2nd edition (27 November 2003)
3. Khanna, S.K. & Justo E.G.,” Highway Engineering”, Nem Chand and Bros, Roorkee
References:
1. Atkins & Harold, Highway Materials, Soils, and Concretes, Prentice Hall –Pearson, 2003.
2. Richard Kim Y., “Modeling of Asphalt Concrete”, Mc Graw Hill Professional.,2008.
3. Relevant IRC, ASTM, AASHTO and other Codes, Manuals and Specifications
4. Lavin P.G., “Asphalt Pavements”1stEd, Taylor and Francis, 2007
103
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20CEGST134 Analysis and Design of Pavements 3-0-0-3
Contact ESE
MODULES
Hours Marks (%)
MODULE: 1
Introduction: Types and component parts of pavements, Factors
affecting design and performance of pavements. Highway and
airport pavements. Conventional aggregates and their evaluation, 7 15
Bituminous binders- Properties, testing and applications;
Bituminous mixes-Design, testing
and evaluation.
MODULE: 2
Materials for cement concrete and semi-rigid pavements, Design of
mixes for stabilized roads ; Non-conventional and new pavement 7 15
materials- their application and limitations
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE: 3
Stresses and strains in an infinite elastic half space , use of
Boussinesq's equations, Burmister's two layer and three layer
theories; Wheel load stresses, various factors in traffic wheel 7 15
loads; Equivalent single wheel load of multiple wheels. Repeated
loads and EWL factors
MODULE: 4
Flexible pavement design methods for highways and airports:
Empirical, semi-empirical and theoretical approaches;
Development, principle, design steps of the different pavement 7 15
design methods including AASHTO, Asphalt Institute, Shell
Methods.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE: 5
Stresses in rigid pavements: Types of stresses and causes;
Introduction to Westergaard's equations for calculation of
stresses in rigid pavement due to the influence of traffic and 7 20
temperature; Considerations in rigid pavement analysis, EWL;
wheel load stresses, warping stresses, frictional
stresses, combined stresses
104
MODULE: 6
Rigid pavement design: Design of cement concrete pavement for
highways and runways; Design of joints, reinforcements, tie bars, 7 20
dowel bars. IRC method of design; Design of continuously
reinforced concrete pavements.
END SEMESTER EXAM
105
COURSE COURSE NAME L-T-P-C YEAR

CODE
20CEGST144 Modern Construction Practices 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 To study the substructure construction techniques like box jacking, sheet piling etc
 To study and understand the various types of equipments used for earthwork,
tunneling, drilling, blasting, dewatering, material handling conveyors and its
applications in construction projects
Syllabus:
Fundamentals of Earth Work Operations; Equipment for Compaction - Erection

Equipment; Forklifts and related equipment; Sub structure construction-Box jacking - pipe
jacking - Under water construction of diaphragm walls and basement - Tunneling techniques;
Super Structure construction- Vacuum dewatering of concrete flooring – concrete paving
technology; erection techniques of tall structures, large span structures.
Course Outcome:
 At the end of this course students will be able to know various types of equipments
to be used in the constructions projects
Text Books:
1. Peurifoy, R.L., Ledbetter, W.B. and Schexnayder, C., Construction Planning,
Equipment and Methods, 5th Edition, McGraw-Hill, Singapore, 1995
2. Dr. Mahesh Varma, Construction Equipment and its planning and Application,
Metropolitan Book Company, New Delhi. 1983.
References:
1. Sharma S.C. Construction Equipment and Management, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi,
1988.
2. Deodhar, S.V. Construction Equipment and Job Planning, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi,
1988.
3. Robertwade Brown, Practical foundation engineering hand book, McGraw-Hill
Publications, 1995
4. Patrick Powers. J., Construction Dewatering: New Methods and Applications, John
Wiley & Sons, 1992
5. Jerry Irvine, Advanced Construction Techniques, CA Rocketr, 1984
106
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20CEGST144 Modern Construction Practices 3-0-0-3
Contact ESE
MODULE: 1
Fundamentals of Earth Work Operations - Earth Moving
Operations - Types of Earth Work Equipment - Tractors, Motor 7 15
Graders, Scrapers, Front end Waders, Earth Movers, Equipment
for Dredging, Trenching, Tunneling, Drilling, Blasting .
MODULE: 2
Equipment for Compaction - Erection Equipment - Types of pumps
used in Construction - Equipment for Dewatering and Grouting – 7 15
Foundation and Pile Driving Equipment
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE: 3
Forklifts and related equipment - Portable Material Bins –
Conveyors - Hauling Equipment, Crushers – Feeders - Screening
Equipment - Handling Equipment - Batching and Mixing 7 15
Equipment - Hauling, Pouring and Pumping Equipment –
Transporters
MODULE: 4
Sub structure construction-Box jacking - pipe jacking - Under
water construction of diaphragm walls and basement - Tunneling
techniques - piling techniques- auger, DMC, drilling - driving well
and caisson - sinking cofferdam - cable anchoring and grouting - 7 15
driving diaphragm walls, sheet piles - laying operations for built up
offshore system - shoring for deep cutting - large reservoir
construction with membranes and earth system - well points -
dewatering and stand by plant equipment for underground
open excavation
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE: 5
Super Structure construction- Vacuum dewatering of concrete
flooring – concrete paving technology – techniques of construction 7 20
for continuous concreting operation in tall buildings of various
shapes and varying sections – launching techniques – suspended
form work
107
MODULE: 6
Erection techniques of tall structures, large span structures –
launching techniques for heavy decks – insitu prestressing in high 7 20
rise structures, aerial transporting handling erecting lightweight
components on tall
structures
END SEMESTER EXAM
108
COURSE
CODE
20CEGSP101 Mini Project 0-0-4-2 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 To improve the professional competency and research aptitude by touching the specific areas
which are otherwise not covered by theory or laboratory classes.
 To develop the work practice in students to apply theoretical
and practical tools/techniques to solve real life problems related to industry/field and current
research
The mini project is designed to improve knowledge about real life problems and thereby
enhance the problem solving ability. Students can take up any project pertaining to relevance in
the field of Geotechnical Engineering and Structural Engineering. Projects can be chosen either
from the list provided by the faculty or in the field of interest of the student. As far as possible,
projects should be done in the parent institution. For external projects, students should obtain
prior permission after submitting the details of the guide and synopsis of the work. The
external project guide should have a minimum qualification of ME/M.Tech. in Geotechnical
Engineering, Structural Engineering or related fields. At the end of each phase of work,
presentation of the project should be conducted, which will be evaluated by a panel of
examiners. A detailed project report duly approved by the guide in the prescribed format
should be submitted for end semester assessment. Marks will be awarded based on the report
and their performance during presentations.
109
COURSE
CODE
20CEGSL102 Civil Engineering Design Studio 0-0-2-1 2020
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To visualize, model and analyze civil engineering problems using finite element softwares and
arrive at suitable solution.
Application of software packages like PLAXIS, ANSYS, SAP, STRUDS, etc in modeling,
simulation, analysis, design and drafting of structural components for raft foundation, retaining
wall, pile foundation, beams, columns , slopes and embankments using the concepts given in
theory papers. The student has to practice the packages by working out different types of
problems. The student has to carry out a mini project work which will be evaluated for internal
assessment
110
COURSE
CODE
20CEGSD101 Industrial Training 0-0-4-0 2020
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Enhance students’ awareness in real life geotechnical and structural problems

 Enhance employability skills and make them industry-ready
 Improve confidence by providing hands-on experience of real life problems
 Improve the ability to work as an individual and as a member in the group
The student has to undergo an industrial training of minimum two weeks duration during the
semester break. Industrial training should be carried out in an industry / company approved by the
institution and under the guidance of a staff member in the concerned field. Students can take up any
application level/system level project pertaining to a relevant domain. Projects can be chosen from the
field of interest of the student. The project guide should have a minimum qualification of ME/M.Tech. in
relevant field of work.
Students should prepare a report which includes the organisational structure, the projects
taken up by the industry and a description of the works they have carried out in the industry. A
presentation of 20 minutes duration is to be done before a panel consisting of a Professor in the
specialised area as Chairman and two faculty members. The report of the industrial training should be
submitted according to the prescribed format from the department.
111
M. Tech. Syllabus 2020 – Machine Design

IN
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
WITH SPECIALIZATION
MACHINE DESIGN
112
SEMESTER I

Advanced Engineering
20MEMDT101 3-0-0-3 2020
Mathematics
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
To develop an understanding of the fundamental principles of higher engineering mathematics and

apply these principles to a variety of physical systems mainly consisting of machines
Syllabus
Variation and its properties, Euler's equation - functionals dependent on first and higher
order derivatives. Power series solutions about ordinary point, Legendre equation and Legendre
polynomials, Solutions about singular points. Linear partial differential equation of second order -
elliptic, parabolic, hyperbolic equations. Range and summation conventions - transformation of co-
ordinates contra variant, covariant, mixed tensors.
Course Outcome:
Students will be able to apply the knowledge of Calculus for solving problems in respective areas of
specialization
Text Books:
1. B. S. Grewal, “Higher engineering mathematics”, Khanna Publishers, 2000

2. Erwin Kreyszig, “Advanced engineering mathematics”
References:
1. Michael E. Greenberg, “Advanced engineering mathematics”, Pearson Education

2. E. Balagurusamy, “Numerical methods”, Tata McGraw Hill, 1995
3. Sokol Nikof, “Tensor analysis”, John Wiley, New York, 2000
4. Richard A. Johnson, “Miller & Freund’s probability & statistics for engineers”, Prentice Hall of
India, 2006
5. Jay L. Devore, “Probability and statistics for engineering and sciences”
6. B. S. Grewal, “Numerical methods in engineering and sciences”, Khanna Publications
113
COURSE PLAN

Advanced Engineering
20MEMDT101 3-0-0-3
Mathematics
Contact ESE
MODULES
Hours Marks (%)
MODULE 1: Functionals - Euler's equation - functional dependent on
first and higher order derivatives-functionals dependent on functions of
6 15
several dependent variables-Isoperimetric problem - Approximate
solution of boundary value problems - Rayleigh Ritz method.
MODULE 2: Power series solutions about ordinary point – Frobenius
method - Bessel equation and Bessel Functions - Legendre equation and 10 15
Legendre polynomials
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3: Linear partial differential equation of second order- elliptic,
parabolic, hyperbolic equations - Method of separation of
6 15
Variables - Solution of Laplace, one-dimensional heat & one dimensional
wave equations.
MODULE 4: Finite difference method - solution of Laplace equation -
solution of one-dimensional heat equation - Crank Nicholson method - 5 15
solution of one-dimensional wave equation
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5: Range and summation conventions - transformation of
coordinates contravariant, covariant, mixed tensors - Fundamental
10 20
operations with tensors - Metric and Conjugate tensors - Christoffel
symbols
MODULE 6: One way and two way classification (single observation per
cell) - basic principles of experimentation - role of
5 20
randomization, replication, local control. Basic designs - CRD, RBD,
LSD
114
20MEMDT103 Theory of Vibration 3-1-0-4 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
To make the Student:-
1. Fully understand and appreciate the importance of vibrations in mechanical design of

machine parts that operate in vibratory conditions.
2. Develop linear vibratory models of dynamic systems with changing complexities (SDOF,
MDOF).
3. Understand the principle of writing the differential equation of motion of vibratory systems.
4. Understand free and forced (harmonic, periodic, non-periodic) vibration analysis of single
and multi-degree of freedom linear systems.
Syllabus
Free Vibration: Introduction, Use of Fourier series, Single degree of freedom undamped system -
Equation of motion, Response under general periodic force, The unit impulse (Dirac Delta), Eigen
value problem, natural frequencies, Multi Degree of Freedom System; normal mode of vibration,
flexibility matrix and stiffness matrix
Course Outcome:
The student will demonstrate the ability to
1. Learn free and forced vibration for 1 DOF, 2DOF and MDOF systems
2. Learn vibration measurement and vibration isolation techniques
3. Learn the analysis of vibration of continuous systems
Text Books:
1. S. S. Rao, “Mechanical Vibrations”, Prentice Hall, 2000.

2. W. T. Thomson, M. D. Dahleh, C. Padmanabhan, “Theory of Vibration with Applications”,
Pearson Education, 2008.
References:
1. Leonard Meirovitch, “Fundamentals of Vibrations”, McGraw Hill International, 2001.

2. Den Hartog, “Mechanical Vibrations”, Dover Publishers, 1985
115
COURSE PLAN

20MEMDT103 Theory of Vibration 3-1-0-4
Contact ESE
MODULES
Hours Marks (%)
MODULE 1: Free Vibration: Introduction, Fundamentals of system
modeling, Spring, inertia and damping elements, Harmonic motion -
Representation and analysis. Use of Fourier series, Single degree of 9 15
freedom undamped system - Equation of motion, natural frequency,
complete response, examples.
MODULE 2: Single degree of freedom systems with viscous damping -

response, under damping, critical damping and over damping,
9 15
Logarithmic decrement. Free vibration with Coulomb Damping, Free
vibration with Hysteresis damping.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3: Harmonically excited vibration - equation of motion,
response of undamped systems under harmonic force, response of
9 15
damped systems to harmonic force. Frequency response plots,
harmonic motion of the base, transmissibility.
MODULE 4: Response under general periodic force, Use of Fourier

9 15
series Response due to square wave, triangular wave, half sine wave etc.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5: The unit impulse (Dirac Delta), Impulse response, step
response, ramp response, response to arbitrary excitations. Time
domain method - Convolution Integral, complete response to arbitrary
10 20
excitation, response spectrum. Frequency domain method - Laplace
Transforms, transfer function, general response using Laplace
transforms.
MODULE 6: Introduction, Equations of motion, matrix form, coupling in
mass, coupling in stiffness, free vibration analysis of 2 dof undammed
system. Eigen value problem, natural frequencies, mode shapes, initial
conditions to excite a specific mode, response to general initial 10 20
conditions. Multi Degree of Freedom System; normal mode of vibration,
flexibility matrix and stiffness matrix, Eigen values and vectors
orthogonal properties-modal matrix analysis, matrix inversion method
116

Advanced Mechanics
20MEMDT105 3-1-0-4 2020
of Solids
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
1. Solve advanced solid mechanics problems using classical methods.

2. Understand the theory of elasticity including strain/displacement and Hooke’s law relationships.
3. Solve torsion problems in bars and thin walled members.
4. Learn the importance of residual stresses.
Syllabus
Definition of Stress at a point. Shear stress distribution and Shear center for thin walled open
sections circular and semi-circular. Fundamental aspects of general inelastic behavior.
Introduction to Viscoelasticity
Course Outcome:
The student will be able to
1. Solve advanced solid mechanics problems using classical methods

2. Understand the theory of elasticity including strain/displacement and Hooke’s law relationships
3. Solve torsion problems in bars and thin walled members
4. Understand the viscoelasticity behaviour of materials
Text Books:
1. S. P. Timoshenko, “Theory of Plates & Shells”, McGraw Hill, 1958.

2. Den Hartog, “Advanced Strength of Materials”, McGraw Hill, 1952.
References:
1. S.Timoshenko & J.W.Goodier, “Theory of Elasticity”, McGraw Hill, 2007.

2. Seely and Smith, “Advanced Mechanics of Materials”, John Wiley, 1952.
3. Filonenko & Borodic, “Theory of Elasticity”, Foreign Languages Publishing House, 1965.
4. Fluggue W, “Handbook of Engineering Mechanics”, McGraw Hill, 1962.
5. Prager W., “Introduction to Plasticity”, Oxford University Press, 1959.
6. Kachanov.L.M., “Foundations of Theory of Plasticity”, North-Holland Publishing Co.,1971.
117
COURSE PLAN
20MEMDT105 Advanced Mechanics of Solids 3-1-0-4

Contact ESE
MODULES
Hours Marks (%)
MODULE 1: Definition of Stress at a point, Tensor representation, Stress
Transformation, Concept of traction. Cauchy's stress theorem, Traction on 9 15
arbitrary planes, Octahedral shear stress.
MODULE 2: Principal stresses and strains in 3D coordinates, 3D Mohr
9 15
circle. Motion and Deformation. Strain Transformation, Strain Energy
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3: Airy’s Stress function, Biharmonic equation, Saint Venant’s
9 15
principle. Applications to Polynomials in rectangular coordinates.
MODULE 4: Problem of determining contact stresses, Assumptions,
Expressions for principal stresses, cylindrical bodies in line contact and 9 15
spherical bodies in point contact.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5: Shear stress distribution and Shear center for thin walled
open sections circular and semicircular. Determine the shear center of a
section like channel, I, L, Z. Torsion of prismatic shafts, Warping, Semi-
10 20
inverse method and Stress function method - Membrane analogy, Torsion
of bars with rectangular cross section. Torsion of multi celled thin wall
open and closed sections.
MODULE 6: Fundamental aspects of general inelastic behavior. Stress-strain
curves - plastic flow conditions – Von-Mises and Tresca, elasto-plastic
analysis for bending and torsion of bars - residual stresses. Introduction to 10 20
Viscoelasticity: Rheological models, Maxwell model, Kelvin model and the
four-element Maxwell-Kelvin model.
118
Design of Power Transmission

20MEMDT107 3-0-0-3 2020
Elements
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
1. Understand the fundamentals of chain drives and belt drives

2. Learn the design fundamentals of gear box and brakes
3. Learn the concept of design for Clutches
Syllabus
Analysis, design and selection of chain drives and belt drives, Tensioning Belt, Timer belts,
Sprocket design, Design of speed gear boxes, standardization of spindle speeds, speed diagrams,
design of housings, lubrication considerations, Disc brakes-Graphical and analytical analysis and
design of self-actuating brakes, fixed link and sliding anchor drum brakes, Friction Clutches,
Centrifugal Clutches, Analysis, dynamics and thermal aspects of clutches.
Course Outcome:
Students will be able to understand basic design procedure for power transmission elements like
gears, brakes, belt drives, clutches, chain drives, etc.
Text Books:
1. P. Kannaiah, Design of Machine Elements, Scitech Publications, 2006

2. Reshetov, “Design of Machine elements”, Mir Publication, 1978
References:
1. Newcom and Spurr, “Braking of road vehicles”, Chapman and Hall, 1967.
2. Nieman, “Design of Machine elements - Vol. II”, Springer Verlag.
3. Dobrovolksy, “Design of Machine elements”, Mir Publishers, 1977.
4. Wong, “Theory of Ground Vehicles”, Wiley, 2001.
119
COURSE PLAN

Design of Power
20MEMDT107 3-0-0-3
Transmission Elements
Contact ESE
MODULES
Hours Marks (%)
MODULE 1: Analysis, design and selection of chain drives and
7 15
belt drives, Tensioning Belt, Timer belts, Sprocket design
MODULE 2: Chordal action in Chains, Chain velocity and drive
ratio, Length of chain and centre distance. Failure of the chain 7 15
drives and belt drives
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3: Design of speed gear boxes, standardization of
spindle speeds, speed diagrams, design of housings, Step less 7 15
regulation of speed
MODULE 4: Selection of servo and stepper motors, timing belts,
5 15
lubrication considerations
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5: Disc brakes-Graphical and analytical analysis and
design of self-actuating brakes, fixed, link and sliding anchor drum
brakes, Dynamics and thermal aspects of vehicle braking, Design 8 20
of brakes for applications such as machine tools, modern
automobiles, cranes, railway coaches and aircrafts.
MODULE 6: Friction Clutches, Centrifugal Clutches, Analysis,
dynamics and thermal aspects of clutches, Design of automobile 8 20
clutch: single plate, multi plate, cone clutch, overrunning clutches.
120
20MEMDT111 Industrial Tribology 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
1. Introduced to the fundamentals of Friction, Wear and Lubrication.

2. Learn the design fundamentals of hydrodynamic and hydrostatic bearings
3. Learn the basic design details of rolling contact bearings
4. Learn the basic bearing failure modes and its remedies
Syllabus
Types of friction, effect of pressure, velocity, temperature, vibration on friction, Classification -

theories of wear, Role of lubrication - Lubricants, Journal bearings, Hydrostatic lubrication, Types -
bearings theory - static and dynamic capacities - bearing life - selection of bearings, Lubrication and
mounting of bearings. Bearing failures.
Course Outcome:
To understand basic design procedure for different types of bearings in industrial applications.
Text Books:
1. Radzimovsky, “Theory of lubrication of bearings”, Mir Publications, 1972.

2. Design of Machine Elements by VB Bhandari, McGraw-Hill
References:
1. O’Conner and Boyd, “Standard Hand Book of Lubrication Engineering”, McGraw Hill, 1968.
2. Fuller D.D., “Theory and practice of lubrication for Engineers”, John Wiley, 1973
121
COURSE PLAN
20MEMDT111 Industrial Tribology 3-0-0-3
Contact ESE
MODULES
Hours Marks (%)
MODULE 1: Types of friction - dry-boundary and fluid-laws of friction and
friction theories-Variables in friction - Surface cleanliness - effect of
6 15
pressure, velocity, temperature, vibration, etc. Parallel plates, The
continuity equation and Reynold’s equation
MODULE 2: Role of lubrication - Lubricants - Importance of viscosity and
methods for measuring viscosity - fundamentals of viscous flow - flow 6 15
through capillary tubes
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3: Journal bearings eccentricity - pressure distribution - load
carrying capacity - friction and power loss - ideal and real bearings - leakage 6 15
factors
MODULE 4: Sommerfeld number and design charts, Petroff’s Equation. Oil
6 15
flow and heat dissipation in bearings
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5: Hydrostatic lubrication. Analysis of hydrostatic
bearingsPressure distribution calculation of flow requirements, Energy losses 9 20
in hydrostatic bearings Analysis of hydrostatic bearings with multiple pads.
MODULE 6: Types - bearings theory - static and dynamic capacities -
bearing life - selection of bearings, Lubrication and mounting of bearings.
9 20
Bearing failures, Classification & theories of wear - stages of wear -
adhesive and abrasive wear -factors affecting wear.
122

Additive
20MEMDT121 3-0-0-3 2020
Manufacturing
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:

1. Get the required engineering knowledge, techniques, skills and modern tools to analyze
problems in Additive Manufacturing.
Syllabus
Definition, Different terminology, Difference b/w conventional and AM, Virtual Prototyping- Rapid
Tooling -Principle, pre-build process, part-building and post-build processes, photo polymerization of
SL resins, Solid Ground Curing (SGC): working principle, process, strengths, weaknesses and
applications. Fused deposition Modelling (FDM): Working Principles, details of processes, products,
materials, advantages, limitations and applications - Case studies. Selective Laser Sintering (SLS):
Principle, process, Indirect and direct SLS- powder structures, materials, post processing, surface
deviation and accuracy, Application. Laser Engineered Net Shaping (LENS) - Case Studies. Laser
Metal Deposition and other Metal AM processes. Three dimensional Printing (3DP): Principle, basic
process, Physics of 3DP, types of printing, process capabilities, material system. Solid based, Liquid
based and powder based 3DP systems, strength and weakness
Course Outcome:
At the end of this programme, students will be able to, identify different industrial sectors, relevant
AM processes and measurement techniques to reduce cost and time from design to manufacture.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Chua, C.K., Leong K.F. and Lim C.S., “Rapid prototyping: Principles and applications”, second
edition, World Scientific Publishers, 2010.
2. Gebhardt, A., “Rapid prototyping”, Hanser Gardener Publications, 2003.
REFERENCES:
1. Gibson, I., Rosen, D.W. and Stucker, B., “Additive Manufacturing Methodologies: Rapid
Prototyping to Direct Digital Manufacturing”, Springer, 2010.
2. Liou,L.W. and Liou, F.W., “Rapid Prototyping and Engineering applications : A tool box for
prototype development”, CRC Press, 2011.
3. Kamrani, A.K. and Nasr, E.A., “Rapid Prototyping: Theory and practice”, Springer, 2006.
4. Hilton, P.D. and Jacobs, P.F., Rapid Tooling: Technologies and Industrial Applications, CRC
press, 2005.
123
COURSE PLAN
20MEMDT121 Additive Manufacturing 3-0-0-3

Contact ESE
MODULES
Hours Marks (%)
MODULE 1: Definition, Different terminology, Difference b/w
6 15
conventional and AM, Need, Development of AM systems
MODULE 2: AM process chain - Impact of AM on Product Development,
Virtual Prototyping- Rapid Tooling - RP to AM -Classification of AM 6 15
processes - Benefits - Applications.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3: Stereo lithography Apparatus (SLA): Principle, pre-build
process, part-building and post-build processes, photo polymerization of
6 15
SL resins, Part quality and process planning, recoating issues, Materials,
advantages, limitations and applications.
MODULE 4: Solid Ground Curing (SGC): working principle, process,
strengths, weaknesses and applications. Fused deposition Modelling
(FDM): Principle, details of processes, process variables, types, products,
6 15
materials and applications, Laminated Object Manufacturing (LOM):
Working Principles, details of processes, products, materials, advantages,
limitations and applications - Case studies.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5: Selective Laser Sintering (SLS): Principle, process, Indirect
and direct SLS- powder structures, materials, post processing, surface
deviation and accuracy, Application - Laser Engineered Net Shaping
9 20
(LENS): Processes, materials, products, advantages, limitations and
applications-Case Studies Laser Metal Deposition and other Metal AM
processes.
MODULE 6: Three dimensional Printing (3DP): Principle, basic process,
Physics of 3DP, types of printing, process capabilities, Material system -
Solid based, Liquid based and powder based 3DP systems, strength and
9 20
weakness, Applications and case studies on Aerospace & Automotive.
Deposition Manufacturing (SDM), Ballistic Particle Manufacturing (BPM),
Selective Laser Melting, Electron Beam Melting
124

Composite Materials
20MEMDT131 3-0-0-3 2020
and Mechanics
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:

1. Define a composite, enumerate advantages and drawbacks of composites over monolithic
materials, and discuss factors which influence mechanical properties of a composite
2. Develop concepts of volume and weight fraction of fiber and matrix, density and void
fraction in composites
3. Find the engineering constants of a unidirectional/bidirectional lamina in terms of the
stiffness and compliance parameters of the lamina
4. Details about latest manufacturing methods for composite materials.
Syllabus
Fatigue and Impact Properties, Environmental effects, Long term properties, Fracture behavior and
Damage Tolerance. Fiber Glass, Carbon, Ceramic and Aramid fibers. Rule of mixture -volume and
mass fractions density void content, Evaluation of four elastic moduli based on strength of materials
approach and Semi empirical model. Stress Analysis of Composite Laminates
Course Outcome:
Covers strength and fracture; damage mechanics and fatigue; numerical methods and optimal design
of structures and more. Experimental and theoretical research on the mechanical properties and
behavior of composite materials as well as matrices and fibers.
Text Books:
1. Autar K Kaw, “Mechanics of Composite Materials”, CRC Press, 2006

2. Serope, Kalpakjian, Steven Schmid, “Manufacturing engineering and Technology”, Prentice
Hall, 2009.
References:
1. Chawla K K, “Composite Materials”, Springer - Verlag, 1987

2. Carlos A., Cristóvão M., Manuel J. M. Freitas, “Mechanics of Composite materials and
Structures” Kluwer Academic, 1999.
3. Mallick, P.K., “fibre-Reinforced Composites: Materials, Manufacturing and Design”,Maneel
Dekker Inc, 1993.
125
COURSE PLAN
20MEMDT131 Composite Materials and Mechanics 3-0-0-3
Contact ESE
MODULES
Hours Marks (%)
MODULE 1: Introduction: Definition- Need - General characteristics,
Applications. Static Mechanical Properties - Fatigue and Impact Properties -
6 15
Environmental effects, Long term properties, Fracture behavior and
Damage Tolerance. Fibres - Glass, Carbon, Ceramic and Aramid fibers.
MODULE 2: Matrices - Polymer, Graphite, Ceramic and Metal matrices,
Characteristics of fibers and matrices. Fiber surface treatments, fillers and 6 15
additives, fibre content, density and void content
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3: Rule of mixture - volume and mass fractions - density - void
content, Evaluation of four elastic moduli based on strength of materials 6 15
approach and Semi - empirical model
MODULE 4: Longitudinal Young’s modulus - transverse Young’s modulus -
major Poisson’s ratio - In-plane shear modulus, Ultimate strengths of a
6 15
unidirectional lamina. Characteristics of Fibre reinforced lamina - laminates
- lamination theory. Inter laminar stresses.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5: Bag moulding - Compression moulding - Pultrusion – Filament
Winding -Other manufacturing Processes, Quality Inspection Methods. 9 20
Processing of MMC - diffusion bonding - stir casting - squeeze casting.
MODULE 6: Stress Analysis of Composite Laminates, Failure predictions -
maximum stress theory, maximum strain theory, Tsai-Hill theory, Laminate
9 20
Design considerations, Modes of Failure of composites - First Ply Failure,
Partial Ply Failure, Total Ply Failure.
126

Engineering
20MEMDT141 3-0-0-3 2020
Optimization
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
1. Understand the theory of optimization methods and algorithms developed for solving various
types of optimization problems
2. Develop and promote research interest in applying optimization techniques in problems of
Engineering and Technology
3. Apply the mathematical results and numerical techniques of optimization theory to concrete
Engineering problems
Syllabus
Introduction to Optimization, Formulation and Solution methodologies, Single variable optimization,
Multivariable optimization with no constraints, with equality constraints and with inequality
constraints, Unrestricted search method, Interval halving method, Fibonacci method, Golden Section
method, quadratic interpolation method, pattern search method, steepest descent method, quasi-
Newton method, Hook & Jeeve’s method, Lagrange multiplier method Constrained non-linear
optimization: Kuhn-Tucker conditions, quadratic programming, Wolfe’s method, method of feasible
directions, Frank-Wolf method Convex simplex method, separable programming, Kelley’s cutting
plane method, penalty and barrier methods, Integer and dynamic programming: Dynamic
programming, principle of optimality - tabular and calculus methods of solutions, Introduction to
integer programming, Gomory’s cutting plane method, branch and bound method, first variation,
problems with integral constraints, statement only of the corner conditions for discontinuous case,
Sufficient condition for strong and weak extrema. Calculus of variations: Problems with fixed end
points and moving boundaries, strong and weak variations,
Course Outcome:
At the end of this programme, students will be able to, identify and solve optimization problems.
Text Books:
1. S.S. Rao, “Engineering Optimization”, Newage, 1996.

2. N.S. Kambo, “Mathematical Programming Techniques”, Affiliated East-West Press, 1984.
References:
1. Els Golts, “Differential Equations and Calculus of Variations”, Mir Publications.
127
COURSE PLAN

20MEMDT141 Engineering Optimization 3-0-0-3
Contact ESE
MODULES
Hours Marks (%)
MODULE 1: Introduction to Optimization, Formulation and Solution
methodologies, Single variable optimization, Multivariable optimization
6 15
with no constraints, with equality constraints and with
inequality constraints
MODULE 2: Unrestricted search method, Interval halving method,
Fibonacci method, Golden Section method, quadratic interpolation
6 15
method, pattern search method, steepest descent method, quasi-Newton
method, Hook & Jeeve’s method, Lagrange multiplier method
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3: Constrained non-linear optimization: Kuhn-Tucker
conditions, quadratic programming, Wolfe’s method, method of feasible
6 15
directions, Frank-Wolf method Convex simplex method, separable
programming, Kelley’s cutting plane method, penalty and barrier methods
MODULE 4: Integer and dynamic programming: Dynamic programming,
6 15
principle of optimality - tabular and calculus methods of solutions
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5: Calculus of variations: Problems with fixed end points and
9 20
moving boundaries, strong and weak variations
MODULE 6: Introduction to integer programming - Gomory’s cutting
plane method, branch and bound method- first variation, problems with
9 20
integral constraints, statement only of the corner conditions for
discontinuous case, Sufficient condition for strong and weak extrema.
128
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 Get introduced to research philosophy and processes in general.

 Formulate the research problem and prepare research plan
 Apply various numerical /quantitative techniques for data analysis
 Communicate the research findings effectively
Syllabus
Introduction to the Concepts of Research Methodology, Research Proposals, Research Design,
Data Collection and Analysis, Quantitative Techniques and Mathematical Modelling, Report
Writing
Course Outcome:

Text Books:
Publisher, 2004
2. Research Methodology: A Step by Step Guide for Beginners’ by Ranjit Kumar, SAGE PublicationsLtd;
Third Edition
References:
1. Research Methodology: An Introduction for Science & Engineering Students’, by Stuart Melville and
Wayne Goddard, Juta and Company Ltd, 2004
Company Ltd, 2004
129
COURSE PLAN
Contact
MODULES
Hours
MODULE 1:
Introduction to Research Methodology, Concepts of Research, Meaning
and Objectives of Research, Research Process, Types of Research, Type 5
Quantitative vs. Qualitative, and Conceptual vs. Empirical.
MODULE 2:
Criteria of Good Research, Research Problem, Selection of a problem, 4
Techniques involved in definition of a problem, Research Proposals –
MODULE 3:
Research Design : Meaning, Need and Types of research design,
Literature Survey and Review, Identifying gap areas from literature 5
review, Research Design Process, Sampling fundamentals, Measurement
and scaling techniques, Data Collection – concept, types and methods,
Design of Experiments.
MODULE 4:
methods, Concepts of correlation and regression, Fundamentals of time
MODULE 5:
Report Writing: Principles of Thesis Writing, Guidelines for writing
reports & papers, Methods of giving references and appendices, 5
Reproduction of published material, Plagiarism, Citation and
acknowledgement
MODULE 6:
Documentation and presentation tools – LATEX, Office Software with 4
basic presentations skills, Use of Internet and advanced search
techniques
130
20MEMDQ101 Seminar - I 0-0-2-2 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
1. Assess the debating capability to present a technical topic.

2. To face audience and present his/her ideas and thus creating in him self-esteem and courage
that are essential for an engineer.
Syllabus
Individual students are required to choose a topic of their interest from latest design related topics
preferably from outside the M.Tech syllabus and give a seminar on that topic about 30 minutes. The
student is free to continue this as his/her project. A committee consisting of at least three faculty
members shall assess the presentation of the seminar and award marks to the students. Each student
shall submit two copies of a write up of his / her seminar topic. One copy shall be returned to the
student after duly certifying it by the Chairman of the assessing committee and the other will be kept
in the departmental library. Internal continuous assessment marks are awarded based on the
relevance of the topic, presentation skill, quality of the report and participation.
Course Outcome:
The student will demonstrate the ability to
1. Write a technical report.

2. Do a presentation confidently.
131

Advanced
20MEMDL101 0-0-2-1 2020
Measurements Lab
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:

1. Develop measurement strategies for measuring parameters that can come up in the
development of a machine.
Syllabus
1. Preparation and calibration of Photo elastic sheets.

2. Preparation of Photo elastic models like Discs, Beams and Columns.
3. Stress determination for different models having regular shapes, loaded conventionally, and
comparison of results with theoretical values.
4. Measurement of strains for different shapes, by different arrangements of strain gauges.
5. Determination & verification of natural frequency of Transverse vibration of beams with
different end conditions.
6. Determination and verification of Logarithmic Decrement of a damped system.
7. Determination and verification of Displacement, Velocity, Acceleration and phase lag of
Forced vibration systems.
8. Vibration signature analysis of different existing machines such as Lathe, Grinder, Blower
etc.
Course Outcome:
The student will be confident in measurement of engineering components to be used in design

process
132
SEMESTER II
20MEMDT102 Finite Element Analysis 3-1-0-4 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
1. To equip the students with the Finite Element Analysis fundamentals.

2. To enable the students to formulate the design problems into FEA.
3. To introduce basic aspects of finite element technology, including domain discretization,
polynomial interpolation, application of boundary conditions, assembly of global arrays, and
solution of the resulting algebraic systems.
Syllabus
Basic concepts of FEM, Linear spring, elastic bar, flexure elements and their nodal equilibrium
equations, element transformation and assembly of global stiffness matrix and element load vector,
method of weighted residuals, applications in solid mechanics, finite elements in dynamics and
introduction to FEA software.
Course Outcome:
Upon completing this course, the students will be able to:

1. Identify mathematical model for solution of common engineering problems.
2. Formulate simple problems into finite elements.
3. Solve structural, thermal, fluid flow problems.
4. Use professional-level finite element software to solve engineering problems in Solid
mechanics, fluid mechanics and heat transfer
Text Books:
1. David V Hutton, “Fundamentals of Finite Element Analysis”, McGraw Hill

2. Daryl L. Logan, “First course in Finite Element Method”, Vengage Learning, Singapore
References:
1. J. N. Reddy, “An Introduction to the Finite Element Method”, McGraw Hill

2. C. Zienkiwiez, “The Finite Element Method”, McGraw Hill, New York.
3. K. H. Huebner, “The Finite Element Method of Engineers”, John Wiley & Sons, New York.
133
COURSE PLAN
20MEMDT102 Finite Element Analysis 3-1-0-4

Contact ESE
MODULES
Hours Marks (%)
MODULE 1: Basic concepts of FEM - Comparison with other methods of
analysis - a general procedure for finite element analysis, Discretization of
9 15
domain, types of elements, interpolation polynomials, basic equations of
solid mechanics.
MODULE 2: Linear spring as finite element, elastic bar, spar/link/truss
element - finite element equations, solution, Strain energy, Castgliano’s 9 15
first theorem, Principle of minimum potential energy.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3: Truss structures: The direct stiffness method - Nodal
equilibrium equation, element transformation and direct assembly of
9 15
global stiffness matrix, boundary conditions, constraint forces, element
strain and stress, three dimensional trusses.
MODULE 4: Flexure elements: elementary beam theory, flexure element,
flexure element stiffness matrix and element load vector, work 9 15
equivalence for distributed loads, flexure element with axial loading.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5: Method of weighted residuals - Introduction, the Galerkin
method, numerical integration - Gaussian quadrature. Applications in solid
mechanics - plane stress, plane strain - triangular membrane element,
10 20
Isoparametric formulation of plane quadrilateral element, axisymmetric
stress analysis, general three dimensional stress - finite element
formulations, strain and stress computations.
MODULE 6: Finite elements in dynamics - formulation - consistent and

lumped mass matrices, assembly of global mass matrix, solution of
dynamic equations of motion as an eigenvalue problem - Free vibration 10 20
analysis of one dimensional problems - bar and beam elements -
evaluation of eigenvalues and eigenvectors, Introduction to FEA software.
134
20MEMDT104 Design Engineering 2-1-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:

3. Understand, identify and quantify failure modes for mechanical parts.
4. Develop an ability to identify, formulate, and solve engineering problems.
5. To approach a design problem successfully, taking decisions when there is no unique answer
Syllabus
Fundamentals of design, The design process, Design considerations, Fatigue considerations in
design, Design for wear and corrosion resistance, Design consideration of rubber springs, Design for
manufacture, Advanced shaft design, Design of high speed cams, Introduction to reliability in design,
Industrial product design.
Course Outcome:

1. Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, and engineering
2. Design and conduct experiments, as well as to analyze and interpret data
3. Function on multidisciplinary teams
4. Identify, formulate, and solve engineering problems
Text Books:
1. M.F.Spotts, “Mechanical Design Analysis”, Prentice Hall, 1964.

2. L.S. Srinath, “Concepts in Reliability”, Affiliated East West Press, 2005.
References:
1. Kare Hellan, “Introduction to Fracture Mechanics”, McGraw Hill, 1985.

2. P. Orlov, “Fundamentals of Machine Design Vol. I, II, III”, Mir publications.
3. C.O. Smith, “Introduction to Reliability in Design”, McGraw Hill, 1976.
4. Woodson T.T., “Introduction to Engineering Design” McGraw Hill, 1966.
5. W.H. Mayall, Industrial Design for Engineers, Iliffe, 1967.
6. Pahl, G, and Beitz, W.,” Engineering Design”, Springer - Verlag, NY. 1984.
7. Ray, M.S., “Elements of Engg. Design”, Prentice Hall Inc. 1985.
8. Suh, N.P., “The principles of Design”, Oxford University Press, NY.1990.
9. Dieter, George E., “Engineering Design - A Materials and Processing Approach”, McGraw
Hill, International Editions, Singapore, 2000.
135
COURSE PLAN
20MEMDT104 Design Engineering 2-1-0-3

Contact ESE
MODULES
Hours Marks(%)
MODULE 1: Design Fundamentals - Importance of design- The design
process-Considerations of Good Design - Morphology of Design -
6 15
Organization for design, Design considerations - material selection,
functional design, cost analysis.
MODULE 2: Fatigue considerations in design - fatigue in materials -
fracture mechanics approach to fatigue - theories of fracture - nucleation
6 15
and growth of fracture - creep in materials - laws of creep - estimated
time to rupture - relaxation and creep in bending.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3: Design for wear and corrosion resistance - contact stresses -
the plastic flow process - shape factor - spring back - residual stresses. 6 15
Design consideration of rubber springs, air springs and Belleville springs.
MODULE 4: Design for Manufacture - Design for Assembly -Designing for
6 15
castings, Forging, Metal Forming, Machining and Welding
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5: Advanced shaft design - deflection of stepped shafts - variable
cross-section shafts - conjugate beam and strain energy method. Design
9 20
of high speed cams - kinematic design and dynamic design - polydyne
cams.
MODULE 6: Introduction to reliability in design - reliability function,
failure data analysis, failure distribution functions, MTTF/MTBF, hazard
rate and models, methods of improving reliability, reliability testing. 9 20
Industrial product design - Creative design, ergonomics and aesthetic
requirements - quality and maintainability considerations.
136

Advanced Theory of
20MEMDT106 2-1-0-3 2020
Mechanisms
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:

1. Classify space mechanisms and understand the synthesis theory of mechanism
2. Apply mathematical tools for mechanism analysis and applications
3. Understand the basic theory for motion analysis
4. Learn the evaluation indexes for mechanism performance
Syllabus
Kinematics of links and mechanisms, Auxiliary points and special methods for velocity and
acceleration determination, Euler Savary Equation, Bobilier theorem, Hartman’s construction, Design
of function generators, Analysis of Cams, Anlaytical and graphical methods of profile determination,
Static and Dynamic Force Analysis
Course Outcome:
1. Draw inversions and determine velocity and acceleration of different mechanisms.

2. Calculate loss of power due to friction in various machine elements.
3. Solve problems on power transmission.
4. Calculate balancing mass and its position.
Text Books:
1. Shigley, J.E, John J. Uicker, “Theory of Machines and Mechanisms”, Oxford University press,
2004.
2. J.E.Shigley, “Kinematics analysis of Mechanisms”, McGraw Hill, 2007.
References:
1. Holowenko, A.R, “Dynamics of Machinery”, Wiley, 2007.

2. Allen S. Hall, Jr., “Kinematics and Linkage Design”, Prentice Hall, 2007.
3. Hartenberg and Denavit, “Kinematic Synthesis of Linkages”, McGraw Hill, 1964.
4. Arthur G. Erdman and George N. Sandor, “Mechanisms Design Analysis and Synthesis - Vol.
I and II”, Prentice Hall of India.
5. Robert L. Norton, “Design of Machinery”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2004.
6. Rothbart H.A., “Cams”, Wiley, 1956.
7. Merit, “Gears”, Pitman, 1954.
8. Pahlen R.M., “Fundamentals of Mechanical Design”, McGraw Hill, 1962.
137
COURSE PLAN
COURSE NO COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
20MEMDT106 Advanced Theory of Mechanisms 2-1-0-3

Contact ESE
MODULES
Hours Marks (%)
MODULE 1: Kinematics: Review of determination of velocity and
acceleration of points and links in mechanisms- Analytical and graphical
6 15
methods - Use of auxiliary points and special methods for velocity and
acceleration determination.
MODULE 2: Pole, polode, Polode curvature, path curvature, Inflection
Circle - Euler-Savary Equation - Bobiller theorem- Collineation axis- 6 15
Hartman’s Construction.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3: Relative poles based construction of four bar linkages and
slider crank mechanisms - Geometric methods of synthesis with three
accuracy points- Design of a function generators using Chebychev Spacing. 6 15
Transmission angle - Angle design for optimum transmission – Coupler
curves - Robert’s Law - Cognate mechanisms.
MODULE 4: Analysis of Cams: Basic curves, pressure, angle-Cam size
determination - Cam profile determination - Analytical and graphical. Cam
dynamics: Cam force analysis-Dynamics of high speed cam system, source 6 15
of vibration, Follower response. Position error - Jump and cross-over
shock, Spring surge and wind up.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5: Static Force Analysis: Forces, Couples. Conditions of
equilibrium- Free Body Diagram. Analysis of 4-bar linkage, slider crank
9 20
mechanisms, cams. Force analysis using Coulomb friction and pin joint
friction.
MODULE 6: Dynamic force analysis of spatial mechanism. D'Alembert's
principle, Motion of a rigid body, moments and products of Inertia,
9 20
Translation of axes. Rotation of axes. Measuring moment of Inertia,
Euler’s equation of motion.
138

Industrial
20MEMDT112 3-0-0-3 2020
Instrumentation
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
1. Understand technical terms and nomenclature used in industrial measurement and industrial
process control.
2. Demonstrate a working knowledge of the basic principles of electricity and electronics.
3. Understand the principles of industrial processes, process measurement, and process
control.
Syllabus
Introduction to instruments and their representation, static and dynamic characteristics,

steady state and transient response, Mechanical measurements, pressure, temperature and flow
measurements, measurement of vibration.
Course Outcome:
1. The student will be equip with the basic knowledge of Pressure, Temperature, flow, level,
density and viscosity measurements.
2. The student knows to calibrate the various instruments also he knows to apply the
instrument in various fields.
Text Books:
1. Earnest O Doebelin, “Measurement systems Applications & Design”, McGraw Hill.

2. B.C Nakra and K.K Choudhary, “Instrumentation Measurement and analysis”, Tata McGraw
Hill.
References:
1. Rangan C.S., Sharma G.R, Mani V.S.V, “Instrumentation devices and Systems”, Tata McGraw
Hill, New Delhi.
2. Donald P Eckman, “Industrial Instrumentation”, Wiley Eastern Ltd., New Delhi.
3. Beckwith Thomas G., and Buck, N. Lewis, “Mechanical Measurements”, Oxford &
IBH,New Delhi.
139
COURSE PLAN
20MEMDT112 Industrial Instrumentation 3-0-0-3
Contact ESE
MODULES
Hours Marks (%)
MODULE 1: Instrumentation: Introduction to Instruments and their
representation. Static and Dynamic characteristics of Instruments, analysis 6 15
of steady state and transient response.
MODULE 2: Mechanical measurements: Transducer Elements,
6 15
Intermediate Elements, Indicating and recording Elements.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3: Mechanical Measurements: a) Frequency Measurement b)
Displacement Measurement c) Force Measurement, and d) Torque 6 15
Measurement.
MODULE 4: Pressure measurements: Pressure and Vacuum
6 15
measurement, Flow measurements.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5: Temperature Measurements using Industrial Thermocouples,
9 20
resistance thermometers, radiation temperature measurements.
MODULE 6: Measurement of vibration: Study of vibrometer, vibration
analyser - measurement of noise – Study of noise meter, noise analyser, 9 20
Signal and system analysis.
140
Computer Aided Design in

20MEMDT122 3-0-0-3 2020
Manufacturing
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:

1. Understand the basic tools of Computer-Aided Design (CAD) and Computer- Aided
Manufacturing (CAM).
2. To expose the student to contemporary computer design tools for aerospace and
mechanical engineers.
3. To prepare the student to be an effective user of a CAD/CAM system.
Syllabus
Overview of CAD systems, CAD hardware and software, Computer graphics and graphics
transformation, geometric modeling, boundary representations, parametric design and object
representation, introduction to finite element analysis
Course Outcome:
1. Be able to model a part.

2. Be able to create an assembly of parts.
3. Be able to use a commercial CAD/CAM software package as an engineering tool
4. Be able to create basic NC sequences necessary for material removal.
Text Books:
1. C. S. Krishnamoorthy and S. Rajeev, “Computer aided design”, Narosa Publishing House, 1991
2. Ibrahim Zeid, “CAD/CAM theory and practice”, McGraw Hill Inc, 1991
3. David V. Hutton, “Fundamentals of finite element analysis”
References:
1. New man & Sproull, “Principles of interactive graphics”, McGraw Hill.

2. Vera B. Anand, “Computer graphics and geometric modelling for engineers”, John Wiley &
Sons Inc., 1993
3. Sandhu Singh, “Computer aided design and manufacturing”, Khanna Publishers, 1998
4. User’s Manuals for Ansys, Adams, Pro/Engineer and Autocad softwares.
5. R. D. Cook, “Concepts and applications of finite element analysis”
6. Daryl L. Logan, “A first course in the finite element method”
7. David F. Rogers and J. Alan Adams, “Mathematical elements for computer graphics”, Second
Edition, McGraw Hill, 1990
141
COURSE PLAN

Computer Aided Design in
20MEMDT122 3-0-0-3
Manufacturing
Contact ESE
MODULES
Hours Marks (%)
MODULE 1: Overview of CAD systems: Conventional and computer
aided design processes-advantages and disadvantage - CAD hardware and 6 15
software - analytical and graphics packages - networking of CAD systems.
MODULE 2: Computer graphics and graphics transformation: Image
Processing - transport of graphics data - graphic standards - display and 6 15
viewing - transformations - customizing graphics softwares.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3: Geometric modeling: Wire frame, surface and solid
modeling-applications and advantages-Boolean operations - half-spaces -
6 15
filleting of edges of solids - boundary representations - constructive solid
geometry - sweep representation.
MODULE 4: Parametric design and object representation: Object-
oriented representation-types of coordinate system - parametric design -
definition and advantages - parametric representation of analytic and 6 15
synthetic curves - parametric representation of surfaces and solids -
manipulations. Mechanical assembly - mass property calculation.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5: Introduction to finite element analysis: Basic steps in finite
element problems formulation - element type and characteristics - 9 20
element shapes - co-ordinate systems.
MODULE 6: 1D link elements and beam elements - shape functions -
stiffness matrices - direct stiffness method - 2 D elements - axisymmetric 9 20
elements - plane stress problem - higher order elements.
142

Principles of Robotics
20MEMDT132 3-0-0-3 2020
and Applications
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives
1. Understand about basic robotics through lectures.
Syllabus
Introduction to robotics, Kinematic principles, Introduction to dynamics, Drives and sensors,

Robot application
Course Outcome:
Students should be able to:
1. Define a robot
2. Describe moral and ethical issues related to robotics
3. Apply and practice basic principles of robotic design
4. Contribute in a teamwork environment method
Text Books:
1. Deh S. R., “Robotics technology and flexible automation”, Tata McGraw Hill, 1994
2. Craig, J. J., “Robotics: mechanics and control”, Addison Wesley, 1989
References:
1. Shiman Y., “Handbook of industrial robotics”, John Wiley & Sons, 1985
2. Groover M. P., “Fundamentals of modern manufacturing materials, processes, and systems”,
Prentice Hall, 1996
3. Craig J., “Adaptive control of mechanical manipulators”, Addison Wesley, 1988
4. Snyder W. E., “Industrial robots: computer interfacing and control”, Prentice Hall, 1985
5. Song S. M., and Waldron K. J., “Machines that walk”, MIT Press, 1988
6. “IEEE journal of robotics and automation”
7. “International journal of robotics research”
8. “IEEE transactions on man, system, and cybernetics”
9. Richard D. Klafter, Thomas A. Chmielwski, Michael Negin, “Robotics engineering, an
integrated approach”, Prentice Hall of India. 1989
10. Mikell. P. Groover et al., “Industrial robots - technology, programming and application”,
McGraw Hill, 1980
143
COURSE PLAN
20MEMDT132 Principles of Robotics and Applications 3-0-0-3
Contact ESE
MODULES
Hours Marks (%)
MODULE 1: Introduction: Definition, configurations, work envelopes,
specifications, and other basic parameters of robots. 6 15
MODULE 2: Kinematic principles: Position and orientation, co-ordinate
systems, relative frames, homogeneous co-ordinates, direct and inverse
6 15
kinematics, differential motions and the Jacobeans.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3: Introduction to dynamics: Types of motions: slew-joint-
interpolated-straight line interpolated motions. Path planning – trajectory
6 15
planning and control.
MODULE 4: Drives: electrical, hydraulic, and pneumatic drives - basics
and relative merits. Components: harmonic reduction units, servo valves,
and grippers. Sensors: basic types including vision, force - torque wrist 6 15
sensors.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5: Robot application: Robot motion planning-configuration
space concepts. Robot programming concepts: off line programming and
9 20
simulation - work cell application.
MODULE 6: Development: requirements - modeling - work cell
9 20
calibration - layout planning. Case studies.
144

Experimental
20MEMDT142 3-0-0-3 2020
Stress Analysis
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives

1. Get a basic idea of experimental stress analysis, Stress analysis - Analytical, Numerical and
Experimental approaches, Specific domain of these approaches, Advantages and
disadvantages
Syllabus
General introduction, Strain gauges and their applications, photoelasticity, other stress
analysis techniques.
Course Outcome:
1. Students will demonstrate a basic understanding of experimental methods (e.g. strain gauges,
photoelasticity, image correlation) commonly used in experimental mechanics
2. Students will demonstrate the ability to complete a detailed laboratory report and present
their findings in a structured, logical manner.
3. Students will demonstrate the ability to analyse experimental data and develop appropriate,
logical conclusions based on comparisons to theoretical results and other experimental
evidence.
Text Books:
1. Dalley and Riley, “Experimental stress Analysis”, McGraw Hill, 1991.

2. Sadhu Singh, “Experimental Stress Analysis”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 1996.
References:
1. Dove and Adams, “Experimental Stress Analysis and Motion measurement”, Prentice Hall,
1965.
2. Hetenyi, “Handbook of Experimental stress Analysis”, John Wiley, 1960.
3. Perry and Lissener, “Strain gauge Primer”, McGraw Hill, 1962.
4. W.J. McGonnagle, “Non-destructive Testing”, McGraw Hill, 1961.
5. American Society for Metals, “Metals Hand Book - Vol.7”, 1984.
145
COURSE PLAN
20MEMDT142 Experimental Stress Analysis 3-0-0-3
Contact ESE
MODULES
Hours Marks (%)
MODULE1: Introduction:- Principal stresses and strains - Three
dimensional stress - strain relationships - Plane stress and Plane strain
conditions. Strain gauges - Types - Mechanical, Optical and Electrical strain
gauges - Electrical resistance strain gauges - Gauge factor - Strain gauge
6 15
circuitry - Temperature compensation - Bridge balancing and calibration of
D.C and A.C bridges.
MODULE 2: Application of strain gauges :- Transverse sensitivity-Selection
and mounting of strain gauges-Strain gauge rosettes - Analysis of strain
gauge data and stress calculations - Recording equipments for static and
dynamic strains - Strain gauge transducers - Introduction to
6 15
semiconductor strain gauges - Residual stresses - Beneficial and harmful
effects - Principle of residual stress measurement methods.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3: Photoelasticity: Theory of photoelasticity - Stress-optic law -
Plain Polariscope & Circular Polariscope - Isoclinic & Isochromatic fringes
6 15
-Partial fringe value and compensation techniques - Tardy’s Method.
MODULE 4: Photoelastic model materials and their desired properties -
use of photo elastic coatings. Applications of Photoelasicity for two
dimensional models - Separation of Principal stresses- Scaling models to 6 15
prototype. Introduction to 3D Photoelasticity.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5: Other Stress analysis techniques - Moire fringe method and
Brittle coating technique for stress analysis. Introduction to Holography in
9 20
stress analysis.
MODULE 6: Non-destructive testing - Types - Dye penetrate methods,
Radiography, X-ray and Gamma ray - X-ray fluoroscopy - Penetrameter -
Magnetic particle method. Introduction to lasers in NDT - Ultrasonic flaw 9 20
Detection
146
20MEMDT114 Numerical Methods 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives

1. Aware of a basic knowledge of numerical methods including root- finding, elementary
numerical linear algebra, solving systems of linear equations, curve fitting and numerical
solution to ordinary differential equations.
Syllabus
Algebraic and transcendental equation, Simultaneous linear equations, Interpolation and

curve fitting, Numerical integration and differentiation, Numerical solution of ordinary differential
equation, boundary value and eigen value problem.
Course Outcome:
1. Demonstrate understanding of common numerical methods and how they are used to
obtain approximate solutions to otherwise intractable mathematical problems.
2. Apply numerical methods to obtain approximate solutions to mathematical problems
3. Analyse and evaluate the accuracy of common numerical methods
Text Books:
1. Computer Based Numerical and Statistical Techniques, Manish Goyal, Laxmi Publications (P)
Ltd, New Delhi
2. Introductory Methods of Numerical Analysis, S. S. Sastry, Prentice-Hall of India (P) Ltd, New
Delhi
References:
1. Numerical Methods in Engineering, Salvadori M G, Baron M L, Prentice-Hall

2. Numerical Methods for Engineers, Chapra S C, Canale R P, 2nd Ed, McGraw-Hill, New York
3. Applied Numerical Analysis, Gerald C F, Wheatley P O, 6th edition, Pearson Education,
1999
4. Numerical Methods for Partial Differential Equations, William F. Ames, 2nd Edition,
Academic Press, 1977
147
20MEMDT114 Numerical Methods 3-0-0-3
Contact ESE
MODULES
Hours Marks (%)
MODULE 1: Algebraic and transcendental equation: Bisection method,
Fixed point, Regula-Falsi method, Newton-Raphson method, Rate of
6 15
convergence, Merits and demerits of methods.
MODULE 2: Simultaneous Linear Equations: Motivation, Gauss
elimination, Solution accuracy, Iterative methods, Jacobi method, Gauss-
6 15
Seidel method, Relaxation method.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3: Interpolation and Curve Fitting: Motivation, Polynomial
forms, Linear interpolation, Lagrangean interpolation, Newton
interpolation, spline interpolation, Regression analysis, Fitting linear
equations, Least-square method, Fitting transcendental equations, 6 15
Polynomial functions.
MODULE 4: Numerical integration and differentiation: Maximum and
Minima, Trapezoidal rule, Simpson’s 1/3 and 3/8 rule, Weddle’s rule,
6 15
Euler-Mclaurin’s formula.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5: Numerical solution of ordinary differential equation: Euler’s
method, Modified Euler’s method, Runge-Kutta Methods 9 20
MODULE 6: Boundary value and Eigen value problem: Motivation,
Shooting method, Finite difference method, Finite volume method,
Polynomial Method, Power method, Elliptic, Parabolic and Hyperbolic 9 20
Partial Differential Equations
148

Oil Hydraulics and
20MEMDT124 3-0-0-3 2020
Pneumatics
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives
1. Demonstrate an understanding of Hydraulic and Pneumatic principles, equipment, Seals and

industries.
2. Identify and describe the basic operation of Hydraulic / Pneumatic systems, the various
equipment used in their operation, Hydraulic / Pneumatic terms as well as actuator Sealing
Device design / material strengths and weaknesses.
Syllabus
Fluid power fundamentals, Hydraulic cylinders, Control valves, Hydraulic circuits and
pneumatic circuits, design of circuit
Course Outcome:
1. Demonstrate the ability to understand the basic concepts of the Industrial Hydraulics and
Pneumatics Course deals with fluid power, and describes the basic principles and the
importance of pressure, flow, speed, and efficiency rating factors.
2. Understand the operation of hydraulics &pneumatics circuits and components typically used
in industry
3. Read hydraulics & pneumatics circuit drawings
4. Understand how PLCs are interfaced and used to control pneumatic systems.
Text Books:
1. Pippengar, John J. and Koff, Richard M, “Fluid Power Controls”, McGraw Hill, 1959
2. Dr. HeinzaZoebl. Techn, “Fundamentals of Hydraulic Circuitry”, Iliffe, 1970.
3. Kirshner, Joseph M, “Fluid amplifiers”, McGraw Hill, 1966.
References:
1. Pippengar, John J. and Hicks, Tyler G, “Industrial Hydraulics”, McGraw Hill, 1979.
2. Kirshner, Joseph M. and Silas Katz, “Design Theory of Fluidic Components”,
Academic press, 1975.
3. Leskiewics H.J. and Zarhmba M, “Pneumatic and Hydraulic components and
instrumentations in automatic controls”, International Federation of Automatic Control,
1980.
149
COURSE PLAN
20MEMDT124 Oil Hydraulics and Pneumatics 3-0-0-3
Contact ESE
MODULES
Hours Marks (%)
MODULE 1: Fluid power fundamentals: Introduction - operation principle
of fluid power-definitions, units, standards and symbols - advantages and 6 15
disadvantages - applications in various fields.
MODULE 2: Hydraulic cylinders: Classification and characteristics -
connection types and performance parameters - differential and float 6 15
concepts - typical cylinder structure - ancillary hydraulic elements.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3: Control valves: Directional control valve - structure and
operation of pilot-operated check valves and the directional control valves
6 15
- standard symbols for representing the elements - concepts of position
and way - actuation mechanisms.
MODULE 4: Pressure control valves - operation - remote pressure
adjustment of the pilot-operated pressure relief valve - pressure reducing
valve, sequence valve, counterbalance valve and pressure switch. Flow 6 15
control valves - throttle characteristics of various orifices - flow regulating
valve. Cartridge valves, proportional valves and servo valves.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5: Hydraulic circuits: Rapid motion circuits, speed control
circuits, synchronous circuits, sequential circuits, counter balance circuits
and unloading circuits. Typical hydraulic system examples - movable 9 20
platform system of modular machine tools - the hydraulic system of truck
cranes
MODULE 6: Pneumatic circuits: Compressed air production and
distribution, pneumatic control components, examples of application
including electro-pneumatic and hydro pneumatic controls. Design of
circuits: Hydraulic circuit design for typical hydraulic systems such as 9 20
hydraulic press, movable platform of modular machine tools, truck cranes
- design calculations. Pneumatic circuit design and associated design
calculations.
150
20MEMDT134 Advanced Machine Tool Design 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives
1. Implement the tool design process when designing tooling for the manufacturing of a
product.
2. Evaluate and select appropriate materials for tooling applications.
3. Design, develop, and evaluate cutting tools and work holders for a manufactured product.
4. Use CAD and conventional techniques in creating tooling drawings
Syllabus
Kinematics of machine tools, Design of drives, Design of machine tool structures, Design of
slide ways and circular ways, machine tool noise control, automatic machine tool and transfer
machines with control systems, application of CAD/CIM/CAM in machine tool design, NC and CNC
machines, Hydraulic and pneumatic circuit design for tools.
Course Outcome:
Students should be able to know about machine tool drive, regulation of speed and feed rates, design
of machine tool structure, design of guide ways and power screws, design of spindles and spindle
supports, dynamics of machine tools.
Text Books:
1. Mehta, N.K., “Machine Tool Design”, Tata McGraw Hill, 1989.

2. Acherkan N., “Machine Tool Design”, Vol. I - IV, Mir Publications.
References:
1. M. Weck, “Handbook Of Machine Tools, Vol. 1-4”, John Wiley, USA. 1980.
2. Cyrll Donaldson, G.H.LeCain& V.C. Goold, “Tool Design”, Tata McGraw Hill, 1973.
3. J. Tlusty&F.Koenigsbeger, “Machine Tool Structure, Vol. I”, Pergamon press, UK, 1970.
4. Pippengar, John J. and Koff Richard M, “Fluid Power Controls”, McGraw Hill, 1959.
5. Pippengar, John J. and Hicks, Tyler G, “Industrial Hydraulics”, McGraw Hill, 1979.
6. Leskiewics H.J. and Zarhmba M., “Pneumatic and Hydraulic components and Instrumentations
in Automatic Controls”, International Federation of Automatic controls, 1980.
151
COURSE PLAN
20MEMDT134 Advanced Machine Tool Design 3-0-0-3
Contact ESE
MODULES
Hours Marks (%)
MODULE 1: Kinematics of Machine tools: Classifications of motions for
shaping surfaces, Kinematic structure of Machine tools having mechanical
6 15
and non-mechanical kinematic constraints. Machine tool dynamics,
Selection of power drives.
MODULE 2: Design of drives. Transmission ratio, Design and classification
of Speed and feed gear boxes, Step less drives, Bearing selection, 6 15
Mechanism for rectilinear motion, Reversing devices.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE3: Design of Machine tool structures like beds, columns, Tables,
Cross rails, Carriages, Design of slide ways and Circular ways-Static and
6 15
Dynamic stiffness, Profiles, application of new materials - treatment of
slide way. Machine tool noise and concepts of noise control.
MODULE 4: Automatic machine tools and Transfer machines with control
systems: Selection of control systems, Control systems with pre-selection
of speeds or feeds, Manual and Automatic controls, Remote controls, 6 15
Safety devices in machine tools. Significance of Machine tool automation,
working members.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5: Application of CAD/CAM/CIM in Machine tool design, N.C
machines, C.N.C Machines, Transfer machines & their controls. Recent 9 20
trends in machine tool design.
MODULE 6: General principles of Hydraulic and Pneumatic drives.
Different types control valves for Hydraulic and Pneumatic circuits, 9 20
Hydraulic & Pneumatic circuit design for machine tools.
152

Fracture Mechanics
20MEMDT144 3-0-0-3 2020
and Design
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives
1. Treat linear and nonlinear fracture mechanics principles and their applications to structural
design.
2. Understand fracture phenomena in metals and non-metals will be discussed and testing
methods. In the end computer assisted techniques for fracture study will be discussed.
Syllabus
Fracture mechanics, fatigue testing methods, notches and stress concentration, analysis of
crack tip field, principles of crack arrest, nonlinear fracture mechanics, fracture design.
Course Outcome:
1. Predict material failure for any combination of applied stresses.

2. Estimate failure conditions of a structure
3. Determine the stress intensity factor for simple components of simple geometry
4. Predict the likelihood of failure of a structure containing a defect
Text Books:
1. Hortezberg, R.W., “Determination of fracture mechanics of engineering materials”,

Wiley,1983
2. Knott, J.F., “Fracture In Engineering Materials”, Butterworth, 1973.
References:
1. Kanninen, M.F and Popelar, C.H, “Advanced fracture mechanics”, Oxford University Press,
1985.
2. John M. Barson and Stanely T. Rolfe, “Fracture and Fatigue Control in Structures”, Prentice
Hall, Inc, USA, 1987.
153
COURSE PLAN
20MEMDT144 Fracture Mechanics and Design 3-0-0-3
Contact ESE
MODULES
Hours Marks (%)
MODULE1: Fracture mechanics: The geometry of stress and strain,
elastic deformation, plastic and elasto plastic deformation - limit analysis.
Damage tolerant fracture mechanics - Fatigue testing methods - statistical 6 15
nature of fatigue data - theories of fatigue - crack initiation and growth in
fatigue.
MODULE 2: Notches and stress concentration - Stress intensity solutions
for 2-D and 3-D crack geometries - Fractography - Structure modes and 6 15
types.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3: Analysis of crack tip field: Elements of elasticity - linear
elastic crack tip fields. Stress intensity factor - energy release rate -
6 15
Criterion for crack growth - Crack resistance curve - Principles of crack
arrest.
MODULE 4: Small-scale yielding (SSY) - crack growth relation in SSY -
Stable crack growth in SSY. Irwin plastic zone correction - Actual shape 6 15
of plastic zone - Plane stress - Plane strain.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5: Fatigue crack growth: Fatigue crack growth test - stress
intensity factor, factors affecting stress intensity factor - variable
9 20
amplitude service loading - Dynamic energy balance - crack arrest -
retardation model.
MODULE 6: Nonlinear fracture mechanics: J-integral - Elastic - plastic
stationary crack tip fields, ductile structure criterion, J-controlled crack
growth and stability - Tearing modulus - the x factor. Engineering
approach to plastic fracture - J-integral - testing single specimen testing - 9 20
standard test methods. Fracture design: Selection of materials - fatigue
crack growth rate curve - stress intensity factor range - use of crack
growth law.
154
20MEMDP101 Mini Project 0-0-4-2 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives
1. Understand customer needs through market survey and suitably incorporating it in the
product
2. Work out the complete cost of the product
3. Prepare a business plan to launch and market the product.
4. Work out the after sales services plan for the product
Course Outcome:
The students have to identify a marketable product whose initial functionality wise design is
complete. He/She is expected to refine the crude product by improving its aesthetics and
ergonomics. At the end of the semester the student is expected to prepare and submit a report for
final evaluation.
155

Computer Aided
20MEMDL102 0-0-2-1 2020
Engineering Design
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives
1. Familiarize the students in using computer for designing a structure

2. Reduce the lead time in product development
Syllabus
1. Computer aided drafting: Use of AutoCAD or Drawing Editor for 2-D drafting,
plan/elevation/side view, etc.
2. 3D Solid modeling: Part creation, surface generation and solid modeling of machine parts,
assembly of parts (simple exercises only).
3. Finite Element Analysis: Creation of models, use of different elements, mesh generation,
assigning material properties, treatment of different loads and boundary conditions. Solution
- static and dynamic analysis. Post-processing - displacement, stress and strain plots - stress
concentration. Various exercise problems using software (simple exercises only).
4. Software: Students must be trained in 3D Modeling and Finite Element Software such as
SolidWorks, ABAQUS, ANSYS, NASTRAN or COSMOS, as part of the Lab exercise.
Course Outcome:
1. Make 3D models independently

2. Analyze them for strength consideration
3. Optimize their structure
156
20MEMDD101 Industrial Training 0-0-4-0 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives
1. Expose students to experience and knowledge which is required in industry.

2. Develop an appreciation of the structure and operation of industrial organizations.
3. Understand the role of the engineer and engineering in industry.
4. Appreciate the ethical basis of engineering practice in industry.
5. Appreciate the importance of good communication and interpersonal skills, and to develop
these skills
Syllabus
The student shall undergo an industrial training for a minimum period of 12 weeks in an industry/
company approved by the institution and under the guidance of a staff member in the concerned
field. The candidate is also required to identify, define, formulate and offer an acceptable solution for
a problem observed in the organization. At the end of the training he/she has to submit a report on
the work being carried out.
Course Outcome:
1. Get familiarized with the general operations happening in an industry.

2. Get an experience in shaping oneself for entering an industry
157
M. Tech. Syllabus 2020 – Power Systems

IN
ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING
WITH SPECIALIZATION
POWER SYSTEMS
158
SEMESTER I

20EEPST101 Applied Mathematics 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
● Apply Fourier and Z Transforms to solve engineering problems

● Learn and use scientific methods for curve fitting
● Use mathematical methods to solve optimization problems
Syllabus
Fourier Transforms, cosine and sine transforms; Inverse transforms by partial

fractions and residues; Calculus of Variation; Integral equations; Parameter estimation;
Markov process; Reliability; Numerical approximation by least square method; Numerical
solution of Partial differential equations; Vector spaces and subspaces; Representation of
linear transformation by matrices
Course Outcome:
The student will be able to model, analyze and interpret engineering systems using mathematical
tools
Text Books:
1. Erwin Kreyzig, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, John Wiley & Sons, 1994.
2. S.S. Sastry, Introductory Methods of Numerical Analysis, Prentice -Hall of India
Private Limited, 2005
References:
1. Venkataraman M K, “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, (2 nd and 3rd volumes),

National Publishing Co., Chennai, 2002.
2. Bali, Ashok Saxena and Narayana Iyengar, “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Laxmi
Publications (P) Ltd., New Delhi, 2002.
3. Naylor A W and George R. Sell, “Linear Operator Theory”, Holt Rinehart and
Winston, London, 1971 (Copy right).
159
4. Cantrew C D, “Modern Mathematical Methods for Physicists and Engineers”,

5. Athanasios Papoulis, Unnikrishnan Pillai S, “Probability, random variables & Stochastic
Process”, TMH,4th Edition.
6. Alberto Leon-Garcia, “Probability & Random Processes for Electrical Engineering”,
Pearson Education Second Edition.
7. Hwei P HSU, “Probability, Random Variables & Random Processes”, Schaum’s Outlines
Series.
8. Elhance D N, “Fundamentals of Statistics”.
160
COURSE PLAN
20EEPST101 Applied Mathematics 3-0-0-3
ESE
MODULES Contact
Marks
Hours
(%)
MODULE : 1
Fourier Transforms, cosine and sine transforms. Z transforms of a n,

np, cos nT, sin nT, an cos nT, an sin nT, properties, convolution.
7 15
Inverse transforms by partial fractions and residues, application to
solution of difference equations. Application of Z-transform in
solution of Circuit theory problems.
MODULE : 2
Calculus of Variation: Euler-Lagrange condition for extremum of 7 15

integrals, isoperimetric problems, problems with constraints.
Optimization using Calculus of Variation.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE : 3
Integral equations: Formation of Volterra and Fredholm integral

7 15
equations, solution of integral equations of second kind by
transform method, method of successive approximations and
iterative methods.
MODULE : 4
Introduction – Parameter estimation – properties of point

estimators – maximum-Likelihood estimation, Mean square
estimation. Markov process:-Discrete-Time Markov Chains, 8 15
Continuous Time Markov Chains.
Reliability:- Concepts-Reliability by Markov Analysis-reliability

under preventive maintenance.
INTERNAL TEST - II
161
MODULE : 5
Numerical approximation by least square method-linear, parabolic 5 20

and exponential curve fitting, approximation by method of natural
cubic splines. Numerical solution of Partial differential equations.
MODULE : 6
Vector spaces and subspaces, definitions and simple problems on

linear dependence, basis, dimension, linear transformations. 8 20
Representation of linear transformation by matrices, definitions and

simple problems of inner product spaces and Hilbert spaces.
END SEMESTER EXAM
162

Optimization of Power System
20EEPST103 3-1-0-4 2020
Operation
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
● To introduce the different optimization problems and techniques.
● To study the fundamentals of the linear and non-linear programming problem.
● To learn the concept of dynamic programming and genetic algorithm technique.
● Apply optimization techniques to power system operational problems.
Syllabus
Optimization problems; Statements –Classification; Constrained optimization problem

Kuhn-Tucker conditions-Gradient methods; Dynamic programming; Quadratic Programming;
Power Generation Units; Characteristics - Thermal Units, Hydroelectric Units; Generation
with limited energy supply; Solution by gradient search techniques; Hydrothermal co-
ordination; Hydroelectric Plant models; Scheduling problems; Short term hydro scheduling.
Course Outcome:
Students who successfully complete this course will get exposure to different optimization
problems and techniques as applied to power systems operation.
Text Books:
1. Singiresu S Rao, John, “Engineering Optimization Theory and Practices”, 3rd Edition,
Wiley and Sons, 1998.
2. Wood A J and Wollenberg B F, “Power Generation, Operation and Control”, John
Wiley, 1984.
References:
1. Vadhera S S, “Power System Analysis and Stability”, Khanna Publishers, 1981.
2. Kirchmayer, “Economic Operation and Control of Power System”, Wiley, 1958.
3. Kothari D P & Dhillon J S, “Power System Optimization”, Prentice Hall India LTD, 2004.
4. Reklaitis G V, Ravindran A & Rajsdell K M, “Engineering Optimization,
Methods and Applications”, John Wiley & Sons.
5. Michalewiez Z, “Genetic Algorithms +Data Structures=Evolution Programs”,
Springer Verlag, Berlin, 1994.
6. Goldberg D E, “Genetic Algorithm in Search, Optimization and Machine Learning,”
7. International Students Edition (ISE), 1st Reprint, Addision Wesley Longman, 1999.
163
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
Optimization of Power System
20EEPST103 3-1-0-4
Operation
ESE
Contact
MODULES Marks
Hours
(%)
MODULE : 1
Optimization problems
Statements -Classification -One Dimensional Minimization
methods- Fibonacci and Golden section methods, Quadratic
interpolation method- 10 15
Unconstrained optimization – Univariant method-Powell’s method,
Decent methods-Steepest decent method- Conjugate gradient
method Fletcher-Reeves method.
MODULE : 2
Constrained optimization problem

Kuhn-Tucker conditions-Gradient methods-Lagrangian method- 10 15
penalty function methods –Dynamic programming-Discrete case
only – Quadratic Programming- Solution using C. P. algorithm –
Integer programming.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE : 3
Power Generation Units

Characteristics - Thermal Units-variations in steam unit 9 15
characteristics- cogeneration plants; Hydroelectric Units; First
order Gradient Method in power system application
MODULE : 4
Generation with limited energy supply - Take or pay fuel supply

contract - Composite generation production cost function - 9 15
Solution by gradient search techniques - Hard limits and slack
variables - Development of loss formula and B coefficients
INTERNAL TEST - II
164
MODULE : 5
Hydrothermal co-ordination
Long range and short range hydro scheduling - Hydroelectric
9 20
Plant models – Scheduling problems: types of Scheduling
problems - Scheduling energy – Short term Hydrothermal
Scheduling problem
MODULE : 6
9 20
Short term hydro scheduling: A Gradient approach - Pumped
storage hydro plants - Pumped storage hydro scheduling using λ-γ
iteration.
END SEMESTER EXAM
165
COURSE
CODE
Computer Applications in Power
20EEPST105 4-0-0-4 2020
Systems
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
1. To develop an idea about graph theory and building algorithm.
2. To identify and represent various power system components.
3. Learn to analyze power systems with different load flow studies and short circuit studies.
Syllabus
Elementary linear graph theory; Building algorithm for Bus impedance matrix; Load Flow
Studies; Three phase Load Flow; Representation of power system components; Incorporation
of FACTS devices in Load Flow; Types of faults-Short circuit study of a large power system;
Unsymmetrical Faults; Short circuit calculations using Z bus.
Course Outcome:
The student will able to apply computational techniques to analyze and solve load flow studies
and fault calculations.
Text Books:
1. Singh L P, “Advanced Power Systems Analysis and Dynamics”, New Age Intl. Publishers,
1983.
2. Stagg and EL Abiad, “Computer Methods in Power System Analysis”, McGraw Hill, 1968.
3. Kusic G L, “Computer Aided Power System Analysis”, Prentice Hall, 1986.
References:
1. Hadi Saadat, “Power System Analysis”, McGraw Hill-1999.
2. Arriliga J and Watson N R, “Computer Modeling of Electrical Power Systems”, Wiley,

2001.
3. Nagrath I J and Kothari D P, “Modern Power System Analysis”, Tata McGraw Hill, 1980.
166
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
Computer Applications in Power
20EEPST105 4-0-0-4
Systems
Contact ESE Marks
MODULES
Hours (%)
MODULE : 1
Elementary linear graph theory: Incidence and Network

matrices- Development of network matrices from Graph 10 15
theoretic approach. Building algorithm for Bus impedance
matrix. Modification of ZBus matrix due to changes in
primitive network.
MODULE : 2
Load Flow Studies: Overview of Gauss- Seidel and Newton

10 15
- Raphson Methods- Decoupled Newton Load Flow. Fast
Decoupled Load Flow- AC/DC load flow- Three phase Load
Flow.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE : 3
Triangular factorization – Optimal ordering – Optimal load 8 15

flow in power Systems. Representation of Synchronous
machine, transmission system, three phase power network.
MODULE : 4
Incorporation of FACTS devices in Load Flow: Static Tap

8 15
Changing, Phase Shifting (PS), Static Var Compensator (SVC),
Thyristor Controlled Series Compensator (TCSC) and Unified
power Flow Controller.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE : 5
Types of faults-Short circuit study of a large power system- 10 20

Algorithm for calculating system conditions after fault-Three
phase short circuit fault.
MODULE : 6
10 20
Unsymmetrical Faults: Three phase to ground, double line to
167
ground, line to line and single line to ground fault. Short circuit
calculations using Z bus –Short circuit calculations for balanced
and unbalanced three phase network using Z-bus.
END SEMESTER EXAM
168

CODE
20EEPST107 Power Electronic Circuits 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course
Objectives:
● To provide in-depth knowledge about important power electronic
devices and their protection.
● To provide insight into design operation of different power converters.
● To impart knowledge about different DC to DC converters.
● To develop the student’s ability to design and control inverters
with high efficiency
Syllabus
Ideal and Real switches; static and dynamic performance; Power diodes; Power Transistors;
Power MOSFET; IGBTs; Thyristor; GTO; Static and Dynamic Performance; Uncontrolled
rectifiers; Single phase and Three phase; Controlled Rectifiers; Analysis with RL, RLE loads;
AC Voltage Controllers; DC to DC Converters; Isolated DC to DC Converters; Inverter;
Half Bridge and Full Bridge; Six Step and Two Level PWM; Introduction to Multilevel
Invertors
Course Outcome:
The students will
be
● Able to describe the characteristics, operational features and control of
important power electronic devices.
● Able to design basic inverter circuitries that are useful in applications
demanding high energy efficiency & compact power conversion stages.
Text Books:
1. Ned Mohan, Tore M. Undeland, William P. Robbins, Power Electronics: Converters,
Applications and Design, 3rd Edition, John Wiley, 2003.
2. M H Rashid, Power Electronics: Circuits, Devices and Applications, Pearson Education
India.
References:
1. William Shepherd, Li Zhang, Power Converter Circuits, Marcel Dekker Inc, 2004.
2. Joseph Vithayathil, Power Electronics: Principles and Applications, McGraw Hill,1994.
3. Philip T. Krein, Elements of Power Electronics, Oxford, 1998.
169
COURSE PLAN
COURSE COURSE NAME L-T-P-C

CODE
20EEPST107 Power Electronic Circuits 3-0-0-3
MODULES Contact ESE

Hours Marks
(%)
MODULE : 1
Ideal and Real switches – static and dynamic performance – Power

8 15
diodes – Power Transistors – Power MOSFET- IGBTs – Thyristor
– GTO – Static and Dynamic Performance – Snubbers for
switching devices – Turn on, Turn off and Over voltage.
MODULE : 2
Uncontrolled rectifiers – Single phase and Three phase.

8 15
Controlled Rectifiers – Single phase and Three phase-fully
controlled and semi- controlled- Analysis with RL, RLE loads –
Inversion mode of operation.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE : 3
Rectifiers - Performance -Effect of source inductance – Dual

converters – Circulating and Non circulating type 6 15
AC Voltage Controllers – Single Phase and Three phase, Principle

of operation.
MODULE : 4
DC to DC Converters - Buck, Boost, Buck-Boost- Cuk

6 15
Converters. Basic Operation-Waveforms-modes of operation –
Output voltage ripple-State space modelling- Multi output Boost
Converter.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE : 5
6 20
Isolated DC to DC Converters - Push-Pull, Forward, fly back,
Bridge type converter topologies - Basic Operation only.
170
MODULE : 6
Inverter – Half Bridge and Full Bridge – Six Step and Two Level
8 20
PWM – Harmonics and Voltage control in inverters – Current
source inverter – Single phase and Three phase – Introduction to
Multilevel Inverters – Different types.
END SEMESTER EXAM
171

CODE
20EEPST111 System Theory 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
To give students
● A foundation in state space representation of systems.

● An ability to design observers.
● The ability to analyze the stability of linear and nonlinear systems.
● An introduction to the basic concepts of optimal control;
Syllabus
State space analysis and design of linear systems, Design of observers, Stability analysis using
lyapnov stability criterion, Introduction to Optimal Control and dynamic programming
Course Outcome:
At the end of the course students will be able to:
1. Use state space method to represent and analyze a system

2. Analyze the stability of a nonlinear system.
3. Describe the basic concepts of optimal control.
References:
1. Benjamin C. Kuo, Control Systems, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2002.
2. M. Gopal, Modern Control System Theory, Tata McGraw-Hill.
3. Thomas Kailath, Linear System, Prentice Hall Inc., Eaglewood Clis, NJ, 1998
4. D. E. Kirk, Optimal Control Theory, Prentice-Hall. 1970
172
COURSE PLAN

CODE
20EEPST111 System Theory 3-0-0-3
MODULES Contact ESE

Hours Marks
(%)
MODULE : 1
State Space Analysis and Design -Analysis of stabilization by pole

cancellation - reachability and constructability - stabilizability - 6 15
controllability - observability -grammians. - Linear state variable
feedback for SISO systems, Analysis of stabilization by output
feedback- modal controllability-formulae for feedback gain
MODULE: 2
Signiﬁcance of controllable Canonical form-Ackermann’s formula - 7 15

feedback gains in terms of Eigen values - Mayne-Murdoch formula
state feedback and zeros of the transfer function - non controllable
realizations and stabilizability -controllable and uncontrollable
modes.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE: 3
Observers -Asymptotic observers for state measurement-open

7 15
loop observer-closed loop observer formulae for observer gain -
implementation of the observer - full order and reduced order
observers - separation principle - combined observer -controller
optimality criterion for choosing observer poles.
MODULE: 4
6 15
Observer Design -Direct transfer function design procedures-
Design using polynomial equations - Direct analysis of the
Diophantine equation.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE: 5
Lyapunov Stability - definition of stability, asymptotic stability and 8 20

instability - Lyapunov’s second method. Lyapunov’s stability
analysis of LTI continuous time and discrete time systems,
173
stability analysis of nonlinear system – Krasovski’s theorem -

variable gradient method.
MODULE: 6
Introduction to Optimal Control- Pontryagin’s maximum principle-

8 20
theory- application to minimum time, energy and control effort
problems, terminal control problem. Dynamic programming-
Bellman’s principle of optimality, multistage decision processes.
Linear regulator problem: matrix Riccati equation and its solution.
END SEMESTER EXAM
174

CODE
20EEPST121 Power Quality 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
● To familiarize the various power quality characterizations, sources of power quality
issues and recommend standards related to power quality
● To understand the effects of various power quality phenomena in various equipment.
● To understand and to provide solutions for power factor correction through
various power factor correction techniques.
● To gain knowledge on active harmonic filtering and to provide solutions to grounding
and wiring problems
Syllabus
Introduction; power quality; voltage quality; classification of power quality issues;

power acceptability curves; Harmonics; effect of power system harmonics on power system
equipment and loads; Modelling of networks and components under non-sinusoidal
conditions; Power factor improvement; Active Harmonic Filtering; Dynamic Voltage
Restorers; Grounding and wiring; NEC grounding requirements
Course Outcome:
Upon completion of course on Power quality the students

● Will be able to identify and classify power quality disturbances.
● Will be able to analyze the causes of power quality issues caused by components in the
system.
● Will be able to provide feasible solutions for power factor correction.
● Will be able to develop the harmonic mitigation methods.
Text Books:
1. Heydt G T, “Electric power quality”.
2. Math H. Bollen, “Understanding Power Quality Problems”.
References:
1. Arrillaga J, “Power System Quality Assessment”, John Wiley, 2000.
2. Arrillaga J, Smith B C, Watson N R & Wood A R, “Power System Harmonic Analysis”,
Wiley, 1997.
3. Ashok S, “Selected Topics in Power Quality and Custom Power”, Course book for STTP,
2004.
4. Surya Santoso, Wayne Beaty H, Roger C. Dugan, Mark F. McGranaghan, “Electrical Power
System Quality “, MC Graw Hill, 2002.
175
COURSE PLAN

CODE
20EEPST121 Power Quality 3-0-0-3
MODULES Contact ESE

Hours Marks
(%)
MODULE : 1
Introduction-power quality-voltage quality-overview of power

quality phenomena-classification of power quality issues-power 7 15
quality measures and standards-THD-TIF-DIN-C-message weights-
flicker factor-transient phenomena-occurrence of power quality
problems.
MODULE : 2
5 15
Power acceptability curves-IEEE guides, standards and
recommended practices.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE : 3
Harmonics-individual and total harmonic distortion-RMS value of a

harmonic waveform-triplex harmonics-important harmonic
8 15
introducing devices-SMPS-Three phase power converters-arcing
devices - saturable devices-harmonic distortion of fluorescent
lamps-effect of power system harmonics on power system
equipment and loads.
MODULE : 4
Modelling of networks and components under non-sinusoidal

conditions- transmission and distribution systems-shunt 8 15
capacitors-transformers- electric machines-ground systems-loads
that cause power quality problems-power quality problems
created by drives and its impact on drives.
INTERNAL TEST - II
176
MODULE : 5
Power factor improvement- Passive Compensation. Passive

Filtering. Harmonic Resonance. Impedance Scan Analysis.
6 20
Active Power Factor Corrected Single Phase Front End, Control
Methods for Single Phase APFC, Three Phase APFC and Control
Techniques, PFC Based on Bilateral Single Phase and Three Phase
Converter. Static var compensators-SVC and STATCOM.
MODULE : 6
Active Harmonic Filtering-Shunt Injection Filter for single phase,

three- phase three-wire and three-phase four-wire systems. d-q
domain control of three phase shunt active filters uninterruptible
power supplies- constant voltage transformers- series active power
8 20
filtering techniques for harmonic cancellation and isolation.
Dynamic Voltage Restorers for sag, swell and flicker problems.
Grounding and wiring-introduction-NEC grounding requirements-

reasons for grounding-typical grounding and wiring problems-
solutions to grounding and wiring problems.
END SEMESTER EXAM
177

CODE
20EEPST131 High Voltage Generation and Testing 3-0-0-3 2020
Techniques
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
• To provide an insight in to the various high voltage Generation Methods.

• To understand the working and design of impulse generation circuits and
measurement techniques
• To expose the students to a variety of practical testing techniques of high voltage
equipment
• To develop an understanding of the various non-destructive testing techniques and
make them capable of analyzing and assessing the condition of high voltage equipment.
Syllabus
Fundamental concepts and overview; High Voltage Generation; Generation of Impulse

Voltages and Impulse Currents and nanosecond pulses; High Voltage measurement methods;
Testing standards and specifications; Testing of various power equipment; Dynamic
Properties of Dielectrics: Non-destructive Insulation Test Techniques; PD and corona
measurement.
Course Outcome:
Students who successfully complete this course will have fundamental idea on high voltage
testing techniques and ability to apply various high voltage generation and measurement
techniques to conduct various high voltage tests on power equipment and assess the
condition of these equipment.
Text Books:
1. High Voltage Test Techniques, Dieter Kind, Kurt Feser, SBA Electrical Engineering,
1999
2. High Voltage Engineering, C L Wadhwa, New Age Science, Third Edition, 2010
References:
1. High Voltage Engineering, Naidu & Kamaraju, Tata McGraw Hill Publications, 2nd
edition, 2010.
2. High Voltage Engineering Fundamentals, Kuffel, E. Zaengl, Elsevier India Pvt Ltd, 2005
3. High Voltage Technology, Alston, L, Oxford University Press, London, 1968 (B.S
Publications, First Indian Edition 2006).
4. IS, IEC and IEEE standards for “Dielectric Testing of High Voltage Apparatus”, W.
178
Nelson, Applied Life Data Analysis, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1982
5. IEC – 60270, “HV Test technique – Partial Discharge Mechanism”, 3rd Edition
December 2000.
6. M.D Judd, Liyang, Ian BB Hunter, “P.D Monitoring of Power Transformers using UHF
Sensors” Vol.21, No.2, pp5-14, 2004.
7. M.D Judd, Liyang, Ian BB Hunter “P.D Monitoring of Power Transformers using UHF
Sensors Part II, Vol.21, No.3, pp 5-13, 2004.
179
COURSE PLAN

CODE
20EEPST131 High Voltage Generation and Testing 3-0-0-3
Techniques
MODULES Contact ESE
Hours Marks
(%)
MODULE : 1
Testing voltages-AC to DC conversion – single phase rectifier

circuits. cascaded circuits – voltage multiplier circuits – Cockroft-
Walton circuits— voltage regulation – ripple factor Generation of 7 15
AC Voltages
Testing Transformer– Single Unit Testing Transformer, Cascaded

Transformer, Equivalent Circuit of cascaded Transformer
MODULE : 2
Testing Transformer– Single Unit Testing Transformer, Cascaded

Transformer, Equivalent Circuit of cascaded Transformer
6 15
Marx generator – Impulse voltage generator circuit – analysis of
various impulse voltage generator circuits – multistage impulse
generator circuits – Switching impulse generator circuits.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE : 3
Impulse current generator circuits – generation of non-standard

impulse voltages and nanosecond pulses
6 15
Measurement of High Voltages – Peak voltage measurements by
sphere gaps – Electrostatic voltmeter – generating voltmeters and
field sensors – Chubb-Fortescue method – voltage dividers and
impulse voltage measurements.
MODULE : 4
Testing Techniques of Electrical Equipment- Objectives of high

voltage testing, classification of testing methods- self restoration
and non-self restoration systems-standards and specifications. 7 15
Testing of insulators, bushings, Power Transformers.
180
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE : 5
Testing of circuit breakers, Surge diverters, cable -testing

methodology. 8 20
Non Destructive Insulation Test Techniques- Dynamic properties

of dielectrics-dielectric loss and capacitance measurement.
MODULE : 6
Partial discharge measurements-basic partial discharge (PD)

circuit – PD currents- PD quantities.
8 20
Digital PD instruments and measurements, acoustic emission

technique and UHF Techniques for PD identification, Corona and
RIV measurements on line hardware.
END SEMESTER EXAM
181

CODE
20EEPST141 Advanced Relaying and Protection 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
1. To study fundamental principles of relaying and application to transmission system
protection.
2. To study DSP fundamentals and microprocessor based relays.
3. To study numerical relaying algorithms for over current, distance and differential
protection with application to transmission system, transformer and bus bar
protection
Syllabus
Functions and functional characteristics of protective relaying; Zones and degree of

protection; Operating principles and construction of different types of relays; Instrument
Transformers for protection; Basic relay units; Comparators; Relay Schematics and Analysis;
Protection of Power System Equipment; Load shedding and frequency relaying; - Out of step
relaying; Reclosing and synchronizing; Advanced Relaying and Protection Schemes; Integrated
and multifunction protection Schemes.
Course Outcome:
The student will get fundamental concepts of basic as well as advanced types of
relaying and protection schemes.
Text Books:
1. Mason C R, “The art and science of protective relaying”, John Wiley &sons.
2. Warrington A R, “Protective Relays”, Vol .1&2, Chapman and Hall.
3. Madhav Rao T S, “Power System Protection Static Relays with Microprocessor
Applications”, Tata McGraw Hill Publication.
References:
1. Badri Ram, Vishwakarma D N, “Power System Protection and Switch Gear”, Tata
McGraw Hill.
2. Power System Protection Vol. I, II, III & IV, THE INSTITUTION OF ELECTRICAL
ENGINEERS”, Electricity Association Services Ltd., 1995.
3. Arun G. Phadke, James S. Thorp, “Computer Relaying for Power Systems”, Marcel
Dekker, Inc.
4. Paithankar Y G, Bhide S R, “Fundamentals of Power System Protection”, PHI Learning
182
Private Limited.
5. Blackburn, Lewis J, “Protective Relaying, Principles and Applications”, Marcel Dekker,
Inc., 1986.
6. Anderson, P. M, “Power System Protection”, McGraw-Hill, 1999.
7. Singh L. P, “Digital Protection, Protective Relaying from Electromechanical to
Microprocessor”, John Wiley & Sons,1994.
8. Wright A. and Christopoulos C, “Electrical Power System Protection”, Chapman & Hall,
1993.
9. Walter A. Elmore, Blackburn J L, “Protective Relaying Theory and Applications”, ABB
T&D Co. Marcel Dekker, Inc.
10. Handbook of Switchgears, Bharath Heavy Electricals.
11. Dr. Khedkar M K, Dr. Dhole G M, “A Textbook of Electric Power Distribution
Automation”, University Science Press, Delhi, Laxmi Publications, 2010.
183
COURSE PLAN

CODE
20EEPST141 Advanced Relaying and 3-0-0-3
Protection
MODULES Contact ESE
Hours Marks
(%)
MODULE : 1
Definitions - Functions and functional characteristics- Sensitivity,

Selectivity, Speed and Reliability - Classification –Analog, Digital
and Numerical - Schemes and design - Factors affecting 6 15
performance- Zones and degree of protection.
Instrument Transformers for protection – Current and Voltage

transformers – Ratio and Phase angle errors – Transient errors in
CT.
MODULE : 2
Operating principles and relay construction – Electromagnetic –

Thermal, Static and Microprocessor based relays
Basic relay units: Sequence networks - Fault sensing - Data 9 15

processing units- FFT and Wavelet based algorithms
Comparators: Amplitude and Phase Comparators - Duality –

Vector product and Coincidence type phase comparators - Zero
Crossing/Level Detectors.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE : 3
Relay Schematics and Analysis - Over Current Relay –

Instantaneous/Inverse Time – Current setting and Time setting - 4 15
IDMT Characteristics - Directional Relays - Differential Relays-
Restraining Characteristics - Distance Relays - Types and
Characteristics.
184
MODULE : 4
Protection of Power System Equipment: Generator and 6 15

Transformer Units – Inter turn faults and protection –
Application of transformer protection.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE : 5
Protection of Transmission Systems, Busbars and Motors -

Pilotwire and Carrier Current Schemes - System grounding –
Ground faults and protection. 8 20
Numerical Relays: Characteristics - Functional Diagrams -

Architecture and algorithms -Microprocessor based relays -
Sampling – Aliasing and filter principles.
MODULE : 6
Load shedding and frequency relaying - Out of step relaying -

Reclosing and synchronizing
9 20
Integrated and multifunction protection Schemes: SCADA based

protection systems- Components and functions – FTA details –
Testing of Relays.
END SEMESTER EXAM
185

CODE
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:

Syllabus
Design, Data Collection and Analysis, Quantitative Techniques and Mathematical Modeling,
Report Writing.
Course Outcome:

plan.
Text Books:
1. Research Methodology: Methods and Techniques’, by Dr. C. R. Kothari, New Age

International Publisher, 2004
Publications Ltd; Third Edition
References:
1. Research Methodology: An Introduction for Science & Engineering Students’, by Stuart

Melville and Wayne Goddard, Juta and Company Ltd, 2004
2. Research Methodology: An Introduction’ by Wayne Goddard and Stuart Melville, Juta
and Company Ltd, 2004
186

Contact
MODULES
Hours
MODULE : 1
Introduction to Research Methodology: Concepts of Research, Meaning

Quantitative vs. Qualitative, and Conceptual vs. Empirical
MODULE :2
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE: 3
MODULE 4:
methods, Concepts of correlation and regression - Fundamentals of
time series analysis and spectral analysis.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE: 5

5
reports & papers, Methods of giving references and appendices,
acknowledgement.
MODULE: 6
Documentation and presentation tools – LaTeX, Office with basic 4

presentations skills, Use of Internet and advanced search techniques.
187

CODE
20EEPSQ101 Seminar - I 0-0-2-2 2020
Course Objectives:

Methodology
Individual students are required to choose a topic of their interest from related topics
to the stream of specialization, preferably from outside the M. Tech syllabus. The students
are required to do a moderate literature review on the topic and give seminar. A committee
consisting of at least three faculty members (preferably specialized in the respective stream)
shall assess the presentation of the seminar and award marks to the students based on merits
of topic of presentation. Each student shall submit two copies of a write up of his seminar
topic. The seminar report shall not have any plagiarized content (all sources shall be properly
cited or acknowledged). One copy shall be returned to the student after duly certifying it by
the chairman of the assessing committee and the other shall be kept in the departmental
library. Internal continuous assessment marks are awarded based on the relevance of the
topic, presentation skill, quality of the report and participation. It is encouraged to do
simulations related to the chosen topic and present the results at the end of the semester.
188

CODE
20EEPSL101 Power Systems Simulation Lab 0-0-2-1 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 To carry out experimental/simulation studies on Power System Problems.

Syllabus
1. Formation of Bus Admittance Matrix and Bus Impedance Matrix using MATLAB
2. Formation of Jacobian for a system not exceeding 4 buses (no PV

Buses) in polar co-ordinates using MATLAB/PSS/E
3. Sequence Components of Power System Network with Single Line to
Ground Fault using MATLAB SIMULINK
4. Modelling of Single Machine Power System using SIMULINK
5. Short circuit studies of power system using ETAP/PSCAD/PSS/E
6. Power System dynamic studies using PSS/E
7. Load flow analysis using Gauss Seidel Method, Newton Raphson Method
8. Fast De-coupled for both PQ and PV Buses using ETAP/PSCAD
9. DC Load flow analysis using MATLAB.
10. Simulation & Analysis of magnetic circuits using SIMULINK.
11. Simulation and measurements of Three Phase circuits using SIMULINK.
12. Modelling of Automatic Generation Control for a two area network using
SIMULINK/PSS/E.
13. To determine
a. Swing curve
b. Critical clearing time for a single machine connected to infinite bus through
a pair of identical transmission lines, three phase fault on one of the lines
for variation of inertia constant/line parameters/fault locations/clearing
time/pre fault electrical output using MATLAB/C-program/PSS/E
14. Modelling and Simulation of Non-Conventional Energy Systems using MATLAB
189
O ptional Experiments
1. Analysis of Static Var Compensators.
2. Analysis of STATCOM.
3. Load forecasting using ANN Tool/ETAP
4. Power Quality studies using PSCAD/PSS/E
5. Substation layout using AutoCAD Electrical
6. Transient Stability Analysis and formation of Swing
Curves using MATLAB/SIMULINK
7. Modelling of Surge Arresters using PSCAD
8. Modelling of FACTS devices using SIMULINK
9. Transformer Tests using SIMULINK /ETAP
10. Fault Analysis of a synchronous Generator using PSCAD
11. Execute optimal power flow problem using ETAP/PSCAD.
12. Analysis of voltage stability of a SLIB (Single Load Infinite Bus)

system while delivering maximum power using MATLAB/PSS-E.
13. Continuation Power Flow (CPF) analysis using MATLAB
(At least 10 experiments in the list are to be conducted in the laboratory.

Additional experiments and simulation assignments can also be given by the
department)
Course Outcome:
● The student will be able to analyze Power System Problems.
190
SEMESTER II

CODE
20EEPST102 Power System Control and Security 4-0-0-4 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
● To understand the fundamentals of speed governing system and the concept of control
areas.
● To study the concept of voltage control using compensation devices
● To understand the role of energy control centre and power system security states.
Syllabus
Active Power and Frequency control; Fundamentals of speed governing; Fundamentals
of Automatic Generation control (AGC) -implementation of AGC; Reactive Power &
Voltage control; Methods of voltage Control; Principles of transmission system
compensation; Modelling of reactive compensating devices; Power system security; Power
System State Estimation; Security assessment; Contingency analysis; performance indices;
Real time control of power system; Introduction to system monitoring; Basic SCADA system
architecture.
Course Outcome:
Students who successfully complete this course will get fundamental concepts of active and
reactive power control and power system security
Text Books:
1. Wood A J, Wollenberg B F, “Power Generation Operation and Control”, John Wiley
and Sons, 1996.
2. Kundur P, “Power System Stability and Control”, McGraw Hill, Inc., 1995.
References:
1. Elgerd O, “Electrical Energy System Theory and Introduction “, Tata McGraw Hill
publishing Co. Ltd., 1992.
2. John D Grainger & William D Stevenson, “Power System Analysis”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2003.
3. Weedy B M, Cory B J, “Electric Power System”, John Wiley & Sons.
4. Electric Power System Operation and Management in Restructured Environment,
Short Term Course Material, IIT-Kanpur, July 21-25, 2003.
5. Pabla A S, “Electric Power Distribution”, Tata McGraw Hill, Fifth Edition.
6. Clyde F. Coombs, “Printed Circuits Handbook”, McGraw Hill, 2007.
7. Richard K. Ulrich &William D. Brown, “Advanced Electronic Packaging”, 2nd Ed., Wiley,
2006.
8. Henry W. Ott, “Noise Reduction Techniques in Electronic Systems”, 2nd Ed., Wiley, 1998.
9. Henry W Ott, “Electromagnetic Compatibility Engineering”, Wiley, 2004.
10. Prasad Kodali V., “Engineering Electromagnetic Compatibility: Principles, Measurements,
Technologies and Computer Models”, 2nd Ed., Wiley, 2001.
191
COURSE PLAN

CODE
20EEPST102 Power System Control and 4-0-0-4
Security
MODULES Contact ESE
Hours Marks
(%)
MODULE : 1
Active Power and Frequency control

Active Power and Frequency control:-Fundamentals of speed
governing- Control of Generating unit power output-composite 10 15
regulating characteristic of Power system-Responds rates of
turbine-Governing systems- Fundamentals of Automatic
Generation control (AGC) - implementation of AGC.
MODULE : 2
Reactive Power & Voltage control

Reactive Power & Voltage control:-Production and absorption of 10 15
Reactive power-Methods of voltage Control-Shunt reactors-Shunt
capacitors- series capacitors-synchronous condensers - Static VAr
systems
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE : 3
Principles of transmission system compensation – Modelling of 9 15

reactive compensating devices-Application of tap-changing
transformers to transmission systems-distribution system voltage
regulation.
MODULE : 4
Power System Security

Power system security: Basic concepts-factors affecting power
system security-system monitoring-security assessment-security
enhancement Power System State Estimation - Maximum 11 15
likelihood – Weighted-least squares estimation – detection and
identification of bad measurements – estimation of quantities not
being measured – network observability – pseudo measurements.
INTERNAL TEST - II
192
MODULE : 5
6 20
Security assessment
Security assessment: Contingency analysis – network sensitivity
factors – contingency selection – performance indices.
MODULE : 6
Real time control of power system: Real time control of power

system under normal, alert, emergency and restorative modes of
10 20
operation- Introduction to system monitoring-Basic SCADA
system architecture- Preventive, emergency and restorative
control procedures including principles of Load Shedding and
application of under frequency Relays.
END SEMESTER EXAM
193

CODE
20EEPST104 Flexible AC Transmission Systems 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
To give the Student: -
• An introduction to the various types of FACTS controllers;

• Explanation of the principle of shunt compensation and series compensation;
• Description on the various power devices and converter topologies used in FACTS
controllers;
• The concept of combined series and shunt FACTS controllers.
Syllabus
Power transmission problems and emergence of FACTS solutions; FACTS controllers;

FACTS control considerations; Shunt compensation; Principles of shunt SVC; static
synchronous compensator (STATCOM) configuration and control; Series compensation;
Variable Impedance Type series compensators; Static Synchronous Series Compensator
(SSSC); Unified Power Flow Controller (UPFC): Principles of operation and characteristics;
Interline Power Flow Controller (IPFC) – Basic operating Principles
Course Outcome:
Students who successfully complete this course will have demonstrated an ability to
understand the emergence of FACTS Technology and compare various types of FACTS
controllers; Understand the configuration and the control of shunt and series compensation
devices; Identify appropriate power devices and converter topologies for implementation of
FACTS controllers; Explain the active and reactive power flow control capability of combined
series and shunt controllers.
Text Books:
(1) Song, Y.H and Allan T. Johns, “Flexible Ac Transmission Systems (FACTS)”; Institution of
Electrical Engineers Press, London, 1999
(2) Hingorani, L Gyugyi “Concepts and Technology of Flexible Ac Transmission System”, IEEE
Press New York, 2000 ISBN- 078033 4588.
References:
(1) Miller, T J E “Reactive Power Control in Power Systems” John Wiley, 1982
(2) Padiyar K.R. “Facts Controllers in Power Transmission and Distribution”, New Age
International Publishers, June 2007.
194
COURSE PLAN

CODE
20EEPST104 Flexible AC Transmission Systems 3-0-0-3
MODULES Contact ESE

Hours Marks
(%)
MODULE : 1
Power transmission problems and emergence of FACTS

solutions
10 15
Fundamentals of ac power transmission, transmission problems
and needs, emergence of FACTS- FACTS controllers-FACTS
control considerations.
MODULE : 2
Shunt compensation
6 15
Principles of shunt SVC-TCR, TSC, combined TCR and TSC

configurations.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE : 3
5 15
Static synchronous compensator (STATCOM) configuration and
control, application of SVC and STATCOM.
MODULE : 4
Series compensation
6 15
Variable Impedance Type series compensators: Thyristor Switched
Series Capacitor (TSSC), Thyristor Controlled Series Capacitor
(TCSC).
INTERNAL TEST - II
195
MODULE : 5
Sub synchronous characteristics- Basic NGH SSR Damper. Static 5 20

Synchronous Series Compensator (SSSC): Principle of operation,
configuration and control.
MODULE : 6
Unified power flow controller (UPFC)
Principles of operation and characteristics, independent active and

10 20
reactive power flow control, comparison of UPFC to the
controlled series compensators, control and dynamic performance.
Interline Power Flow Controller (IPFC) – Basic operating

Principles and Characteristics.
END SEMESTER EXAM
196

CODE
20EEPST106 Power System Dynamics and Stability 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
● To understand and work with the modelling of main power system elements like,
synchronous machines, excitation systems, prime mover and its governing mechanism
and power system load.
● To understand and work with the linearization of power system elements and its
small signal stability analysis.
● To understand and work with power system stabilizer, voltage stability and its analysis
● To understand and work with different power system stability enhancements.
Syllabus
Fundamental concepts and overview; Types of Stability; Mathematical description of a

synchronous Machine. Modeling of other power system components-Excitation and Turbine
and Load Modeling. Small signal Stability analysis, Power system stabilizer and its Multi
Machine system. Voltage stability aspects and its analysis including continuation power flow
analysis. Enhancement of stability- Transient and its techniques, small signal using PSS-
Supplementary control of Static VAR Compensators.
Course Outcome:
● Candidate should be able to work with the modelling of main power system elements
like, synchronous machines, excitation systems, prime mover and its governing
mechanism and power system load.
● Candidate should be able to work with the linearization of power system elements
and its small signal stability analysis.
● Candidate should be able to work with power system stabilizer, voltage stability and its
analysis
● Candidate should be able to work with different power system stability enhancements.
Text Books:
1. Kundur P, “Power System Stability and Control”, TMH

2. Anderson and Fouad, “Power System Control and Stability”, Galgotia Publications,
Compensation 1981.
197
References:
1. Ramanujam R, “Power System Dynamics- Analysis & Simulation”, PHI learning Private
Limited.
2. Padiyar K R, “Power System Dynamics”, 2nd Edition, B.S. Publishers, 2003.
3. Sauer P W & Pai M A,” Power System Dynamics and Stability”, Pearson, 2003.
4. Olle I Elgerd, “Electric Energy Systems Theory an Introduction”, 2nd Edition, McGraw-Hill,
1983.
5. Kimbark E W, “Power System Stability”, McGraw-Hill Inc., 1994, Wiley & IEEE Press,
1995.
6. Yao-Nan-Yu, “Electric Power Systems Dynamics”, Academic Press, 1983.
198
COURSE PLAN

CODE
20EEPST106 Power System Dynamics and 3-0-0-3
Stability
MODULES Contact ESE Marks
Hours (%)
MODULE : 1
Power System Stability 2 15

Structure of power System and its controls. Concept of Power
system stability-Types of stability.
MODULE : 2
Modelling Power System Components

Synchronous machine modelling: Synchronous Machine
Mathematical Description of a Synchronous Machine - Basic
10 15
equations of a synchronous machine. dq0 Transformation- per
unit representation- equivalent circuits for direct and
quadrature axes. Excitation System Modelling -Static Excitation
System only- Hydraulic turbine modelling- Load modelling
concepts.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE : 3
Small Signal Analysis

Fundamental Concepts of Stability of Dynamic Systems: State-
space representation- stability of dynamic system - 7 15
Linearization, Eigen properties of the state matrix – eigen value
and stability. Small Signal Stability of Single Machine Infinite Bus
(SMIB) System. Swing Equation, H-constant calculation -
Representation in system studies.
MODULE : 4
Effects of K constants on small signal stability:

Generator represented by the classical model. Effect of field 8 15
flux variation on system stability-Effects of Excitation System -
Block diagram representation with exciter and AVR- Effect of
AVR on synchronizing and damping torque components.
INTERNAL TEST - II
199
MODULE : 5
Voltage Stability
Voltage stability – generation aspects - transmission system 7 20
aspects – load aspects. PV curve – QV curve – PQ curve –
analysis with static loads. Load ability limit - sensitivity analysis-
continuation power flow analysis.
MODULE : 6
Enhancement of Stability
Methods of improving stability – transient stability 8 20
enhancement – different techniques. Small Signal Stability
Enhancement: Using Power System Stabilizers-Supplementary
control of Static VAR Compensators.
END SEMESTER EXAM
200

CODE
20EEPST112 Power Electronic System 3-0-0-3 2020
Control and Applications
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
● Describe different PWM Strategies for inverter and multilevel inverter

● Acquire in depth knowledge on DC to DC converters
● Explain resonant converters
● Learn about protection of electronic devices and circuits
Syllabus
Inverter - control - PWM- Space Vector Modulation, Multilevel inverter and boost inverter,
PWM techniques for multilevel inverter, Isolated DC to DC converter, push pull converter
fly back converter, SMPS, Cycloconverter, dual converter, Resonant and quasi –Resonant
converters, Protection of Devices and Circuits, Power Electronic Applications
Course Outcome:
The student will be able to apply different control strategies of power electronic circuits for
power systems
Text Books:
1. B W Williams, Power Electronics; Principles and Elements, University of Strathclyde,
Glasgow, 2006.
2. Mohan, Undeland, Robbins, Power Electronics; Converters, Applications and
Design. - 3rdedition, John Wiley and Sons, 2003.
References:
1. William Shepherd, Li Zhang, Power Converter Circuits, Marcel Decker, 2004.
2. V. Ramanarayanan, Course Material on Switch Mode Power Conversion, Electrical
Department, IISc, Bangalore, 2006.
3. Philip T Krein, Elements of Power Electronics, Oxford, 1998.
4. B K Bose, Modern Power Electronics and AC Drives, Pearson Education, 2002.
5. Kazmierkowski, Krishnan, Blaabjerg, Control in Power Electronics, Academic Press, 02
6. Bin WU, High Power Converters and AC drives, John Wiley, 2006.
7. D. Grahame Holmes, Thomas A Lipo, Pulse Width Modulation for Power Converters
Principles and Practice, IEEE Press, 2003.
8. M H Rashid (Ed), Power Electronics Handbook: Devices, Circuits and Applications,
Academic Press 2001.
9. M D Singh, K B Khanchandani, Power Electronics, Tata McGraw Hill
201
COURSE PLAN

CODE
20EEPST112 Power Electronic System Control and Applications 3-0-0-3
MODULES Contact ESE

Hours Marks
(%)
MODULE : 1
Inverters: Principle of operation of half and full bridge inverters

– Performance parameters, Sinusoidal PWM – Harmonic 7 15
elimination-Regular Sampled PWM- Space Vector Modulation,
Methods of Current Control – Tolerance Band control, Fixed –
Frequency control.
MODULE : 2
Multilevel & Boost Inverters: Multilevel concept – diode

clamped – flying capacitor – cascade type multilevel inverters - 7 15
Comparison of multilevel inverters - application of multilevel
inverters – PWM techniques for MLI – Single phase & Three
phase Impedance source inverters
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE : 3
Isolated DC to DC Converters
Push-Pull and Forward Converter Topologies-Basic Operation.
Waveforms-Voltage Mode Control. Half and Full Bridge 7 15
Converters. Basic Operation and Waveforms - Fly back
Converter, Discontinuous mode operation, Waveforms, Control-
Continuous Mode Operation, Waveforms-Switched Mode Power
Supplies
MODULE : 4
Cycloconverters : Principle of operation – Single phase and

Three-phase Dual converters - Single phase and three phase 7 15
cyclo-converters – power factor Control – Introduction to
matrix converters.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE : 5
Resonant and quasi –Resonant converters: Classification, 7 20

Basic Resonant Circuit Concepts, Load Resonant Converter,
202
Resonant Switch Converter, Zero Voltage Switching - Zero

current switching – ZVS Clamped Voltage Topologies, Resonant
dc-link inverters.
MODULE : 6
Protection of Devices and Circuits

Cooling and heat Sinks, Thermal Modelling of Power switching
7 20
devices, snubber circuits, overvoltage protection, over-current
protection, gate protection, Electromagnetic Interference
Power Electronic Applications-Static Circuit Breakers, Static
relays, Induction heating, Dielectric Heating
END SEMESTER EXAM
203

CODE
20EEPST122 Power System Voltage Stability 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
● To impart the fundamentals of power system voltage stability.

● To analyze the aspects of voltage stability in generation, transmission and load
systems.
● To provide knowledge on various compensation and control techniques for
voltage stability.
Syllabus
Voltage stability: Definition-Power system stability classification; Transmission System

Aspects; Effect of compensation; Power voltage relationships; Generation aspects; Frequency
and voltage controllers; Limiting devices affecting voltage stability; Load aspects
Course Outcome:
The student will acquire knowledge on voltage stability and its analysis on various power system
components
Text Books:
1. Van Cutsen T and Vournas C, “Voltage Stability of Electric Power Systems”, Kluwer
Academic Publishers, 1998.
References:
1. Taylor C W, “Power System Voltage Stability”, McGraw Hill, Inc.,1994.
2. Kundur P, “Power System Stability and Control”, McGraw Hill, Inc.,1995.
204
COURSE PLAN

CODE
20EEPST122 Power System Voltage Stability 3-0-0-3
MODULES Contact ESE

Hours Marks
(%)
MODULE : 1
Voltage stability: Definition-Power system stability classification.

7 15
Physical phenomenon of Voltage collapse-Description-Time scales
Reactive power-system changes and Voltage collapse-maintaining
variable voltage levels.
MODULE : 2
Transmission System Aspects: Single load infinite bus system-

7 15
Maximum deliverable power-Lossless transmission-Maximum power-
Power voltage relationships-Generator reactive power requirement-
Instability mechanism.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE : 3
Effect of compensation:-Line series compensation-Shunt 7 15

compensation-Static VAR compensator-VQ curves-Effect of
adjustable transformer ratio.
MODULE : 4
Generation aspects: Synchronous machine theory-Physical

description-Mathematical description-dq0 transformation-Motion
8 15
dynamics.
Frequency and voltage controllers-Frequency control-Automatic

voltage regulators
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE : 5
Limiting devices affecting voltage stability- Over excitation limiters- 6 20

Description-field current- Armature current limiters-Capability
205
curves.
MODULE : 6
Load aspects: Voltage dependence of loads- Load characteristics- 7 20

Exponential load-Polynomial load. Saddle node bifurcation- Simple
power system example (Static and Dynamic).
END SEMESTER EXAM
206

CODE
Power System Transients and Insulation
20EEPST132 3-0-0-3 2020
Coordination
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
• To impart knowledge on various transients in power systems
• To give basic ideas on travelling waves and lightning phenomena
• To acquire knowledge on the objectives and properties of insulation coordination
Syllabus
System Transients; Double frequency Transients; Damping; Abnormal switching
transients; Transients in three phase circuits and DC Circuits; Theory of Travelling waves-
wave equation, multi conductor transmission lines; Lightning Phenomena in power system;
Insulation Coordination- Objective, history, Insulation levels for power devices; Dielectric
Properties- Gaseous Insulation, Tracking and Erosion, High Current Arcs.
Course Outcome:
Students who successfully complete this course will be acquainted with various
transient and overvoltage phenomena in power systems and will be able to analyze
insulation coordination of power system.
Text Books:
1. Electrical Transients in Power Systems, Allen Greenwood, Wiley Interscience, New York
2. Power System Transients, Vanikov
References:
1. Indulkar C S and Kothari D P, “Power System Transients”.
2. Flurscheim C.H, “Power Circuit Breaker Theory and Design”.
3. Kreuger F H, “Discharge Detection in High Voltage Equipment”, Temple press Ltd. London,
1964.
4. Butterworth London, “Insulation Coordination in High Voltage Electrical Power Systems”.
5. Dieter Kind, “An introduction to HV Experimental Techniques”, Wiley Eastern.
6. Arriliga J and Watson N R, “Computer Modeling of Electrical Power Systems”, Wiley, 2001
7. Electromagnetic Transients in Power System, Pritindra Chowdhari, John Wiley and sons
207
COURSE PLAN

CODE
20EEPST132 Power System Transients and Insulation 3-0-0-3
Coordination
MODULES Contact ESE
Hours Marks
(%)
MODULE : 1
Introduction: Classification of system transients-The circuit 5 15

closing transients-The recovery transient initiated by the removal
of a short circuit, Double frequency transients.
MODULE : 2
Damping-Resistance switching-Load switching.

7 15
Abnormal switching transients-Current suppression-Capacitance

switching.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE : 3
Other restriking Phenomena.

5 15
Transients in three phase circuits-Symmetrical component method

for solving three phase switching transients.
MODULE : 4
Transients in DC circuits-HVDC Circuit breaker

6 15
Travelling waves: Transmission line transients-Wave equation-
Reflection and refraction of travelling waves-Line terminations-
Lattice Diagram
INTERNAL TEST - II
208
MODULE : 5
Travelling waves in distributed parameter multi-conductor lines,

parameters as a function of frequency. 9 20
Lightning phenomena- Interaction between lightning and power

system - Influence of tower footing resistance and earth resistance.
MODULE : 6
Insulation Coordination: Objective and history –Insulation level for

power apparatus overvoltage limiting devices. 10 20
Dielectric properties- Breakdown of gaseous insulation-Tracking

and erosion of insulation- High current arcs.
END SEMESTER EXAM
209

CODE
Industrial Energy Conservation and
20EEPST142 3-0-0-3 2020
Management
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
● Acquainted with the basic principles of Energy conservation management

● Knowledge on Energy management of different electrical loads
● In depth knowledge in energy efficiency analysis of HVAC systems and turbines.
● An overview in energy economics.
Syllabus
Energy conservation management; General principles of energy management and energy

management planning; Energy audit report; Energy management; Computer-aided energy
management; Cogeneration; Energy efficiency; Energy efficiency analysis; Energy efficiency of
turbines; Energy economics
Course Outcome:
The student will be able to understand major principles of energy conservation and identify
energy management opportunities in various applications
Text Books:
1. Charles M Gottschalk, “Industrial energy conservation”, John Wiley & Sons, 1996.
2. Craig B Smit, “Energy management principles”, Pergamon Press
References:
1. IEEE Recommended Practice for Energy Management in Industrial and Commercial

Facilities, IEEE std 739 – 1995 (Bronze book).
2. Rajan G. G., “Optimizing energy efficiencies in industry”, Tata McGraw Hill, Pub. Co.,
2001.
3. Paul O. Callaghan, “Energy management”, McGraw Hill Book Co.
4. Wayne C. Turner, “Energy management Hand Book”, The Fairmount Press, Inc., 1997.
5. Rao S. & Parulekar B B, “Energy Technology”, Khanna Publishers, 1999.
210
COURSE PLAN
CODE
20EEPST142 Industrial Energy Conservation and 3-0-0-3
Management
MODULES Contact ESE

Hours Marks
(%)
MODULE : 1
Energy conservation management: The relevance of energy

management profession-General principles of energy management
and energy management planning-Application of Pareto’s model
6 15
for energy management-Obtaining management support-
Establishing energy data base Conducting energy audit-identifying,
evaluating and implementing feasible energy conservation
opportunities-Energy audit report; - monitoring, evaluating and
following up energy saving measures/ projects
MODULE : 2
Energy management: Energy management of process energy-

8 15
Principles- Opportunities-Case studies-Management of electrical
load and lighting - Management opportunities with electric drives-
Lighting, heating and electrolytic systems.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE : 3
Electrical load analysis-Peak demand control- Computer-aided 6 15

energy management-Cogeneration-Forms of cogeneration-
Feasibility study for cogeneration.
211
MODULE : 4
Energy efficiency: Energy efficiency analysis-Thermodynamics-

8 15
energy- coefficient of performance-Energy effectiveness-
Management of heating, ventilating and air-conditioning (HVAC) –
Principles-Opportunities-Case studies.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE : 5
Energy efficiency of turbines: Compressors and pumps (brief 6 20

treatment only)-Specific energy consumption-Parameters affecting
specific energy consumption-Flexi targeting technique
MODULE : 6
Energy economics: Financial evaluation of energy projects-Cash

flow model-Time value of money-Evaluation of proposals -
Payback method, Average rate of return method, Internal rate of 8 20
return method, Present value method, Profitability index, Life
cycle costing approach, Investment decision and uncertainty;
Consideration of income taxes, Depreciation and inflation in
investment analysis.
END SEMESTER EXAM
212

CODE
20EEPST114 Soft Computing Techniques in 3-0-0-3 2020
Power Systems
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
1. Impart the basic knowledge of functional approximation
2. Inculcate the skill of reasoning under uncertainty to solve practical engineering
problems
3. Enhance system design capability using fuzzy logic and neural networks
Syllabus
Classical sets, Fuzzy sets; Operations on fuzzy relations; Defuzzification methods;
Fuzzy logic; Fuzzy Tautologies; Biological Neural Networks-Architecture of neural network;
Learning Process; Competitive learning; Back propagation net; Genetic Algorithm;
Application of Genetic algorithm to Economic Load Dispatch
Course Outcome:
1. Solve numerical problems related to fuzzy set theory
2. Analyze system design and control using fuzzy logic and fuzzy inference systems
3. Design intelligent systems and training algorithms using artificial neural networks
4. Demonstrate the knowledge of different soft computing techniques in
power system applications
Text Books:
1. Driankov D, Hellendoorn H, Reinfrank M, “An Introduction to Fuzzy Control”,
Narosa Publishing Company, New Delhi,1996.
2. Lawrene Fausett, “Fundamentals of Neural Networks”, Prentice Hall,1994.
References:
1. James Kennedy, Russell, Eberhar T C, YuhuI Shi, “Swarm Intelligence”, Morgan, March
2001.
2. Timothy J Rose, “Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications”, McGraw-Hill, New
York,1996.
3. Simon Haykin, “Neural Networks”, Mc Millan College Publishing Co., New York,1994.
4. Zurad A J M, “Introduction to Artificial Neural Systems”, Jaico publishing house,
Delhi,1994.
5. Bonabeau E, Dorigo M, Theraula Z G, “Swarm Intelligence: From Natural to
Artificial Systems”, Oxford University Press, New York,1999.
213
COURSE PLAN

CODE
20EEPST114 Soft Computing Techniques in Power 3-0-0-3
Systems
MODULES ESE
Contact
Marks
Hours
(%)
MODULE : 1
5 15
Classical sets, Fuzzy sets−Properties of fuzzy sets, Operations
on fuzzy sets
MODULE : 2
Classical relations and Fuzzy relations-Tolerance and Equivalence

Relations-Fuzzy Tolerance and Equivalence Relations- Operations
on fuzzy relations-The Extension principle-Membership Function: 7 15
Features of membership functions-various forms – Fuzzification -
Membership value assignments-Intuition, Inference, Rank ordering.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE : 3
Lambda-cuts for fuzzy sets- Lambda-cuts for fuzzy relations-

Defuzzification methods- Classical predicate logic
7 15
Fuzzy logic - Approximate reasoning – Fuzzy Tautologies -
Contradictions- Equivalence and logical proofs - Implication
operation - Composition operation.
MODULE : 4
Biological Neural Networks-Architecture of neural network- 8 15

Activation Functions-McCulloch-Pitts neuron model
INTERNAL TEST - II
214
MODULE : 5
Learning Process- Error correction learning-Memory based 7 20

learning- Hebbian learning- Competitive learning- Boltzman-
Supervised and Unsupervised learning.
MODULE : 6 8 20
Back propagation net-Standard back propagation-Architecture,
algorithm–Derivation of learning rules-Number of hidden layers-
Learning factors.
Genetic Algorithm: Basic Concepts- Biological background-

Creation of Off springs- Working principle- Encoding- Fitness
function- reproduction- Cross over- Mutation – Application of
Genetic algorithm to Economic Load Dispatch.
END SEMESTER EXAM
215
COURSE
CODE
20EEPST124 EHV AC and DC Transmission 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
● Students know long line transmission line analysis and have a depth knowledge about the generation
and properties of audible noise.
● Students able to know short circuit analysis and high voltage measuring equipment
● Students learn about HVDC power transmission systems-Technology and system interactions.
● Students are able to understand HVDC system control principles and converter protection.
● Students are introduced to modelling of converter and AC and DC networks.
Syllabus
Long line theory; Generation and characteristics of AN; Radio Interference RIV, corona pulses; Over
voltages; Introduction to HVDC system, Analysis of HVDC system, Control of HVDC system,
Harmonics and AC/DC filters
Course Outcome:
The student will be acquainted with the fundamentals of EHV AC and DC transmission systems.
Text Books:
1. Begemudre R.D, “EHVAC Transmission Engineering”, Wiley Eastern Ltd.

2. Kundur P, “Power System Stability and Control”, McGraw Hill Publication.
References:
1. Arrillaga J,” HVDC Transmission”, Peter Peregrinus Pub.
2. Rao S, “EHV AC & HVDC Transmission Systems”, Khanna Publishers.
3. Padiyar K.R., “HVDC Power Transmission Systems”, Wiley Eastern Ltd.
216
COURSE PLAN

CODE
20EEPST124 EHV AC and DC Transmission 3-0-0-3
MODULES Contact ESE

Hours Marks
(%)
MODULE : 1
Long line theory- long distance transmission problems-corona

power loss- Charge Voltage Diagram with corona-Attenuation of
travelling waves due to corona- Audible noise: Generation and 7 15
characteristics-Limits for audible noise- AN measurement and
Meters-Relation between single phase and three phase AN levels-
day Night Equivalent Noise level.
MODULE : 2
Radio Interference RIV and excitation functions: Generation and

properties of corona pulses-Limits for radio interference fields- 7 15
The CIGRE Formula- Rules for addition of RI levels of three
phases-S/CS Line-Rules for addition of RI Levels for a D/C Line.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE : 3
Sequential impedances of AC systems -EHVAC transmission over

voltages- Short Circuit Current and the Circuit Breaker-
Recovery voltage and Circuit breaker-Over voltages caused by
interruption of Low induction current-Interruption of Capacitive 8 15
currents-Ferro resonance. Over voltages- Calculation of
switching surges-single phase equivalents. Reduction of switching
surges on EHV systems.
MODULE : 4
High voltage testing of AC equipment: Measurement of High

Voltages-Voltage dividers-High speed oscilloscope-Peak voltmeter 6 15
and sphere gap-Digital Recorder-Measurement of Partial
Discharge-Layout of EHV Laboratory.
217
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE : 5
Comparison of EHV AC & DC transmission. HVDC system

7 20
configuration and components -conversion and inversion. Analysis
of three phase bridge converter and Performance equations -
abnormal operations of converter.
MODULE : 6
Control of HVDC system- Principle of DC link control- current

and Extinction angle control power and reactive power control- 7 20
alternative inverter control modes. Harmonics and AC/DC
filters- Influence of AC system strength on AC/DC system
interaction. Responses to DC and AC system faults.
END SEMESTER EXAM
218
COURSE
CODE
Power System Monitoring and
20EEPST134 Instrumentation 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
● Understanding components, architecture and various applications of SCADA systems

● Learn and explore the state estimation techniques
Syllabus
SCADA: Signal processing and conditioning; Evolution of SCADA- Communication

technologies- Monitoring and supervisory functions; SCADA applications in Utility
Automation; SCADA System Components; Various SCADA architectures; Open standard
communication protocols; Modern trends in power system monitoring and control
Course Outcome:
Students who successfully complete this course will have demonstrated an ability to
understand the fundamental concepts of SCADA and can apply SCADA systems in
various power system applications.
Text Books:
1. Stwart A Boyer, “SCADA: Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition”, ISA Society,
2nd Edition, 1999.
References:
1. Gordan Clarke, Deon Reynders, “Practical Modern SCADA Protocols: DNP3, 60870.5
and Related Systems”, Newnes Publications, Oxford, UK, 2004.
2. Dr. Khedkar M K, Dr. Dhole G M, “A Textbook of Electric Power Distribution
Automation”.
219
COURSE PLAN

CODE
20EEPST134 Power System Monitoring and 3-0-0-3
Instrumentation
MODULES Contact ESE
Hours Marks
(%)
MODULE : 1
SCADA: Signal processing and conditioning- Transducers-

Metering technology – An introduction to supervisory control 8 15
and data acquisition (SCADA) systems. Evolution of SCADA-
Communication technologies- Monitoring and supervisory
functions
MODULE : 2
SCADA applications in Utility Automation- Industries. 6 15
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE : 3
SCADA System Components: Schemes- Remote Terminal Unit

7 15
(RTU)- Intelligent Electronic Devices (IED)-Programmable Logic
Controller (PLC), Communication Network- SCADA Server-
SCADA/HMI Systems.
MODULE : 4
7 15
Various SCADA architectures-Advantages and disadvantages of
each system - single unified standard architecture -IEC 61850
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE : 5
SCADA Communication: Various industrial communication
technologies - Wired and wireless methods and fiber optics- 7 20
Open standard communication protocols.
MODULE : 6
Reliable operations basic functional requirements: Networking
applied to power systems – Online load flow and security analysis 7 20
– State estimation techniques- Automatic load frequency control-
Modern trends in power system monitoring and control.
END SEMESTER EXAM
220

CODE
20EEPST144 Power System Reliability 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
To study the fundamentals of power system reliability analysis
Syllabus
Concept of reliability; Reliability of series-parallel structures; State space method of

system representation; Other methods of system reliability; Planning for reliability; Construction
of reliability models; Generating capacity reserve evaluation; Operating reserve evaluation; Bulk
power system reliability
Course Outcome:
The students will be able to apply probability and reliability theory in power
system problems
Reference Books:
1. EndrenyI J, “Reliability modeling in electric power systems”, John Wiley & Sons.
2. Singh C. and Billiton R., “System reliability modeling and evaluation”, Hutchinston
London, 1977.
221
M.Tech. Syllabus 2020 – Power Systems
COURSE PLAN

CODE
20EEPST144 Power System Reliability 3-0-0-3
MODULES Contact ESE

Hours Marks
(%)
MODULE : 1
Non-repairable components- Hazard models- Components with

8 15
preventive maintenance-Ideal repair and preventive maintenance-
Repairable components- Normal repair and preventive
maintenance.
MODULE : 2
System reliability: Monotonic structures-Reliability of series- 5 15

parallel structures, the ‘r’ out of ‘n’ configuration- the
decomposition methods- Minimal tie and cut method.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE : 3
State space method of system representation- System of two

independent components-Two components with dependent 5 15
failures- Combining states- Non-exponential repair times failure
effects analysis- State enumeration method- Application to non-
repairable systems.
MODULE : 4
State space method of system representation- System of two

independent components-Two components with dependent 6 15
failures- Combining states- Non-exponential repair times failure
effects analysis- State enumeration method- Application to non-
repairable systems.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE : 5
Generating capacity reserve evaluation- Generation model,

Probability of capacity deficiency, Frequency and duration method,
Comparison of the reliability indices, Generation expansion 8 20
planning, Uncertainties in generating unit failure rates and in load
forecasts. Operating reserve evaluation-State space representation
of generating units, Rapid start and hot-reserve units, Security
function approach.
222
MODULE : 6
Interconnected systems: Two connected systems with independent

loads- Two connected system with correlated loads-More than two
systems interconnected.
10 20
Bulk power system reliability: Load flow analysis-DC load flow-

Effect of variable system load- Weather effects on transmission
lines- Two-weather Markov model-Common model failures-
Evaluation of large system-Monte Carlo simulation.
END SEMESTER EXAM
223
COURSE
CODE
20EEPSP101 Mini Project 0-0-4-2 2020
COURSE CONTENT
The mini project is designed to develop practical ability and knowledge about practical
tools/techniques in order to solve the actual problems related to the industry, academic
institutions or similar area. Students can take up any application level/system level project
pertaining to a relevant domain. At the end, presentation and demonstration of the project
should be conducted, which will be evaluated by a panel of examiners.
224

CODE
20EEPSL102 Power Systems Lab 0-0-2-1 2020
Syllabus
List of Experiments
1. Measurement of output voltage of cascade transformer using,
i. Voltage divider method

ii. Sphere gap method
2. Generation of impulse voltage waveform
3. String efficiency of string of suspension insulators.
4. Power frequency testing of lightning arresters, insulators, fuses, AB Switches etc.
5. Measurement of dielectric strength of solid and liquid insulating materials.
6. Determine the characteristic, pick-up time etc. of electromagnetic relay & static relay.
7. Measurement of transient & sub transient reactance of synchronous machines
8. Determine the following for a long transmission line.
a) Voltage regulation of the transmission line
b) Ferranti effect demonstration
c) Voltage and Current profile of EHVAC Transmission line under no load condition
d) ABCD parameter evaluation
9. Plot the IDMT/IMT characteristics of Over current relay, Earth fault relay, Over voltage
relay and Under voltage relay
10. Plot the functional performance characteristics of the relay
11. Plot the performance characteristics for distance relay for the feeder protection.
(Additional experiments/Simulation assignments may be developed by the

Department).
225

CODE
20EEPSD101 Industrial Training 0-0-4-0 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives
1. Expose students to experience and knowledge which is required in industry.

2. Develop an appreciation of the structure and operation of industrial organizations.
3. Understand the role of the engineer and engineering in industry.
4. Appreciate the ethical basis of engineering practice in industry.
5. Appreciate the importance of good communication and interpersonal skills, and to
develop these skills.
Syllabus
The student shall undergo an industrial training for a minimum period of 4 weeks in an industry/
company approved by the institution and under the guidance of a staff member in the concerned
field. The candidate is also expected to familiarize with the general operations in the
organization. At the end of the training he/she has to submit a report on the work being carried
out.
Course Outcome:
1. Get familiarized with the general operations happening in an industry.

2. Get an experience in shaping oneself for entering an industry.
226
M. Tech. Syllabus 2020 – Robotics and Automation
IN
ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
WITH SPECIALIZATION
ROBOTICS AND AUTOMATION
227
M.Tech. Syllabus 2020 – Robotics and Automation
SEMESTER I
COURSE
CODE
Advanced Mathematics and
20ECRAT101 3-0-0-3 2020
Optimization Techniques
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 To introduce the basic ideas of linear algebra and optimization techniques
 To familiarize them with the necessary tools from these fields which have got diverse
applications in applied sciences and engineering
 To provide a strong background on these areas which, besides being important for their
applications, will also be essential for higher studies and research in engineering.
Syllabus
Vector spaces, linear transformation, inner products and orthogonality, linear programming, simplex
methods, integer programming, non-linear optimizations
Course Outcome:
The students will have to

1. Acquire knowledge and practical skills in the application of basic ideas of linear algebra such as
vector spaces, linear transformations, orthogonality and approximations.
2. Learn the use of optimization techniques applicable to linear, non-linearand integer
programming models in various fields of engineering.
Text Books:
1. Richard Bronson, Gabriel B Costa, Linear Algebra- An Introduction, Elsevier, 2/e, 2009.
2. David C. Lay, Linear Algebra, Pearson Education,4/e, 2012
3. Ravindran, Philips, Solberg, Operations Research: Principles and PracticeWiley student Edition,
2007
References:
1. Paneerselvam R., Operations Research, 2/e, Prentice Hall of India, 2010
2. Singiresu S Rao, Engineering Optimization Theory and Practice,3/e, New Age International
Publishers, 2010.
228
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
Advanced Mathematics and Optimization
20ECRAT101 3-0-0-3
Techniques
ESE
Contact
MODULES Marks
Hours
(%)
MODULE 1:
Vector spaces and examples, subspaces, linear independence and spanning sets, 7 15
basis and dimension, co-ordinate representation of vectors
MODULE 2:
Linear transformations, matrix representation of linear transformations, 7 15
properties-kernel and range, change of basis.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3:
Inner product, length of vectors, orthogonal and orthonormal sets and basis,
7 15
Gram-Schmid to orthogonalization, orthogonal projections, Least square
approximations. Singular value decomposition(All results without proof)
MODULE 4:
Linear programming problems, formation of LPP, graphical method of solution- 7 15
Simplex Method, Big M Method, Dual Simplex method.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5:
Integer linear programming- Gomory‘s Cutting plane method, Branch and 7 20
Bound method ,mixed Integer Programming problems, zero-one programming
MODULE 6:
Constrained non-linear Optimization-method of Lagrange multiplier, Kuhn 7 20
Tucher conditions, Quadratic programming
END SEMESTER EXAM
229
COURSE
CODE
20ECRAT103 Robotic System Configuration 3-1-0-4 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 To familiarize students with robot classifications and configurations.
 To acquaint the students with Forward Kinematics and Inverse Kinematics, Trajectory planning,
dynamic modelling, control and applications of robots
Syllabus
Robot anatomy; Robot classifications; Robot specifications; Direct kinematics- theorem equation;
Inverse Kinematics- solving the arm equation; Velocity analysis and statics of manipulators; Dynamics of
manipulators; Workspace analysis and Trajectory planning; Control of manipulators, Robotic Sensors;
Robot applications.
Course Outcome:
Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able to:

1. Obtain kinematic model of a robotic manipulator
2. Develop dynamic model of a robotic manipulator
3. Plan a trajectory in joint space and Cartesian space
4. Do the forward and inverse kinematic analysis
5. To design a controller for a robotic manipulator
Text Books:
1. Robert. J. Schilling, “Fundamentals of robotics – Analysis and control”, Prentice Hall of India
1996.
2. R K Mittal and I J Nagrath, “Robotics and Control”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi,2003.
3. Introduction to Robotics (Mechanics and control), John. J. Craig, Pearson Education Asia 2002.
References:
1. Ashitava Ghosal, “Robotics-Fundamental concepts and analysis”, Oxford University press.

2. John Iovine- “PIC Robotics: A Beginner's Guide to Robotics Projects Using the PIC Micro”,
McGraw Hill.
230
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20ECRAT103 Robotic System Configuration 3-1-0-4
ESE
Contact
MODULES Marks
Hours
(%)
MODULE 1:
Introduction - Definitions, Robot Elements - links, joints, end effector, actuators,
sensors, hydraulic, pneumatic, electric drive systems, Robot specifications, Work
envelope of different robots, Classification of Robots Robot Coordinate Systems- 7 15
Fundamental and composite rotations, homogeneous co-ordinates and
transformations, Kinematic parameters, Direct Kinematics-The D-H
representation.
MODULE 2:
The Arm equation-Kinematic analysis of a typical robot. The inverse kinematics
problem – general properties of solutions, Inverse kinematics of a typical 3 DOF 7 15
Robot. Linear and angular velocities of a rigid body; Manipulator Jacobian; linear
and angular velocities of planar 3Rmanipulator.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3:
Tool configuration vector, Workspace analysis, trajectory planning- steps in
trajectory planning, joint space techniques, Cartesian space techniques, The pick 10 15
and place operation –Continuous path motion, Tool configuration Jacobian
matrix.
MODULE 4:
Manipulator Dynamics - Dynamic model of a robot using Lagrange’s Equation,
12 15
1DOF and 2 DOF manipulator dynamic modelling, State space model of 1 DOF
and 2DOF manipulators. Steps for building servomotor controlled robot arm.
INTERNAL TEST - II
231
MODULE 5:
Feedback control of a single link manipulator- PID control and digital control of
10 20
a single link manipulator; Nonlinear Control - PD gravity control, Computed
torque control, Variable Structure control, Impedance control.
MODULE 6:
Sensors in Robotics- status sensors, environment sensors, quality control sensors,
safety sensors etc. Robot vision - Image representation, Perspective and inverse 10 20
perspective Transformations. Robot Applications- Industrial Applications-
Material handling, Processing, Assembly, Inspection etc.
END SEMESTER EXAM
232
COURSE
CODE
20ECRAT105 Fluid Power Automation 3-1-0-4 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 To reinforce basic ideas of fluid power automation.
 To understand the basic building blocks of pneumatic and hydraulic automation systems will be
dealt with in detail
 To enable the students to design and optimise pneumatic and hydraulic automation schemes.
Syllabus
Classification of drives, Drive characteristics, Direction, flow and pressure control valves, Electro
hydraulic servo valves, Typical Design methods –sequencing circuits design, Electrical control of
pneumatic and hydraulic circuits, Proportional control of hydraulic systems.
Course Outcome:

1. Acquire knowledge and practical skills in the modelling and optimisation of hydraulic and
pneumatic systems which has applications in diverse areas of process and manufacturing
automation.
Text Books:
1. Peter Rohner, Fluid Power Logic Circuit Design, Mcmelan Prem, 1994.
2. Antony Esposito, Fluid Power Systems and control Prentice-Hall, 1988
3. E.C.Fitch and J.B.Suryaatmadyn. Introduction to fluid logic, McGraw Hill, 1978
References:
1. Peter Rohner, Fluid Power logic circuit design. The Macmillan Press Ltd.,London, 1979
2. Herbert R. Merritt, Hydraulic control systems, John Wiley & Sons, Newyork, 1967
3. Dudbey. A. Peace, Basic Fluid Power, Prentice Hall Inc, 1967.2. R. Jacob Baker, Harry W. Li,
David E. Boyce, “CMOS, Circuit Design, Layout, and Simulation”, 3/e, Wiley Inter science.
233
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20ECRAT105 Fluid Power Automation 3-1-0-4
ESE
Contact
MODULES Marks
Hours
(%)
MODULE 1:
Classification of drives-hydraulic, pneumatic and electric –comparison ISO
symbols for their elements, Selection Criteria. Generating Elements-
10 15
Hydraulic
pumps and motor gears, vane, piston pumps-motors-selection and
specification
MODULE 2:
Drive characteristics – Utilizing Elements-- Linear actuator – Types, mounting 8 15
details, cushioning –power packs –accumulators
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3:
Control and regulation Elements—Direction, flow and pressure control
8 15
valves--Methods of actuation, types, sizing of ports. spool valves operating
characteristics.
MODULE 4:
Electro hydraulic servo valves. Different types-characteristics and 8 15
performance.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5:
Typical Design methods –sequencing circuits design -combinational logic 12 20
circuit design-cascade method-Karnaugh map method.
MODULE 6:
Electrical control of pneumatic and hydraulic circuits- use of relays,timers, 9 20
counters, interfacing with PLCs, Proportional control of hydraulic systems
END SEMESTER EXAM
234
COURSE
CODE
Measurements and Sensors for
20ECRAT107 3-0-0-3 2020
Automation
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 To provide the basic understanding about operational characteristics and applications of various
sensors, transducers, measurements and instrumentation.
Syllabus
Introduction to Measurement, Testing & Calibration, Introduction to Sensors, Displacement

Measurement, Pressure Measurement, Temperature Measurement, Flow Measurement, Level
Measurement, Magnetic sensors, Radiation sensors, Feedback transducer system, Advancement in
Sensor technology, MEMS, Nano Sensors, Sensor Signal Conditioning
Course Outcome:
The students will be able to:

1. Use sensors with conditioning circuits for automation systems which has applications in diverse
areas of process and manufacturing automation.
Text Books:
1. K.L. Kishore, “Electronic Measurement and Instrumentation” Pearson .

2. D. Patranabis, “Sensors and Transducers”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., 2nd edition
3. A.K.Ghosh, “Introduction to Measurements and Instrumentation”4th Edition, PHI.
4. D V S Murty, “Transducers and Instrumentation”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd.
5. B. C. Nakra., K. K. Chaudhry, “Instrumentation, Measurement and Analysis”,4th Edition, TMH.
References:
1. W. D. Cooper, “Modern Electronics Instrumentation & Measurement Techniques”, PHI.
2. John. P.Bentley, “Principles of Measurement Systems”, Pearson
3. E.O.Doebelin, Dhanesh N Manik, “Measurement Systems”,6th Edition,Mcgraw Hill Edu.
4. Bolton W., “Mechatronics - Electronic Control Systems in Mechanical & Electrical Engineering”, (2e),
Longman Publishers, 2002.
235
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
Measurements and Sensors for
20ECRAT107 3-0-0-3
Automation
ESE
Contact
MODULES Marks
Hours
(%)
MODULE 1:
Introduction to Measurement: Significance of measurement, Different
methods of measurement, Classification of measuring instruments,
Application of measurement systems, typical measurement schemes. Units
and Standards: MKS, SI units of engineering parameters, Details of different
standards mass, length, time, frequency, temperature, EMF, ampere, 6 15
substandard and lab standards.
Performance Characteristics: Definition of range, span, accuracy,
precision, drift, sensitivity, reproducibility, repeatability, dead zone,
resolution, hysteresis, threshold, zero error, noise, linearity, loading effect,
static characteristics.
MODULE 2:
Dynamic Characteristics: Dynamic response; Transient response; speed
of response, fidelity, measuring lag etc., Linear approximation, Introduction
to compensation techniques. Significance of testing and calibration, 6 15
Calibration curve, Standards for calibration, Different calibration
procedures-primary, secondary, direct, indirect, routine calibration,
Calibration setup: pressure gauge, level etc.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3:
Introduction to Sensors: Definition and differences of sensors and
transducers, Classification, static and dynamic characteristics, electrical
characterization, mechanical and thermal characterization including bath-tub
curve.
Sensors and Transducers: Transducer classification, Active and Passive 6 15
Transducers, Potentiometric Transducers, Linear and nonlinear
potentiometer, Resistance/Bonded Type Strain Gauge.
Displacement Measurement: Linear/Angular displacement, Pneumatic/
Electric/ Optical/ Ultrasonic/ Electronic Displacement Transducers, Tactile
and Proximity Sensors, Typical application schemes.
MODULE 4:
Pressure Measurement: Pressure Units, Force Summing Devices,
Secondary Transducers, Vacuum Measurement, Torque Measurement, 6 15
Tachogenerators. Temperature Measurement: Electric Method, Change
in Electrical Properties, RTD, Thermocouples, Thermistors, Thermowells.
236
nuclear thermometers, resistance change type thermo metric sensors.

Flow Measurement: Reynold Number, Head type flow meters, Velocity
measurement type flow meters, Mass flow measurement type flow meters.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5:
Level Measurements: Importance, advantage and limitation of different
instruments, visual level indicators, float type, Purge method of measuring
level, Buoyancy method, Resistance and capacitance probes for level
measurement, limit switches, level measurement in pressurized vessels, solid
level measurement techniques Magnetic sensors: Basic working principles, 6 20
Magneto strictive, Hall effect, Eddy current type.
Radiation sensors: Photo-detectors, Photo-emissive, photomultiplier,
scintillation detectors. Electro-analytical sensors: Electro-chemical cell, SHE,
Polarization, Reference electrode, Metal electrodes, Membrane electrodes,
Electro-ceramics
MODULE 6:
Feedback transducer system: Inverse transducer, Self-balancing
transducer, Servo operated manometer, Feedback pneumatic load cell,
integrating servo. Advancement in Sensor technology: Introduction to smart
sensors, Film sensors, Introduction to semiconductor IC technology and 6 20
Micro Electro Mechanical System (MEMS), Nano-sensors. Bio-Sensors.
Sensor Signal Conditioning: Amplification/Attenuation using Op-Amp,
Filtering, Protection from high current/Voltage, Wheatstone bridge, ac
bridge, Comparator, Analog to digital conversion, Digital to Analog
Conversion
END SEMESTER EXAM
237
COURSE
CODE
20ECRAT111 Advanced Control Systems 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
1. Acquaint the students with classical and modern control theory
2. Familiarise the students with some real systems, which use automatic control
3. Introduce to students with mathematical modelling of physical systems
4. Introduce students to design of feedback control systems using classical andmodern control
theory.
Syllabus
Open loop and closed loop systems, Modelling of dynamic systems using transfer function, time domain
and frequency domain analysis of dynamic systems, state space analysis, simple controllers for robotic
manipulators.
Course Outcome:

1. Obtain transfer function or state space model of dynamic systems
2. Analyse a system using classical or modern control theory
3. Design simple controllers for a dynamic system
Text Books:
1. Ogata K., Modern Control Engineering, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2010.
2. Nagarath I. J. AndGopal M., Control System Engineering, Wiley Eastern,2008.
References:
1. Dorf R. C. and R. H. Bishop, Modern Control Systems, Pearson Education,2011

2. Nise N. S., Control Systems Engineering, 6/e, Wiley Eastern, 2010.
238
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20ECRAT111 Advanced Control Systems 3-0-0-3
Contact ESE Marks
MODULES
Hours (%)
MODULE 1:
Review of system concepts, linear, non - linear, static, dynamic, time
variant and time invariant, continuous time and discrete time, distributed
and lumped parameter systems. Open loop and closed loop systems. 7 15
Transfer function -T.F of simple- Mechanical and Electromechanical
systems; block diagram representation –block diagram reduction- signal
flow graph- Mason's gain formula -characteristics equation.
MODULE 2:
Time domain analysis of control systems: Transient and steady state
responses -test signals - time domain specifications - first and second
7 15
order systems -impulse and step responses - steady state error analysis –
static error coefficient of type 0,1,2 systems - Dynamic error coefficients
– Design and implementation of PID controllers
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3:
Concept of stability: stability of feedback system - Routh's stability
criterion - Root locus based analysis - Frequency domain analysis: 10 15
Introduction - Bode plot- Frequency domain specifications: stability
analysis using bode plot.
MODULE 4:
State space analysis of systems: Introduction to state concept -state
equation of linear continuous time systems, matrix representation of 12 15
state equations. Phase variable and canonical forms of state
representation
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5:
Solution of time invariant autonomous systems- state transition matrix- 10 20
relationship between state equations and transfer function. Properties of
239
state transition matrix- controllability & observability. State feedback

design viapole placement technique.
MODULE 6:
PID control of single link manipulator, digital control of single link
manipulator, PID control of multi link manipulator, model based control, 10 20
force control of a single mass, partitioning a task for force and position
control, stability analysis of single link manipulator.
END SEMESTER EXAM
240
COURSE
CODE
20ECRAT121 Soft Computing Techniques 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
1. To provide concepts of soft computing and design controllers based on ANN and Fuzzy systems.
2. To identify systems using soft computing techniques.
3. To give an exposure to optimization using genetic algorithm.
4. To provide a knowledge on hybrid systems.
Syllabus
Biological foundations; ANN models; Feed Forward Network; Radial Basis Function; Learning process;
Supervised and unsupervised learning; Least mean square algorithm; Back propagation algorithm;
Applications in pattern recognition and other engineering problems; Case studies; Identification and
control of linear and nonlinear systems; Fuzzy set operations; Fuzzy control systems; Classical fuzzy
control problems; Genetic Algorithm; Adaptive fuzzy systems; Hybrid Systems; Application of soft
computing techniques in physical systems.
Course Outcome:

1. To design a complete feedback system based on ANN or Fuzzy control.
2. To identify systems using soft computing techniques.
3. To use genetic algorithm to find optimal solution to a given problem.
4. To design systems by judiciously choosing hybrid techniques.
Text Books:
1. S.N.Sivanandam, S.N.Deepa, “Principles of Soft Computing”, Wiley India.
2. Dilip Kumar Pratihar, "Soft Computing, Volume 10", Alpha Science International, 2008
References:
1. J. M. Zurada, Introduction to artificial neural systems, Jaico Publishers, 1992.
2. Simon Haykins, Neural Networks - A comprehensive foundation, Macmillan College, Proc, Con,
Inc, New York. 1994.
3. D. Driankov. H. Hellendorn, M. Reinfrank, Fuzzy Control - An Introduction, Narosa Publishing
House, New Delhi, 1993.
4. G. J. Klir, Boyuan, Fuzzy sets and fuzzy logic, Prentice Hall of India (P) Ltd, 1997.
5. Timothy J. Ross, Fuzzy logic with Engineering Applications, McGraw Hill, New York.
6. SuranGoonatilake, SukhdevKhebbal (Eds,), Intelligent hybrid systems, John Wiley & Sons, New
York, 1995.
7. Rajasekaran&Pai, Neural Networks, Fuzzy Logic, and Genetic Algorithms: Synthesis and
Applications, Prentice-Hall of India, 2007.
241
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20ECRAT121 Soft Computing Techniques 3-0-0-3
ESE
Contact
MODULES Marks
Hours
(%)
MODULE 1: Biological foundations
ANN models - Types of activation function - Introduction to Network 7 15
architectures - Multi Layer Feed Forward Network (MLFFN) - Radial Basis
Function Network (RBFN) - Recurring Neural Network (RNN)
MODULE 2: Learning process
Supervised and unsupervised learning - Error correction learning - Hebbian
learning – Boltzmen learning - Single layer and multilayer perceptrons - 8 15
Least mean square algorithm – Back propagation algorithm - Applications in
pattern recognition, Case studies - Identification and control of linear and
nonlinear systems.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3: Fuzzy sets
Fuzzy set operations - Properties - Membership functions, Fuzzy to crisp 7 15
conversion, fuzzification and defuzzification methods, applications in
engineering problems.
MODULE 4: Fuzzy control systems
Introduction - simple fuzzy logic controllers with examples - Special forms 7 15
of fuzzy logic models, classical fuzzy control problems, inverted pendulum,
image processing, home heating system, Adaptive fuzzy systems.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5: Genetic Algorithm
Introduction - Basic concepts working principle – encoding – different
methods – fitness function – reproduction-different methods. Genetic 7 20
modelling- inheritance- Crossover mutation-convergence of genetic
algorithm, applications.
MODULE 6: Hybrid Systems
Adaptive Neuro fuzzy Inference System (ANF1S), Neuro –Genetic, Fuzzy- 8 20
Genetic systems. Case Studies
END SEMESTER EXAM
242
COURSE
CODE
Artificial Intelligence and Expert
20ECRAT131 3-0-0-3 2020
Systems in Automation
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
1. Introduces the different algorithms that can be applied in Artificial Intelligence.
2. Impart an idea about how these algorithms can be used to solve Engineering problems
Syllabus
Introduction to AI, Knowledge representation, Expert system & Search, Search techniques
Computer Vision, Advanced Topics- Machine Learning Genetic Algorithm – Neural Networks
Course Outcome:
Students will able to design

1. Expert systems for knowledge representation,
2. Neural networks for knowledge organization
3. Search techniques for knowledge manipulation in Engineering Application.
Text Books:
1. Alison Cawsey, The Essence of Artificial Intelligence, Prentice Hall Europe, 1998
2. Charniak& McDermott, Introduction to Artificial Intelligence, International Student Edition,
Addison Wesley, 1998.
3. Dan W Patterson, Introduction to Artificial Intelligence and Expert Systems, Prentice Hall of
India, New Delhi 1992.
4. Winston, Artificial Intelligence, Addison-Wesley, 1992
References:
1. Nilsson, Principles of Artificial Intelligence, Narosa, 1998

2. Elian Rich, Artificial Intelligence, McGraw Hill, 1991
3. Robert J. Schalkoff, Artificial Intelligence an Engineering Approach, McGraw Hill, 1990.
243
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
Artificial Intelligence and Expert Systems in
20ECRAT131 3-0-0-3
Automation
Contact ESE Marks
MODULES
Hours (%)
MODULE 1:
Introduction to AI – Definition – Typical AI Problems – Knowledge
representation and search – philosophical issues – Requirements of 7 15
knowledge representation languages – semantic Networks – Frames –
Predicate Logic – Rule Based Systems – Forward and Backward chaining –
Comparison of different – representation methods.
MODULE 2:
Expert system & Search – Heuristic – Knowledge Engineering – expert
System – Designing an Expert System – Backward chaining – Rule based 7 15
expert systems – Explanation facilities – Bayers’s theorem – case study of
MYCIN
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3:
Search techniques, Breadth first search, depth first search, Heuristic 7 15
search – Hill climbing, Best – first – search, A* algorithm
MODULE 4:
Graphs and Tree Representation. Problem solving as search, Planning, 7 15
Game planning – Minimax and alpha – beta proving. Searching AND –OR
Graph, Optimal Search – The Best path and Redundant Path
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5:
Computer Vision – Different levels of vision processing – Low level 8 20
processing edge deletion line filling – depth & Orientation information–
Object recognition – Practical vision system
MODULE 6:
Advanced Topics – Machine Learning – Introduction – Genetic Algorithm 8 20
– Neural Networks – Back propagation – Multi layer network –
Applications – Software agents – Robots – different types – applications.
END SEMESTER EXAM
244
COURSE
CODE
20ECRAT141 Human Robo Interface 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Basic knowledge in Robotics and Robotic configurations
Course Objectives:
1. To familiarize the students about human Robotic Interfacing systems
2. To provide knowledge on Human-centred robotic systems and its programming and design.
Syllabus
Human Robot Interface, History, Human Robot Collaboration System, Human factors in robot teach
programming, Types of teaching, Care Robots, Robotics in rehabilitation and assistance, Design of
human-centred robotic systems, Human error reduction strategies in advanced manufacturing systems.
Course Outcome:

1. Understand the operations of Human Robot Interfacing
2. Understand the Human Robot interface programs
3. Design human centred Robot
4. Understand the design strategies by considering the human factors
Text Books:
1. Mansour Rahimi, Waldemar Karwowski, “Human-Robot Interaction”, Taylor & Francis (1992)
References:
1. http://humanrobotinteraction.org
2. Helge Ritter, Gerhard Sagerer, Rüdiger Dillmann, and Martin Buss, “Human Centered Robot
Systems: Cognition, Interaction, Technology”, Springer
245
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20ECRAT141 Human Robo Interface 3-0-0-3
Contact ESE
MODULES
Hours Marks (%)
MODULE 1:Introduction to Human Robot Interface: A historical
perspective- Emergence of HRI as a Field- Early History of Robotics and
7 15
HRI- Design Guidelines for Human-Robot Collaboration- Human Robot
Collaboration System Architecture.
MODULE 2: Human factors in robot teach programming:
Elements of a robot system, Robot teaching: On-line programming-
Lead-through teaching- Teach pendant programming- Textual
7 15
programming languages in the on-line mode, Off-line programming:
Elements of off-line programming, Robot programming languages- Basics
of Robot programming language design.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3: Care Robots, Robotics in rehabilitation and
assistance- Control by teaching: the system and the task- Experiments 7 15
in human understanding and control of robot systems.
MODULE 4: Ergonomics of human-robot motion control-
Characteristics of the TES/WCS- Construction of the TES/WCS-
7 15
Improvement of the robot motion control- Coordinate reading for
calculation of inherent data.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5: Design of human-centred robotic systems- Human-
8 20
centred technology- Development of initial design proposals.
MODULE 6: Human error reduction strategies in advanced
manufacturing systems: Hazards in robot systems- Incidents in
8 20
advanced manufacturing systems- Human aspects of robot systems-
Safety recommendations.
END SEMESTER EXAM
246
COURSE
CODE
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 To get introduced to research philosophy and processes in general.

 To formulate the research problem and prepare research plan
 To apply various numerical /quantitative techniques for data analysis
 To communicate the research findings effectively
Syllabus
Collection and Analysis, Quantitative Techniques and Mathematical Modelling, Report Writing
Course Outcome:

Text Books:
Publisher, 2004
Ltd; Third Edition
References:
Company Ltd, 2004
4. Management Research Methodology’ by K. N. Krishnaswamy et al, Pearson Education.
247
COURSE PLAN
Contact
MODULES
Hours
MODULE 1:
MODULE 2:
Criteria of Good Research, Research Problem, Selection of a problem, 4
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3:
MODULE 4:
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5:
acknowledgement
MODULE 6:
techniques
248
COURSE
CODE
20ECRAQ101 Seminar - I 0-0-2-2 2020
COURSE CONTENT
Course Objectives:
To make students
1. Identify the current topics in the specific stream.
2. Collect the recent publications related to the identified topics.
3. Do a detailed study of a selected topic based on current journals, published papers and books.
4. Present a seminar on the selected topic on which a detailed study has been done.
5. Improve the writing and presentation skills.
Expected Outcome:
Upon successful completion of the seminar, the student should be able to
1. Get good exposure in the current topics in the specific stream.
2. Improve the writing and presentation skills.
3. Explore domains of interest so as to pursue the course project.
Approach:
Each student shall present a seminar on any topic of interest related to the core / elective courses
offered in the first semester of the M. Tech. Programme. He / she shall select the topic based on the
References: from international journals of repute, preferably IEEE journals. They should get the paper
approved by the Programme Co-ordinator / Faculty member in charge of the seminar and shall present
it in the class. Every student shall participate in the seminar. The students should undertake a detailed
study on the topic and submit a report at the end of the semester. Marks will be awarded based on the
topic, presentation, participation in the seminar and the report submitted.
249
COURSE
CODE
20ECRAL101 Automation Lab 0-0-2-1 2020
Pre-requisites:
Basic knowledge of electrical circuits and components like relays, timers, proximity sensors, etc.
Course Objectives:
This laboratory aims to introduce the various elements of automation namely actuators and sensors. It
also enables the students to plan, design and optimise logic circuits using these basic elements.
Course Outcome:
After completing the laboratory, the students will be able to design and build automation logic circuits
using the basic elements.
COURSE CONTENT
Tools: PLC/ SENSOR UNITS/ PNEUMATIC HYDRAULIC UNITS/

LABVIEW/ MATLAB
Experiments:
Exercises on Hydraulic circuits.
Usage of DCVs in hydraulic logic.
Experiments on electro-hydraulics.
Exercises on pneumatic circuits.
Cylinder sequencing using pneumatic circuits.
Experiments on Electro pneumatics.
Simulation of Pneumatic and Hydraulic Circuits using Software
Experiments using Different Sensors.
Calibration of sensors
Characteristics of Actuators
Automatic Control using PID Controllers
250
SEMESTER II
COURSE
CODE
20ECRAT102 Industrial Automation 3-1-0-4 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 To identify the managerial concepts behind industrial automation and to justify the need of
industrial automation.
 To identify the different hard ware components required for automation.
 To identify the information technology components in automation.
Syllabus
Automation methodologies: Concepts – Types of Automation Trends in manufacturing –Flexible

manufacturing systems –computer integrated manufacturing – Automated assembly systems. CNC
systems: CNC Mechanical systems Material Handling Systems. Group Technology and cellular
manufacturing CAP Inspection automation: Inspection automation, CMMs, online inspection systems,
Communication systems for Automation – Computer networks and protocols. DFMA.
Course Outcome:

1. To identify potential areas for automation and justify need for automation
2. To select suitable major control components required to automate a process or an activity
3. To translate and simulate a real time activity using modern tools
4. To identify suitable automation hardware for the given application.
Text Books:
1. YoramKoren, “Computer Control of Manufacturing Systems”,Tata McGrawHillEdition2005.

2. Automation, Production Systems and Computer Integrated Manufacturing-M.P.Groover, Pearson
Education.5th edition, 2009.
3. W.Bolton, “Mechatronics: A MultidisciplinaryApproach,4/E”, Pearson
References:
1. “Mechatronics”, HMT, TataMcGraw-Hill,1998.

2. Computer Based Industrial Control- Krishna Kant, EEE-PHI,2nd edition,2010
3. Product Design for Manufacture and Assembly, Third Edition (Manufacturing Engineering and
Materials Processing) -Geoffrey Boothroyd Peter Dewhurst , Winston A. Knight- CRC Press.
4. Chapman and Hall, “Standard Handbook of Industrial Automation”, Onsidine DMC & Onsidine
GDC”, N J, 1986
251
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20ECRAT102 Industrial Automation 3-1-0-4
Contact ESE Marks
MODULES
Hours (%)
MODULE 1:
Introduction: Automation in Production System, Principles and
Strategies of Automation, Basic Elements of an Automated System, 7 15
Levels of Automations. Flow lines& Transfer Mechanisms,
Fundamentals of Transfer Lines
MODULE 2:
Numerical control- concepts- evolution - CNC Structure of CNC
machines, components, ball screw sand guide ways. Spindle, bearings 8 15
and mountings. Drive systems. Automated tool changers and pallet
changers. Accessories
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3:
Material handling and Identification Technologies:
Overview of Material Handling Systems, Principles and Design 7 15
Consideration, Material Transport Systems, Storage Systems,
Overview of Automatic Identification Methods.
MODULE 4:
Automated Manufacturing Systems: Components,
Classification and Overview of Manufacturing Systems, Manufacturing 7 15
Cells, GT and Cellular Manufacturing, FMS, CIM .Quality Control
Systems: Traditional and Modern Quality Control Methods,
Inspection Principles and Practices, Inspection Technologies.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5:
Control Technologies in Automation: Industrial Control
Systems, Process Industries Versus Discrete Manufacturing Industries,
Continuous Versus Discrete Control. Introduction & Automatic 8 20
Process Control, Building Blocks of Automation Systems: LAN,
Analog & Digital I/O Modules, SCADA Systems & RTU. Distributed
Control System: Functional Requirements, Configurations
MODULE 6:
Design for Manufacture, Assembly and Automation. Design 7 20
considerations for automaton. Poka Yoke principles for automation
END SEMESTER EXAM
252
COURSE
CODE
Programmable Logic Control and
20ECRAT104 3-0-0-3 2020
Computer Numerical Control
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 To provide a thorough understanding about Programmable Logic Control and Computer
Numerical Control.
Syllabus
Introduction to Logic Circuits, Programmable Logic Controller Architecture, PLC programming

methods, Ladder Programming, Programming Style, Communication links for PLC, Fundamentals of
Numerical Control, Classification, Features of NC machine tools, Interpolation, Control loops for
CNC, Manual part programming, Computer aided programming, APT programming, Direct
Numerical Control, Distributive numerical control.
Course Outcome:
1. Acquire knowledge and skills in using PLCs, Ladder programming, CNC machines, Manual part
programming and Computer Aided Programming.
Text Books:
1. Programmable Logic Devices and Logic Controllers, Enrique Mandado, Jorge Marcos, Serafin A.
Peres, Prentice Hall, 1996.
2. Introduction to Programmable Logic Controllers, Gray Dunning, Delamar Thomson
Learning,1998.
3. Programmable Controllers – An Engineers’s Guide, 2ndEdition, E.A. Parr, Newnes, 1999.
4. Programmable controllers, Hardware, Software & Applications, George L. Batten Jr.,
McGrawHill, 2ndEdition, 1994.
References:
1. Koren Y., Computer Control of Manufacturing Systems, McGraw Hill, 1983.

2. DevdasShetty& Richard A Kolk - Mechatronics System Design – PWS Publishing Company
3. Mechatronics – HMT Ltd., TMH
4. Bolton-Mechatronics- Pearson-Fourth edn.
253
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
Programmable Logic Control and
20ECRAT104 3-0-0-3
Computer Numerical Control
Contact ESE Marks
MODULES
Hours (%)
MODULE 1:
Introduction to logic circuits, Logic Controllers – Combinational and
Sequential Logic Controllers - Synchronous and asynchronous logic 6 15
controllers –Design examples- Non modular, Modular and Semi-
modular logic controllers.
MODULE 2:
Programmable Logic Controllers – Basic PLC with Load and Store
operations, PLC with Conditional Instructions – Input and Output
6 15
modules – Discrete AC/DC and Analog Input/ Output – Modular
PLC -Relays for Logic Control – Relay Diagrams – PLC programming
Methods – IEC 1133-3 standard –Ladder programming.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3:
Program and Data organisation in PLC – Basic relay instructions –
Timers and Counters –Comparison and data handling – Sequencer 6 15
instructions. Programming Style – Top Down design – Proprietary
and Standard communication links for PLC – PROFIBUS.
MODULE 4:
Fundamentals of numerical control - advantages of NC systems -
classification of NC systems - point to point and contouring
systems - NC and CNC incremental and absolute systems open 6 15
loop and closed loop systems - features of NC machine tools-
fundamentals of machining. Introduction to Modern CNC
Machines - Advantages of CNC Machines.
INTERNAL TEST - II
254
MODULE 5:
Interpolation – linear interpolator - circular interpolators Complete
interpolator - Control Loops for CNC – CNC software 6 20
interpolator. Manual part programming examples - point to point
programming and simple contour programming, canned cycles.
MODULE 6:
Computer aided programming - concepts - APT programming –
part programming examples Geometric definitions- cutter
6 20
motion definitions- postprocessor statements- generation and
execution of APT programs. Direct Numerical Control (DNC),
Distributive Numerical control, DNC software.
END SEMESTER EXAM
255
COURSE
CODE
Control, Programming and
20ECRAT106 3-0-0-3 2020
Calibrations of Robots
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
1. To familiarize students with different control schemes for robots

2. To acquaint the students with programming of robots
3. To familiarize students with calibration of robots
Syllabus
Control of Robots in task space, Passivity based control, Compliant motion control, Hybrid position and
force control, Control of mobile robots and quadcopters to track different trajectories, Vision based
Control- Position based visual servoing, Image based visual servoing, Hybrid visual servoing.
Programming of robots using BASIC, VAL, RAPID, ROS. Fundamental algorithms in MATLAB for
modelling and control of robots. Robot calibration methods.
Course Outcome:
1. Design controllers for robotic manipulator in task space

2. Develop hybrid position and force controllers
3. Develop vision based controllers
4. Program robots using BASIC, VAL, RAPID & ROS
5. Implement trajectory tracking controllers for mobile robots and quadcopters
6. Path planning and localization of UGVs
7. Calibrate robotic manipulators for a particular application
Text Books:
1. Bruno Siciliano, Lorenzo Sciavicco, and Luigi Villani, “Robotics: Modelling, Planning and
Control”, Springer Publishing Company, 2008.
2. S R Deb, “Robotics Technology and Flexible Automation”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi,
2005.
3. Wisama Khalil, Etienne Dombre, “Modelling, Identification and Control ofRobots”, Taylor
& Francis, 2002.
256
References:
1. Peter Corke, “Robotics, Vision and Control-Fundamental Algorithms in MATLAB”,

Springer Tracts in Advanced Robotics, volume 73.
2. Z S Roth, B W Mooring B Ravani, “An overview of Robot Calibration”, IEEE Journal of
Robotics and Automation, October 1987.
257
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20ECRAT106 Control, Programming and Calibrations of Robots 3-0-0-3
ESE
Contact
MODULES Marks
Hours
(%)
MODULE 1:
Control of robotic manipulators in task space- PID Control and Computed
torque control, Passivity based position control and tracking control,
compliant motion control, Hybrid position and force control, Resolved 7 15
rate motion control. Selection of motors for robotic manipulators & AGVs,
Control of different electric drives - DC Motor, servo motor, stepper motor,
BLDC motor. Implementation of PID controller.
MODULE 2:
Kinematic model of steered robot and differentially driven mobile robot,
Control of a mobile robot to move to a point, to follow a line, following a 6 15
path, moving to a pose, Dynamic model of quadcopter- Controller design to
track any desired trajectory.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3:
Vision based Control- configuration of a vision system, image
segmentation, image interpretation, Pose estimation, Stereo vision, Camera 7 15
Calibration, Position based visual servoing, Image based visual servoing,
Hybrid visual servoing.
MODULE 4:
Robot Programming-classification of robot languages, teaching and Offline
programming, programming using BASIC, programming using VAL-
representing robot locations, trajectory control, monitor commands. RAPID 8 15
language basic commands- Motion Instructions-Pick and place operation using
Industrial robot- manual mode, automatic mode. Robot Studio- Create a
mechanism, auto path control, collision control, reachability, editing and
258
debugging, Introduction to ROS and simple programming examples.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5:
Fundamental algorithms in MATLAB- for trajectory generation- one
dimensional and multidimensional case, trajectory tracking, Navigation-
7 20
reactive navigation, Map based planning, Localization- Dead reckoning,
Monte-Carlo Localization, Kinematic & Dynamic modeling, Control of
robots.
MODULE 6:
Robot Calibration methods- level 1, 2, 3 calibration with model,
measurement, identification and correction, Manual Calibration, Bulls eye –
7 20
calibration of Tool Centre Point, Calibration by Force Control, Laser
based Calibration, Absolute accuracy, PosEye, Calibration of work object
coordinate system.
END SEMESTER EXAM
259
COURSE
CODE
20ECRAT112 System Analysis and Design 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: NIL
Course Objectives:
1. To apply system concepts to solve problems in industrial and business organizations.
2. To model and simulate discrete event systems.
3. To study the tools for modeling and simulating dynamic systems.
Syllabus
Introduction to System Simulation – Random Numbers – Random number generators – Generation of
Random deviates – Input modeling – Verification and validation of simulation models - Analysis of
Simulation outputs - Structure and Behaviour of Dynamic systems – Tools for systems thinking –
Elements of system dynamics modeling – Steps in SD modeling – Overview of computer simulation
languages and packages.
Course Outcome:
1. The student will have an understanding of real life systems with interacting components,
elements and sub-systems, modelling and analysis of these interacting components and elements
in a system and the system as a whole.
2. The student will be able to conduct experiments on the system models and to predict the
system behaviour at different environments and input states and parameter settings and to find
out the best suited system parameter settings to meet the predefined objectives
Text and Reference Books:
1. Geoffrey Gordon, “System Simulation”, PHI
2. Narsingh Deo, “System Simulation with Digital Computer”, PHI
3. J. Banks, “Discrete Event System Simulation”, Pearson Education
4. Fishman – John, “Concepts and Methods in Discrete Event Digital; Simulation”, Willey &
Sons
5. Sterman, “Business Dynamics”, McGraw Hill
6. Mohapatra, “System Dynamics”, PHI
7. Ogata, “System Dynamics”, Pearson Education
260
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20ECRAT112 System Analysis and Design 3-0-0-3
Contact ESE Marks
MODULES
Hours (%)
MODULE 1:
Introduction to System Simulation: System approach to problem
7 15
solving, Steps in simulation study, Comparison of simulation and
numerical methods, Monte Carlo simulation.
MODULE 2:
Random Numbers: Properties, Generation of Pseudo-Random
7 15
numbers – Random number generators, Tests for random numbers –
Frequency, Run, Gap, Autocorrelation and Poker tests.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3:
Generation of Random Deviates: Inverse Transformation method -
Exponential, Uniform, Weibull, Triangular, and discrete distributions,
7 15
Direct transformation method for the Normal and Lognormal
distributions, Acceptance- rejection technique - Poisson and Gamma
distributions.
MODULE 4:
Input modeling - data collection, identifying the distribution with the
collected data, goodness of fit tests, Verification and Validation of
7 15
simulation models, Analysis of simulation Outputs. Discrete event
simulation techniques - Next- Event approach and Fixed Time
Increment methods.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5:
Structure and Behaviour of Dynamic systems: Fundamental modes of
dynamic behaviour – Exponential growth, goal seeking, oscillation and
8 20
process point, Interactions of fundamental modes.
Tools for Systems thinking - Causal loop diagramming, Behaviour of
low order systems - Analytical approach.
261
MODULE 6:
Elements of System Dynamics Modeling: Physical flows, Information
flows, Level & Rate variables, Flow diagrams, Delays, Information
smoothing, Table functions and Table function multipliers, First order
positive and negative feedback systems, Second order systems. 8 20
Steps in system dynamics modeling: Problem identification/
conceptualization, fixing model aggregates and boundary, principles of
simulation modeling, Developing model equations. Overview of
computer simulation languages and packages
END SEMESTER EXAM
262

Condition Monitoring and
20ECRAT122 3-0-0-3 2020
Maintenance Engineering
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
1. To introduce Various predictive maintenance techniques

2. To familiarize the Destructive and Non-destructive testing techniques
3. Analysis and remedial of condition monitoring and maintenance of various machinery in plants.
Syllabus
Introduction to Machine Condition Monitoring and Condition Based Maintenance, Fundamentals of

Machinery Vibration and Rotor dynamics, Vibration & Noise Monitoring, Digital Signal Processing &
Instrumentation, Condition monitoring Techniques, Machine Tool Condition Monitoring.
Course Outcome:
1. Students must be able to apply predictive maintenance techniques.

2. Students must be able to handle the maintenance of industrial machinery in plants.
Text Books:
1. Machinery Condition Monitoring, Principles & Practices, Amiya R. Mohanty, CRC Press,2017.
2. Vibration Based Condition Monitoring, Robert Bond Randall, John Wiley Publication-2010
References:
1. Mechanical Fault diagnosis and condition monitoring- R.A.Collacott

2. First Course on Condition monitoring in the process Industry, Manchester, Edited by M.JNeale.
3. Condition Monitoring Manual- National Productivity Council, New Delhi
4. Condition Monitoring Using Computational Intelligence Method, Tshilidzi Marwala, Springer
Publications, ISBN-978-4471-2379-8, 2012
263
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
Condition Monitoring and Maintenance
20ECRAT122 3-0-0-3
Engineering
Contact ESE Marks
MODULES
Hours (%)
MODULE 1:
Introduction to condition monitoring and fault diagnosis –Machinery 7 15
failure, Type and cause – Frequency of failure- Bath-tub curve- Basic
Maintenance strategies.
MODULE 2:
Characteristics of Vibrating systems- Vibration of continuous systems
Mode shape and operational deflection shapes- Experimental modal 7 15
analysis- Simple rotor disc systems and critical 15 speed-Condition
monitoring of large rotor systems
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3:
Vibration monitoring- Misalignment and eccentricity detection-
Bearing fault- Gear fault- Cavitation induced vibration in fluid 7 15
machines – Noise measurement: Decibel scale – relationship between
pressure, intensity and power – Noise source
MODULE 4:
Introduction- Classification of signals-Frequency domain- Signal
Analysis-Fourier series-Discrete Fourier Transforms – Fundamentals 9 15
of FFT, Auto power spectrum– Frequency Response Spectrum – Basic
Measuring Equipments for Vibration, Force, Rotational speed
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5:
Introduction- Radiography- Ultrasound Testing- Thermography-Wear 7 20
Debris Analysis- Eddy current Testing – Acoustic Emission
MODULE 6:
Introduction- Case studies of condition monitoring in Process & 8 20
Manufacturing industry. Bend Pulley Failure Analysis, Vibration
measurement on a multi 20 -stage gearbox drive set.
END SEMESTER EXAM
264
COURSE
CODE
20ECRAT132 Control of Industrial Drives 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Basic Control System
Course Objectives:
The objective of the course is to introduce various control schemes of dc drives, scalar and vector
control of induction motor drives, control of synchronous motor drives, and control of brushless dc and
ac motor drives
Syllabus
Separately Excited DC Motors and DC series motors: system model-braking-speed control motor
dynamics DC Drives-fully controlled and half-controlled rectifier drives- closed loop control of DC
drives--micro computer control of DC drives Three Phase Induction Motors –equivalent circuit-braking-
speed control-variable voltage operation-variable frequency operation-constant volts/Hz operation-
Voltage source inverter drives-Pulse Width Modulated inverter drives space vector PWM drives-CSI
drives-slip power recovery drives-Vector control- Direct Torque Control (DTC). Synchronous Motor
Drives -Volt/hertz control of synchronous motor-closed loop operation-self-controlled synchronous
motors Switched Reluctance Motor Drives. Permanent Magnet Brushless DC motor Drives, Sensor less
Speed Control of DC and AC Drives.
Course Outcome:
Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able to understand various control schemes
for AC and DC drives
Reference Books:
1. Bimal K Bose, 'Modern Power Electronics and AC Drives" , Pearson Education Asia,2003
2. Dubey G K. 'Power Semiconductor Controlled Drives' , Prentice-Hall, New Jersey, 1989
3. Peter Vas, “Sensorless Vector and Direct Control' , Oxford London, 1998
4. NK De,PK Sen, 'Electrical Drives' , Prentice-Hall of India, 2002
5. T J.E Miller,’ Brushless PM and Reluctance Motor Drives' ,C. Larendon Press, Oxford
265
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20ECRAT132 Control of Industrial Drives 3-0-0-3
Contact ESE Marks
MODULES
Hours (%)
MODULE 1:
Separately Excited DC Motors and DC series motors: system model, 6 15
speed torque characteristics- starting- braking- speed control- motor
dynamics
MODULE 2:
DC Drives-fully controlled rectifier drives- inverter operation- Half
controlled rectifier drives- single quadrant-two quadrant and four
quadrant drives-power in load and source circuits- closed loop 8 15
control of DC drives-transfer function- micro computer control of
DC drives- block diagram and flowchart
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3:
Three Phase Induction Motors -equivalent circuit- braking- speed
control-variable voltage operation-variable frequency operation 7 15
(review)- constant volts/ Hz operation-Voltage source inverter drives-
Pulse Width Modulated inverter drives.
MODULE 4:
Space vector PWM drives- CSI drives- slip power recovery drives-
Vector control- DC drive analogy- direct vector control- indirect 7 15
vector control- Direct Torque Control (DTC)
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5:
Synchronous Motor Drives -Volt/hertz control of synchronous 7 20
motor-closed loop operation- self-controlled synchronous motors
MODULE 6:
Switched Reluctance Motor Drives. Permanent Magnet Brushless DC 7 20
motor Drives, Sensor less Speed Control of DC and AC Drives.
END SEMESTER EXAM
266
COURSE
CODE
Design of Power Electronic
20ECRAT142 3-0-0-3 2020
System
Pre-requisites: Basic Electronics
Course Objectives:
To enable the students to design control circuits and cooling system for power electronics
based system
Syllabus
Design of gate and base drive circuits, snubber circuits and het sink design concepts,
Demonstration Design
Course Outcome:
The students can design the control and cooling circuits for the power electronic circuits.
Text Books:
1. Ned Mohan, Tore M. Undeland and William P.Riobbins, “ Power Electronics—Converters,
Applications and Design” Third Edition, John Wiley and Sons. Inc2014
2. Muhammad H. Rashid, “ Power Electronics, Circuits, Devices and Application”’ Third
Edition, Prentice Hall of India Private Limited, 2004
3. Joseph Vithayathil, “ Power Electronics-Principle and Applications’’ , Tata McGraw Hill
Education Pvt Ltd, 2010.
4. Barry W. Williams, “Principles of Elements of Power Electronics Devices, Drivers,
Applications and Passive Components”, Barry W. Williams, 2006.
5. Daniel W. Hart, “Power Electronics”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2011.
267
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20ECRAT142 Design of Power Electronic System 3-0-0-3
ESE
Contact
MODULES Marks
Hours
(%)
MODULE 1:
Design of Gate and Base Drive Circuits: Design consideration, dc –
coupled drive circuits isolated drive circuits, cascade-connected drive 7 15
circuits Thyristor drive circuits power device protection in drive circuits
layout considerations.
MODULE 2:
Snubber circuits: Function and type of Snubber circuits, diode snubbers 7 15
thyristor snubber circuits, Transistor snubber circuits
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3:
Turn off and turn-on snubber, overvoltage snubber, snubber for bridge 7 15
circuit configurations, GTO snubber considerations.
MODULE 4:
Cooling and Design of heat sinks: Control of device temperature, heat
7 15
transfer by conduction, heat sinks, heat transfer by radiation and
Convection
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5:
Demonstration Design: Typical specification of power converters, EMI 8 20
and layout fundamentals, design of power circuits to meet specification
MODULE 6:
Design of resonant inverters, switch mode converter, single phase ac-dc 8 20
inverter.
END SEMESTER EXAM
268
COURSE
CODE
Sustainable and Translational
20ECRAT152 3-0-0-3 2020
Engineering
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
The purpose of this course is:-

1. To bring in to focus the basics aspects of sustainable development.
2. To have a general understanding on global environmental issues and the differentaspects
involved in Green Technology.
Syllabus
History and emergence of the concept of Sustainable Development; Economic dimensions,

Environmental dimension; Framework for sustainability, assessment of sustainable performance;
Industrialization, Globalization and Environment; Global environmental issues; Waste land reclamation,
Resource degradation, carbon credits and Carbon trading – Carbon footprint; Energy: Conventional and
renewable sources, Green buildings, green materials, Technology and sustainable development,
Sustainable urbanization, Industrial Ecology.
Course Outcome:
The student will be able to

1. Understand the concept of sustainable development
2. To have an insight in to global environmental issues
3. Understand the different aspects of green Technology
Text Books:
1. Kurian Joseph & R. Nagendran’ Essential Environmental studies’. Pearson education, New Delhi,
2004.
2. S.C Bhatia, Environmental Pollution and Control in Chemical Process Industries, Khanna
3. Kirkby, J.O’ Keefe, P. and Timberlake, Sustainable Development, Earthscan Publication, London,
1996.
References:
1. Mackenthun, K.M., Basic Concepts in Environmental Management, Lewis Publication, London,

1998.
2. S.S Purohit ,Green Technology-An approach for sustainable environment, Agrobiospublication,
India, 2008.
3. Twidell, J. W. and Weir, A. D., Renewable Energy Resources, English Language BookSociety
(ELBS) Publishers, Delhi, 2005.
269
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20ECRAT152 Sustainable and Translational Engineering 3-0-0-3
Contact ESE Marks
MODULES
Hours (%)
MODULE 1:
History and emergence of the concept of Sustainable Development –
6 15
Framework of Sustainability, economic dimensions, environmental
dimension
MODULE 2:
Framework for achieving sustainability, assessment of sustainable 7 15
performance, Industrialization – Globalization and Environment
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3:
Global environmental issues: - desertification –– green house gases-
6 15
greenhouse effect, ozone layer depletion- global warming – acid rain –
deforestation.
MODULE 4:
Waste land reclamation-Resource degradation, carbon credits and
7 15
Carbon trading-International summits- conventions-agreements-trans
boundary issues- Carbon footprint
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5:
Energy sources: Basic concepts-Conventional and non-conventional,
9 20
solar energy, Fuel cells, Wind energy, Small hydro plants, bio-fuels,
Energy derived from oceans, Geothermal energy.
MODULE 6:
Green buildings, Sustainable cities, Sustainable Urbanisation
9 20
Sustainable transport, Green Engineering, Industrial Ecology, Industrial
symbiosis.
END SEMESTER EXAM
270
COURSE
CODE
20ECRAT162 Design of Embedded Systems 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
1. To explore the concepts of embedded system design

2. To Study about embedded system design and its analysis
3. To Study about software development tools
Syllabus
Characteristics of embedded computing applications, design process, Embedded Computing Platform
CPU bus-memory devices-I/O device, Program Design and Analysis, basic compilation techniques, design
methodologies, Introduction to assembler, compiler, cross-compiler, linker and integrated development
environment debugging strategies-simulators-emulators-logic analysers
Course Outcome:
1. Understand the concepts of embedded system design
2. Understand software development tools
3. Understand ,Analyze embedded system design and its applications
Text Books:
1. Wayne Wolf, “Computers as Components-Principles of Embedded Computing System Design”,

Morgan Kaufman Publishers, 2008.
2. David E. Simon, “An Embedded Software Primer”, Pearson Education, 2004.
3. Frank Vahid and Tony Givargi,”Embedded System Design: A Unified Hardware/Software
Introduction”, John Wiley & Sons, 2001.
References:
1. Steve Heath, “Embedded System Design”, Elsevier science, 2003.

2. Arnold S. Berger, “Embedded System Design: An Introduction to Processors”
271
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20ECRAT162 Design of Embedded Systems 3-0-0-3
ESE
Contact
MODULES Marks
Hours
(%)
MODULE 1:
Introduction- characteristics of embedded computing applications-
challenges in embedded computing design – design process:
8 15
requirements- specification architecture design- designing hardware
and software components- system integration and testing structural
description behavioural description.
MODULE 2:
The Embedded Computing Platform CPU bus-memory devices- I/O
7 15
devices- component interfacing- development and debugging-testing-
design examples – alarm clock.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3:
Program Design and Analysis Introduction- design patterns- data flow 6 15
graph- control /data flow graphs- assembly and linking.
MODULE 4:
Basic compilation techniques- analysis and optimization of execution
8 15
time, energy, power and program size program validation and testing-
design examples :software modem
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5:
System Design Techniques Introduction- design methodologies-
8 20
requirement analysis - specifications- system analysis and architecture
design-quality assurance
MODULE 6:
Software Development and Tools, Introduction to assembler,
compiler, cross-compiler, linker and integrated development 10 20
environment debugging strategies- simulators- emulators- logic
analysers - : introduction to JTAG.
END SEMESTER EXAM
272
COURSE
CODE
Digital Image Processing and
20ECRAT172 3-0-0-3 2020
Computer Vision
Pre-requisites: NIL
Course Objectives:
1. Understand the various steps in digital image processing.
2. Get a thorough understanding of digital image representation and processing techniques.
3. Ability to process the image in spatial and transform domain for better enhancement
Syllabus
Image processing fundamentals, Two-dimensional transform techniques, Image representation and
sampling, Image enhancement techniques, Image restoration techniques, Image and video compression
standards, Image description and recognition, Mathematical morphology, Computer
tomography, Image texture analysis
Course Outcome:
1. Understand various techniques for image representation

2. Understand various low level image processing techniques including reconstruction
3. from Projections
4. Understand the fundamentals of high level image processing
Text Books:
1. Gonzalez and Woods, “Digital image processing”, Prentice Hall, 2002.
2. M. Haralick, and L.G. Shapiro, “Computer and Robot Vision”, Vol-1, Addison Wesley, Reading,
MA, 1992
References:
1. A. K. Jain, “Fundamentals of digital image processing”, Prentice Hall of India, 1989.
2. 1. William K. Pratt, “Digital Image Processing: PIKS Scientific Inside”, Wiley Interscience, 4th Ed.,
2007.
3. Azriel Rosenfield, Avinash C. Kak, "Digital Picture Processing", Morgan Kaufmann, 2nd Ed., 1982.
4. Bernd Jahne, “Digital Image Processing”, Springer, 6th Ed., 1997.
273
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
Digital Image Processing and Computer
20ECRAT172 3-0-0-3
Vision
Contact ESE Marks
MODULES
Hours (%)
MODULE 1:
Image processing fundamentals. Two dimensional orthogonal 7 15
transforms - DFT, FFT, WHT, Hear transform, KLT, DCT, Hough
Transform.
MODULE 2:
Image representation - Gray scale and colour images. Image sampling 7 15
and quantization. Image enhancement - filters in spatial and frequency
domains, histogram- based processing, homomorphic filtering.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3:
Edge detection - non parametric and model based approaches, LOG
filters, localization problem. Image Restoration - PSF, circulant and 7 15
block - circulant matrices, deconvolution, restoration using inverse
filtering, Wiener filtering and maximum entropy-based methods.
MODULE 4:
Image and Video Compression Standards: Lossy and lossless
compression schemes: Transform Based, Sub-band Decomposition, 7 15
Entropy Encoding, JPEG, JPEG2000, MPEG. Image description and
recognition - boundary detection, chain coding, segmentation and
thresholding methods.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5:
Mathematical morphology - binary morphology, dilation, erosion,
opening and closing, duality relations, gray scale morphology, 8 20
applications such as hit-and-miss transform, thinning and shape
decomposition.
MODULE 6:
Computer tomography - parallel beam projection, Radon transform,
and its inverse, Back-projection operator, Fourier-slice theorem, 8 20
CBPand FBP methods, ART, Fan beam projection. Image texture
analysis -co-occurrence matrix, measures of textures, statistical
models for textures.
END SEMESTER EXAM
274
COURSE
CODE
20ECRAT114 Advanced Finite Element Methods 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
The objective in this course is to summarize modern and effective finite element procedures for
the nonlinear analysis of static and dynamic problems. The modeling of geometric and material nonlinear
problems is discussed. Students will learn advanced topics and techniques in finite element methods and
how to implement and apply these techniques to solve nonlinear systems of ordinary and partial
differential equations. How particular continuum and structural (beam, plate and shell) elements can be
formulated, integrated and used to solve elastic problems.
Syllabus
Introduction to Nonlinear Analysis, nonlinear differential equations; Total Legrangian and updated
Legrangian formulation for Incremental General Nonlinear Analysis from the principles of continuum
mechanics; Updated and Total Legrangian Formulation; Formulation of Finite Element Matrices for Beam
and Plate elements; Linearization and Directional derivatives.; Solution of Nonlinear Dynamic Response;
Solution of the Nonlinear Finite Element Equations in Static Analysis
Course Outcome:
1. The student may be able to model nonlinear problems with Static and dynamic problems with
Geometric and material nonlinearities
2. Be aware of the limitations of the nonlinear FEM to avoid GIGO (Garbage In Garbage Out)
3. Gain an insight into programming nonlinear FE using MATLAB, C++ etc.
4. Efficient and effective use of commercial FE software like ANSYS, NASTRAN, ABAQUS and
5. To understand the solution control options like load step, sub step, time step, restart, stability of
solution at bifurcation etc.
Text Books:
1. An Introduction to Nonlinear Finite Element Analysis, J.N Reddy, Oxford University Press, 2005.
2. Nonlinear Finite elements for continua and structures, Ted Belytschko, Wiley 2001.
275
References:
1. Finite element procedures K. J. Bathe, PHI.
2. Continuum Mechanics and plasticity, Han Chin Wu, CRC,2001.
3. An introduction to continuum mechanics with applications, J.N Reddy, Cambridge university
Press,2008.
4. Nonlinear Finite Element Analysis of Solids and Structures: Volume 1 essentials - M.A. Crisfield,
Wiley.
5. Introduction to Nonlinear Finite Element Analysis, , Nam-Ho Kim,Spinger
6. Advanced Topics in Finite Element Analysis of Structures: With Mathematica and MATLAB
Computations, M. Asghar Bhatti, Wiley
7. Nonlinear Finite Element Methods, Peter Wriggers, Springer
8. Structural Analysis with the Finite Element Method. Linear Statics Volume 2: Beams, Plates and
Shells, Eugenio Oñate, Springer.
276
COURSE PLAN

20ECRAT114 Advanced Finite Element Methods 3-0-0-3
ESE
Contact
MODULES Marks
hours.
(%)
MODULE 1:
3
Introduction to Nonlinear Analysis, nonlinear differential equations
Basic Considerations in Nonlinear Analysis Lagrangian Continuum 15
Mechanics Variables for General Nonlinear Analysis, Virtual work 3
principle and variational methods,
MODULE 2:
Continuum Mechanics Variables for General Nonlinear Analysis–Total
4
Lagrangian formulation for Incremental General Nonlinear Analysis
15
from the principles of continuum mechanics.
Formulation of Finite Element Matrices from the principles of
3
continuum mechanics: Two-Noded Truss Element
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3:
Updated Lagrangian formulation for Incremental General Nonlinear 3
Analysis from the principles of continuum mechanics.
15
Formulation of Finite Element Matrices from the principles of
continuum mechanics: Two-Noded Truss Element Formulation of the 3
Nonlinear Finite Element Equations.
MODULE 4:
Two and Three-Dimensional Solid Elements; Plane Stress, Plane Strain, 4
and Axisymmetric Conditions, Constitutive relations
15
Formulation of Finite Element Matrices for Beam and Plate elements,
Kirchhoff’s and Mindlin’s beam/plate theory, nodal coordinate system, 3
surface normal, transformation matrices.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5:
4 20
Linearization and Directional derivatives, Directional derivatives of
277
different strain measures.
Linearization of weak form in terms of second Piola Kirchoff stresses

and the Green Lagrange strains, Solution of Nonlinear Dynamic 4
Response,
MODULE 6:
Solution of the Nonlinear Finite Element Equations in Static Analysis, 4
Newton Raphson Methods 20
Modified Newton Raphson, Secant method, Arc length method, Force
4
and displacement control, residual calculation, convergence criterion.
END SEMESTER EXAM
278
COURSE
CODE
20ECRAT124 Mechanism and Machine Theory 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
1. To impart students with the knowledge about motion, masses and forces in machines.
2. To enable students to apply fundamental of mechanics to machines which include machines,
linkages etc.
3. To give awareness to students on cams and its synthesis.
4. To provide knowledge on Dynamic and Static Force Analysis on Machines, Linkages etc.
Syllabus
Classification of mechanisms, Kinematic inversions, Degree of freedom, Description of some common

Mechanisms, Displacement, velocity and acceleration analysis, instantaneous centers, Vector approach,
Computer applications, Relative poles based construction, Geometric methods of synthesis with three
accuracy points, Design of a function generators, Transmission angle, Analysis of Cams, Cam Dynamics,
Follower response, Static and Dynamic Force Analysis
Course Outcome:
1. The students will be able to determine velocities & accelerations of various planar mechanisms.
2. Students will have an understanding of static force relationships and inertia forces and their
effect that exist in machines.
3. Students will demonstrate on synthesis of cams.
4. Students will be able to perform Dynamic and Static Force Analysis on Machines, Linkages etc.
Text Books:
1. S. S. Rattan, Theory of Machines, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 2009

2. Shigley, J.E, John J. Uicker, G R. Pennock “Theory of Machines and Mechanisms”, Oxford
University press, 2009.
References:
1. R L Norton, Kinematics and Dynamics of Machinery, 1st ed., Tata McGraw Hill Education
Private Limited, Delhi, 2009
2. Ballaney P. L., Theory of Machines and Mechanisms, Khanna Publishers, 2005
3. A. Ghosh, A. K. Malik, Theory of Mechanisms and Machines, Affiliated East West Press
4. A. G. Erdman, G. N. Sandor, Mechanism Design: Analysis and synthesis Vol I &II,Prentice Hall of
India
5. C. E. Wilson, P. Sadler, Kinematics and Dynamics of Machinery, Pearson Education, 2005
6. D. H. Myskza, Machines and Mechanisms Applied Kinematic Analysis, Pearson Education, 2013
279
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20ECRAT124 Mechanism and Machine Theory 3-0-0-3
Contact ESE Marks
MODULES
Hours (%)
MODULE 1: Classification of mechanisms: Basic kinematic concepts and
definitions, Degree of freedom, Mobility, Kutzbach criterion, Gruebler’s
criterion, Grashof’s Law, Kinematic inversions of four-bar chain, slider
crank chains and double slider crank chains, Limit positions, Mechanical 7 15
advantage, Transmission Angle, Coupler curves, Description of some
common Mechanisms, Quick return mechanisms, Straight line generators,
Dwell Mechanisms.
MODULE 2: Displacement, velocity and acceleration analysis of simple
mechanisms, Graphical method, Velocity and acceleration polygons –
Velocity analysis using instantaneous centers, Kennedy’s theorem, kinematic
7 15
analysis by complex algebra methods, Vector approach, Computer
applications in the kinematic analysis of simple mechanisms Coincident
points, Coriolis component of Acceleration.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3: Relative poles based construction of four bar linkages and
slider crank mechanisms, Geometric methods of synthesis with three
accuracy points- Design of a function generators using Chebychev Spacing. 7 15
Transmission angle – Angle design for optimum transmission, Coupler
curves, Robert’s Law, Cognate mechanisms.
MODULE 4: Analysis of Cams: Basic curves, pressure, angle-Cam size

determination-Cam profile determination-Analytical and graphical. Cam
dynamics: Cam force analysis-Dynamics of high-speed cam system, source 7 15
of vibration, Follower response. Position error-Jump and crossover shock,
Spring surge and wind up.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5: Static Force Analysis: Forces, Couples. Conditions of
8 20
equilibrium- Free body diagram. Analysis of 4-bar linkage, slider-crank
280
mechanisms, cams. Force analysis using Coulomb friction and pin joint
friction
MODULE 6: Dynamic force analysis: Inertia force and inertia torque.

D’Alemberts principle, analysis of mechanisms (four bar linkages and slider- 8 20
crank), equivalent dynamical systems.
END SEMESTER EXAM
281
COURSE
CODE
20ECRAT134 Robotics 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
1. To introduce the basic concepts, parts of robots and types of robots.

2. To make the student familiar with the various drive systems for robot, sensors and their
applications in robots and programming of robots.
3. To discuss about the various applications of robots, justification and implementation of robot
Syllabus
Introduction and classification of robots, Robot kinematics and dynamics, Robot drives and power
transmission systems, Robot end effectors Path planning & programming, Robot Language- Software-
Industrial application
Course Outcome:
At the end of the course the students will:
1. The Student must be able to design automatic manufacturing cells with robotic control.
2. The student could understand the principle behind robotic drive system, end effectors, sensor,
machine vision robot kinematics and programming.
Text Books:
1. Deb S. R. and Deb S., “Robotics Technology and Flexible Automation”, Tata McGraw Hill
Education Pvt. Ltd, 2010.
2. John J.Craig , “Introduction to Robotics”, Pearson, 2009.
3. Mikell P. Grooveret. al., "Industrial Robots - Technology, Programming and Applications",
McGraw Hill, New York, 2008.
References:
1. Richard D Klafter, Thomas A Chmielewski, Michael Negin, "Robotics Engineering – An

Integrated Approach", Eastern Economy Edition, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., 2006.
2. Fu K S, Gonzalez R C, Lee C.S.G, "Robotics : Control, Sensing, Vision and Intelligence",
McGraw Hill, 1987
282
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20ECRAT134 Robotics 3-0-0-3
ESE
Contact
MODULES Marks
Hours
(%)
MODULE 1:
Specifications of Robots- Classifications of robots – Work envelope, 6 15
Flexible automation versus Robotic technology – Applications of
Robots.
MODULE 2:
ROBOT KINEMATICS AND DYNAMICS: Positions, Orientations and
frames, Mappings: Changing descriptions from frame to frame,
Operators: Translations, Rotations and Transformations - 10 15
Transformation Arithmetic - D-H Representation- Forward and
inverse Kinematics Of Six Degree of Freedom Robot Arm – Robot
Arm dynamics
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3:
ROBOT DRIVES AND POWER TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS: Robot
drive mechanisms, hydraulic – electric – servomotor- stepper motor
Pneumatic drives, Mechanical transmission method - Gear 9 15
transmission, Belt drives, cables, Roller chains, Link - Rod systems,
Rotary-to-Rotary motion conversion, Rotary-to-Linear motion
conversion, Rack and Pinion drives, Lead screws, Ball Bearing screws
MODULE 4:
ROBOT END EFFECTORS : Classification of End effectors – Tools as
end effectors. Drive system for grippers- Mechanical adhesive- 7 15
vacuum-magnetic grippers. Hooks & scoops. Gripper force analysis
and gripper design. Active and passive grippers.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5:
Drive system for grippers-Mechanical adhesive-vacuum-magnetic 7 20
grippers. Hooks & scoops. Gripper force analysis and gripper design.
Active and passive grippers.
MODULE 6:
Robot languages -.computer control and Robot software - Industrial 7 20
Application of robots
END SEMESTER EXAM
283
COURSECODE COURSENAME L-T-P-C YEAR
20ECRAT144 Nonlinear Control Systems 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Control System
Course Objectives:
1. To acquire knowledge on non linear systems characteristics

2. Analyse stability of non-linear systems by different techniques
3. Design the system with predictive control and sliding mode control.
Syllabus
Characteristics of nonlinear system, Phase plane analysis, Perturbation techniques, Stability of

Nonlinear Systems- Lyapunov stability, variable gradient method, Centre manifold theorem,
Describing Function Method, Feedback Linearization, Model predictive control, Sliding Mode
Control
Course Outcome:
Students will be able to design and analyse systems with different non-linearities
Text Books:
1. Hassan K Khalil, “Nonlinear Systems”,Prentice-Hall International (UK),1996.

2. Miroslav Krstić, Ioannis Kanel lakopoulos, Petar V. Kokotović, “Nonlinear and adaptive control
design”, Wiley,1995
References:
1. J J E Slotine & W .L I, “Applied Nonlinear Control”, Prentice Hall, Englewood Clifs, New Jersey
1991.
2. AlbertoIsidori, “Nonlinear Control Systems”,Springer Verlag,1995.
284
COURSE PLAN

20ECRAT144 Nonlinear Control Systems 3-0-0-3
ESE
Contact
MODULES Marks
Hours
(%)
MODULE 1:
Characteristics of nonlinear systems- classification of equilibrium
points - limit cycles - analysis of systems with piecewise constant
7 15
inputs using phase plane analysis. Perturbation techniques- Periodic
orbits- Stability of periodic solutions- singular perturbation model-
Slow and fast manifolds.
MODULE 2:
Lyapunov stability- local stability- local linearization and stability in the
small- Direct method of Lyapunov- generation of Lyapunov function
7 15
for linear and nonlinear systems- variable gradient method- Centre
manifold theorem- region of attraction- Invariance theorems- Input
output stability -L stability- L stability of state models- L2 stability.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3:
Harmonic linearization- filter hypothesis- Sine Input describing
function of standard non linearities (Saturation, Dead Zone, ON/OFF 7 15
Nonlinearity, Backlash, Hysteresis)- study of limit cycles. Prediction of
stability of nonlinear systems using D F method
MODULE 4:
Feedback Linearization and the Canonical Form- Mathematical Tools-
Input- State Linearization of SISO Systems- input-Output Linearization
of SISO Systems- Generating a Linear Input- Output Relation-Normal 7 15
Forms- The Zero -Dynamics- Stabilization and Tracking - Inverse
Dynamics and Non-Minimum- Phase Systems- Feedback Linearization
of MIMO Systems
INTERNAL TEST - II
285
MODULE 5:
Simultaneous Feedback control- Design via linearization- stabilization-
regulation via integral control- gain scheduling- Exact Feedback 8 20
Linearization- Input state linearization- input output linearization- state
feedback control- stabilization - tracking- integral control.
MODULE 6:
Introduction, concept of variable structure control (VSC), ideal sliding
motion and chattering, switching function, reachability condition,
8 20
properties of sliding motion, Continuous approximations of Switching
Control laws- The Modelling/ Performance Trade- Offs- MIMO
Systems
END SEMESTER EXAM
286
COURSE
CODE
20ECRAT154 Adaptive Control 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
1. Inculcate conceptual understanding of adaptive control

2. Provide knowledge on various adaptive schemes, with a basic understanding on closed loop
system stability and implementation issues
3. Develop ability to design suitable stable adaptive scheme to meet the performance objectives
even in the presence of disturbances and changing operating conditions
4. Design model reference adaptive control system considering matched structured uncertainties
5. Identify the need and apply appropriate adaptive control design technique to real-time systems
Syllabus
Adaptive Control, Adaptive Schemes, Adaptive Control Problem; Applications, Regression Models,
Recursive Least Squares, Real- Time Parameter Estimation, Direct and Indirect Self- Tuning Regulators
Pole Placement Design, MDPP, Model Reference Adaptive Systems, MIT Rule, Design of MRAS Using
Lyapunov Theory, Relations between MRAS and STR, Adaptive Feedback Linearization, Adaptive Back
Stepping, Gain Scheduling, Design of Gain- Scheduling Controllers, Nonlinear Transformations. Practical
Issues and Implementation, Operational Issues, Case Study
Course Outcome:

1. Formulate adaptive control design problem
2. Identify suitable adaptive controller for a given system with uncertain parameters
3. Apply adaptive design techniques to real-time systems whose parameters changeduring
operation.
4. Implement adaptive control schemes to meet the performance objectives inchallenging
situations.
287
Text Books:
1. Karl Johan Astrom and BjomWittenmark, ‘Adaptive Control’ , Addison Wesley,2003

2. Shankar Sastry, ‘Adaptive Control’, PHI (Eastern Economy Edition), 1989
3. Karl Johan Astrom, ‘Adaptive Control’, Pearson Education, 2001
References:
1. Petros A Loannou, Jing, ‘Robust Adaptive Control’, Prentice-Hall, 1995

2. Eykhoff P, ‘System Identification: Parameter and State Estimation’, 1974
3. Ljung, ‘System Identification Theory for the User’, Prentice-Hall, 1987M.D. Ercegovac and T.
Lang, Digital Arithmetic, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers - An Imprint of Elsevier Science, 2004
288
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20ECRAT154 Adaptive Control 3-0-0-3
ESE
Contact
MODULES Marks
Hours
(%)
MODULE 1:
Introduction: Adaptive Control, effects of process variation - Adaptive
Schemes - Adaptive Control problem - Applications – RealTime
Parameter Estimation: Introduction - Regression Models - Recursive 10 15
Least Squares - Exponential Forgetting – Estimating Parameters in
Dynamical Systems - Experimental Conditions – Loss of identify ability
due to feedback
MODULE 2:
Deterministic Self-Tuning Regulators: Introduction - Pole Placement
Design, MDPP -Design of Indirect Self-tuning Regulators - Continuous 7 15
Time Self-tuners - Direct Self-tuning Regulators - Properties of Direct
Self-tuners - Disturbances with Known Characteristics, Case Study
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3:
Model Reference Adaptive Systems: Introduction - MIT Rule -
Significance of Adaptation Gain - Lyapunov Stability Theory - Design 7 15
of MRAS Using Lyapunov Theory - Adaptation of a Feed forward Gain
- Applications to Adaptive Control, Case Study
MODULE 4:
Relations between MRAS and STR - Nonlinear Systems - Feedback 7 15
Linearization - Adaptive Feedback Linearization - Back Stepping -
Adaptive Back Stepping, Case Study
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5:
Gain Scheduling: Introduction - Principle - Design of Gain Scheduling 8 20
controllers - Nonlinear Transformations - Applications of Gain
Scheduling, Case Study
MODULE 6:
Practical Issues and Implementation - Controller Implementation - 7 20
Computational Delay - Sampling and Pre- and Post Filtering -
Controller Windup - Estimator Implementation - Operational Issues
END SEMESTER EXAM
289
COURSE
CODE
20ECRAT164 Non Linear and Adaptive Control Systems 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
1. To study the characteristics of a non-linear system and different types of non-linearities in a

system.
2. Should be able to analyze a Non-linear system
3. Should be able to analyze an adaptive control system with different configurations
Syllabus
Features and Characteristics of non-linear systems- Common non-linearities, Describingfunction

Analysis, Phase plane analysis - Singular points, Construction of Phase portraits, Stability analysis of
Nonlinear systems, Liapunov stability analysis, Popov’s stability criterion, Circle criterion, Variable
structure control systems- Sliding mode control, Development of adaptive control problem, Model
Reference Adaptive Systems, Adaptive predictive control. Backstepping
Course Outcome:
1. Understand more details about different nonlinearities present in a system.

2. Understand different methods used for analysing a Nonlinear system.
3. Understand more about an adaptive control system schemes
Text Books:
1. Jean-Jacques Slotine & Weiping Li,”Applied Nonlinear Control”, Prentice- Hall .

2. Shankar Sastry, ”Nonlinear System Analysis, Stability and Control”, Springer.
References:
1. Hassan K Khalil, ”Nonlinear systems”, MACMILLAN Publishing company
290
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20ECRAT164 Non Linear and Adaptive Control Systems 3-0-0-3
ESE
Contact
MODULES Marks
Hours
(%)
MODULE 1:
Features of linear and non-linear systems- Common non-linearities.
Characteristics of Nonlinear systems - Limit cycles - stability, jump 7 15
resonance - Describing function Analysis– Describing function of
different non linearities - saturation, dead zone, relay, hysteresis
MODULE 2:
Phase plane analysis - Singular points – types - Construction of Phase 7 15
portrits – Isocline, Delta methods.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3:
Stability analysis of Nonlinear systems, Liapunov stability analysis. 7 15
Construction of Liapunov function- variable gradient method.
MODULE 4:
Popov’s stability criterion, Circle criterion, Variable structure control 7 15
systems-basic concepts- Sliding mode control.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5:
Introduction- Development of adaptive control problem- The role of
8 20
Index performance (IP) in adaptive systems- Gain scheduling- Model
Reference Adaptive Systems- The MIT rule.
MODULE 6:
Self tuning regulators- Adaptive predictive control. Determination of 8 20
Adaptation gain Backstepping approach to Stabilization.
END SEMESTER EXAM
291
COURSE
CODE
20ECRAP101 Mini Project 0-0-4-2 2020
COURSE CONTENT
The mini project is designed to develop practical ability and knowledge about practical tools/techniques
in order to solve the actual problems related to the industry, academic institutions or similar area.
Students can take up any application level/system level project pertaining to a relevant domain. At the
end, presentation and demonstration of the project should be conducted, which will be evaluated by a
panel of examiners.
292
COURSE
CODE
20ECRAL102 Robotics Lab 0-0-2-1 2020
Course Objective:
1. Trajectory planning of robotic manipulators.

2. To track desired trajectories of robotic manipulators and mobile robots.
3. Robot Programming using Software
4. Trajectory tracking, Pick & Place, collision avoidance algorithms using Software
5. Testing of algorithms for trajectory planning, trajectory tracking for robotic manipulators, and
localization & path planning of mobile robots using software
Course Outcome:

1. Plan trajectories for robotic manipulators
2. Track trajectories for robotic manipulators
3. Program robots for a specific application.
4. Analyse kinematic and dynamic models of robots.
5. Design and implement controllers for robots.
COURSE CONTENT
Tools: PLC/ MATLAB/LABVIEW/ROBOT KIT
Experiments:
 Open loop and closed loop control of manipulators
 Forward Kinematics
 Inverse Kinematics
 Manipulator Control
 Position Control
 Goal-Directed Line Following
 Robots Programming
 Basic PLC Programming
293
 Automatic Traffic Light control using PLC

 Vertical Take-off control
 Study of CNC Machine
294
M. Tech. Syllabus 2020 – Structural Engineering and Construction Management

IN
CIVIL ENGINEERING
WITH SPECIALIZATION
STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING AND CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT
295

20CESCT101 Analytical Methods in Engineering 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 Understanding of fundamental mathematics and to solve problems of algebraic and

differential equations, simultaneous equations, partial differential equations
 To provide an overview of discovering the experimental aspect of modern applied
mathematics
Syllabus
Differential equations, Partial differential equations, Charpit’s method, Boundary value problems,
Numerical solutions of P.D.E
Course Outcome:
• Ability to solve the model by selecting and applying a suitable mathematical method
• Ability to interpreting the mathematical results in physical or other terms to see what it
practically means and implies
Text Books:
1. B.S Grewal, “Numerical Methods in Engineering and Science”, Khanna Publications.

2. George F. Simmons, “Differential Equations with applications and historical notes”,
TMH Edition
References:
1. Michael D Greenberg, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Pearson education.

2. Ian Sneddon, “Elements of Partial Differential Equations”, McGraw Hill, International Editions.
3. P Kandasamy, “Numerical Methods”, S Chand and company.
4. S.Arumugam,A. ThangapandiIssac, “Numerical methods”, Scitech
296
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20CESCT101 Analytical Methods in Engineering 3-0-0-3
ESE
Contact
Marks
MODULES Hours
(%)
MODULE 1:Differential equations
Linear differential equations–homogeneous equations–boundary value 7 15

problems–Cauchy–Euler equations–factoring the operator–non-
homogeneous equations–variation of parameters.
MODULE 2:Partial differential equations
Ordinary differential equations in more than two variables – first order 7 15

P.D.E– integral surface passing through a given curve–surfaces orthogonal to
given system–compatible systems of first order P.D.E
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3:Charpit’s method–solution satisfying the given conditions–
7 15
P.D.E second order in physics–linear P .D.E with constant coefficients.
MODULE 4:Boundary value problems
Elementary solutions of Laplace equations, wave equations, series solution 7 15

of these equations in two dimensions–related problems in engineering
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5: Classification of second order equation– finite difference
7 20
approximations to partial derivatives.
MODULE 6: Solution of Laplace equation by finite difference method–
solution of one dimensional wave equations 7 20
END SEMESTER EXAM
297

20CESCT103 Theory of Elasticity 3-1-0-4 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 Understanding the basic concepts of forces, stresses, strain etc
 Understanding the general concepts of plasticity, asymmetric problems
Syllabus
Elasticity, Two dimensional stress–strain problems, Airy’s stress function, Analysis of

asymmetric problems and Torsion, Torsion of prismatic bar, Plasticity
Course Outcome:
 The student will be able to execute the stress state, stresses and strains analysis
 To be able to use the numerical methods for the problem of the theory of elasticity in practice
Text Books:
1. Timoshenko S P and Goodier J. N, “Theory of Elasticity”, Tata Mcgraw Hill International
Student Edition
2. Johnson W and Mellor P. B, “Plasticity for Mechanical Engineers”, Van Nostrand Company Ltd.
3. Srinath L. S, “Advanced mechanics of solids”, Tata McGraw– Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New
Delhi.
References:
1. Thin plates and shells, Theory, Application-Edward Ventsel, Krauthammer.

2. Sadhu Singh, “Theory of elasticity”, Khanna Publishers, Delhi.
3. Arthur P Boresi& Omar M SideBottom, “Advanced Mechanics of Materials”, John Wiley & Sons.
4. Sokolnikoff, “Mathematical Theory of Elasticity”.
298
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20CESCT103 Theory of Elasticity 3-1-0-4
ESE
Contact Marks
MODULES
Hours (%)
MODULE 1:Elasticity
Basic concepts– Body force–Surface traction–Stresses and strains–

Three dimensional stresses and strains–analysis–transformation
equations of 3D stresses & strains–principal stresses & strains–States 10 15
of stresses & strain– Equilibrium equations–generalized Hooke’s Law–
Compatibility Conditions– Boundary conditions.
MODULE 2:Two dimensional stress–strain problems
Plane stress and plain strain– Analysis–transformation equations– 10 15

stress–strain relations– equilibrium equations in Cartesian and polar
co ordinates.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3:Airy’s stress function
Biharmonic Equilibrium–St Venant’s principle–2D problems in 8 15
Cartesian coordinate–cantilever with concentrated load at free end–
Simply supported With UDL–Cantilever with moment at free end.
MODULE 4:Analysis of asymmetric problems and Torsion
General equations in polar co ordinates–Stress distribution 10 15

symmetric about an axis–Cylinder subjected to external and internal
pressures– Rotating disc as a 2D problem. Effect of circular hole in
stress distribution of plates.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5:Torsion of prismatic bar
General solution–Warping function approaches – St. Venant’s theory– 8 20
Membrane analogy– Torsion of Non Circular sections – Torsion of
multi celled thin wall open and closed sections.
MODULE 6:Plasticity
Introduction to plasticity – General concepts – Stress – Strain
curves – Ideal plastic body – Plastic flow conditions – theories of
failure – plastic work – Plastic potential – Yield criteria – Simple
10 20
applications – Elasto – plastic analysis for bending and torsion of
bars – Residual stresses
END SEMESTER EXAM
299
COURSE
CODE
20CESCT105 Construction Management 3-1-0-4 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 To acquaint with the project management skills
 Ability to use CPM and PERT methods in effective project management
 Ability to do resource planning and project scheduling
Syllabus
Scientific Management, Organisation, Management information Systems , Engineering Economics,

Rate of return - replacement analysis ,Network Techniques in Construction
Course Outcome:
To understand the principles associated with effective project management and application of
these principles in avoiding common difficulties associated with project management
Text Books:
1. Robert G Murdick, Joel E Ross, James R Clagget. “Information systems for Modern Management
"- PHI Learning Private Limited, New Delhi.
2. B L Gupta & Amit Gupta. "Construction management and machinery " - Standard publishers
Distributors, Delhi
References:
1. DinkarPagare. " Principles of Management " - Sultan Chand &Sons, New Delhi.
2. R Paneerselvam. “Engineering Economics” - PHI Learning Private Limited, New Delhi.
3. Prassanna Chandra. "PROJECTS-Planning, Analysis, Selection, Financing,
Implementation and Review" -Tata McGraw-Hill Education private Limited.
4. James D Stevens. "Techniques for Construction Network Scheduling" - McGraw-Hill Publishing
Company
300
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20CESCT105 Construction Management 3-1-0-4
ESE
Contact
Marks
MODULES Hours
(%)
MODULE 1: Scientific Management
Concept - elements - contributions of pioneers in scientific 10 15

management - basic principles of management with reference to
construction industry
MODULE 2: Organisation
Maslow's hierarchy of needs –organisation - principles –types- 8 15

construction organisation setup.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3:Management information Systems
Definition - evolution - organisational theory - systems approach - 10 15

computer systems -database management - information systems for
decision making - MIS effectiveness and efficiency criteria -failure of
MIS.
MODULE 4: Engineering Economics
Definition and scope - cash flow - interest formulas and application - 8 15

time value of money -bases of comparison - decision making amongst
alternatives
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5: Rate of return - replacement analysis - break even
analysis - incremental analysis - benefit cost analysis - capital budgeting
- working capital management - construction accounting - long term 10 20
and short term financing -
problems and case studies
MODULE 6: Network Techniques in Construction
Introduction - planning - work scheduling -network diagram - rules for

drawing network diagram - Fulkerson's rule - PERT / CPM techniques -
10 20
precedence networks - least cost scheduling- resource allocation -
updating - application of network techniques - related problems
END SEMESTER EXAM
301
COURSE
CODE
Advanced Design of Concrete
20CESCT107 3-0-0-3 2020
Structures
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 To learn the fundamentals of design, analysis, and proportioning of reinforced concrete
members and structures.
 Methods for analysis and design of the elements under flexure, shear, and axial loads will be
examined
Syllabus
Calculation of deflection and crack width, Design of flat slabs and flat plates, Design of RC walls.
Course Outcome:
 The students will be familiar with advanced methods used for concrete structural design
 Identify underlying concepts in modern concrete design methods
Text Books:
1. Varghese, P.C, “Advanced Reinforced Concrete Design”, Prentice Hall of India, 2005.
2. Purushothaman, P, “Reinforced Concrete Structural Elements : Behaviour Analysis and Design”,

Tata McGraw Hill, 1986
References:
1. Varghese P.C, “Limit State Design of Reinforced Concrete, Prentice Hall of India, 2007.
2. Arthur. H. Nilson, David Darwin& Charles W Dolan, "Design of Concrete Structures", Tata
Mcgraw Hill, 2004
3. Sinha.N.C. and Roy S.K., “Fundamentals of Reinforced Concrete”, S.Chand and Company
Limited, New Delhi, 2003.
4. Park.R & Paulay T "Design of Concrete Structures", John Wiley & Sons, NewYork
302
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20CESCT107 Advanced Design of Concrete Structures 3-0-0-3
Contact ESE Marks
MODULES
Hours (%)
MODULE 1: Calculation of deflection and crack width 7 15

Design of columns, slender column, corbels and deep-beams.
MODULE 2: Design of flat slabs and flat plates- Design of spandrel

beams .Method of design of slabs- Yield line theory and Hillerborgs strip 7 15
method.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3: Design of RC walls - ordinary and shear walls – Design
7 15
of Grid floors- a) by IS code method-b) by plate theory.
MODULE 4: Analysis of Multi-Storey Buildings with Moment
resistant Joints for Lateral loads- Modified portal, Cantilever &
Factor method- Analysis of Multi-Storey Buildings with Moment 7 15
resistant Joints for
Gravity loads(Vertical Loads)
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5: Inelastic behaviour of concrete beams- limit state
analysis of concrete beams- moment rotation curves, Moment 7 20
redistribution in
continuous beams.
MODULE 6: Baker’s method of plastic design - Design of cast-in-
situ joints in frames. Detailing for ductility - Fire resistance of structural
members – Quality of control of concrete. Strengthening of existing
7 20
structures
END SEMESTER EXAM
303

Construction and Contracts
20CESCT111 3-0-0-3 2020
Management
Pre-Requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 To study the various types of construction contracts and their legal aspects and provisions.
 To study the of tenders, arbitration, legal requirement, and labour regulations
Syllabus
Construction Contracts, Tenders, Arbitration, Legal Requirements.
Course Outcome:
 The students will be able to apply knowledge and skills of modern construction practices
and techniques.
 Have necessary knowledge and skills in accounting, financing, risk analysis and contracting
Text Books:
1. Patil. B.S, Civil Engineering Contracts and Estimates, Universities Press (India) Private
Limited, 2006
2. Jimmie Hinze, Construction Contracts, McGraw Hill, 2001
References:
1. Gajaria G.T., Laws Relating to Building and Engineering Contracts in India,
2. Joseph T. Bockrath, Contracts and the Legal Environment for Engineers and Architects,
McGraw Hill, 2000.
3. Kwaku, A., Tenah, P.E. Jose M.Guevara, P.E., Fundamentals of Construction
Management and Organisation, Prentice Hall, 1985.M.M.Tripathi Private Ltd., Bombay,
1982.
304
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20CESCT111 Construction and Contracts Management 3-0-0-3
ESE
Contact
Marks
MODULES Hours
(%)
MODULE 1:Construction Contracts
Indian Contracts Act–Elements of Contracts–Types of Contracts – 7 15

Features –Suitability –Design of Contract Documents –International
Contract Document – Standard Contract Document –Law of Torts.
MODULE 2:Tenders
Prequalification –Bidding–Accepting–Evaluation of Tender from Technical, 7 15

Contractual and Commercial Points of View
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3:ContractFormation and Interpretation–Potential
7 15
Contractual Problems –World Bank Procedures and
Guidelines
MODULE 4:Arbitration
Comparison of Actions and Laws –Agreements–Subject Matter –Violations 7 15

– Appointment of Arbitrators –Conditions of Arbitration –Powers and
Duties of
Arbitrator –Rules of Evidence–Enforcement of Award –Costs.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5:Legal Requirements
Insurance and Bonding–Laws Governing Sale, Purchase and Use of 7 20

Urban and Rural Land –Land Revenue Codes –Tax Laws –Income Tax,
Sales Tax.
MODULE 6:Excise and Custom Duties and their Influence on
Construction Costs – 7 20
Legal Requirements for Planning–Property Law–Agency Law –Local
Government Laws for Approval –Statutory Regulations
END SEMESTER EXAM
305

20CESCT121 Structural Dynamics 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
• Learn how to model discrete single-degree and multiple-degree vibratory systems and calculate
the free and forced response of these systems.
• Calculate the mode shapes and frequencies for the free response of continuous vibratory
systems and use modal methods to calculate the forced response of these systems
Syllabus
Single Degree of Freedom System, Response to harmonic loading, Multi degree Freedom
Systems and Continuous systems
Course Outcome:
 Understanding of basic principles and importance of structural dynamics.

 Learning the importance of structural dynamics in civil engineering in practice
Text Books:
1. Clough & Penzien, “Dynamics of Structures.
2. Paz Mario, “Structural Dynamics–Theory and Computation”.
References:
1. Anil K Chopra, “Dynamics of structures”, Pearson Education. V.P Singh, “ Mechanical

Vibrations
2. Meirovitch.L, “Elements of Vibration Analysis”.
3. W.T. Thomson , “Vibration Theory and Applications”.
4. M.Mukhopadhyay , “Vibrations, Dynamics & Structural systems”.
5. Denhartog, “Mechanical vibrations”.
6. Timoshenko, “Vibration Problems in Engineering”.
306
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20CESCT121 Structural Dynamics 3-0-0-3
ESE
Contact Marks
MODULES
Hours (%)
MODULE 1:Introduction
Objectives - types of dynamic problems - degree of freedom -
D’ Alembert’s Principle -principle of virtual displacement - Hamilton’s 7 15
principle. Types of vibration – vibration control.
MODULE 2: Un damped and damped free and forced vibrations-
critical damping- over damping- under damping- logarithmic
7 15
decrement
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3: Response to harmonic loading - evaluation of damping -
vibration isolation - transmissibility -response to periodic forces- vibration
measuring equipments. Duhamel integral for undamped system- Response 7 15
to impulsive loads.
MODULE 4:Multidegree Freedom Systems and Continuous systems

Natural modes - orthogonality conditions - modal Analysis - free and
harmonic vibration 7 15
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5:Free longitudinal vibration of bars - flexural vibration of
beams with different end conditions -forced vibration. 7 20
MODULE 6: Approximate methods Rayleigh’s method - Dunkerley’s
method - Stodola’s method - Rayleigh –Ritz method -Matrix method. 7 20
END SEMESTER EXAM
307

Construction Planning,
20CESCT131 3-0-0-3 2020
Scheduling and Control
Pre-requisites:
Nil Course
Objectives:
 To introduce the concepts and techniques of project planning and scheduling
 To provide an understanding of various techniques for planning and scheduling
 To develop in students the ability to recognize and identify the activities involved in a
construction project
Syllabus
Basic Concepts in the Development of Construction Plans, Relevance of Construction Schedules,

Scheduling with Resource Constraints and Precedence, the Cost Control Problem, Quality and Safety
Concerns in Construction.
Course Outcome:
 Determine the required level of resources and value of work complete as a function of
project time
 Determine the optimum method for reducing the time required to complete a project
 Utilize a scheduling program to accelerate the scheduling process and ease the creation of
complex project schedules
Text Books:
1. Calin M. Popescu, ChotchalCharoenngam (1995), “Project Planning, Scheduling and Control
in Construction: An Encyclopedia of terms and Applications”, Wiley, New York.
2. John Wiley & Sons, Halpin, D. W (1985). “Financial and Cost Concepts for
Construction Management”, John Wiley & sons. New York.
References:
1. Chitkara. K.K(1998) “Construction Project Management: Planning Scheduling and Control”, Tata
McGraw Hill Publishing Company, New Delhi.
2. Chris Hendrickson and Tung Au(2000), “Project Management for Construction - Fundamental
Concepts for Owners, Engineers, Architects and Builders”, Prentice Hall Pittsburgh
3. Moder, J., C. Phillips and E. Davis (1983)“Project Management with CPM, PERT and Precedence
Diagramming”, Van Nostrand Reinhold Company, Third Edition, Willis, E. M., Scheduling
Construction Projects.
308
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
Construction Planning, Scheduling and
20CESCT131 3-0-0-3
Control
ESE
Contact
MODULES Marks
Hours
(%)
MODULE 1: Basic Concepts In the Development of
Construction Plans
Choice of Technology and Construction Method - Defining Work
Tasks - Defining Precedence Relationships Among Activities - 7 15
Estimating Activity Duration. Estimating Resource Requirements for
Work Activities -Coding
Systems
MODULE 2: Relevance of Construction Schedules
The Critical Path Method - Calculations for Critical Path Scheduling -
Activity Float and Schedules -Presenting Project Schedules Critical
Path Scheduling for Activity-on-Node and with Leads. Lags. and 7 15
Windows . -
Calculations for Scheduling with Leads, Lags and Windows
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3: Resource Oriented Scheduling - Scheduling with
Resource 7 15
Constraints and Preceedences - Use of Advanced Scheduling
Techniques - Scheduling with Uncertain Duration
MODULE 4: Calculations for Monte Carlo Schedule
Simulation - Crashing 7 15
and Time/Cost Tradeoffs - Scheduling In Poorly Structured Problems -
Improving the Scheduling Process
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5: The Cost Control Problem
The Project Budget - Forecasting for Activity Cost Control - Financial
Accounting Systems and Cost Accounts - Control of Project Cash
Flows - Schedule Control - Schedule and Budget Updates - Relating 7 20
Cost and
Schedule Information.
MODULE 6: Quality and Safety Concerns in Construction
Organizing for Quality and Safety - Work and Material Specifications -
Total Quality Control -Quality Control by Statistical Methods -
Statistical Quality Control with Sampling by attributes - Statistical 7 20
Quality Control
with Sampling by Variables - Safety.
END SEMESTER EXAM
309

20CESCT141 Prestressed Concrete Structures 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites:
Nil Course
Objectives:
 To explain the effects of prestress on the behaviour of concrete beams and identify situations
when prestress is needed
 To determine the combined stresses induced by prestress and applied loads
 To define and determine the different types of losses of pre-stressed concrete
Syllabus
Analysis and design of simply supported (post and pre tensioned, Short term deflections and long term
deflections as per IS Code, Design of tension members.
Course Outcome:
 To introduce you the concepts of pre-stressed concrete, dealing with load analysis
 You will also be introduced to types pre stressed concrete structures
Text Books:
1. Krishna Raju N, “Prestressed Concrete” , 4th Edition TMH New Delhi , 2000
2. Lin T.Y, “Design of Prestressed Concrete Structures”, John Wiley & Sons , 1960
References:
1. Rajagopalan N, “Prestressed Concrete”, Narora Publishing house, 2002

2. Sinha N.C. & Roy, “Fundamentals of Prestressed Concrete”, S. Chand & Co, 1985
3. Pandit and Gupta, “Prestressed concrete”, CBS, 2002
4. F K Kong and R H Evans, “ reinforced and prestressed concrete”, TMH, 1999
310
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20CESCT141 Prestressed Concrete Structures 3-0-0-3
Contact ESE Marks
MODULES
Hours (%)
MODULE 1: Analysis and design of simply supported (post and
pre 7 15
tensioned) - PSC flexural members – Basic concepts – Stresses at
transfer and service loads, ultimate strength in flexure
MODULE 2: Short term deflections and long term deflections
7 15
as per IS Code – Design and analysis of post and pre tensioned PSC
slabs.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3: Design for shear, bond and torsion – Design of end
blocks (IS code method)– Design of prestressed concrete cylindrical 7 15
water tanks – Design of prestressed concrete pipes
MODULE 4: Design of tension members - Design of compression
members – compression members with and without flexure – Design of 7 15
piles
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5: Composite construction with precast RC beams-
Analysis and design – Ultimate strength – Partial prestressing – 7 20
Definitions –principles and design approaches.
MODULE 6: Statically indeterminate structures – Analysis and
design –Continuous beams – concept linear transformation – concordant 7 20
cable profile and cap cables.
END SEMESTER EXAM
311

Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:

Syllabus
Design, Data Collection and Analysis, Quantitative Techniques and Mathematical Modeling, Report
Writing.
Course Outcome:

Text Books:
Publisher, 2004
Ltd; Third Edition
References:
Company Ltd, 2004
312

Contact
MODULES
Hours
MODULE : 1
Introduction to Research Methodology: Concepts of Research, Meaning and

Objectives of Research, Research Process, Types of Research, Type of research: 5
Descriptive vs. Analytical, Applied vs. Fundamental, Quantitative vs. Qualitative, and
Conceptual vs. Empirical
MODULE :2
Criteria of Good Research, Research Problem, Selection of a problem, Techniques
4
involved in definition of a problem, Research Proposals – Types, contents, Ethical
aspects, IPR issues like patenting, copyrights.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE: 3
Research Design: Meaning, Need and Types of research design, Literature Survey
and Review, Identifying gap areas from literature review, Research Design Process, 5
Sampling fundamentals, Measurement and scaling techniques, Data Collection –
concept, types and methods, Design of Experiments.
MODULE 4:
Quantitative Techniques: Probability distributions, Fundamentals of Statistical
analysis, Data Analysis with Statistical Packages, Multivariate methods, Concepts of 5
correlation and regression - Fundamentals of time series analysis and spectral
analysis.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE: 5
Report Writing: Principles of Thesis Writing, Guidelines for writing reports &
5
papers, Methods of giving references and appendices, Reproduction of published
material, Plagiarism, Citation and acknowledgement.
MODULE: 6
4
Documentation and presentation tools – LaTeX, Office with basic presentations
skills, Use of Internet and advanced search techniques.
313

20CESCQ101 Seminar - I 0-0-2-2 2020
Course Objectives:

Methodology
Individual students are required to choose a topic of their interest from related topics to the
stream of specialization, preferably from outside the M. Tech syllabus. The students are required to do
a moderate literature review on the topic and give seminar. A committee consisting of at least three
faculty members (preferably specialized in the respective stream) shall assess the presentation of the
seminar and award marks to the students based on merits of topic of presentation. Each student shall
submit two copies of a write up of his seminar topic. The seminar report shall not have any plagiarised
content (all sources shall be properly cited or acknowledged). One copy shall be returned to the
student after duly certifying it by the chairman of the assessing committee and the other shall be kept in
the departmental library. Internal continuous assessment marks are awarded based on the relevance of
the topic, presentation skill, quality of the report and participation. It is encouraged to do simulations
related to the chosen topic and present the results at the end of the semester.
314

20CESCL101 Computer Application Lab 0-0-2-1 2020
List of experiments:
1. PRIMAVERA
i. Practice on the GUI of the software and Input of Date.
ii. Practice on Creating Bar Charts/Grant charts.
iii. Practice on creating CPM/PERT charts and finding out critical path.
iv. Practice on resource allocation and leveling of resources.
v. Practice on Project Monitoring (Cost &Time).
vi. Plotting and printing of various charts and project.
vii. Filters and layouts- formatting the display- printing and reports.
viii. Tracking progress- scheduling options and out of sequence progress.
2. STRAP / ETABS / SAP

Linear Static Analysis of Continuous Beams, Portal Frames, Truss (2D and 3D) and Multistoried Building.
Loading: Dead Load, Live Load, Wind Load (IS: 875 Part 1 / Part 2 / Part 3), Earthquake Load (IS: 1893
Part 1) and its Combinations as per Codal Provisions.
Design and Detailing: As per Indian Standards.
3. ANSYS
Linear Static Analysis of Continuous Beams, Portal Frames, Truss (2D and 3D) and Plates (Plane
Stress and Plane Strain).
Note: Application of STRAP / ETABS / SAP and ANSYS in modeling, simulation, analysis, design and
drafting of structural components is done using the concepts given in theory papers. The student has to
practice the packages by working out different types of problems mentioned above.
315
SEMESTER II

Project Planning and
20CESCT102 3-1-0-4 2020
Implementation
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 To gather information regarding the tendering process and different types of contract and
related aspects regarding construction industry and to analysis productivity in construction
industry.
 To learn and understand various quality and safety parameters and its applications in
construction industry.
Syllabus
Project reports, Work study, Behavioral science aspects, Evolution of Quality.
Course Outcome:
 Students will earn sufficient knowledge on various basic aspects in construction contract
process and productivity analysis and will be in a position to apply various quality and safety
techniques in construction industry
Text Books:
1. Sengupta and H. Guha (1995), “Construction Management and Planning”, Tata McGrew Hill
Publishing Company Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
2. Clarkson Oglesby, Henry Parker (1989), Grogory Howell, “Productivity Improvement in
Construction”, McGrew Hill Book Company, Inc.
References:
1. R.P. Mohanty and R.R. Lakhe, “Total Quality Mangement”, Jaico Publishing House.
2. S. Seetharaman, “Construction Engineering and Management”, Umesh Publications.
3. K. N. Vaid, “Construction Safety Management”, National Institute of Construction
Management and Research
316
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20CESCT102 Project Planning and Implementation 3-1-0-4
Contact ESE Marks
MODULES
Hours (%)
MODULE 1: Project reports – sanctions – tendering – contracts –
execution of works – measurements – payment – disputes – 10 15
compensation – arbitration
MODULE 2: Work study – factors influencing productivity – tools to
8 15
assess productivity – productivity improvement techniques
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3: Behavioral science aspects – motivation of individuals –
8 15
management of groups – leadership – communication
MODULE 4: Evolution of Quality – Quality Management – Quality
Control Methods – Factors Affecting Quality of Construction – Quality
Standards and Codes in Construction -Concept and Philosophy of Total 10 15
Quality Management – TQM in Construction.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5: Importance of Safety – Safety Aspects of Construction –
Causes of Accidents – Human Factors in Construction Safety 10 20
Management
MODULE 6: Site Safety Management – Safety in Various
Construction Operations – Safety in Material Handling and Equipments
– Safety Codes – Measuring of Safety – Approaches to Improve 10 20
Safety in
Construction.
END SEMESTER EXAM
317

20CESCT104 Finite Element Analysis 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:

• Understand the general plate bending theories
• Obtain an understanding of the fundamental theory of FEA
• Develop the ability to generate the governing differential equations
Syllabus
Introduction to FEM -General procedure of FEA - Displacement approach-Variational principles-
Derivation of Shape functions-Convergence criteria - Conforming & nonconforming elements-
Derivation of Stiffness matrix-axisymmetric problems Isoparametric elements - Numerical Integration.-
Gauss- Quadrature General plate bending elements-Plate bending theory – Kirchhoff’s theory –Mindlin’s
theory – locking problems - -spurious modes.
Course Outcome:
 Students who successfully complete this course will have demonstrated an ability to understand
the fundamental concepts of theory of FEA and will be able use the basic finite elements for
structural applications using truss, beam, frame and plane elements
Text Books:
1. R.D.Cook, “Concepts and Applications of Finite Element Analysis”, John Wiley &
Sons.
2. C.S.Krishnamoorthy, “Finite Element Analysis”, Tata McGraw Hill .New Delhi, 1987.
References:
1. C Zienkiewicz, “Finite Element Method”, Fifth Edition, McGraw Hill, 2002

2. S.Rajasekharan, “Finite Element Analysis in Engineering Design”, S Chand & Co.
Ltd.1999.
3. T.Kant, “Finite Element Methods in Computational Mechanics”,Pergamons Press.
4. K.J.Bathe, “Finite Element Procedures inEngineeringAnalysis”.,Prentice Hall,
5. MukhopadhyayM.,Matrix “Finite Element Computer and Structural Analysis”, Oxford&
IBH,1984.
6. Irving H.Shames, “Energy &F inite Element Methods in Structural Mechanics”.
7. Desai C.S. & Abel J.F., “Introduction to Finite Element Methods”, East West Press.
318
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20CESCT104 Finite Element Analysis 3-0-0-3
ESE
Contact Marks
MODULES
Hours (%)
MODULE 1: Introduction to FEM

Historical development - Idealization of structures-Mathematical model - 7 15
General procedure of FEA - Displacement approach
MODULE 2: Variational Approaches to FEM
Variational principles weighted residual approach and method of virtual 7 15
work. Derivation of equilibrium equations.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3: Shape functions
Introduction to Shape Functions-characteristics-Derivation of Shape
7 15
functions using different methods- -Lagrangian and Hermition
Interpolation–Generalised coordinates–Natural coordinates
MODULE 4: Stiffness matrix
Derivation of Stiffness matrix of Bar element - Beam element - Plane
stress and plane strain and axisymmetric problems -Triangular elements 7 15
- Constant Strain Triangle - Linear Strain Triangle – using generalized
coordinates-natural coordinates etc. – Fellipas method
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5: Convergence Criteria & Numerical Integration
Compatibility-C°and C¹ elements - Convergence criteria - Conforming &

7 20
nonconforming elements – Patch test. Legrangian and Serendipity
elements, static condensation - Isoparametric elements - Numerical
Integration.-Gauss- Quadrature – Computer implementation of finite
element method.
MODULE 6: General plate bending elements
Plate bending theory – Kirchhoff’s theory – Mindlin’s theory – locking
7 20
problems - preventive measures – reduced integration – selective
integration-spurious modes.
END SEMESTER EXAM
319

20CESCT106 Theory of Plates and Shells 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
• To provide an elementary knowledge of mechanics of materials and mathematics

• To provide a simple and comprehensive mathematical analysis of plate theories and their
application to plate bending problems
• Give an insight into the behavior of the plate structure, maintaining a fine balance between
analytical and numerical methods
• To provide a knowledge of the fundamentals of theory of shells and folded plates
Syllabus
Plates: Introduction; Pure bending of plates; Laterally loaded rectangular plates; Simply supported
rectangular plates under sinusoidal load; Circular plates. Shells: Introduction; Classical theory of shells.
Folded plates: Fundamental concepts.
Course Outcome:
• Students will be able to apply fundamental concepts of mechanics of materials and mathematics
to practical engineering problems.
• Students will be able to determine the properties and behavior of plates and shells
Text Books:
1. Edward Ventsel, Krauthammer, “ Thin plates and shells, Theory ,Application”.
2. S.P Timoshenko, S.W Krieger (2001), “ Theory of plates and shells”, McGraw Hill, New York
References:
1. Lloyd Hamilton Donnell (1976), “Beams, plates and shells”, McGraw Hill, New York.
2. Owen F Hughes (1983), “Ship Structural Design”, John Wiley & Sons, New York
3. G.S. Ramaswamy (1986), “Design and Construction of Concrete Shell Roofs”, Tata McGraw Hill
Book Co.Ltd
4. Krishna Raju N. (1998), “Advanced Reinforced Concrete Design”, CBS Publishers and
distributors, New Delhi
320
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20CESCT106 THEORY OF PLATES AND SHELLS 3-0-0-3
ESE
Contact Marks
MODULES
Hours (%)
MODULE 1: Plates Introduction – classification of plates – thin plates
and thick plates – assumptions in the theory of thin plates – differential
equation for cylindrical bending of rectangular plates 7 15
MODULE 2: Pure bending of plates Slope and curvature of slightly
bent plates – relation between bending moment and curvature in pure
bending – stresses acting on a plate inclined to x and y-axes – particular
7 15
cases of pure bending of rectangular plates.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3: Laterally loaded rectangular plates
Small deflections of laterally loaded thin plates – differential equation of
plates – derivation of fourth order differential equation – solution
7 15
techniques for fourth order differential equation – boundary conditions –
simply supported, built – in and free edges.
MODULE 4: Simply Supported rectangular plates under
sinusoidal Load Navier solution for simply supported plates subjected
7 15
to uniformly distributed - Levy’s solution for simply supported rectangular
plates–
uniformly distributed and concentrated load
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5: Circular plates Polar coordinates – differential equation of
symmetrical bending of laterally loaded circular plates- uniformly loaded
circular plates with clamped edges and simply supported edges– circular
7 20
plates loaded at the center.
MODULE 6: Classical theory of Shells Structural behavior of thin shells
– Classification of shells – Singly and doubly curved shells with examples–
Membrane theory and bending theory of doubly curved shells.-equilibrium
equations. Folded plates – Introduction, Classification, Structural action 7 20
and analysis
END SEMESTER EXAM
321

20CESCT112 Advanced Analysis of Structures 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 Ability to model loads on structures using current codes and standards
 Ability to idealize and analyze statically determinate and indeterminate structures
Syllabus
Review of work and energy principles, Stiffness method, Gauss elimination, Element Flexibility matrix
Course Outcome:
 Ability to analyze statically determinate trusses, beams, and frames and obtain internal
loading.
 Ability to analyze cable and arch structures
 Ability to obtain the influence lines for statically determinate and indeterminate structures.
 Ability to determine deflections of beams and frames using classical methods
Text Books:
1. Reddy C.S., “Basic Structural Analysis”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co.1996.
2. Smith J.C. “Structural Analysis”, Macmillian Pub.Co.1985.
References:
1. Weaver & Gere, “Matrix Analysis of Structures”, East West Press.

2. Moshe F Rubinstein– “Matrix Computer Analysis of Structures”– Prentice Hall, 1969.
3. Meek J.L., “Matrix Structural Analysis”, McGraw Hill, 1971.
4. Rajesekharan&Sankarasubramanian,G., “Computational Structural Mechanics”, Prentice Hall of India,
2001.
5. Mukhopadhyay M., “Matrix Finite Element Computer and Structural Analysis”, Oxford & IBH, 1984.
6. Wang C.K.& Solomon C.G.,” Introductory Structural Analysis”, McGraw Hill.1968.
7. Pezemieniecki, J.S, “Theory of Matrix Structural Analysis”, McGraw Hill Co .,1984.
8. Seeli F.B.& Smith J.P., “Advanced Mechanics of Materials”, John Wiley &Sons, 1993.
9. Norris & Wilbur, “Elementary Structural Analysis”, McGraw Hill.
DamodarMaity, “Computer Analysis of Framed Structures”, I K
International
322
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20CESCT112 Advanced Analysis of Structures 3-0-0-3
ESE
Contact Marks
MODULES
Hours (%)
MODULE 1: Review of work and energy principles- Maxwell, Betti,

Castigliano theorems- principles virtual work- Classification of structures–
discrete structures–elements–nodes–degrees of freedom– static& 7 15
kinematic indeterminacy Stiffness method–coordinate systems–element
stiffness matrix
MODULE 2: Stiffness method – analysis of pin jointed frames
(temperature effect, lack of fit), continuous beams (settlement of supports), 7 15
rigid jointed frames and grids
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3: Structure stiffness matrix–assembly–equivalent joint load –
7 15
incorporation of boundary conditions –solutions
MODULE 4: Gauss elimination–matrix inversion–analysis of pin jointed
7 15
frames, continuous beams
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5: Element Flexibility matrix–truss element–beam element–
7 20
force transformation matrix
MODULE 6: Equilibrium–compatibility–analysis of beams & frames (rigid
7 20
and pin jointed), grids.
END SEMESTER EXAM
323

20CESCT122 3-0-0-3 2020
Foundations
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 To familiarise knowledge and understanding of soil behaviour, pertaining to

different types of foundations.
 To introduce detailed design issues related to both deep and shallow foundations.
 Develop the understanding of the role of modern soil mechanics
Syllabus
Introduction to Limit State Design of reinforced concrete in foundation, Combined footings,

Structural design of mat foundation , Analysis of flexible beams.
Course Outcome:
 To build the knowledge on soil behaviour and introduce to design issues pertaining to
different types of foundations
 An ability to identify & design various types of foundations according to field conditions
Text Books:
1. Varghese P.C, "Design of Reinforced Concrete Foundations", Prentice Hall of India,2009
2. Nainan P Kurien,Design of Foundation Sytems:Principles& Practices, Narosa, New Delhi
1992.
References:
1. Varghese P.C, "Foundation Engineering" Prentice Hall of India,2005

3. Askok K Jain , "Reinforced Concrete Limit State Design" Nem Chand & Bros ,Roorkee
4. Shamsherprakash, GopalRanjan, & Swami Saran (1979), “Analysis and design of foundations
and retaining structures”, Sarita Prakashan New Delhi
5. Jain G.S & Dinesh Mohan “ Hand Book on Under reamed and Bored compaction pile
foundation ", CBRI Roorkee.
324
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20CESCT122 Design of Reinforced Concrete Foundations 3-0-0-3
ESE
Contact
Marks
MODULES Hours
(%)
MODULE 1: Introduction to Limit State Design of reinforced
concrete in foundations: 7 15
Soil pressure for structural design; Conventional structural design of Spread
footings, isolated footings, column Pedestals
MODULE 2: Combined footings: Combined footing subjected to vertical
7 15
loads, lateral loads and moments, Combined Footing, Strap footing, strip
footings under several columns
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3: Structural design of mat foundation of various types
subjected to vertical and lateral loads and moments; Design of circular rafts;
Annular rafts. Soil structure interaction and 'flexible' approach to the design 7 15
of foundations; Structural design of retaining walls
MODULE 4: Analysis of flexible beams and grids on elastic foundations,

Analysis of flexible plates on elastic foundations, ACI method of analysis of 7 15
beams on elastic foundation.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5: Structural design of piles including pile caps, under-reamed
piles, piers and caissons; infilled virendal frame foundation- steel column basis 7 20
, structural design of well foundation.
MODULE 6: Special foundations; Foundations For Towers-steel towers-
foundation to water tank, chimneys- shells for foundations- hyperbolic 7 20
paraboloid foundations, design of conical shell foundation.
END SEMESTER EXAM
325

Earthquake Analysis and Design
20CESCT132 3-0-0-3 2020
of Structures
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 To assists analysing the interaction between civil infrastructure and the ground, including the
consequences of earthquakes on structures.
 For the proper design and construction of buildings in accordance with building codes, so
as to minimize damage due to earthquakes
Syllabus
Engineering Seismology, Dynamics of Structures, Structural Systems, Earthquake Resistant Design of
R.C.C. Buildings.
Course Outcome:
 Ensure proper design of buildings so they will resist damage due to earthquakes, but at the
same time not be unnecessarily expensive
Text Books:
1. S K Duggal, “Earthquake Resistant Design of Structures”, Oxford University Press, 2007.49
2. Pankaj Agarwal and Manish Shrikhande, “Earthquake Resistant Design of Structures”, Prentice
Hall of India, 2006
References:
1. Course Notes "Design of Reinforced Concrete Buildings", IIT Kanpur, June 1999.
2. Paulay,T and Priestly, M.N.J., “A Seismic Design of Reinforced Concrete and Masonry buildings”,
John Wiley and Sons, 1991.
3. Bruce A Bolt, “Earthquakes” W H Freeman and Company, New York, 2004
4. Bungale S.Taranath, “Structural Analysis and Design of Tall Buildings”, McGraw Hill Book
Company, New York, 1999.
5. Steven. C. Kramer, “A text Book on Geotechnical Earthquake Engineering”, Prentice
hall International series,2004
6. Das B . M., “A Text Book on Principles of Soil Dynamics”, Brooks, Code,1993.
326
COURSE PLAN

20CESCT132 Earthquake Analysis and Design of Structures 3-0-0-3
Contact ESE Marks

MODULES
Hours (%)
MODULE 1: Engineering Seismology (Definitions, Introduction to

Seismic hazard, Earthquake Phenomenon), Seismotectonics and Seismic
Zoning of India, Earthquake Monitoring and Seismic Instrumentation, 7 15
Characteristics of Strong Earthquake Motion, Estimation of Earthquake
Parameters, Microzonation
MODULE 2: Dynamics of Structures (SDOFS/ MDOFS), Response
Spectra - Average Response Spectra -Design Response Spectra,
Evaluation of Earthquake Forces as per codal provisions, Effect of 7 15
Earthquake on
Different Types of Structures, Lessons Learnt From Past Earthquakes
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3: Structural Systems -Types of Buildings, Causes of
damage, Planning Considerations, Philosophy and Principle of Earthquake
Resistant Design, Guidelines for Earthquake Resistant Design, Earthquake 7 15
Resistant Earthen Buildings, Earthquake Resistant Masonry Buildings -
Design consideration –Guidelines.
MODULE 4: Earthquake Resistant Design of R.C.C. Buildings -
7 15
Material properties -Lateral load analysis -Design and detailing –Rigid
Frames –Shear wall –Coupled Shear wall
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5: Mathematical modeling of multistoried RC Buildings
– Capacity based design. Vibration Control -Tuned Mass Dampers – 7 20
Principles and application
MODULE 6: Basic Concept of Seismic Base Isolation –various
7 20
Systems- Case Studies, Important structures.
END SEMESTER EXAM
327

Construction Methods and
20CESCT142 3-0-0-3 2020
Equipments
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 To study the substructure construction techniques like box jacking, sheet piling etc
 To study and understand the various types of equipments used for earthwork, tunneling,
drilling, blasting, dewatering, material handling conveyors and its applications in construction
projects
Syllabus
Open excavation, Supporting the excavations, Construction Method, Construction equipment and
techniques.
Course Outcome:
 At the end of this course students will be able to know various types of equipments to be used
in the constructions projects
Text Books:
1. Peurifoy, R.L., Ledbette. W.B. (2000), “Construction Planning, Equipment and Methods”,
McGraw Hill Co.
2. Varma,M. (1979), “Construction Equipment and its Planning & Applications”, Metropolitain Book
Co.
References:
1. Antil J.M., (1982) “Civil Engineering Construction”, McGraw Hill Book Co.
2. Ratay, R.T. (1984), “Hand Book of Temporary Structures in Construction”, McGraw Hill.
3. Koerner, R.M. (1984), “Construction & Geotechnical Methods in Foundation Engineering”,
McGraw Hill.
4. Smith, R.C, Andres, C.K. (1986), “Principles and Practice of Heavy Construction”, Prentice Hall.
328
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20CESCT142 Construction Methods and Equipments 3-0-0-3
Contact ESE Marks

MODULES
Hours (%)
MODULE 1: Open excavation, shafts and tunnels, pile, pier and
7 15
caisson foundations. Basement construction – construction methods
MODULE 2: Supporting the excavations – control of ground
7 15
water - shoring and underpinning – basement waterproofing
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3: Construction Method for: Bridges, roads, railways,
7 15
dams, harbours, river works and pipelines
MODULE 4: Construction equipment and techniques for: Earth
moving, excavating, drilling, blasting, tunneling and hoisting and 7 15
erection
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5: Equipment for: Dredging, tunneling, dewatering.
7 20
Equipment for Flooring-dewatering and floors finishing.
MODULE 6: Crushers – feeders – screening equipment – batching
and mixing equipment – hauling, pouring and pumping equipment – 7 20
transporters
END SEMESTER EXAM
329

20CESCT114 Advanced Concrete Technology 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 To study the properties of constituent elements of concrete
 To study the properties of fresh and hardened
concrete To study properties of special types of
concrete
Syllabus
Classification, Testing Aggregates, Special Cement, Methods of Concrete mix design, Methods
of transportation
Course Outcome:
To study the properties of concrete and special types of concrete
Text Books:
1. Nevile, A. M. (1985), “Concrete Technology”, Prentice Hall, New York.
2. Gambhir.M.L., Concrete Technology – Tata McGraw Hill Book Co. Ltd.,Delhi,2004
References:
1. Krishnaraju, N., “Advanced Concrete Technology”, CBS Publishers.

2. Santhakumar A.R (2006), “Concrete Technology”, World Rights Publisher.
3. MethaP.K.andMontreio P.J.M., Concrete Structure Properties and Materials, Prentice Hall,
1998.
4. Gupta.B.L. and Amit Gupta, Concrete Technology, Standard Publishers Distributer,
New Delhi, 2004.
330
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20CESCT114 Advanced Concrete Technology 3-0-0-3
Sem.
Contact
MODULES Exam
Hours
Marks (%)
MODULE 1: Classification, Testing Aggregates, Fibres. Cement,
grade of 7 15
Cement, chemical composition, Hydration of Cement, Structure of
hydrated Cement
MODULE 2: Special Cement, Water, Chemical and Mineral Admixtures 7 15
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3: Methods of Concrete mix design, Design of high
strength and high performance concrete. Rheological behaviour of fresh
Concrete, Properties of fresh and hardened concrete, Strength, Elastic 7 15
properties,
Creep and Shrinkage
MODULE 4: Variability of concrete strength. Non destructive testing and
7 15
quality control, Durability, corrosion protection and fire resistance
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5: Methods of transportation, Placing and curing–extreme
whether concreting, Special concreting methods, Vacuum dewatering of 7 20
concrete– Under water concreting
MODULE 6: Fly–ash Concrete, Fibre reinforced Concrete, Polymer
Concrete, Epoxy resins and screeds for rehabilitation – properties and 7 20
application – Emerging trends in replacement of fine aggregates.
END SEMESTER EXAM
331
20CESCT124 Advanced Steel Structures 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 To study and design members subjected to lateral loads and axial loads
 To focus on the study and design of various steel towers and steel chimneys
 To study the design concepts and design Light gauge steel structures
Syllabus
Review of loads on structures, Types of connections, Design of self supporting chimney, Theory
of plastic bending, Behaviour of Compression Elements
Course Outcome:
 The student will also gain knowledge of designing different types of steel members
 The student will have an exposure to design of steel tower and chimneys.
 The student will also gain the knowledge of designing light gauge steel structures
Text Books:
1. Subramanian.N, “Design of Steel Structures”, Oxford University Press, 2008.
2. S.K Duggal “ Limit State Design of steel structures’ TMH publications
References:
1. Dayaratnam.P, “Design of Steel Structures”, A.H.Wheeler, India, 2007.

2. Linton E. Grinter, “Design of Modern Steel Structures”, Eurasia Publishing House, New
Delhi, 1996.
3. John E. Lothers, “Design in Structural Steel”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 1990.
4. Lynn S. Beedle, “Plastic Design of Steel Frames”, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1990.
5. Wie Wen Yu, “Design of Cold Formed Steel Structures”, McGraw Hill Book Company,
New York, 1996.
6. S.S Bhavikatti “ Design of steel structures” I.K International Publishing house Pvt Ltd
332
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20CESCT124 Advanced Steel Structures 3-0-0-3
Contact ESE
MODULES
Hours Marks (%)
MODULE 1: Review of loads on structures – dead, live, wind and
seismic loads as per IS 800-2007 , Design of purlins, Louver rails, gable
column and gable wind girder – Analysis and design of gable frames – 7 15
design of moment resisting base plates
MODULE 2: Types of connections –design requirement of bolted
and welded connections– Seated Connections – Unstiffened and
Stiffened seated Connections – Moment Resistant Connections – Semi 7 15
rigid Connections – Split beam Connections – Framed Connections
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3: Design of self supporting chimney – design of base
plates, foundations and anchor bolts- Guyed steel chimney – guy ropes
– stresses due to wind . Along with load calculation – gust factor 7 15
method.
MODULE 4: Theory of plastic bending- plastic hinge
concept-mechanism method- Apllication to continuous beam and portal 7 15
frames – plastic moment distribution.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5: Limit State Design –Ultimate and serviceability
limit states – Limit state design of axially loaded members- Design of 7 20
beams.
MODULE 6: Behaviour of Compression Elements – Effective
width for load and deflection determination – Behaviour of
Unstiffened and Stiffened Elements – Design of webs of beams – 7 20
Flexural members – Lateral buckling of beams – Shear Lag – Flange
Curling – Design of Compression Members – Wall Studs
END SEMESTER EXAM
333

Quantitative Methods in
20CESCT134 3-0-0-3 2020
Construction
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 To understand various quantitative techniques applied in construction industry
Syllabus
Operations Research, Graphical and Simplex Methods, Production Management, Safety Stock, Decision
Theory.
Course Outcome:
 To bring about an exposure to quantitative techniques applied to construction industry.
Text Books:
1. Hamdy A.Taha, Operations Research: An Introduction, Prentice Hall, 2010.
2. S.L.Tang, IrtishadU.Ahmad,SyedM.Ahmed, Ming Lu, Quantitative Technique for Decision

making in Construction, Hongkong University Press, HKU, 2004.
References:
1. Frank Harrison, E., The Managerial Decision Making Process, Houghton Mifflin Co.,
Boston,1999.
2. Levin, R.I, Rubin,D.S., and Stinson J., Quantitative Approaches to Management, McGraw
Hill College, 1993.
3. Schroeder, R.G, Operations Management, McGraw Hill, 2009.
4. Vohra, Nd., Quantitative Techniques in Management, Third Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill
Company Ltd, 2007
334
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20CESCT134 Quantitative Methods in Construction 3-0-0-3
Contact ESE Marks
MODULES
Hours (%)
MODULE 1: Operations Research - Introduction to Operations
7 15
Research-Linear Programming
MODULE 2: Graphical and Simplex Methods, Duality and Post –
7 15
Optimality Analysis –Transportation and Assignment Problems
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3: Production Management- Inventory Control-EOQ -
7 15
Quantity Discounts
MODULE 4: Safety Stock–Replacement Theory–Simulation Models–
7 15
Quality Control.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5: Decision Theory- Decision Theory –Decision Rules –
Decision making under conditions of certainty, risk and uncertainty – 7 20
Decisiontrees–Utility Theory.
MODULE 6: Managerial Economics: Cost Concepts–Break-even
7 20
analysis–Pricing Techniques–Game theory Applications.
END SEMESTER EXAM
335

Project Formulation and
20CESCT144 3-0-0-3 2020
Appraisal
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 To study elements of project formulation and appraisal
 To study the costing and financial aspects of projects
 To study the implications of private sector participation in construction project
Syllabus
Project, Concepts, Project Cash Flows, Indian Practice of Investment Appraisal, Project Financing.
Course Outcome:
To introduce and study formulation, costing, appraisal and finance of construction projects
Text Books:
1. Prasanna Chandra, Projects –Planning, Analysis, Selection, Implementation Review,
McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi. 2006.
References:
1. Barcus, S.W. and Wilkinson.J.W., Hand Book of Management Consulting Services,

McGraw Hill, New York, 1986.
2. Joy P.K., Total Project Management-The Indian Context, New Delhi, Macmillan India
Ltd.,1992
3. United Nations Industrial Development Organisation (UNIDO) Manual for the
Preparation of Industrial Feasibility Studies, (IDBI Reproduction) Bombay, 1987.
336
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20CESCT144 Project Formulation and Appraisal 3-0-0-3
ESE
Contact
MODULES Marks
Hours
(%)
MODULE 1: Project–Concepts–Capital investments-Generation
and Screening of Project Ideas -Project identification –Preliminary
Analysis, Market, Technical, Financial, Economic and Ecological -Pre- 7 15
Feasibility Report and its Clearance.
MODULE 2: Project Estimates and Techno-Economic Feasibility
Report, Detailed Project Report –Different Project Clearances 7 15
required
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3: Project Cash Flows–Time Value of Money–Cost of
Capital.NPV–BCR–IRR –ARR –Urgency –Pay Back Period– 7 15
Assessment
of Various Methods
MODULE 4: Indian Practice of Investment Appraisal –
International Practice of Appraisal–Analysis of Risk –Different 7 15
Methods–Selection
of a Project and Risk Analysis in Practice
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5: Project Financing–Means of Finance–Financial
7 20
Institutions –Special Schemes– Key Financial Indicators –Ratios.
MODULE 6: Private sector participation in Infrastructure
Development Projects-BOT, BOLT, BOOT-Technology Transfer 7 20
and
Foreign Collaboration -Scope of Technology Transfer.
END SEMESTER EXAM
337

20CESCP101 Mini Project 0-0-4-2 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 To improve the professional competency and research aptitude by touching the specific areas
which are otherwise not covered by theory or laboratory classes.
 To develop the work practice in students to apply theoretical
and practical tools/techniques to solve real life problems related to industry/field and current
research
The mini project is designed to develop practical ability and knowledge about practical problems
related to the industry. Students can take up any structural project pertaining to relevance in the field
of structural engineering and construction management. Projects can be chosen either from the list
provided by the faculty or in the field of interest of the student. As far as possible, projects should be
done in the parent institution. For external projects, students should obtain prior permission after
submitting the details of the guide and synopsis of the work. The external project guide should have a
minimum qualification of ME/M.Tech in Structural Engineering, Construction Management or related
fields. At the end of each phase, presentation of the project should be conducted, which will be
evaluated by a panel of examiners. A detailed project report duly approved by the guide in the
prescribed format should be submitted for end semester assessment. Marks will be awarded based on
the report and their performance during presentations.
338

20CESCL102 Structural Engineering Lab 0-0-2-1 2020
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Mix design of concrete of different grades and using admixtures.

2. Tensile and flexural strength of concrete of different grades.
3. Testing of simply supported RCC beams for flexural failure.
4. Testing of simply supported RCC beams for shear failure.
5. Study on the behavior of prestressed concrete beam.
6. Testing of simply supported RCC beam for combined bending and shear failure.
7. Testing of RCC column.
8. Non-destructive testing of concrete including rebound hammer and ultrasonic pulse method.
9. Structural Dynamics:
i. Free vibration analysis of cantilever beam.

ii. Free vibration analysis of simply supported beam.
iii. Free vibration analysis of simply supported beam with tuned mass.
339

20CESCD101 Industrial Training 0-0-4-0 2020
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Enhance students’ awareness in real life structural and construction management problems
 Enhance employability skills and make them industry-ready
 Improve confidence by providing hands-on experience of real life problems
 Improve the ability to work as an individual and as a member in the group
The student has to undergo an industrial training of minimum two weeks duration during the semester
break. Industrial training should be carried out in an industry / company approved by the institution and under
the guidance of a staff member in the concerned field. Students can take up any application level/system level
project pertaining to a relevant domain. Projects can be chosen from the field of interest of the student. The
project guide should have a minimum qualification of ME/M. Tech. in relevant field of work.
Students should prepare a report which includes the organisational structure, the projects taken up
by the industry and a description of the works they have carried out in the industry. A presentation of 20
minutes duration is to be done before a panel consisting of a Professor in the specialised area as Chairman
and two faculty members. The report of the industrial training should be submitted according to the
prescribed format from the department.
340
M. Tech. Syllabus 2020 – Telecommunication Engineering
IN
WITH SPECIALIZATION
TELECOMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
341
SEMESTER 1
COURSE
CODE
20ECTET101 Applied Linear Algebra 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 To develop the skills in abstract algebra

 To develop the skills to identify linear transformation and transforms and its role in linear
systems
 To develop the skills to formulate linear transformation problems in matrix form
Syllabus
Vector spaces, Linear independence, Linear Transformation, Coordinate transformation, System of

Linear equations, projection, Pseudo inverse, Generalized Eigen vectors, Singular Value Decomposition
Course Outcome:

1. Understand the formulation of problems in abstract algebra framework
2. Understand and represent linear transformations
3. Understand the role of matrices in linear transformation representations
References:
1. G. F. Simmons, Topology and Modern Analysis, McGraw HillJaeger, R.C., Introduction to
Microelectronic Processing,
2. Frazier, Michael W, An Introduction to Wavelets Through Linear Algebra, Springer Publications.
3. Hoffman Kenneth and Kunze Ray, Linear Algebra, Prentice Hall of India.
4. Reichard Bronson, Academic Press
342
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE:
20ECTET101 Applied Linear Algebra 3-0-0-3
Contact ESE Marks
MODULES
Hours (%)
MODULE 1:
Algebraic Structures: Group, Ring, Field Vector Spaces, Subspaces, Linear
7 15
Combinations, Subspace spanned by set of vectors, Linear dependence, and
Linear independence, Spanning set and basis, Finite dimensional vector spaces
MODULE 2:
Solutions to Linear System of Equations: Simple systems, Homogeneous and
Non-homogeneous systems, Gaussian elimination, Null Space and Range,
Rank and nullity, Consistency conditions in terms of rank, General Solution 7 15
of a linear system, Elementary Row and Column operations, Row Reduced
Form, existence and uniqueness of solutions, projection, least square
solution -pseudo inverse.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3:
Linear Transformations -four fundamental subspaces of linear transformation
7 15
-inverse transformation - rank nullity theorem -Matrix representation of
linear transformation, Change of Basis operation
MODULE 4:
Inner product, Inner product Spaces, Cauchy – Schwarzine quality, Norm,
Orthogonality, Gram –Schmidt orthonormalization, Orthonormal basis,
Expansion in terms of orthonormal basis, Orthogonal complement,
7 15
Decomposition of a vector with respect to a subspace and its orthogonal
complement– Pythagoras Theorem
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5:
Eigen value – Eigenvector pairs, characteristic equation, Algebraic multiplicity,
Eigenvectors, Eigen spaces and geometric multiplicity, Diagonalization
criterion. The diagonalizing matrix, Projections, Decomposition of the matrix
in terms of projections, Real Symmetric and Hermitian matrices, Properties 7 20
of Eigen values, Eigen vectors, Unitary/Orthogonal diagonalizability of
Complex Hermitian/Real
Symmetric Matrices, Spectral Theorem, Positive and Negative Definite and
Semi Definite matrices.
MODULE 6:
General Matrices: Rank, Nullity, Range and Null Space of AAT and ATA,
7 20
Singular Values, Singular Value Decomposition, Pseudo-inverse and Optimal
solution of a linear system of equations, The Geometry of Pseudo-inverse.
END SEMESTER EXAM
343
COURSE
CODE
Random Processes and
20ECTET103 3-1-0-4 2020
Applications
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 To provide necessary basic concepts in statistical signal analysis

 To study about random processes and its properties
 Apply the basic concepts to various elementary and some advanced applications
Syllabus
Probability theory, Random variable, Probability Density function, Conditional and Joint Distribution
sand densities, Functions of Random Variables, Expectation, Conditional Expectations, RandomVector,
Random Processes, Chapman- Kolmogorov Equations, WSS Processes and LTI Systems,Inequalities,
Central limit theorem, Random Sequences, Advanced Topics.
Course Outcome:
1. Have a fundamental knowledge of the basic probability concepts
2. Have a good knowledge of standard distributions which can describe real life phenomena
3. Acquire skills in handling situations involving several random variable and functions of random
variables
4. Understand and characterize phenomena which evolve with respect to time in probabilistic
manner
References:
1. Henry Stark and John W. Woods, "Probability and Random Processes with Applications to
Signal Processing", Pearson Education, Third edition.
2. Athanasios Papoulis and S. Unnikrishna Pillai, Probability, Random Variables and Stochastic
Processes, TMH
3. Gray, R. M. and Davisson L. D., An Introduction to Statistical Signal Processing.Cambridge
University Press, 2004 (Available at:http://www.ee.stanford.edu/~gray/sp.pdf)
4. Oliver C. Ibe. , Fundamentals of Applied Probability and Random Process, Elsevier, 2005.
344
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE:
20ECTET103 Random Processes and Applications 3-1-0-4
ESE
Contact
MODULES Marks
Hours
(%)
MODULE 1:
Introduction: Sets, Fields and Events, Definition of probability, Joint, Conditional
and Total Probability, Bayes’ Theorem, and applications. Random Variable:- 8 12
Definition, Probability Distribution Function, Probability Density function,
Common density functions, Continuous, Discrete and Mixed random Variables.
MODULE 2:
Conditional and Joint Distributions and densities, independence of random
10 18
variables. Functions of Random Variables: One function of one random variable,
One function of two random variables, Two functions of two random variables.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3:
Expectation: Fundamental Theorem of expectation, Moments, Joint moments,
Moment Generating functions, Characteristic functions, Conditional Expectations, 10 15
Correlation and Covariance, Jointly Gaussian Random Variables. Random Vector: -
Definition, Joint statistics, Covariance matrix and its properties.
MODULE 4:
Random Processes: -Basic Definitions, Poisson Process, Wiener Process, Markov
Process, Birth- Death Markov Chains, Chapman-Kolmogorov Equations, 10 15
Stationarity, Wide sense Markov Process Stationarity, WSS Processes and LTI
Systems, Power spectral density, White Noise.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5:
Chebyshev and Schwarz Inequalities, Chernoff Bound, Central Limit Theorem.
Random Sequences: Basic Concepts, WSS sequences and linear systems, Markov 10 24
Random sequences, Markov Chains, Convergence of Random Sequences:
Definitions, Laws of large numbers.
MODULE 6:
Advanced Topics: Ergodicity, Karhunen- Leove Expansion, Representation of Band-
8 16
limited and periodic Processes: WSS periodic Processes, Fourier Series for WSS
Processes
END SEMESTER EXAM
345
COURSE
CODE
20ECTET105 Advanced Digital Communication 3-1-0-4 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 To introduce the different aspects of digital communication over various channels, fromdesign
through performance issues to application requirement.
 To give an idea on the advances in Multichannel and Multicarrier Systems design.
Syllabus
Digital Communication over Additive Gaussian Noise Channels- Optimum waveform receiver in
additive white Gaussian noise. Digital Communication over Band limited Channels- Optimum receiver
for channels with ISI and AWGN- Equalization Techniques. Spread spectrum Communication- modeling,
application, and synchronization of spread spectrum signals. Digital Communication over Fading Multi-
path Channels. Multiuser Communication - techniques and capacity.
Course Outcome:
1. Understand the design issues of Digital Communication over Additive Gaussian Noise
Channels, over Band limited Channels and Fading Multipath Channels.
2. Understand the design issues in spread spectrum and multicarrier systems.
3. Understand various digital communication receivers and equalization
References:
1. John G. Proakis, Digital Communications, 4/e, McGraw-Hill

2. Edward. A. Lee and David. G. Messerschmitt, “Digital Communication”, Allied Publishers (second
edition).
3. Viterbi, A. J., and J. K. Omura. Principles of Digital Communication and Coding. NY:McGraw-Hill,
1979. ISBN: 0070675163.
4. Marvin K Simon, Sami M Hinedi, William C Lindsey - Digital Communication -Techniques –Signal
Design & Detection, PHI
5. Bernard Sklar,” Digital Communications: Fundamentals and applications “, Prentice Hall 2001.
6. Andrea Goldsmith,” Wireless Communications”, Cambridge University Press 2005.
346
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE:
20ECTET105 Advanced Digital Communication 3-1-0-4
ESE
Contact
MODULES Marks
Hours
(%)
MODULE 1:
Characterization of Communication Signals and Systems: Representation of
band pass signals and systems. Signal space representation. Representation of 8 15
digitally modulated signals: memory-less modulation methods, linear
modulation with memory. Power spectra, Bandwidth efficiency.
MODULE 2:
Optimum receiver for additive white Gaussian noise channel: correlation
demodulator, matched filter demodulator, optimum detector. Performance of 10 15
optimum receiver for memory-less modulation techniques: probability of
error for binary modulation and M-array orthogonal signals, QPSK, QAM.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3:
Communication through band limited channels: Signal design for band-limited
channels. Optimum receiver for channels with ISI and AWGN. Equalization 10 15
techniques: Linear equalization, Decision feedback equalization, ML detectors.
Adaptive equalization: Algorithms
MODULE 4:
Multicarrier Systems: Data transmission with multiple carriers, Multicarrier
modulation with overlapping sub-channels, Mitigation of subcarrier fading. 8 15
Discrete implementation of multicarrier modulation. Challenges in
multicarrier systems.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5:
Digital communication through fading multipath channel: characterization of
fading multipath channel. The effect of signal characteristics on the choice of a 10 20
channel model. Frequency-nonselective slowly fading channel. Digital signaling
over a frequency selective slowly fading channel.
MODULE 6:
Multiple access techniques- Capacity of multiple access methods. Spread
spectrum principles, processing gain and jamming margin. Direct sequence
10 20
spread spectrum (DSSS), Frequency Hopping Spread Spectrum (FHSS).
Synchronization of spread spectrum systems. CDMA signal and channel
models, optimum receiver. Random access methods.
END SEMESTER EXAM
347
COURSE
CODE
Advanced Digital Signal
20ECTET107 3-0-0-3 2020
Processing
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 To provide an overview of time frequency analysis and hence the significance of wavelet
transform.
 To enable the students to use various wavelets transforms for applications like data
compression.
 To familiarize the students with multi-rate sampling principles.
 To enable the students to appreciate various applications of multi-rate systems.
 To equip the students to work with various linear prediction algorithms.
 To familiarize the students with Power spectrum estimation of signals and Power spectral
density.
 To familiarize the students with design of adaptive filters.
Syllabus
Multi-rate signal processing, Filter banks, Continuous and Discrete wavelet transforms, Filter bank
interpretation, Linear Prediction. Adaptive filters
Course Outcome:
1. Design multi-rate systems for applications like sub-band coding.
2. Account for the wavelet transform principles, taking into consideration, time frequency analysis and
multi resolution analysis.
3. Implement various wavelet transforms on 1D as well as 2D signals.
4. Use wavelet transforms for applications like image compression.
5. Design linear prediction systems using Levinson-Durbin algorithm.
6. Have a better appreciation of Power spectrum estimation of signals and Power spectral density.
7. Learn the basics of Adaptive filters
References:
1. P. P. Vaidyanathan, ”Multirate Systems and Filterbanks”, Prentice Hall

2. “Wavelet Transforms ”- Bopadikar and Rao, Pearson Education
3. “Insight into wavelets”, K. P. Soman, Prentice Hall India
4. “Digital signal Processing”, By John G. Proakis, Dimitris G. Manolakis Pearson Education
5. L. Cohen,”Time Frequency Analysis”, Prentice Hall.
6. “Wavelets and Filterbanks”, G Strang& T Nguyen ,Wellesly-Cambridge
7. “Wavelets and subband coding”, M Vetterli& J Kovacevic, Prentice Hall
8. “Adaptive Filter Theory”,Simon Haykin, Prentice Hall
9.
348
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20ECTET107 Advanced Digital Signal Processing 3-0-0-3
ESE
Contact
MODULES Marks
Hours
(%)
MODULE 1:
Basics of Multirate systems and its application, up sampling and Down -Sampling,
5 12
Fractional Sampling rate converter. Frequency domain analysis-anti aliasing and anti-
imaging filter.
MODULE 2:
Poly phase decomposition. Efficient realization of Multi-rate systems. Uniform filter
7 18
banks and its implementation using poly-phase decomposition. Two channel
Quadrature Mirror Filter Banks, Perfect Reconstruction.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3:
Time Frequency Analysis, Heisenberg's uncertainty principle. Short time Fourier 5 10
transform. Continuous Wavelet Transform and its properties.
MODULE 4:
Multi Resolution Analysis. Discrete Wavelet Transform, Orthonormal Wavelet
10 20
Analysis – Filter bank interpretation. Application of wavelet transform for data
compression. -image and speech.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5:
Power spectrum estimation of signals Power spectral density. Nonparametric
7 20
methods: Periodogram, Backman-Tuckey method. Parametric method: ARMA, AR
processes Yule-Walker method.
MODULE 6:
Linear Prediction -Forward and Backward Prediction - Levinson-Durbin Algorithm - 8 20
basic of steepest descend algorithm-adaptive filters- LMS algorithm- applications.
END SEMESTER EXAM
349
COURSE
CODE
20ECTET111 Optical Communication Systems 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 Understand the basic concepts and advantages of fiber optics communication.

 Calculate pulse spread in optical fiber and use it to calculate the bandwidth and data rate of an
optical fiber link.
 To solve the wave equation and apply it in the analysis of symmetric slab waveguide.
 Understand the concept and conditions for light guidance.
 Understand the difference between single mode/multimode fibers as well as step index and
graded index fibers and perform relevant calculations.
 Know the origin of fiber optics losses, including intrinsic and extrinsic loss and know how to
calculate link losses.
 Design a basic optical fiber link.
 To understand various optical amplifiers, WDM systems and Soliton systems
Syllabus
Optical Fibers – Dispersion, Fiber losses, Non-linear optical effects. Optical Transmitters- LED,
Semiconductor lasers, Hetero-structures- VCSEL, Transmitter design, Modulation. Optical receivers-
Detectors, Receiver design, Noise, Sensitivity- BER, Sensitivity degradation. Architecture and Design of
Light wave systems- Loss limited and Dispersion limited light wave systems. Link budget analysis. Optical
amplifiers- Various types, Design of EDFAs. Various Techniques for Dispersion Management. Soliton
based systems- Impact of amplifier noise-Timing Jitter, Gordon – Hauss Effect, Bit Error Rate
Performance. WDM systems – Components and performance issues. Coherent light wave systems.
Course Outcome:
1. Understand various principles of optical communications system operating characteristics
2. Knowledge of the basic design rules and trade-offs of modern optical transmitters and receivers
3. Understand various optical amplifiers
4. Know about multiplexing techniques
5. Understand Soliton systems
References:
1. Govind P. Agrawal: Fiber Optic Communication System, John Wiley and Sons,2003
2. J Diggonet, Rare earth Doped FiberLasers and Amplifiers, , 2/e CRC Press
3. Hasegawa, Solitons in Optical Communications, Clarendon Press1995
4. Govind P. Agrawal: Nonlinear Optics, Academic press 2nd Ed
350
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20ECTET111 Optical Communication Systems 3-0-0-3
ESE
Contact
MODULES Marks
Hours
(%)
MODULE 1:
Optical Fibers – Dispersion, Fiber losses, Nonlinear optical effects. Optical
7 15
Transmitters-LED, Semiconductor lasers, Hetero-structures- VCSEL,
Transmitter design. Modulation.
MODULE 2:
Optical receivers -Basic concepts, Detectors, Receiver design, Noise, 7 15
Sensitivity- BER, Sensitivity degradation
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3:
Architecture and Design of Light wave systems- Loss limited and Dispersion 7 15
limited light wave systems. Link budget analysis.
MODULE 4:
Optical amplifiers- Various types, Design of EDFAs. Various Techniques for 7 15
Dispersion management
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5:
Soliton based systems- Impact of amplifier noise-Timing Jitter, Gordon – Hauss- 7 20
Effect, Bit Error Rate Performance.
MODULE 6:
WDM systems – Components and performance issues. Coherent light wave 7 20
systems-Concepts, Modulation Formats and Bit Error Rate Performance.
END SEMESTER EXAM
351
COURSE
CODE
Modelling and Simulation of
20ECTET121 3-0-0-3 2020
Communication Systems
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 To introduce the main ideas underlying the simulation of communication systems.

 To understand the role of simulation in engineering systems.
 To focus on the modeling, performance evaluation techniques and validation.
Syllabus
Modelling and simulation of systems, error sources in simulation, modelling of communication channels,
validation, performance estimation and evaluation, analysis of simulation results.
Course Outcome:

1. Simulate a communication system.
2. Analyze the performance of the communication system
References:
1. M.C. Jeruchim, Philip Balaban and K.Samshanmugam, “Simulation of communication

systems,”Plemum press, New York, 2007.
2. M.Law and W. David Kelton ,” Simulation Modelling and analysis” ,Tata McGraw Hill, New
York,2008.
3. Raj Jain, The Art of Computer Systems Performance Analysis, John Wiley and Sons.
4. Jerry Banks and John S.Carson, "Discrete-event system Simulation”, Prentice Hall, Inc.,
NewJersey.
352
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20ECTET121 Modelling and Simulation of Communication Systems 3-0-0-3
ESE
Contact
MODULES Marks
Hours
(%)
MODULE 1:
Modelling and Simulation Approach: Basic concepts of modelling – modelling of
systems, devices, random process, and hypothetical systems. Error sources in
7 15
simulation. Validation of devices, system models and random process models,
simulation environment and software issues. Role of simulation in communication
system and random process. Steps involved in simulation study.
MODULE 2:
Generation and Parameter Estimation: Monte Carlo simulation, random number
Generation, Generating independent random sequences. Parameter estimation:
8 15
Estimating mean, variance, confidence interval, Estimating the Average Level of a
Waveform, Estimating the Average power of a waveform, Power Spectral
Density of a process, Delay and Phase.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3:
Modelling of Communication Systems: Information sources, source coding, base
7 15
band modulation, channel coding, RF modulation, filtering, multiplexing,
detection/demodulation- carrier and timing recovery for BPSK and QPSK
MODULE 4:
Communication Channel Models: Fading and multipath channels- statistical
characterization of multipath channels and time-varying channels with Doppler 6 15
effects, models for multipath fading channels. Methodology for simulating
communication systems operating over fading channels.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5:
Performance Estimation and Evaluation: Estimation of Performance Measures -
6 20
Estimation of SNR, Performance Measures for Digital Systems, Importance
sampling method.
MODULE 6:
Analysis of simulation Results: Model Verification Techniques, Model Validation
Techniques, Transient Removal, Terminating Simulations, Stopping Criteria,
8 20
Variance Reduction.
Case Studies: (1) Performance of 16-QAM equalized Line of Sight Digital Radio
Link, (2) performance evaluation of CDMA Cellular Radio System.
END SEMESTER EXAM
353
COURSE
CODE
Spread Spectrum and CDMA
20ECTET131 3-0-0-3 2020
Systems
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objective:
 To familiarize fundamentals of Spread Spectrum.

 To get an idea about performance analysis of Spread Spectrum system under various channel
conditions.
 To provide an overview of Spread Spectrum multiple access networks.
 To get an overview of CDMA systems.
Syllabus
Introduction to spread spectrum communication. Properties and generation of spreading sequences.

Synchronization and Tracking of spread spectrum systems. Performance analysis of spread spectrum
system under AWGN channel. Performance of Spread Spectrum Multiple Access Networks.
Introduction to spread spectrum multiple access in cellular environments. Multi-user Detection. CDMA
Systems
Course Outcome:

1. Generate various spreading sequences and codes.
2. Should be able to comment about the feasibility of given SS system from its performance Analysis.
3. Should be able to provide solutions to various issues present in SS systems.
References:
1. R. L. Peterson, R. Ziemer and D. Borth: “Introduction to Spread Spectrum

Communications,”Prentice Hall, 1995.
2. A. J. Viterbi: “CDMA - Principles of Spread Spectrum Communications,” Addison-Wesley,
1995.
3. Vijay K. Garg, Kenneth F. Smolik, Joseph E. Wilkes: Applications of CDMA in
Wireless/Personal Communications, Prentice Hall, 1997
4. S. Verdu: “Multiuser Detection” , Cambridge University Press, 1998 (with correction: 2003)
5. Mosa Ali Abu – Rgheff “Introduction to CDMA Wireless communication” Else Vier
6. M. K. Simon, J. K. Omura, R. A. Scholtz and B. K. Levitt: “Spread Spectrum Communications
Handbook”, McGraw Hill, New York, 2002.
7. Cooper and McGillem: “Modern Communications and Spread Spectrum” McGraw- Hill, 1986.
8. J. G. Proakis: “Digital Communications,” McGraw Hill, 4th edition, 2001.
9. S. Glisic and B. Vucetic: “Spread Spectrum CDMA Systems for Wireless Communications,”
Artech House, 1997
354
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20ECTET131 Spread Spectrum and CDMA Systems 3-0-0-3
ESE
Contact
MODULES Marks
Hours
(%)
MODULE 1:
Fundamentals of Spread Spectrum: Introduction to spread spectrum
communication, pulse noise jamming, low probability of detection, direct 7 15
sequence spread spectrum, frequency-hopping and time hopping spread
spectrum systems, correlation functions.
MODULE 2:
Spreading sequences- maximal-length sequences, gold codes, Walsh orthogonal
codes- properties and generation of sequences. Synchronization and Tracking: 8 15
delay lock and tau-dither loops, coarse synchronization- principles of serial
search and match filter techniques
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3:
Performance Analysis of SS system : Performance of spread spectrum system
under AWGN, multiuser Interference, jamming and narrow band interferences
Low probability of intercept methods, optimum intercept receiver for direct 7 15
sequence spread spectrum, RAKE receiver Capacity. Coverage and Control of
Spread Spectrum Multiple Access Networks. Error probability of DS-CDMA
system under AWGN and fading channels.
MODULE 4:
Basics of spread spectrum multiple access in cellular environments, reverse
Link power control, multiple cell pilot tracking, soft and hard handoffs, cell
6 15
coverage issues with hard and soft handoff, spread spectrum multiple access
outage, outage with imperfect power control, Erlang capacity offorward and
reverse links.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5:
Multi-user Detection -MF detector, decorrelating detector, MMSE detector.
6 20
Interference Cancellation: successive, Parallel Interference Cancellation,
performance analysis of multiuser detectors and interference cancellers.
MODULE 6:
CDMA Systems: General aspects of CDMA cellular systems, IS-95 standard,
Downlink and uplink, Evolution to Third Generation systems, WCDMA and 8 20
CDMA-2000 standards, Principles of Multicarrier communication, MCCDMA
and MC-DS-CDMA
END SEMESTER EXAM
355
M.Tech. SYLLABUS – 2020
COURSE
CODE
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:

Syllabus
Course Outcome:

plan.
Text Books:
Publisher, 2004
PublicationsLtd; Third Edition
References:
Company Ltd, 2004
4. Management Research Methodology’ by K. N. Krishnaswamy et al, Person Education.
356
COURSE PLAN
Contact
MODULES
Hours
MODULE 1:
MODULE 2:
4
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3:
Literature Survey and Review, Identifying gap areas from literature
5
MODULE 4:
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5:
acknowledgement
MODULE 6:
Documentation and presentation tools – LATEX, Office Software with
4
techniques
357
COURSE
CODE
20ECTEQ101 Seminar – I 0-0-2-2 2020
COURSE CONTENT
offered in the first semester of the M. Tech. Programme. He / she shall select the topic based on the
References: from international journals of repute, preferably IEEE journals. They should get the paper
approved by the Programme Co-ordinator / Faculty member in charge of the seminar and shall present
it in the class. Every student shall participate in the seminar. The students should undertake a detailed
study on the topic and submit a report at the end of the semester. Marks will be awarded based on the
topic, presentation, participation in the seminar and the report submitted.
358
COURSE
CODE
20ECTEL101 Telecommunication Lab - I 0-0-2-1 2020
Pre-requisites: Basic course on MATLAB and Communication Engineering Lab
Course Objectives:
To experiment the concepts introduced in the core and elective courses offered in the first semester
with the help of simulation tools and related hardware
COURSE CONTENT HRS
Tools: Numerical Computing Environments – GNU Octave or MATLAB or

any other equivalent tool, NS2/OPNET.
Random Processes– Generation of discrete time i.i.d. random processes with
different
Distributions (Bernoulli, Binomial, Geometric, Poisson, Uniform, Gaussian,
Exponential, Laplacian, Rayleigh, Rician) - pmf/pdf estimation, AR, MA and ARMA
processes - spectral estimation -Visualization of Central Limit Theorem, Whitening
Filter.
Communication system Design for Band limited Channels - Signal Design for
Zero ISI and Controlled ISI - Partial Response Signaling.
Carrier Phase Modulation and Quadrature Amplitude Modulation - BER
Performance in AWGN channel.
Synchronization in Communication Systems: Carrier and Clock
Synchronization- Frequency Offset Estimation and Correction.
Modeling and Simulation of Networks using NS2/OPNET: Unicast Routing
Basics -
Measurements and Statistics of Delays, Throughput, and Packet Behavior - TCP and
Packet Trace
Tools - Real-Audio vs. TCP-based Traffic.
TCP Connections- Congestion and Congestion Control Parameters. MAC
Protocols: CSMA and CSMA/CD in Ethernet and LAN Environments. Multimedia
Networking applications: RTSP and Transport of Video using UDP. OMNEST and
OMNET
359
SEMESTER II
COURSE
CODE
20ECTET102 Estimation and Detection Theory 3-1-0-4 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 Familiarize the basic concepts of detection theory, decision theory and elementary hypothesis
testing
 Acquire knowledge about parameter estimation, and linear signal waveform estimation
 Get a broad overview of applications of detection and estimation
Syllabus
Detection theory, Hypothesis testing, Detection with unknown signal parameters, Non parametric
detection, Parameter estimation, Cramer- Rao lower bound, Linear Signal Waveform Estimation,
Levinson Durbin and innovation algorithms, Applications of detection and estimation.
Course Outcome:

1. Understand Signal detection in the presence of noise
2. Understand the basic concepts of estimation theory
3. Ability to apply the concepts of estimation and detection in various signal processing applications
References:
1. S.M. Kay, Fundamentals of Statistical Signal Processing: Detection Theory, Prentice Hall, 1998
2. S.M. Kay, Fundamentals of Statistical Signal Processing: Estimation Theory, Prentice Hall, 1993
3. H.L. Van Trees, Detection, Estimation and Modulation Theory, Part I, Wiley, 1968.
4. H.V. Poor, An Introduction to Signal Detection and Estimation, 2nd edition, Springer,1994.
5. L.L. Scharf, Statistical Signal Processing, Detection and Estimation Theory,Addison-Wesley:1990
360
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE:
20ECTET102 Estimation and Detection Theory 3-1-0-4
Contact ESE Marks
MODULES
Hours (%)
MODULE 1:
Detection Theory, Decision Theory, and Hypothesis Testing
10 15
:Elementary hypothesis testing, Neyman-Pearson Theorem,
Minimum probability of error, Bayes risk, Multiple hypothesis testing
MODULE 2:
Matched filter, Composite hypothesis testing: Generalized
9 15
likelihood-ratio test. Detection of Signalswith unknown Amplitude,
Chernoff bound
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3:
Parameter Estimation: Minimum Variance Unbiased Estimator,
9 15
Cramer-Rao lower bound, Fisher information matrix, Linear Models,
Best Linear Unbiased Estimator.
MODULE 4:
Maximum Likelihood Estimation, Invariance principle, Least Square
Estimation, Non-linear least square estimation, Minimum mean 9 15
square estimation, Minimum mean absolute error, Maximum
APosteriori Estimators
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5:
Linear Signal Waveform Estimation: Wiener Filter, Kalman Filter, 10 20
Choosing an estimator
MODULE 6:
Applications of detection and estimation: Applications in diverse
fields such as communications, system identification, adaptive 9 20
filtering, pattern recognition, speech processing, and image
processing
END SEMESTER EXAM
361

20ECTET104 Antenna Theory and Design 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 To give idea about analysis and design of antennas and antenna arrays.
Syllabus
Review of Antenna Parameters, Antenna matching. Review of dipole antennas, Monopole antennas, Vee
and rhombic antennas. Folded dipole. Analysis of Circular Loop and Biconical Antenna. Helical
Antennas. Current induced in a dipole antenna. Near fields of linear antennas, arrays of parallel dipoles,
Yagi-Uda antennas. Aperture antenna. Radiation from open-ended wave-guides, horn antennas, optimum
horn design, rectangular micro-strip antennas – Field analysis and design. parabolic reflector antennas,
aperture-field and current-distribution methods, radiation patterns of reflector antennas, dual-reflector
antennas, lens antennas. Frequency independent antennas. Antenna arrays. Grating lobes. One
dimensional arrays. Concept of beam steering. Design of array. Adaptive Beam forming. 2D arrays
Course Outcome:
1. Understand the analysis of practical antennas
2. Understand the design antennas
3. Understand general antenna arrays and array design method
References:
1. Sopholes J. Orfanidis – Electromagnetic waves and antennas. Available at:

http://eceweb1.rutgers.edu/~orfanidi/ewa/
2. Consrantive A Balanis -Antenna Theory - Analysis and Design – 2/e John Wiley & Sons.
3. John D. Krans, Ronald J. Marhefka : Antennas for all Applications , 3/e, TMH
4. Thomas A Milligan – Modern Antenna Design ,2/e John Wiley & Sons.
362
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20ECTET104 Antenna Theory and Design 3-0-0-3
Contact ESE Marks
MODULES
Hours (%)
MODULE 1:
Review of Antenna Parameters:- Polarization, Input impedance,
Gain. Relation between radiation fields and magnetic vector 7 15
potential – Helmholtz equation and Lorentz conditions. Antenna
matching –T match, baluns, gamma and omega match.
MODULE 2:
Review of dipole antennas (short dipole and arbitrary length),
Monopole antennas, V and rhombic antennas. Folded dipole and it's
7 15
properties. Analysis of Circular Loop and Biconical Antenna.
HelicalAntennas (normal mode and axial mode) – relation for far
fields, radiation resistance and gain.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3:
Current induced in a dipole antenna – Pocklington and Hallen's
integral equations. Solution of Hallen's integral equation for current
7 15
induced in a dipole antenna for delta gap model. Near fields of linear
antennas, self and mutual impedance, arrays of parallel dipoles, Yagi-
Uda antennas.
MODULE 4:
Aperture antenna – Field equivalence principle. Radiation from
open-ended wave-guides, horn antennas, horn radiation fields, horn 7 15
directivity, optimum horn design, rectangular micro-strip antennas–
Filed analysis and design
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5:
Parabolic reflector antennas, gain and beam width of reflector
antennas, aperture-field and current distribution methods, radiation
patterns of reflector antennas, dual-reflector antennas, lens 7 20
antennas-hyperbolic lens and zoned lens. Frequency independent
antennas – Rumsey Principle – Spiral Antennas. Design of log
periodic dipole arrays.
MODULE 6:
Antenna arrays – General expression for array factor. Grating lobes.
One dimensional arrays- Broadside, end fire and Chebyshev arrays.
Concept of beam steering. Design of array using Schelkunnof's zero
7 20
placement method and Fourier series method. Woodward-Lawson
frequency-sampling design, Narrow beam design and Butler matrix
beam former. Adaptive Beam forming. 2D arrays –Rectangular and
Circular array.
END SEMESTER EXAM
363
COURSE
CODE
20ECTET106 Wireless Communication and Networks 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 To familiarize radio propagation characteristics.

 To understand the link design in satellite communication.
 To understand the design of cellular system.
 To familiarize wireless networks.
Syllabus
Propagation characteristics of radio waves, modulation and coding techniques for mobile radio, space
time propagation and channel models, capacity and diversity of space time channels, cellular architecture
and frequency allocation techniques for mobile radio, analysis of CDMA systems, satellite link and
interference analysis, wireless networks and standards.
Course Outcome:

1. Explain the radio propagation characteristics.
2. Explain the cellular concepts.
3. Design satellite link.
4. Compare wireless networks.
References:
1. Andrea Goldsmith, “Wireless Communication”, Cambridge University Press.

2. T.S. Rappaport, Wireless Communications: Principles and Practice, Prentice Hall, 2002.
3. G.L. Stuber, Principles of Mobile Communications, Kluwer Academic, 1996.
4. Tri. T. Ha: , Digital Satellite Communication, 2nd Edn ,McGraw Hill, 2009
5. Kumar, D. Manjunath and J. Kuri, Communication Networking, an Analytical Approach, Elsever,
2004
6. Paulraj, R. Nabar& D. Gore, Introduction to Space Time Wireless Communications, Cambridge
University Press, 2003
7. C Sivarama Murthy and B S Manoj, Ad-Hoc Wireless Networks, Architectures and Protocols,
PH, 2004.
364
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE:
20ECTET106 Wireless Communication and Networks 3-0-0-3
Contact ESE Marks
MODULES
Hours (%)
MODULE 1:
Radio Propagation Characteristics: Models for path loss, shadowing and
multipath fading (delay spread, coherence band width, coherence time,
9 15
Doppler spread), Jakes channel model, Linear and constant envelope
digital modulation techniques for mobile radio, Block and Convolutional
channel coding.
MODULE 2:
Space time propagation: Wireless channel as a space time random field,
8 15
space time channel models, capacity of frequency flatdeterministic MIMO
channels, Transmit and receive antenna diversity.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3:
The cellular concept: Frequency reuse, The basic theory of hexagonal
6 15
cell layout, Capacity of cellular system, Channel allocation schemes,
Frequency planning techniques, Cluster planned hierarchical architecture.
MODULE 4:
Cellular CDMA system: reverse and forward link, Radio Resource
6 15
Management: soft and hard handoffs, CDMA soft handoff analysis,
GSMcellular standards.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5:
Satellite link: Basic link and interference analysis, Rain induced
attenuation and cross polarization interference – link design, Frequency 6 20
Division Multiple Access – FDM – FM – FDMA, Single channel per
carrier.
MODULE 6:
Wireless networks: IEEE 802.11 – Physical layer – media access frame
format –802.11b, High throughput WLAN (IEEE 802.11n), Quality of
service support (IEEE 802.11e), Security enhancements (IEEE 7 20
802.11i).Bluetooth, Bluetooth protocol architecture, Operational states,
Bluetooth security, Mobile IP-Address mobility, Tunneling, Handoffs,
IPV6advancements.
END SEMESTER EXAM
365
COURSE
CODE
20ECTET112 Adaptive Signal Processing 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 Introduction of basic concepts of adaptive systems and their applications.

 Familiarize with various algorithms applicable for designing adaptive systems.
 Get an overall picture about adaptive filter design in various fields.
Syllabus
Introduction to adaptive signal processing, Adaptive systems- definitions and characteristics. Smoothing
and Prediction filtering, MSE predictors, Filtering, surface-stability and rate of convergence LMS and
RLS algorithms and their tracking performance, Applications of adaptive signal processing.
Course Outcome:

1. Understand basic concepts of adaptive signal processing.
2. Design of various adaptive filters and compare the convergence issues, computational
complexities and optimality.
3. Ability to develop adaptive systems for various applications.
References:
1. Bernard Widrow and Samuel D. Stearns: “Adaptive Signal Processing”, Person Education, 2008.
2. Simon Haykin: “Adaptive Filter Theory”, Pearson Education, 2003.
3. John R. Treichler, C. Richard Johnson, Michael G. Larimore: “Theory and Design of Adaptive
Filters”, Prentice-Hall of India, 2002. (Wiley and sons publications, 1987)
4. S. Thomas Alexander: “Adaptive Signal Processing - Theory and Application”, Springer-Verlag.
5. D. G. Manolokis, V. K. Ingle and S. M. Kogon: “Statistical and Adaptive Signal Processing”,
McGraw Hill International Edition, 2000.
366
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE:
20ECTET112 Adaptive Signal Processing 3-0-0-3
Contact ESE Marks

MODULES
Hours (%)
MODULE 1:
Goal of adaptive signal processing, some application scenarios,
problem formulation. Adaptive systems - definitions and
7 15
characteristics -applications – properties examples - adaptive linear
combiner-input signal and weight vectors - performance function-
gradient
MODULE 2:
MMSE predictors, LMMSE predictor, orthogonality theorem.
Introduction to filtering-smoothing and prediction - linear optimum 8 15
filtering -orthogonality - Wiener – Hopf equation-performance
surface, Leastsquare filters.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3:
Searching performance surface-stability and rate of convergence -
learning curve-gradient search - Newton's method - method of 7 15
steepest descent - comparison - gradient estimation - performance
penalty -variance - excess MSE and time constants
MODULE 4:
Convergence of weight vector-LMS/Newton algorithm - properties -
6 15
sequential regression algorithm - lattice structure - adaptive filters
withorthogonal signals– mis-adjustments.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5:
Adaptive recursive filters - RLS recursions - assumptions for RLS -
convergence of RLS coefficients and MSE.LMS and RLS filters using
6 20
lattice filters - Levinson Durbin algorithm -reverse Levinson Durbin
algorithm. Tracking performance of LMS and RLS filters - Degree of
stationarity and misadjustment - MSE derivations.
MODULE 6:
Adaptive modeling of Multipath Communication channel – Adaptive
equalization of telegraph channels - Adaptive interference 8 20
cancellation -Techniques used in Adaptive removal of noise in speech
signals and echoes in long distance telephone circuits.
END SEMESTER EXAM
367
COURSE
CODE
20ECTET122 Digital Microwave Communication 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 To familiarize the digital microwave systems and their structures.

 To understand different multiplexing techniques.
 To get an overview about different waveguide components and accessories.
Syllabus
Overview of Digital Microwave Communication systems. Structure of MUX equipment’s. Signaling

Telecommunication. Equalization techniques in DMR-770 Digital Microwave radio. Bit Stream
integration in Digital Transmission systems. Waveguide components and accessories.
Course Outcome:

1. Understand the structure of digital microwave systems.
2. Understand digital transmission systems.
3. Understand the working of waveguide components and accessories
References:
1. P V Sreekanth: Digital Microwave Communication Systems, Universities Press, 2003

2. Robert E. Collin: Foundation for Microwave Engineering,2nd edition, McGraw Hill,1992
3. David M. Pozar: Microwave Engineering, 3rd Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 2004.
368
COURSE PLAN

20ECTET122 Digital Microwave Communication 3-0-0-3
Contact ESE Marks
MODULES
Hours (%)
MODULE 1:
Digital Microwave Communication systems - general block diagram,
interconnections, 34+2Mb Digital microwave radio equipment –
7 15
arrangement of modules – DMR 770, signal flow, modules and sub
modules, Transmitter –Receiver sub system, Channel Primary MUX
–Data frame
MODULE 2:
Structure of 30 channel Primary MUX, Signaling in
Telecommunication, R2 Signaling, and PDM 30B exchange. III order
8 15
multiplexing equipment– 2/34 MUX equipment, overview of 2/8 card,
8/34 card (No detailed functional description), alarms and
consequent action.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3:
Equalization techniques in DMR-770 Digital Microwave radio – Delay 6 15
equalizer, Transversal equalizer, line equalizer.
MODULE 4:
Bit Stream integration in Digital Transmission systems – Multiplexing
of synchronous data signals, multiplexing asynchronous signals,
6 15
retiming by justification, perforated Clock, Integration of 2Mb
streams in II orderdigital MUX, Integration of digital streams of
different data rates.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5:
Waveguide components – bands, corners, taper, twist, flexible 7 20
waveguide, loading elements, ferrite devices
MODULE 6:
Waveguide Accessories – clamps, earthing pit, flanges and coupling, 8 20
bending tools, Precautions while hoisting waveguide.
END SEMESTER EXAM
369
COURSE
CODE
20ECTET132 Embedded Systems for Communication 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 To give a brief introduction to microcontrollers

 To introduce the concept and basics of embedded systems
 To give an overview of the different communication buses and protocols.
 To give an in depth knowledge in RTOS
Syllabus
Review of the microcontrollers- Memory Organization, Interrupts. Introduction to Embedded Systems -

Characteristics, software, I/O devices, Interrupt Servicing mechanisms. Overview of Communication
Buses and protocols. Hardware Software Co-design and Program Modelling. Real Time Operating
Systems. Study of - VX works, Micro C/OS-II RTOS.
Course Outcome:

1. Program a microcontroller.
2. Understand the basics of embedded systems
3. Get an understanding of the different protocols
4. To be able to program using RTOS
References:
1. Ajay V. Desh Mukh: “Microcontrollers -Theory and Applications”, Tata McGraw Hill
Publications, 2005
2. Rajkamal: “Embedded Systems Architecture; Programming and Design”, 2nd Edition; Tata
McGraw Hill Publications, 2008.
3. Michael Predko, Myke Predko: Programming and Customizing the 8051 microcontroller,
1stEdition; McGraw Hill International, 1999.
4. Ayala, Kenneth J: 8051 microcontroller: Architecture, Programming & Applications, 3rdEdition,
Cengage Learning, 2004
5. J. R. Gibson,: ARM Assembly Language –An Introduction, Lulu Press, 2007
6. Jane. W.S. Liu: Real-time Systems, PHI 2000
7. Phillip A Laplante: Real-Time Systems Design and Analysis : An Engineer's Handbook , 3rdedition,
Wiley-IEEE,2004
8. Paul T Ward & Stephen J Mellor: Structured Development for Real - Time Systems V1
:Introduction and Tools, 9th edition, Yourdon Press, 1985
370
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20ECTET132 Embedded Systems for Communication 3-0-0-3
Contact ESE Marks
MODULES
Hours (%)
MODULE 1:
Brief review of the microcontrollers – 8051/PIC/ARM -
7 15
Programming, CPU Block diagram, Memory Organization, Interrupts,
ADC, PWM, Timers, Watch Dog Timer, Serial Port, I/O Port.
MODULE 2:
Introduction to Embedded Systems: Characteristics of Embedded
systems, Software embedded into a system - General ideas of
8 15
Processor and Memory organization - Processor and memory
selection, Interfacing to Memory and I/O devices- Devices and Buses-
DeviceDrivers and Interrupt Servicing mechanisms.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3:
Overview of Communication Buses and protocols – Serial Bus
Communication Protocols, Parallel Bus Protocols, Internet 6 15
Embedded Systems - Network Protocols, Wireless and Mobile
System Protocols.
MODULE 4:
Hardware Software Co-design and Program Modelling – Program
Models, Multiprocessor Systems, UML Modelling, Inter-process
6 15
Communication and Synchronization of Processes, Tasks and
Threads Multiple Processes in an Application - Data sharing by
multipletasks and routines- Inter Process Communication.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5:
Real Time Operating Systems - Operating System Services, I/O
Subsystems- Network Operating Systems - Real Time and Embedded
8 20
System Operating systems -Interrupt routines in RTOS Environments
-RTOS Task Scheduling models, Interrupt Latency and response
Times -Standardization of RTOS - Ideas of Embedded Linux.
MODULE 6:
Study of VX works, Micro C/OS-II RTOS, Case Studies of
programming with RTOS and Case study /design using 8051/PIC 7 20
microcontroller/ARM processor for applications in
Telecommunications.
END SEMESTER EXAM
371
COURSE
CODE
20ECTET114 Information Theory 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 To get an overview about entropy, its properties and significance in source coding.
 Familiarize the concept of channel capacity, its computation and different channel properties.
 Get an idea about rate distortion theory.
Syllabus
Entropy for discrete and continuous random variables and its properties, source coding theorem and its
significance, Importance of typical set in source coding techniques, computation of channel capacity,
Channel coding theorem, Different channels, Introduction to rate distortion and its properties.
Course Outcome:

1. Understand the importance of entropy calculation and its application in source coding.
2. Should be able to design channels with different channel capacity.
3. Understand rate distortion properties.
References:
1. Robert Gallager: “Information Theory and Reliable Communication”, John Wiley & Sons.
2. T. Cover and Thomas: “Elements of Information Theory”, 2nd edition, John Wiley & Sons 2006.
3. Shu Lin and Daniel. J. Costello Jr.: “Error Control Coding: Fundamentals and applications”, 2nd
edition, Prentice Hall Inc, 2002.
4. T. Bergu: “Rate Distortion Theory a Mathematical Basis for Data Compression” PH Inc. 1971.
5. Special Issue on Rate Distortion Theory, IEEE Signal Processing Magazine, Vol. 15, No. 6,
November 1998.
6. R. J. McEliece: “The theory of information & coding”, Addison Wesley Publishing Co.1982
372
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20ECTET114 Information Theory 3-0-0-3
Contact ESE Marks
MODULES
Hours (%)
MODULE 1:
Entropy- Memory less sources- Markov sources- Entropy of a
discrete Random variable- Joint, conditional and relative entropy- 7 15
Mutual Information and conditional mutual information- Chain
relation for entropy, relative entropy and mutual Information.
MODULE 2:
Lossless source coding- Uniquely decodable codes- Instantaneous
8 15
codes- Kraft's inequality - Optimal codes- Huffman code-
Shannon'sSource Coding Theorem, Lempel Ziv Coding.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3:
Asymptotic Equipartition Property (AEP) - High probability sets and 6 15
typical sets- Properties of typical set - Data compression.
MODULE 4:
Channel Capacity- Capacity computation for some simple channels,
Jointly Typical Sequences, Fano's inequality- Shannon's Channel 7 15
Coding Theorem, Converse- Channels with feedback- Joint
sourcechannel coding Theorem.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5:
Differential Entropy- Joint, relative and conditional differential
6 20
entropy-Mutual information. Gaussian channels- Band limited
channels- Shannon limit- Parallel Gaussian Channels- Water filling.
MODULE 6:
Rate distortion theory - Introduction, Quantization, Rate distortion
function, calculation, continuous sources and rate distortion 8 20
measure, Rate distortion theorem, converse, information
transmission theorem.
END SEMESTER EXAM
373

20ECTET124 Image and Video Processing 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 To enhance the knowledge of 2D-transforms and filtering.

 To develop the skills for processing of images and videos.
 To enhance the knowledge of image and video compression formats.
Syllabus
Basics of Image processing, Image transforms, Image enhancement, Image Restoration, Image
Segmentation, Image texture analysis, Image Reconstruction from projections, Basic Steps of Video
Processing, Motion Estimation, Video processing operations, Image compression and standards, Video
compression and standards.
Course Outcome:

1. Familiarized with the performances of different types of transforms and filtering operations.
2. Familiarized with the processing of images and videos.
3. Understand the different types of image and video compression techniques.
References:
1. ANil K Jain: “Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing,”, PHI, 1989.

2. Gonzalez and Woods: “Digital Image Processing”, 3rd edition, PHI, 2008.
3. Yao wang, Joem Ostarmann and Yaquin Zhang, ”Video processing and communication”1st
edition , PHI
4. Bhabatosh Chanda, D. Dutta Majumder: “Digital Image Processing and Analysis ,PHI, 2004.
5. W Pratt: Digital Image Processing, 4th edition, Wiley, 2007.
6. M. Tekalp, “Digital video Processing”, Prentice Hall International
7. Al Bovik: Handbook of Image and Video, 2nd edition, Academic Press, 2005.
8. Keith Jack: Video Demystified, 5th edition, LLH, 2007.
374
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE:
20ECTET124 Image and Video Processing 3-0-0-3
Contact ESE Marks
MODULES
Hours (%)
MODULE 1:
Basics of Image processing, RGB and HSV color model, 2D
sampling theorem and Nyquist criteria, Interpolation, Moire Effect 7 15
and flat field response. Image transforms - DFT, DCT, Sine,
Hadamard, Haar, Slant, KL transform, Wavelet transform.
MODULE 2:
Image enhancement:-Point processing, Spatial filtering, Histogram
techniques, Pseudo coloring and false coloring, Frequency filtering. 8 15
Image Restoration:- Image observation models, Sources of
degradation,inverse filtering and wiener filtering.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3:
Image Segmentation: - region growing, region merging and split and
merge, watershed segmentation. Image texture analysis - co- 6 15
occurrence matrix, measures of textures, statistical models for
textures.
MODULE 4:
Hough Transform, boundary detection, chain coding. Image
Reconstruction from projections: - Random transform, Back- 6 15
projection operator, Back projection algorithm, Fan beam and
algebraic restorationtechnique.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5:
Basic Steps of Video Processing: Analog video, Digital Video, Time
varying Image Formation models: 3D motion models, Geometric
Image formation, Photometric Image formation, sampling of video 8 20
signals, filtering operations 2-D Motion Estimation: Optical flow,
general methodologies, Block matching algorithm, global Motion
Estimation. Application of motion estimation in video coding.
MODULE 6:
Video processing operations– display enhancement, video mixing,
video calling, scan rate conversion, Image compression – lossless
7 20
and lossy compression techniques, standards for image
compression – JPEG,JPEG2000. Video compression- intra and inter
frame prediction, perceptual coding, standards - MPEG, H.264
END SEMESTER EXAM
375
COURSE
CODE
20ECTET134 High Performance Communication Networks 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 To understand the convergence of the telephone, computer networking, cable TV, and wireless
industries.
 To familiarize network architectures, protocols, control and performance.
 To understand the core networking principles and technologies from a system perspective
Syllabus
Principles of High speed networking. Service Integration - architecture, characterization and

mechanisms. Packet Switched Networks. Internet and TCP/IP Networks. Circuit switched
networks.ATM and Wireless Networks.
Course Outcome:
1. Explain the principles of high speed communication.
2. Derive the most important mathematical results of network performance.
3. Explain the core networking principles and technologies from a system perspective.
4. Identify the essential tools for analyzing, designing, and managing high performance networks.
References:
1. Jean Walrand and Pravin Pratap Varaiya: "High Performance Communication Networks",
2ndEdition, Harcourt and Morgan Kauffman, London, 2000.
2. Sumit Kasera "ATM Networks ", Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2006.
3. Behrouz. A. Forouzan: "Data Communication and Networking ", Tata McGraw-Hill, New
Delhi,2001.
4. C. Sivaram Murty and M. Guruswamy: “WDM Optical Networks, Concepts, Design and
Algorithms”, PHI,2002.
5. A.Leon Gracia, I. Widjaja: "Communication networks ", Tata McGraw-Hill, 2nd edition, New
Delhi,2006.
6. Rajiv Ramaswamy, Kumar Sivarajan: “Optical Networks: a practical perspective”,
2ndedition,Morgan Kaufmann, 2002
376
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE:
High Performance Communication
20ECTET134 3-0-0-3
Networks
Contact ESE Marks
MODULES
Hours (%)
MODULE 1:
Basics of Networks:-Principles of High speed networking.
7 15
Integration of -Telephone, computer, Cable television and Wireless
network.
MODULE 2:
Digitalization: Service integration, network services and layered
8 15
architecture, traffic characterizationand QoS, networks, services:
network elements and network mechanisms.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3:
Packet Switched Networks:-OSI and IP models: Ethernet (IEEE
6 15
802.3); token ring (IEEE 802.5), FDDI, DQDB, frame relay, SMDS:
Internet working with SMDS.
MODULE 4:
Internet and TCP/IP Networks:-Overview; Internet protocol; TCP
and VDP; performance of TCP/IPnetworks. Circuit switched 6 15
networks: SONET; DWDM, Fibre to home, DSL, Intelligent
networks, CATV
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5:
ATM and Wireless Networks:-Main features-addressing, signaling
and routing; ATM header structure adaptation layer, management
7 20
and control; BISDN; Internet-working with ATM, Wireless channel,
link level design, channel access; Network design and wireless
networks.
MODULE 6:
Optical Networks and Switching:-Optical links- WDM systems,
cross-connects, optical LAN's, optical paths and networks; TDS and 8 20
SDS: modular switch designs-Packet switching, distributed, shared,
input and output buffers.
END SEMESTER EXAM
377
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P=C YEAR
CODE
20ECTEP101 Mini Project 0-0-4-2 2020
COURSE CONTENT
The mini project is designed to develop practical ability and knowledge about practical tools/techniques
in order to solve the actual problems related to the industry, academic institutions or similar area.
Students can take up any application level/system level project pertaining to a relevant domain. At the
end, presentation and demonstration of the project should be conducted, which will be evaluated by a
panel of examiners.
378
COURSE
CODE
20ECTEL102 Telecommunication Lab - II 0-0-2-1 2020
Course Objective:
To experiment the concepts introduced in the core and elective courses offered in the second semester
with the help of simulation tools and related hardware.
COURSE CONTENT
Tools: Numerical Computing Environments – GNU Octave, - MATLAB,
Communication Block set, RF Block set and signal processing Block set,
NS2/OPNET.
Channel Coding: Linear Block code and Convolutional codes -Viterbi Decoding
– Majority Logic Decoders- CRC-32.
Modeling and Simulation of Radio Channels - Multipath Fading Channels-
Jakes Model. Spread Spectrum Communication Systems
Scheduling and Queuing Disciplines in Packet Switched Networks: FIFO,
Fair Queuing.
RED- TCP Performance: with and without RED.
Antenna simulation: using ANSYS, IE3D and Microsoft office. OMNET++.
Wireless Medium Access Control: MAC layer 802.11: CSMA/CA, RTS/CTS
mode.
Simple Ad hoc/Sensor Networks: Simulation and Evaluation.
379
M. Tech. Syllabus 2020-VLSI and Embedded Systems

IN
WITH SPECIALIZATION
VLSI AND EMBEDDED SYSTEMS
380
SEMESTER I
COURSE
CODE
20ECVET101 VLSI Technology 4-0-0-4 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 A study of fabrication processes used in VLSI

 Familiarize MOSFET principles in detail
 A study of monolithic Integrated circuits
Syllabus
Production of metallurgical and electronic grade silicon. Crystal and wafer reparation. Lithographic
techniques. Etching, chemical vapour deposition and ion implantation. Carrier generation and
recombination. Calculation of charge densities and position of Fermi level in semiconductors. Invariance of
Fermi level at thermal and electrical equilibrium. Density variation of injected carriers in p-n junctions. One-
sided and two-sided p-n junctions. Metal-semiconductor junctions and ohmic contacts. BJTs. Calculation of
threshold voltage of MOSFETs. Expression for drain current of MOSFETs, Body effect. Circuit model of
MOSFETs including body effect. Unloaded voltage gain of MOSFETs. Isolation of components, scaling.
Tunneling currents. Transit time limitation of frequency response.
Course Outcome:
1. Explain fabrication process in VLSI.
2. Design New MOSFET Devices.
3. Design Monolithic Integrated Circuits.
Text Books:
1. James D. Plummer, Michael D. Deal and Peter B. Griffin, Silicon VLSI Technology, Pearson
Education,2001
2. Adel S. Sedra and Kenneth C. Smith, Microelectronic Circuits, 5 th Ed., Oxford University
Press, 2004.
References:
1. WolfS.andTauber,R.N.,SiliconProcessingfortheVLSIEra,LatticePress,SunsetBeach,2000.
2. Jaeger, R.C., Introduction to Microelectronic Processing,
3. Jacob Millman and Christos C. Halkias, Integrated Electronics, Tata McGraw-Hill
4. Sze, S.M., Physics of Semiconductor Devices, John Wiley and Sons, 3 rdEd.
5. Ben G. Streetman and Sanjay Kumar Banerjee Solid State Electronic devices, 6 th Ed.,
Prentice- Hall of India,2006.
6. Sorab K Gandhi, VLSI Fabrication Principles, John Wiley & Sons, New York,1994
7. Nandita Das Gupta and Amitava Das Gupta, Semiconductor Devices, Prentice-Hall of India,
2004.
381
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20ECVET101 VLSI Technology 4-0-0-4
ESE
Contact
MODULES Marks
Hours
(%)
MODULE 1:
Production of metallurgical grade silicon. Zone refining and Float zone
refining methods to obtain electronic grade silicon. Czochralsky
technique of crystal growth. Wafer preparation. Oxidation methods.
Lithographic techniques. Contact, proximity and projection printing 10 15
methods. Dependence of “feature size” on lithographic technique.
Electron beam lithography. De Broglie wavelength. Etching methods.
Chemical vapour deposition techniques. Epitaxial growth. Ion
implantation techniques. Magnetic field deflection method for
removal of unwanted ions. Metallisation.
MODULE 2:
Carrier generation and recombination. Photons and phonons. Direct
and indirect and gap materials and recombination mechanism in each.
Calculation of charge densities using density of states function and
Fermi-Dirac probability function. Proof for complete ionization of 10 15
dopants at room temperature. Calculation of position of Fermi level.
Proof for invariance of Fermi level in a system at thermal and electrical
equilibrium.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3:
P-N junctions. Density variation of injected carriers in a p-n junction
as a function of distance. Diode equation. Analysis of one-sided and
double-sided p-n junctions. Calculation of diffusion and transition
capacitances. Metal semiconductor junctions (Schottky diodes) and 9 15
method of converting the metal semiconductor junction in to an
ohmic contact, BJTs. Characteristic equation of the BJT. Early voltage.
MODULE 4:
Advantages of using MOSFETs as the active device in VLSI design.
Structure of MOSFET and principle of operation. Ideal MOS structure.
Calculation of threshold voltage for the ideal MOS structure.
Modification of threshold voltage for non- ideal MOS structures. 9 15
Analysis to obtain drain current as a function of gate-to- source
voltage. Channel length modulation and Early voltage, Calculation of gm
and ro. Substrate bias effect (Body effect). Transconductance due to
body effect.
INTERNAL TEST - II
382
MODULE 5:
Low frequency circuit model of MOSFET including body effect. Calculation
of capacitances associated with MOSFETs. Complete all frequency model of
MOSFET. Calculation of unloaded voltage gain μ = gmro. Dependence of 9 20
unloaded voltage gain μ on drain current. Use of MOSFET circuit model in
analysis.
MODULE 6:
Isolation of components. Junction isolation and dielectric isolation.
Techniques for modifying threshold voltage. Silicon gate technology.
Advantages of scaling. Scaling of oxide thickness to reduce threshold
9 20
voltage. Problem of tunnelling current in thin oxide layers. Tunnelling
mechanism and its quantification. Techniques to reduce tunnelling. Velocity
saturation. Transit time limitation of frequency response and need to
reduce channel length. Resistors and capacitors.
END SEMESTER EXAM
383
COURSE
CODE
20ECVET103 Advanced Digital Design 3-1-0-4 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 A detailed study of combinational & sequential circuits

 Familiarize with asynchronous sequential circuits
 A brief knowledge on RTL design of datapath components and controller
Syllabus
Review of Boolean Algebra-Shannon’s Expansion Theorem, Consensus Theorem, Reed Muller

Expansion, A detailed study of combinational & sequential circuits-design; Clock skew and Jitter;
Familiarize asynchronous sequential circuits ; Static ,dynamic and essential hazards; Designing with SM
charts; A brief knowledge on RTL design of data path components and controller; overview of
Optimizations and Trade-offs; Design Using Hardware Description Languages
Course Outcome:

1. Design combinational and sequential logic circuit and describe them using Hardware
description Language.
2. Analyze and Design Asynchronous sequential circuits.
3. Design elementary data paths and control unit for processors.
4. Estimate and compute the area, delay and power consumption of logic circuit.
Text Books:
1. Charles H. Roth, Jr, “Fundamentals of Digital Design”, PWSPub.Co.,1998.

2. Kenneth J Breeding “Digital Design Fundamentals”, , PrenticeHall,.1989.
3. Frank Vahid, Digital Design (Preview Edition),WielyIndiaEdition,2012.
References:
1. John F. Wakerly , “Digital Design Principles and Practices”, 4/e, Prentice Hall,2005
2. WilliamI. Fletcher “A Systematic Approach to Digital Design”, PHI, 1996.
3. James E. Palmer, David E. Perlman “Introduction to digital Design” ,Tata Mc Graw Hill,1996.
4. S. Devadas, A.Ghosh and K. Keutzer “Logic Synthesis” ,McGraw Hill,1994.
5. N.N Biswas “Logic Design Theory”, Prentice Hall of India, 1st Edn, 1993.
384
COURSE PLAN
COURSE COURSE NAME
L-T-P-C
CODE
20ECVET103 Advanced Digital Design 3-1-0-4
Contact ESE
MODULES Hours Marks
(%)
MODULE 1:
Review of Boolean Algebra-Shannon’s Expansion Theorem, Consensus
Theorem, Reed Muller Expansion, Combinational-Circuit design using
Programmed Minimization Methods. Sequential Circuit Design: Mealy
and Moore machines, Finite State Machine design procedure – derive 9 15
state diagrams; obtain state tables, state reduction methods, and state
assignments. Clock skew and Jitter. Combinational Logic & Sequential
Logic Description Using Hardware Description Languages.
MODULE 2:
Asynchronous sequential circuits: Derivation of excitation table, Race
conditions and cycles, Static and dynamic hazards, Methods for avoiding
9 15
races and hazards, essential hazards, Designing with SM charts–State
machine charts, Derivation of SM charts and Realization of SM charts.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3:
Data path Components: Registers, Adder, Comparators, Multiplier -
Array-Style, Subtractors and Signed Number, Arithmetic-Logic Units- 7 15
ALUs, Shifters, Counters and Timers, Register Files. Data path
Component Description Using Hardware Description Languages.
MODULE 4:
Controller Design: FSM based Controller design, Micro programmed 5 15
Controllers
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5:
RTL Design: High-Level State Machine, RTL Design Process.
Behavioural-Level Design: C to Gates, Hierarchy—A Key Design 6 20
Concept. Determining Clock Frequency.
385
MODULE 6:
Optimizations and Tradeoffs: Combinational Logic Optimizations and
Tradeoffs, Sequential Logic Optimizations and Tradeoffs, Data path 6 20
Component Tradeoffs, RTL Design Optimizations and Tradeoffs.RTL
Design Using Hardware Description Languages.
END SEMESTER EXAM
386
COURSE
CODE
20ECVET105 CMOS VLSI Design 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 To understand the basic MOS inverter and its characteristics

 To outline the performance parameters of CMOS circuits
 To discuss the various combinational and sequential CMOS circuits
 To explain the static and dynamic logic circuits
Syllabus
To understand the basic MOS inverter and its characteristics; outline the performance
parameters of CMOS circuits; discuss the various combinational and sequential CMOS
circuits; explain the static and dynamic logic circuits
Course Outcome:
1. Understand various parameters involved in CMOS circuit design
2. Design various combinational and sequential CMOS circuits
Text Books:
1. Sung-Mo Kang, Yusuf Leblebici, “CMOS Digital Integrated Circuits-Analysis and Design”,
3/e, Tata McGraw-Hill Education,2003.
2. NeilH.E.WesteandDavidMoneyHarris,“CMOSVLSIDesign-
ACircuitsandSystemsPerspective”, 4/e, Pearson Education,2011
References:
1. Rabaey, Chandrakasan and Nikolic, “Digital Integrated Circuits – A Design
Perspective”, 2/e, Pearson Education.
2. R. Jacob Baker, Harry W. Li, David E. Boyce, “CMOS, Circuit Design, Layout, and
Simulation”, 3/e, Wiley Inter science.
3. John P.Uyemura “Introduction to VLSI Circuits and Systems”, John Wiley & Sons,
Inc., 2002.
387
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20ECVET105 CMOS VLSI DESIGN 3-0-0-3
ESE
Contact
Marks
MODULES Hours
(%)
MODULE 1:
The MOS Inverter: Principle, Depletion and enhancement load inverters,
The basic CMOS inverter, transfer characteristics, logic threshold, Noise
margins, and Dynamic behaviour Propagation Delay, Power 9 15
Consumption, Latch-up in CMOS circuits, Tristate inverter, BiCMOS
inverter.
MODULE 2:
Performance parameters: Static, dynamic and short circuit power
dissipations; Propagation delay; Power delay product; Fan in, fan out and
dependencies. Delay Estimation: RC Delay Models, Linear Delay 9 15
Model, Logical Effort, Parasitic Delay , Logical Effort and Transistor
Sizing: Delay in a Logic Gate, Delay in Multistage Logic Networks
Interconnect :Resistance, Capacitance, Delay, Crosstalk.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3:
Combinational MOS Logic Circuits: MOS logic circuits with NMOS loads
Primitive CMOS logic gates – NOR & NAND gate, Complex Logic 7 15
circuits design –Realizing Boolean expressions using NMOS gates and
CMOS gates, AOI and OAI gates.
MODULE 4:
Sequential MOS Logic Circuits: Behaviour of bistable elements, SR Latch,
Clocked latch and flip flop circuits, CMOS D latch and edge triggered flip- 5 15
flop.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5:
Static Logic Circuits: Pseudo-NMOS – Full complementary CMOS,
Ratioed logic, Pass Transistor logic Pass transistor Logic (PTL) families: 6 20
DPTL, CPTL-DCVS, CMOS transmission gates, Designing with
Transmission gates.
388
MODULE 6:
Dynamic Logic Circuits: Basic principle, Voltage Bootstrapping,
Synchronous dynamic pass transistor circuits, Dynamic CMOS
transmission gate logic High performance Dynamic CMOS circuits, N-P 6 20
Dynamic logic - Domino logic - NORA logic - TSPC logic - Multiple
output Domino logic - Dynamic NORA.
END SEMESTER EXAM
389
COURSE
CODE
20ECVET107 Design with ARM Microcontrollers 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 Thoroughunderstandingofembeddedsystems,itsdesignrequirements,architecture
 Embedded system Project design techniques
 ARM processor architecture, its programming and about various software tools for
the embedded system design especially ARM
Syllabus
A system engineering approach to embedded systems; embedded systems hardware point of

view; Integrated Development environment and hardware simulator; ARM architecture and
features; Programming the ARM processor; ARM instruction sets; ARM assembly Programs;
Programming ARM MCU using C.
Course Outcome:

1. Understand the design requirements and architecture of embedded systems
2. Design Embedded system projects
3. Program ARM Microcontroller
Text Books:
1. Tammy Noergaard. Embedded Systems Architecture ,Elsevier,2011
2. Lyla B Das, Embedded Systems - An Integrated Approach, Pearson,2012.
References:
1. Steve Furber, ARM System - on - Chip Architecture, Pearson, 2ndedition.
2. Andrew N. Sloss, Dominic Symes and Chris Wright, ARM System Developer’s Guide
- Designing and Optimizing Systemsoftware,Elsevier,2006
3. ARM Company Ltd. “ARM920T Technical Reference Manual (Rev1)-ARMDDI0151C”.
390
COURSE PLAN
20ECVET107 Design with ARM Microcontrollers 3-0-0-3
ESE
Contact
Marks
MODULES Hours
(%)
MODULE 1:
A system engineering approach to embedded systems - Introduction and
definition of Embedded Systems, Embedded System Design, Introduction 6 15
and importance of embedded systems architecture, the embedded
systems Model. Microprocessor Vs microcontroller, Classification of
MCUs.
MODULE 2:
Embedded systems - The hardware point of view- MCU, memory, low 6 15
power design Sensors, ADCs and actuators.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3:
The integrated Development Environment (IDE) Conversion steps from
source file to an executable file and downloading the Hex file to the Non- 6 15
volatile memory Hardware simulator
MODULE 4:
History of ARM, The ARM Core, features of ARM. ARM architecture
versions, ARM architecture ARM920T Core Processor Functional Block
Diagram Programming the ARM processor. The ARM memory interface 9 15
The Advanced Microcontroller Bus Architecture(AMBA).
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5:
ARM instruction sets General structure of an assembly language line. 8 20
Writing ARM assembly Programs.
MODULE 6:
Peripheral programming of ARM MCU using Internal block diagram of
LPC2148:Timer Peripheral programming of ARM MCU using Internal 7 20
block diagram of LPC2148: PWM and UART
END SEMESTER EXAM
391
COURSE
CODE
20ECVET111 ASIC and FPGA 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 To study the design flow of different types of ASIC.

 To familiarize the different types of programming technologies.
 To learn the architecture of different types of FPGA.
 To gain knowledge about partitioning, floor planning, placement and routing
including circuit extraction of ASIC
Syllabus
Types of ASICs and different approaches for design of ASIC, Memory technologies;
programmable ASICs- Programmable ASIC logic cells, Programmable ASIC I/O cells; FPGA
architecture; Design of FPGA based systems using low level tools; physical design of ASIC
based systems; Physical design-partitioning, Floor planning, Placement, Routing, Circuit
extraction and DRC.
Course Outcome:

1. Understand different types of ASICs and different approaches for design of ASIC
2. Understand programmable ASICs and different types of Programmable ASICs
3. Understand different FPGA architecture
4. Design of FPGA based systems using low level tools
5. Apply different types of tools for the physical design of ASIC based systems
Text Books:
1. M.J.S. Smith, Application Specific Integrated Circuits, Pearson Education, 2008
References:
1. S. Trimberger, Field Programmable Gate Array Technology, Edr, Kluwer Academic

Publications, 1994.
2. John V. Oldfield, Richard CDore, Field Programmable Gate Arrays, Wiley
Publications1995.
3. P. K. Chan & S. Mourad, Digital Design Using Field Programmable Gate Array,
Prentice Hall, 1994.
4. P.K.Lala,DigitalSystemDesignusingProgrammableLogicDevices,BSP,2003
392
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20ECVET111 ASIC and FPGA 3-0-0-3
ESE
Contact
MODULES Marks
Hours
(%)
MODULE 1:
Types of ASICs, Design Flow. ASIC Cell Library, Combinational
Logic Cell, Sequential Logic Cell, Data-path Logic Cell, Library Cell 8 15
design, Gate Array Design, Standard Cell design, Data path Cell
design.
MODULE 2:
The anti-fuse, SRAM, EPROM and EEPROM technologies, PREP
benchmarks. Programmable ASIC logic cells–CTELACT, XILINX
LCA, ALTERA FLEX, ALTERA MAX, Programmable ASIC IO Cells 8 15
- AC & DC Input & Output, Clock & Power input.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3:
Actel ACT, Xilinx LCA, Xilinx EPLD, Altera MAX5000, Altera 7 15
MAX7000, Altera MAX 9000, Altera FLEX.
MODULE 4:
Design systems, Logic Synthesis, Schematic entry, Low level design 6 15
language.PLA tools, EDIF, CFI design representation
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5:
Physical design, CAD tools. System partitioning, FPGA partitioning, 6 20
partitioning methods.
MODULE 6:
Floor planning, Placement, Routing-Global routing, detailed 7 20
routing, special routing. Circuit extraction and DRC
END SEMESTER EXAM
393
COURSE
CODE
20ECVET121 VLSI Design Automation 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 The study of basic and advanced algorithms used for VLSI CAD tools
 To provide an introduction to the fundamentals of Computer-Aided Design tools for
the modelling, design, analysis of digital Very Large Scale Integration(VLSI) systems.
Syllabus
Data structures for Representation of Graphs; Introduction to combinational logic synthesis,

Binary Decision Diagram; Hardware models for High-level synthesis. Allocation, assignment
and scheduling; Compaction: Problem formulation & types; Partitioning: Problem formulation
& algorithms; Placement, floor planning & pin assignment: Problem formulation and
algorithms; Global Routing: Problem formulation, classification of global routing algorithms,
Detailed routing: Problem formulation and classifications.
Course Outcome:

1. Establish comprehensive understanding of the various phases of CAD for digital
electronic systems, from digital logic simulation to physical design.
2. Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of fundamental concepts in CAD.
3. Demonstrate knowledge of computational and optimization algorithms and tools
applicable to solving CAD related problems.
4. Establish capability for CAD tool development and enhancement.
Text Books:
1. Gerez, Sabih H. Algorithms for VLSI design automation.Vol.8.NewYork:Wiley,1999.
2. Sherwani, Naveed A. Algorithms for VLSI physical design automation. Springer Science
& Business Media,2012.
References:
1. Meinel, Christoph, and Thorsten The obald. Algorithms and data structures in
VLSI design: OBDD-foundations and applications. Springer Science & Business
Media, 2012.
2. Drechsler, Rolf. Evolutionary algorithms for VLSI CAD. Springer Science & Business
Media, 2013.
3. Trimberger, Stephen M.An Introduction to CAD for VLSI. Springer Science &
Business Media, 2012 .Cormen, ThomasH., CharlesE. Leiserson, and Ronald
L.Rivest."C.Stein Introduction to Algorithms." MIT Press 5.3 (2001):55.
394
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20ECVET121 VLSI Design Automation 3-0-0-3
ESE
Contact
Marks
MODULES Hours
(%)
MODULE 1:
Data structures for Representation of Graphs , Breadth First Search,
Depth First Search, Topological Sort, Spanning Tree Algorithm-
Kruskal’s and Prim’s, Shortest path Algorithm - Dijkstra’s and Bellman 8 15
Fort Algorithm for single pair Shortest paths, Floyd-Warshall
algorithm for All pair Shortest path, Matrix multiplication modelling of
All pairs shortest path problem, Min cut and Max cut Algorithms
MODULE 2:
Introduction to combinational logic synthesis, Binary Decision 7 15
Diagram, Hardware models for High-level synthesis. Allocation,
assignment and scheduling.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3:
Compaction: Problem formulation, one-dimensional compaction, two
dimension based compaction, hierarchical compaction, Partitioning: 7 15
Problem formulation, classification of partitioning algorithms, Group
migration algorithms, simulated annealing & evolution, other partitioning
algorithms.
MODULE 4:
Placement, floor planning & pin assignment: Problem formulation,
Placement algorithms, Floor planning concepts, Constraint based floor 7 15
planning, Floor planning algorithms for mixed block & cell design,
General & channel pin assignment
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5:
Global Routing: Problem formulation, classification of global outing 7 20
algorithms, Maze routing algorithm, line probe algorithm, Steiner Tree
based algorithms, ILP based approaches.
395
MODULE 6:
Detailed routing: Problem formulation, single layer routing algorithms,
two layer channel routing algorithms, three layer channel routing 6 20
algorithms, and switchbox routing algorithms , Over the cell routing &
via minimization: two layers over the cell routers, constrained &
unconstrained via minimization.
END SEMESTER EXAM
396
COURSE
CODE
Embedded Network
20ECVET131 3-0-0-3 2020
Controllers
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objective:
To understand the concepts of different communication protocols and its implementation.
Syllabus
Introduction to Embedded Networking: Serial communication protocols: PC Parallel port
programming: USB bus: USB bus communication: Microcontroller USB Interface: CAN Bus:
PIC microcontroller CAN Interface: Micro CAN: Elements of a network:, Design choices:
Inside the Internet protocol: Wireless Embedded Networking
Course Outcome:

1. Understand the CAN protocol and its Implementation
2. Understand the Serial and Parallel Communication Protocol including USB
Text Books:
1. Embedded Systems Design: A Unified Hardware/Software Introduction - Frank

Vahid, Tony Givargis, John & Wiley Publications,2002
2. GlafP.Feiffer, Andrew Ayreand Christian Keyold, “Embedded Networking with
CAN and CAN open”, Embedded System Academy2005.
References:
1. Dogan Ibrahim,‘Advanced PICmicrocontrollerprojectsinC’,Elsevier2008

2. Mohammad Farsi, Manuel Bernardo Barbosa, “CAN open:
Implementation Made Simple”, Research StudiesPress,1999.
3. JanAxelson‘EmbeddedEthernetandInternetComplete’,Penrampublications
4. Bhaskar Krishnamachari, ‘Networking wireless sensors’, Cambridge press 20055.
5. ParallelPortComplete:Programming,interfacingandusingthePCsparallelprinterport
- Jan Axelson, Penram Publications, 1996
397
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20ECVET131 Embedded Network Controllers 3-0-0-3
ESE
Contact
Marks
MODULES Hours
(%)
MODULE 1:
Introduction to Embedded Networking, Serial/Parallel Communication –
Serial communication protocols -RS232 standard – RS485, Synchronous 6 15
Serial Protocols -Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) – Inter Integrated
Circuits (I2C)
MODULE 2:
PC Parallel port programming -ISA/PCI Bus protocols –Firewire, USB
bus – Introduction – Speed Identification on the bus – USB States, USB
bus communication: Packets –Data flow types –Enumeration – 8 15
Descriptors –PIC 18 Microcontroller USB Interface – C Programs, CAN
Bus – Introduction - Frames –Bit stuffing –Types of errors – Nominal Bit
Timing
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3:
PIC microcontroller CAN Interface –A simple application with CAN,
Micro CAN- Implementing CAN open Communication layout and 8 15
requirements–Comparison of implementation methods, Micro CAN
open–CAN open source code Conformance test – Entire design life
cycle.
MODULE 4:
Elements of a network – Inside Ethernet–Building a Network: Hardware
options–Cables, Connections and network speed, Design choices: 6 15
Selecting components–Ethernet Controllers – Using the internet in local
and internet communications
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5:
Inside the Internet protocol-embedded Ethernet- Exchanging messages
using UDP and TCP–Serving web pages with Dynamic Data–Serving web 6 20
pages that respond to user Input, Email for Embedded Systems – Using
FTP – Keeping Devices and Network secure.
398
MODULE 6:
Wireless Embedded Networking- Wireless sensor networks –
Introduction – Applications, Network Topology – Localization – Time 8 20
Synchronization, Energy efficient MAC protocols –SMAC – Energy
efficient and robust routing – Data Centric routing
END SEMESTER EXAM
399
COURSE
CODE
20ECVET141 Embedded Software Design 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 Discuss about embedded software development tools and embedded program

development.
 A brief insight in to the embedded operating system and its various design
perspectives followed by OS performance guidelines.
 Familiarize various device drivers and computer software development.
Syllabus
Embedded software development tools: Embedded program development, Embedded

Firmware Design and Development, Software Design Aspects: Embedded Operating
Systems, Device Dependent Software: Device Drivers, Introduction to middleware and
application software.
Course Outcome:
The student will be able to get familiarized with embedded operating system and various
device drivers and computer software development.
Text Books:
1. Lyla B Das,-Embedded Systems–An Integrated Approach, Pearson2012.

2. Shibu K V,- Introduction to Embedded Systems, Mc Graw Hills 2010.
3. Tammy Noergaard, ―Embedded Systems Architecture: A Comprehensive Guide for
Engineers and Programmers, Elsevier, 2/e,2010.
References:
1. QingLi&CarolineYao,―Real-TimeConceptsforEmbeddedSystems,CMPBooks,2003.
2. David E Simon, ―An Embedded SoG ware Primer, Addison -Wesley,2006.
3. RajKamal,―EmbeddedSystems:Architecture,ProgrammingandDesign,McGrawHill,2008
400
COURSE PLAN

20ECVET141 Embedded Software Design 3-0-0-3
ESE
Contact
MODULES Marks
Hours
(%)
MODULE 1:
Embedded software development tools: Embedded program
development: Initial Steps, the Integrated Development Environment:
Code editor-Builder-Simulator-GUI, Downloading the Hex file to the 7 15
Non-volatile Memory: Out of circuit programming, In System
Programming (ISP), Hardware Simulator.
MODULE 2:
Embedded Firmware Design and Development: Embedded Firmware
Design Approaches Embedded Firmware Development Languages. 7 15
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3:
Software Design Aspects: Embedded Operating Systems: Layers
of an Operating System, History of Operating System, Functions
Performed by an Operating System: Process, Multitasking and Process 7 15
Management
Process Implementation—Process Scheduling-Inter task communication.
MODULE 4:
Embedded Operating Systems continued: Memory management-User
memory space – Kernel memory space I/O and File system 7 15
managements Standards-POSIX (Portable Operating System Interface)
OS performance Guidelines, OSes and Board Support Packages.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5:
Device Dependent Software: Device Drivers: Definition, Purpose of a
device driver, Device Drivers for Interrupt Handling Memory Device
Drivers, On-Board Bus Device Drivers, and Board I/O Driver Examples
7 20
confined to initialization of Ethernet and RS 232.
401
MODULE 6:
Introduction to middleware and application software: Middle ware:
Definition, Middleware Examples - Networking Middleware Driver
Examples-Internet Layer Middleware (Internet Protocol) -Transport
Layer Middleware (User Datagram Protocol). 7 20
Application Software: Application Layer Software Examples - File Transfer
Protocol (FTP) Client Application, Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP)
and E-Mail Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP)
END SEMESTER EXAM
402
COURSE
CODE
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:

Syllabus
Course Outcome:
Text Books:
Publisher, 2004
2. Research Methodology: A Step by Step Guide for Beginners’ by Ranjit Kumar, SAGE PublicationsLtd;
Third Edition
References:
Company Ltd, 2004
4. Management Research Methodology’ by K. N. Krishnaswamy et al, Person Education
403
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
Contact
MODULES Hours
MODULE 1:
Quantitative vs. Qualitative and Conceptual vs. Empirical.
MODULE 2:
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3:
Research Design : Meaning, Need and Types of research design, Literature
Survey and Review, Identifying gap areas from literature review, Research 5
Design Process, Sampling fundamentals, Measurement and scaling
techniques, Data Collection – concept, types and methods, Design of
Experiments.
MODULE 4:
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5:
reports & papers, Methods of giving references and appendices,
Reproduction of published material, Plagiarism, Citation and 5
acknowledgement.
MODULE 6:
basic presentations skills, Use of Internet and advanced search techniques.
404

20ECVEQ101 Seminar - 1 0-0-2-2 2020
COURSE CONTENT
offered in the first semester of the M. Tech. Programme. He / she shall select the topic based on
the References: from international journals of repute, preferably IEEE journals. They should get the
paper approved by the Programme Co-ordinator / Faculty member in charge of the seminar and
shall present it in the class. Every student shall participate in the seminar. The students should
undertake a detailed study on the topic and submit a report at the end of the semester. Marks will
be awarded based on the topic, presentation, participation in the seminar and the report
submitted.
405

VLSI and Embedded Systems
20ECVEL101 0-0-2-1 2020
Lab - I
Course Objectives:
To experiment the concepts introduced in the core and elective courses offered in the first
semester with the help of simulation tools and related hardware
Course Outcome:
The student will be able to design &analyze sequential and combinational circuits in CMOS
COURSE CONTENT
Tools: CADENCE/SYNOPSYS/MENTOR GRAPHICS or any other

equivalent tools
Experiments:
PART A
Simulation and Synthesis of Digital Circuits (Synthesis – Use Library
180nm or less)
1. Experiments on combinational circuits
2. Experiments on Sequential Circuits
VLSI EXPERIMENTS
3. Experiments based on FSM Machines

PART B
Design (Schematic), Simulation and Characterization of the following

CMOS Logic Circuits( Technology Library 180nm or less )
1. Inverter
2. NAND
3. NOR
4. Adders
5. Flip-Flops
Tools and Boards: Any other equivalent tools

Experiments
Embedded Processor /Controller based experiments to be done on a 32 bit

Embedded
Processor/Controller based on IDE and Boards

Peripheral Interfacing based experiments(serial/parallel port
based) IDE based simulations
406
SEMESTER II
COURSE
CODE
20ECVET102 Analog Integrated Circuits 4-0-0-4 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 The study of basic and advanced MOS amplifier configurations, their biasing circuit
elements and evaluation of performance matrices
 Developanunderstandingofdeviceandcircuittheorysufficienttoestimatethelowandhigh
frequency behaviour of linear circuits, including noise
 To lay good foundation on the design and analysis of CMOS analog integrated circuits.
Syllabus
Single stage amplifiers –Basic configurations; Current Mirrors and Voltage references-types
and analysis, Layout and packaging consideration for analog circuits – design rules, Multi
finger transistors – substrate coupling; Differential amplifiers, Output stages : source follower
as an output stage, CMOS Class A B output stages Frequency response of Amplifiers and
noise- Statistical Characteristics of Noise, Noise Spectrum, Amplitude Distribution
,Correlated and Uncorrelated Sources
Course Outcome:

1. Analyze and design current sources/sinks/mirrors
2. Analyze characteristics of single-stage amplifiers and differential amplifiers
3. Understand the importance of noise and distortion in analog circuits
Text Books:
1. R.J.Baker, H.W.Li, D.E. Boyce. CMOS Circuit design, Layout and Simulation
(2ndEdition),2005. 1038p.
2. Behzad Razavi , “Design of Analog CMOS Integrated Circuits”, Tata McGraw Hill2008
References:
1. Gray, Hurst, Lewis, Meyer, “Analysis and Design of Analog Integrated Circuits”, 5 th
407
Edition, WielyIndia,2010
2. PhilipEAllen,DouglasRHolberg,“CMOSAnalogCircuitDesign”,InternationalStudent(Seco
nd) Edition, First Indian Edition2010
3. T.C Carusone, David A. Johns, Kenneth W.Martin “Analog Integrated Circuit
Design”,2nd Edition, Wiley.
408
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20ECVET102 Analog Integrated Circuits 4-0-0-4
ESE
Contact
Marks
MODULES Hours
(%)
MODULE 1:
Single stage amplifiers: Basic configurations: common source amplifier-
Resistive load, Diode Connected load, Current Source load, common 8 15
drain amplifiers -common gate amplifiers, Cascode amplifiers and folded
cascode amplifiers.
MODULE 2:
Current Mirrors: Simple CMOS current mirror ,Sensitivity analysis - 7 15
Temperature analysis -Transient response, Cascode current mirror -
Wilson current mirror
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3:
Voltage references: Supply independent and temperature independent
references-Band gap references, PTAT current generation and constant 7 15
Gm biasing, Layout and packaging consideration for analog circuits –
design rules, Multi finger transistors – substrate coupling
MODULE 4:
Differential amplifiers: Source coupled pair: current source load – CMRR
– Matching considerations, Source cross coupled pair, cascode loads, 7 15
Wide swing differential amplifiers:–constant transconductance differential
amplifier, Current differential amplifier Output stages: source follower as
an output stage, CMOS Class AB output stages
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5:
Frequency response of Amplifiers: General Considerations – Miller effect
– Association of Poles with Nodes, Common source, Source followers, 7 20
Common gate, Cascode stage, Differential Pair
MODULE 6:
Noise Statistical Characteristics of Noise - Noise Spectrum, Amplitude
6 20
Distribution - Correlated and Uncorrelated Sources.
END SEMESTER EXAM
409
COURSE
CODE
20ECVET104 Advanced CMOS VLSI 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 To know the various sources of power dissipation in CMOS circuits

 To understand the various low voltage circuit techniques for leakage power reduction
 To study the various low voltage circuit design of static and dynamic CMOS circuits
Syllabus
Physics of Power dissipation in MOSFET devices-MIS structure; Sources of Power dissipation

in CMOS- static and active power dissipation; Transistor leakage mechanisms of deep
submicron transistors; Circuit techniques for leakage power reduction; Submicron device
design issues; Low voltage circuit design techniques; Low-Voltage Low –Power Circuit design
style, Non clocked logic-CMOS Static logic Circuits; Clocked logic family-Basic concept;
Organization of static RAM
Course Outcome:

1. Identify the sources of power dissipation of various digital circuits
2. Understand the leakage source and reduction techniques
3. Design low power adders, multiplexers and low power memory
Text Books:
1. KaushikRoy,SharatCPrasad,LowpowerCMOSVLSIcircuitdesign,WileyIndia
2. Low voltage CMOS VlSI-James .B.Kuo, Jea Hong Lou
3. KiatSengYeo,KaushikRoy,Lowvoltage,lowpowerVLSIsubsystems,TataMcGrawHill
References:
1. Anatha P Chandrakasan, Robert W Brodersen, Low power digital CMOS Design,

Kluwer Academic
2. Gray Yeap, Practical low power digital VLSI design, Springer
3. Christian Piguet, Low power CMOS circuits, Taylor &Francis
4. Abdellatif Bellaouar, Mohamed I Elmasry, Low power digital VLSI design, Kluwer
410
COURSE PLAN

20ECVET104 Advanced CMOS VLSI 3-0-0-3
ESE
Contact
Marks
MODULES Hours
(%)
MODULE 1:
Physics of Power dissipation in MOSFET devices-MIS structure-
threshold voltage- body effects-short channel and narrow width effects 8 15
–sub threshold current , Sources of Power dissipation in CMOS-static
and active power dissipation Transistor leakage mechanisms of deep
submicron transistors
MODULE 2:
Why low voltage CMOS, Side effects of Low –Voltage, Circuit
techniques for leakage power reduction – standby leakage control using 7 15
transistor stacks, multiple Vth techniques, Dynamic Vth techniques, supply
voltage scaling technique
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3:
Submicron device design issues, Minimizing short channel effect, Low
voltage circuit design techniques, Low-Voltage Low –Power Circuit 7 15
design style, Non clocked logic-CMOS Static logic Circuits, Difficulties
for Low-Power and Low – Voltage operation
MODULE 4:
CMOS differential static logic-DCVS-DSL-DCVSPG, CMOS pass 7 15
transistor logic, BiCMOS static Logic Circuit-Sub-3V BiCMOS-1.5 V
BiCMOS logic with transient feedback, adiabatic logic -1.5 V CMOS
energy efficient logic circuit
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5:
Clocked logic family-Basic concept, Domino logic(domino NAND gate), 7 20
Differential Current Switch Logic, NORA logic
MODULE 6:
Organization of static RAM, MOS static RAM cell, Banked organization 6 20
of SRAMs, Low voltage low power (LVLP) SRAM cell Designs
END SEMESTER EXAM
411
COURSE
CODE
Embedded Operating Systems
20ECVET106 and RTOS 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 To study in detail, learn implementation aspects of real-time systems and to make a case
study
 To familiarize with the fundamentals of Embedded Systems and basic operating system
concepts,
 To learn implementation aspects of real-time systems and to make a case study
Syllabus
Introduction to embedded systems; Operating Systems -Basic Principles and Operating

System structures; Scheduling algorithms and Introduction to RTOS
Course Outcome:

1. Get an Idea about the Real Time Embedded Systems
2. Get Familiarize with the Real Time Operating Systems
Text Books:
1. Raj Kamal, Introduction to Embedded Systems,Tata Mc Graw Hill Publications,

2002.
2. Frank Vahid, Tony D. Givargis, Embedded System Design-A Unified Hardware /
Software Introduction, John Wiley and Sons, Inc2002
References:
1. Tammy Noergaard. Embedded Systems Architecture ,Elsevier,2011

2. Programming for embedded systems, Dream tech SoftwareTeam,Wiley,2002
3. Silberschatz, Galvin,Gagne” Operating System Concepts, 6thed,JohnWiley,2003
4. Real-Time Concepts for Embedded Systems by Qing Li, Caroline Yao, CMP Books.
5. VxWorks Reference Manual
412
COURSE
PLAN

20ECVET106 Embedded Operating Systems and 3-0-0-3
RTOS
Contact ESE
MODULES Hours Marks
(%)
MODULE 1:
Introduction to embedded systems: Classification of embedded systems,
overview of embedded system architecture. Hardware Architecture, 6 15
Embedded Software Development Process, Embedded Systems on a Chip
(SoC).
MODULE 2:
Operating Systems: Basic Principles-Operating System Structures:
System Calls, Files. Processes –Design and Implementation of processes, 8 15
Communication between processes Introduction to Distributed
operating system –issues in distributed system: states, events, clocks.
Distributed scheduling - Fault & recovery.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3:
Scheduling algorithms and Introduction to RTOS: Scheduling algorithms:
Round Robin, Pre-emptive Earliest deadline first. RTOS Architecture, 7 15
Introduction to RTOS- Task and task states, Task and data, Semaphore
and shared data.
MODULE 4:
Inter task communication and synchronization- Semaphore, Message 7 15
Queues, Mail boxes and pipes. Timer functions, events, Memory
Management, Interrupt routine in an RTOS environment.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5:
Case Studies: VxWorks Scheduling and Task Management –Real time
scheduling Task Creation, Inter task Communication, Pipes, Semaphore, 8 20
Message Queue, Signals, Sockets, Interrupts and I/O systems.
MODULE 6:
OS Standards-POSIX(Portable Operating System Interface), OS
Performance Guidelines. OSes and Board Support Packages (BSPs). 6 20
Overview of linkers & linking process, Executable and linking format,
Mapping Executable Images in to Target Embedded Systems.
END SEMESTER EXAM
413
COURSE
CODE
20ECVET112 VLSI Testing 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 To know the various types of faults and also to study about fault detection and
dominance.
 To know the concepts of test generation for combinational and sequential circuits
 To understand the concepts of test generation method–DFT,BIST.
 To understand the fault diagnosis method.
Syllabus
Introduction to Testing, Fault Modelling, Fault equivalence & collapsing. Logic and Fault
Simulation, Testability Measures. Combinational ATPG-Sequential ATPG. Memory Test,
Delay test, IDDQ testing. Design for testability–BIST, Boundary Scan standard. Introduction
to Fault Diagnosis and Self-checking design.
Course Outcome:
1. Explain the VLSI testing procedure.
2. Analyze VLSI circuit for testability.
3. Understand basic ATPG Algorithms used in VLSI Testing.
4. Explain the delay testing, IDDQ testing and Memory Testing
5. Design logic circuit easier for testing by inserting elementary testing Hardware.
Text Books:
1. Viswani D Agarwal and Michael L Bushnell, “Essentials of Electronic Testing of Digital

Memory and Mixed Signal VLSI Circuits”, Springer,2000.
References:
1. M. Abramovici, M A Breuer and A D Friedman, “Digital systems Testing and Testable

Design”, IEEE Press,1994.
2. P.K.Lala,“Fault Tolerant and Fault Testable Hardware Design”,Academic Press,2012.
3. P.K. Lala, “Digital Circuit Testing and Testability”, Academic Press,2002
4. Alfred L Cronch, “Design for Test for Digital IC’s and Embedded Core system”,
Prentice Hall, 1999.
5. Niraj Jhaand Sanjeep K Gupta, “Testing of Digital Systems”, Cambridge University
Press,2003.
414
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20ECVET112 VLSI Testing 3-0-0-3
ESE
Contact
Marks
MODULES Hours
(%)
MODULE 1:
Introduction- Role of Testing- Yield-A TE Block Diagram. Fault
Modeling-glossary of Fault models-single stuck-at-faults-functional 6 15
equivalence and fault collapsing Dominance collapsing and check point
theorem.
MODULE 2:
Logic and Fault Simulation -modeling signal states-algorithm for true
value simulation-serial and parallel fault simulation Testability Measures- 6 15
Combinational Controllability - Combinational Observability –
Introduction to Sequential Testability Measures
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3:
Combinational ATPG-Boolean Difference Method-D-Algorithm-
PODEM- Sequential ATPG Implementation and complexity- Time 7 15
Frame Expansion -simulation based methods.
MODULE 4:
Delay test - Path delay test and fault models - Transition faults - delay 7 15
test methodologies – practical consideration IDDQ testing – Faults
detected by IDDQ Testing-Testing methods.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5:
Memory Test-Faults & Fault modeling- March Test Algorithm- Reduced
Functional Faults. Design for Testability – DFT Fundamentals, Scan 8 20
design, Partial Scan, Random Access Scan,
MODULE 6:
BIST- Pattern Generation-Output Response Analysis-BILBO. 8 20
Boundary Scan standard. Introduction to Fault Diagnosis and Self-
checking design.
END SEMESTER EXAM
415
COURSE
CODE
20ECVET122 Introduction to MEMS 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 To introduce the concepts of micro electro mechanical devices.

 To understand the fabrication process of Microsystems.
 To know the design concepts of micro sensors and micro actuators
Syllabus
MEMS Fundamental concepts; Microfabrication techniques; Photolithography, Ion

Implantation, Diffusion, Oxidation, Thin film depositions: LPCVD, Sputtering, Evaporation,
Electroplating; etching techniques, Microsystems packaging; MEMS Sensors; MEMS Actuators.
Course Outcome:

1. Describe new applications and directions of MEMS
2. Critically analyze Microsystems technology for technical feasibility as well as practicality
3. Describe the limitations and current challenges in Microsystems technology
Text Books:
1. Marc Madou, “Fundamentals of Microfabrication”, CRC press1997.

2. StephenD.Senturia,”MicrosystemDesign”,KluwerAcademicPublishers,2001
References:
1. TaiRanHsu, ”MEMS and Microsystems Design and Manufacture”, Tata Mcraw Hill,2002.
2. Chang Liu, “Foundations of MEMS” ,Pearson education India limited,2006,
3. Sergey Edward Lyshevski, “MEMS and NEMS: Systems, Devices and Structures” CRC
Press, 2002
416
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20ECVET122 Introduction to MEMS 3-0-0-3
ESE
Contact
Marks
MODULES Hours
(%)
MODULE 1:
Micro scale systems overview, Introduction to MEMS, Applications. 6 15
Devices and Structures for MEMS. Materials for MEMS
MODULE 2:
Bulk Micromachining, Surface Micro machining High Aspect-Ratio 5 15
(LIGA and LIGA-like) Technology
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3:
Photolithography, Ion Implantation, Diffusion, Oxidation. Thin film 6 15
depositions: LPCVD, Sputtering, Evaporation, Electroplating
MODULE 4:
Dry and wet etching, electrochemical etching, Microsystems packaging, 5 15
Essential packaging technologies, Selection of packaging materials,
HTCC and LTCC
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5:
Mechanics behind MEMS sensors, Acoustic wave sensors, resonant
sensor, Vibratory gyroscope, Capacitive and Piezo Resistive Pressure 10 20
sensors, Piezo- resistive pressure sensor, thermal sensors, Magnetic
sensors, radiation sensors
MODULE 6:
Actuation using thermal forces, Actuation using shape memory
Alloys, Actuation using piezo electric crystals, Actuation using 10 20
Electrostatic forces, Micromechanical Motors and pumps. Comb
drive actuators
END SEMESTER EXAM
417
COURSE
CODE
20ECVET132 DSP Based System Design 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 To understand the concepts of different processor architectures and different DSP

processors
 To understand the architecture AVR Microcontroller
Syllabus
Need for Special Digital Signal Processors : different processor architectures : Introduction
to AVR Microcontroller : Interfacing :Introduction to TI DSP processor : TMS330C6000:
Introduction to the C6713DSK ”Review of FIR filtering: Review of IIR filtering: Writing
efficient code: Introduction to Sharc/ Tiger Sharc/ Black finseries
Course Outcome:

1. Explain the different processor architectures.
2. Program the DSP Processor
Text Books:
1. Dananjay V .Gadre ‘Programming and Customizing the AVR microcontroller’, McGraw

Hill2001
2. Naim Dahnoun Digital Signal Processing Implementation using the TMS320C6000 DSP
Platform, 1stEdition
3. R.Chassaing ,Digital Signal Processing and Applications with the C6713 and C6416
DSK, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., New York,2004.
References:
1. R.Barnett, L.O’CULL and S.Cox “Embedded C Programming and Atmel AVR”,

Delmar Cengage Learning, India Edition ,2009.
2. Sen M. Kuo and Woon- Seng Gan. Digital Signal Processors: Architectures,
Implementations, and Applications, Prentice Hall,2004
3. David J Defatta J, Lucas Joseph G & Hodkiss William S; Digital Signal Processing: A
System Design Approach, 1st Edition; John Wiley
4. A.V. Oppenheim and R.W. Schafer, Discrete-Time Signal Processing, Second edition,
Prentice- Hall, Upper Saddle River, NJ,1989
418
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20ECVET132 DSP Based System Design 3-0-0-3
ESE
Contact
Marks
MODULES Hours
(%)
MODULE 1:
Need for Special Digital Signal Processors, Processor trends: Von New
mann versus Harvard architecture, Architectures of superscalar and 7 15
VLIW fixed and floating point processors, New Digital Signal Processing
hardware trends,
Selection of DS processors.
MODULE 2:
Introduction to AVR Micro controllers- Architecture – memory 6 15
organization – addressing modes, I/O Memory – EEPROM – I/O Ports,
SRAM –Timer –UART
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3:
AVR- Interrupt Structure- Serial Communication with PC – ADC/DAC 6 15
Interfacing, Interrupt Structure- Serial Communication with PC –
ADC/DAC Interfacing Introduction to TI DSP Processor -TMS330C6000
series
MODULE 4:
TMS330C6000 series CPU Architecture, CPU Data Paths and Control, 9 15
Internal Data/Program Memory. On chip peripherals: Timers - Multi
channel buffered serial ports Extended Direct Memory Access,
Interrupts, and Pipelining
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5:
Design aspects: Introduction to the C6713 DSK- Code Composer
Studio IDE - Matlab and basic skills, Review of FIR filtering: FIR filter 6 20
design techniques and tools, Review of IIR filtering: IIR filter design
techniques and tools, Sampling, quantization and working with the
AIC23 codec
419
MODULE 6:
Writing efficient code: optimizing compiler - effect of data types and
memory map. TMS320C6713 Assembly language Programming: 8 20
Instructions Set and Addressing Modes–Linear Assembly. Introduction
to Sharc / Tiger Sharc /Blackfin series, Other major vendors in the DSP
market and the latest trends.
END SEMESTER EXAM
420
COURSE
CODE
Hardware Software
20ECVET142 Co-design 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 To educate the hardware, software, and system designer on the fundamentals of

hardware / software co-design
 To understand and employ cooperative hardware/software design techniques
for the construction of complex systems, particularly embedded systems.
Syllabus
Introduction: Motivation hardware & software co-design; Hardware Software back ground;
Co-design Concepts; Methodology for Co-Design; Unified Representation for Hardware
& Software; An Abstract Hardware & Software Model; Performance Evaluation;
Object Oriented techniques in Hardware Design; Processor example.
Course Outcome:
The student will be able to employ cooperative hardware/software design techniques for the
construction of complex systems, particularly embedded systems.
Text Books:
1. Sanjaya Kumar, James H. Ayler, “The Co-design of Embedded Systems: A Unified

Hardware Software Representation”, Kluwer Academic Publisher,2002.
2. H.Kopetz, “Real-Time Systems”, Kluwer,1997.
3. R.Gupta,“Co-synthesisofHardwareandSoftwareforEmbeddedSystems”,Kluwer1995.
References:
1. S. Allworth, “Introduction to Real-time Software Design”, Springer-Verlag,1984.

2. C.M.Krishna,K.Shin,“Real-timeSystems”,Mc-GrawHill,1997
3. Peter Marwedel, G. Goosens, “Code Generation for Embedded Processors”,
Kluwer Academic Publishers,1995.
421
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20ECVET142 Hardware Software Co-Design 3-0-0-3
ESE
Contact
Marks
MODULES Hours
(%)
MODULE 1:
Specification of embedded systems- Why Co-design? – Comparison of
co-design approaches-MoCs: State oriented, Activity oriented, Structure 7 15
oriented, Data oriented and Heterogeneous- Software CFSMs-Processor
Characterization.
MODULE 2:
Introduction: Motivation hardware & software co-design, system design
consideration, research scope &overviews. Hardware Software back 7 15
ground: Embedded systems, models of design representation, the virtual
machine hierarchy, the performance modelling, Hardware Software
development.
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3:
Co-design Concepts: Functions, functional decomposition, virtual
machines Hardware Software partitioning, Hardware Software partitions, 7 15
Hardware Software alterations, Hardware Software trade-offs, co-design.
MODULE 4:
Methodology for Co-Design: Amount of unification, general
consideration & basic Philosophies, a framework for co-design Unified 7 15
Representation for Hardware & Software: Benefits of unified
representation, modelling concepts.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5:
An Abstract Hardware & Software Model: Requirement &
applications of the models, models of Hardware
Software system, an abstract Hardware Software models, generality of 7 20
the model. Performance Evaluation: Application of the abstract
Hardware& Software model, examples of performance evaluation
422
MODULE 6:
Object Oriented techniques in Hardware Design: Motivation for object
oriented technique, data types. Modelling hardware components as 7 20
classes, designing specialized components, data decomposition, Processor
example
END SEMESTER EXAM
423
COURSE
CODE
20ECVET114 VLSI Digital Signal Processing 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 IntroducestudentstothefundamentalsofVLSIsignalprocessingandexposethemtoexamples
of applications.
 Design and optimize VLSI architectures for basic DSP algorithms.
 Introduce algorithm, architecture, and circuit design tradeoffs to jointly optimize for
power, performance, and area.
Syllabus
DSP algorithms. : Pipelining and Parallel Processing: Unfolding: Systolic architecture design:
Arithmetic architecture: The CORDIC Algorithms : Fast convolution algorithms: Parallel FIR
filters : Parallel processing in IIR filters.
Course Outcome:
The student will analyse and design basic signal processing blocks meeting VLSI constraints
Text Books:
1. Keshab V Parhi, VLSI Digital Signal Processing, Willey India.

2. Peter Pirsch, Architecture for Digital Signal Processing, Wiley
References:
1. Magdy A Bayoumi, VLSI design methodologies for DSP architecture.

2. B. Parhami, Computer Arithmetic: Algorithms and Hardware Designs, 2nd edition,
Oxford University Press, New York,2010.
3. Israel Koren, Computer Arithmetic Algorithms,2nd Edition, CRC Press,2001
4. M.D. Ercegovac and T. Lang, Digital Arithmetic, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers - An
Imprint of Elsevier Science,2004
424
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20ECVET114 VLSI Digital Signal Processing 3-0-0-3
ESE
Contact
Marks
MODULES Hours
(%)
MODULE 1:
Representation of DSP algorithms .Iteration Bound: Loop Bound,
Iteration Bound, LPM Algorithm for iteration bound computation, 8 15
Iteration Bound for multi rate data flow graphs
MODULE 2:
Pipelining and Parallel Processing: Introduction, Timing Techniques: 6 15
Retiming: introduction, properties, system inequalities, retiming
techniques
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3:
Unfolding: Introduction, algorithm, properties, critical path Systolic 7 15
architecture design: Introduction, Design Methodologies, Design B1 and
B2
MODULE 4:
Arithmetic architecture: Bit level arithmetic architecture, parallel 6 15
multipliers, bit serial multipliers, Canonic Singed digit arithmetic,
distributed arithmetic
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5:
The CORDIC Algorithms: Rotations and pseudo rotations, Basic
CORDIC iterations, CORDIC hardware, Generalized CORDIC, Fast 8 20
convolution algorithms: Cook Toom, Modified Cook-Toom
MODULE 6:
Parallel FIR filters: Fast FIR, Pipelining of recursive filters: Introduction,
pipeline interleaving, Parallel processing in IIR filters, Scaling and round 7 20
off noise computation
END SEMESTER EXAM
425
COURSE
CODE
20ECVET124 Reconfigurable Computing 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 To have fundamental knowledge and understanding of principles and practice in

reconfigurable architecture and computing
 To study about Placement and partitioning algorithms.
 To familiarize various methods of reconfiguration
 To study reconfigurable architectures.
Syllabus
Introduction Reconfigurable Computing –- Performance, power, and other metrics -RC

Architectures – Comparing Computing Machines. Placement and partitioning algorithms–
Routing algorithms-Spatial Computing architectures–Systolic Architectures and Algorithms
Systolic Structures–Adaptive Network Architectures – Reconfigurable bus – Dynamic
reconfiguration– Partial reconfiguration – OS support – Reconfigurable Computing
Architectures – Reconfigurable coprocessor based architectures – Reconfigurable pipelines –
Reconfigurable memories & caches – Reconfigurable Computing Applications.
Course Outcome:
1. An ability to explain the reconfigurable computing architecture
2. An ability to use various algorithms for placement, partitioning and routing.
3. An ability to understand basic adaptive network architectures.
Text Books:
1. Wayne Wolf, “FPGA- based System Design”, Prentice Hall, 2004.
References:
1. R. Vaidynathan and J. I., Trahan, “Dynamic Reconfiguration: Architectures and
Algorithms”, Khuwer Academic/Plenum Publishers, New York,2004.
2. M. Gokhale and P. Graham, Reconfigurable Computing: Accelerating Computation
with Field- Programmable Gate Arrays, Springer, 2005, ISBN:978-0-387-26105-8.
3. P. Lysaght and W. Rosenstiel (eds.), New Algorithms, Architectures and Applications
for Reconfigurable Computing, Springer, 2005, ISBN:978-1402031274.
426
4. D. Pellerin and S. Thibault, Practical FPGA Programming in C, Prentice-Hall, 2005,

ISBN: 978- 0131543188.
5. R.Coferand B. Harding, Rapid System Prototyping with FPGAs: Accelerating the
Design Process, Newnes, 2005, ISBN:978-0750678667.
6. C. Bobda, Introduction to Reconfigurable Computing: Architectures, Algorithms and
Applications, Springer, 2007, ISBN:978-1402060885.
427
COURSE
PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20ECVET124 Reconfigurable Computing 3-0-0-3
ESE
Contact
Marks
MODULES Hours
(%)
MODULE 1:
Introduction to Adaptive/Reconfigurable Computing – Goals and
motivations - History, state of the art, future trends, Basic concepts and
related fields of study- Performance, power, and other metrics- 7 15
Algorithm analysis and speedup projections, RC Architectures-Device
characteristics-Fine-grained architectures - Coarse-grained
architectures.– Custom Computing Machine Overview –Comparing
Computing Machines
MODULE 2:
6 15
Placement and partitioning algorithms, routing algorithms
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3:
Spatial Computing architectures – Systolic Architectures and Algorithms
Systolic Structures – Bit Serial. Reconfigurable coprocessor based 6 15
architectures – Compiler technology for coprocessor based
architectures.
MODULE 4:
Adaptive Network Architectures – Static and Dynamic network –
Routing/embedding Rearrange able networks. Reconfigurable bus – 7 15
Dynamic reconfiguration issues – Reconfiguration delay – Partial
reconfiguration – OS support.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5:
Reconfigurable Operating Systems – Device and task models, Multitasking 8 20
and runtime systems – Dynamically Reconfigurable Adaptive Viterbi
Decoder
MODULE 6:
Mapping/scheduling algorithm – Reconfigurable pipelines – Reconfigurable
memories & caches. Reconfigurable Computing Applications, reconfigure 8 20
ability using Virtex T series
END SEMESTER EXAM
428
COURSE
CODE
20ECVET134 Embedded Control System 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 To introduce the concepts of embedded control systems.

 To understand various input out devices and data convertors
 To know the design concepts of asynchronous data communication as applied to ECS.
Syllabus
Basic concepts of Embedded Control System, schematic study ; Input and Output: Key board
and displays; Timer and Interrupts; Serial Communication requirements; DAC and ADC,
Ports, Data acquisition; Examples of Embedded Control System and case study.
Course Outcome:

1. Design interfacing circuits for embedded control system
2. Design and implement basic embedded control systems
Text Books:
1. BallS.R,EmbeddedmicroprocessorSystems–RealWorldDesign,PrenticeHall,2001
References:
1. Jean J. Labrosse, “Embedded Systems Building Blocks: Complete and Ready-To-Use

Modules in C”, The publisher, Paul Temme, 2003.
2. Herma K, “Real Time Systems – Design for distributed Embedded Applications”,
Kluwer Academic,2003
3. Daniel W. Lewis, “Fundamentals of Embedded Software where C and Assembly
meet”, PHI, 2002
429
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20ECVET134 Embedded Control System 3-0-0-3
ESE
Contact
Marks
MODULES Hours
(%)
MODULE 1:
Controlling the hardware with software, Data lines, Address lines, Ports 6 15
– Schematic representation, Bit masking – Programmable peripheral
interface
MODULE 2:
Keyboard basics – Keyboard scanning algorithm., Switch input detection 5 15
– 74 LS 244, Multiplexed LED displays Character LCD modules, LCD
module display, Configuration
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3:
Time-of-day clock –Timer manager, Interrupts – Interrupt service
routines, IRQ,ISR, Interrupt vector or dispatch table multiple-point, 6 15
Interrupt-driven pulse width modulation
MODULE 4:
Asynchronous serial communication – RS-232, RS-485– Sending and 5 15
receiving data, Serial ports on PC – Low-level PC serial I/O module,
Buffered serial I/O.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5:
DAC and ADC: R 2R ladder – Resistor network analysis, Port offsets –
Triangle waves analog vs. digital values – ADC0809, Auto port detect – 10 20
Recording and playing back voice, Capturing analog information in the
timer interrupt service routine, Automatic, multiple channel analog to
digital data acquisition.
MODULE 6:
Multiple closure problems – Basic outputs with PPI, Controlling motors
– Bi- directional control of motors, H bridge – Telephonic systems- 10 20
Mobile and Satellite, Stepper control –Power electronic control
systems
END SEMESTER EXAM
430

CODE
20ECVET144 Electronic Packaging 3-0-0-3 2020
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
 To understand the different electronic IC assembly and electrical design.

 To Understand the thermo mechanical design and materials used for electronic
device packaging
Syllabus
Microsystems Packaging: Electrical Package Design: IC Assembly – Purpose, Requirements,

Technologies, Printed Circuit Board – Anatomy, CAD tools for PCB design, Thermal
Management: Design for Reliability – Fundamentals.
Course Outcome:

1. Get a detailed understanding of electronic Packaging Materials
2. Get a thorough idea about different IC Packaging
3. Get an idea about different thermal and electronic packaging considerations.
Text Books:
1. Rao R. Tummala: Fundamentals of Microsystem Packaging McGraw Hill.
References:
1. Richard K. Ulrich & William D .Brown Advanced Electronic Packaging-2nd Edition: IEEE
Press
2. Charles A Harper, Electronic Packaging and Interconnection Handbook, McGraw hill,
Fourth Edition
431
COURSE PLAN
COURSE
COURSE NAME L-T-P-C
CODE
20ECVET144 Electronic Packaging 3-0-0-3
ESE
Contact
Marks
MODULES Hours
(%)
MODULE 1:
Microsystems Packaging- Need of packaging, electrical, mechanical and
material technologies, Packaging Materials – electrical, thermal, 5 15
mechanical and chemical properties. Future trends.
MODULE 2:
Electrical Package Design: Fundamentals, Electrical Anatomy of Systems 7 15
Packaging, Signal Distribution, Power Distribution, Electromagnetic
Interference, Design Process
INTERNAL TEST - I
MODULE 3:
IC Assembly – Purpose, Requirements, Technologies, Wire bonding, Tape
Automated Bonding, Flip Chip. Wafer Level Packaging – merits and 8 15
demerits, Technologies, reliability, wafer level test.
MODULE 4:
Printed Circuit Board – Anatomy, CAD tools for PCB design, Standard 8 15
fabrication, Limitations, Microvia Boards. Board Assembly – Surface
Mount Technology, Through-Hole Technology, Assembly Issues, Design
challenges.
INTERNAL TEST - II
MODULE 5:
Thermal Management - Cooling Requirements, Electronic cooling
methods, Sealing and Encapsulation: Necessity, Requirements, 7 20
Encapsulation Processes, Hermetic Sealing.
MODULE 6:
Design for Reliability – Fundamentals, Induced failures, Design for
Reliability – Fundamentals, Induced failures Electrical Testing – System 7 20
level electrical testing, Interconnection tests, Active Circuit Testing,
Design for Testability.
END SEMESTER EXAM
432
COURSE
CODE
20ECVEP101 Mini Project 0-0-4-2 2020
COURSE CONTENT
The mini project is designed to develop practical ability and knowledge about practical
tools/techniques in order to solve the actual problems related to the industry, academic
institutions or similar area. Students can take up any application level/system level project
pertaining to a relevant domain. At the end, presentation and demonstration of the project
should be conducted, which will be evaluated by a panel of examiners.
433
M.Tech. Syllabus 2020-VLSI and Embedded Systems
COURSE
CODE
VLSI and Embedded Systems
20ECVEL102 0-0-2-1 2020
Lab - II
Course Objective:
To experiment the concepts introduced in the core and elective courses offered in the
second semester with the help of simulation tools and related hardware.
Course Outcome:
The student will be able to design & analyze analog and digital circuits in CMOS.
COURSE CONTENT
Tools: CADENCE/SYNOPSYS/MENTOR GRAPHICS or any
other equivalent tools
Experiments:
Schematic Design, Simulation and Characterization of the following Analog
Circuits
PART A (Analog VLSI Design)
a. OPAMP
b. Two - Stage OPAMP with CMFB
c. Comparator
d. 8 - Bit Current Steering DAC/ Charge Scaling DAC
e. 8- Bit SARADC
MOSFETDeviceCharacterizationforSmallSignalDeviceParametersandParasi
tics Design (Schematic and Layout), Simulation and Characterization of
the following Analog Circuits
a. Current Mirrors
b. Voltage Reference
c. Single Stage amplifier configurations
i. CS
ii. CG
iii. CD
d. Differential Amplifier
Tools and Boards: XILINX/ALETERA or any other equivalent

tools and Boards
434
M.Tech. Syllabus 2020-VLSI and Embedded Systems
I. FPGA Based experiments ( Simulation, Synthesis, Post Route

Simulation)
Digital Components inside a microprocessor and integration of
these components
PART B (Embedded Experiments)
a. Shifters
b. State machine based controllers
c. Instruction decoder
d. ALU
II. HDL Based experiments (All the experiments should be verified

by downloading the programming file to FPGA/CPLD)
a. Familiarization of User Constraints File and generation of
programming file.
b. IP Core based experiments
c. Experiments on FPGA-on-board verification
d. Implementation of digital filters (input may be taken using
Parallel ADC and output may be observed using parallel
DAC).
435

M.tech. First Year Syllabus - 2020

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

M.tech. First Year Syllabus - 2020

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SAINTGITS COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING

Kottukulam Hills, Pathamuttom, Kottayam

AUTONOMOUS COLLEGE AFFILIATED TO APJ ABDUL KALAM

FIRST YEAR SYLLABUS 2020

Sl No Course Code Course Name Page No

COMPUTER SCIENCE AND SYSTEMS ENGINEERING

1 20CSSET101 Discrete Structures for Computer Science 2

2 20CSSET103 Advanced Algorithmic Concepts 4

3 20CSSET105 Automata Theory and Computability 6

4 20CSSET107 Distributed Systems and Advanced Computing 8

5 20CSSET111 Advanced Database Concepts 10

6 20CSSET121 Linear Algebra and Topology 12

7 20CSSET131 Computer Systems Engineering 14

8 20CSSET141 Number Theory 16

9 20GNGNT101 Research Methodology 19

11 20CSSEL101 Distributed Systems and Advanced Computing Lab 22

12 20CSSET102 Computer System Design and Architecture 23

13 20CSSET104 Computer Aided Software Engineering 25

14 20CSSET112 Approximation Algorithms 27

15 20CSSET122 Automated Verification 29

16 20CSSET132 Program Analysis and Verification 31

17 20CSSET142 Statistical Foundations of Machine Learning 33

18 20CSSET114 Engineering System Architectures 35

19 20CSSET124 Foundations of Crypto Systems 37

20 20CSSET134 Graph theory 40

21 20CSSET144 Foundations of Machine Learning Techniques 42

22 20CSSET116 Operating System Kernel Design 44

23 20CSSET126 Randomized Algorithms 47

24 20CSSET136 Mathematical Foundations of Digital Image Processing 49

25 20CSSET146 Big Data Management and Analytics 51

26 20CSSEP101 Mini Project 53

27 20CSSEL102 Computer Aided Software Engineering Lab 54

28 20CSSED101 Industrial Training 55

GEOMECHANICS AND STRUCTURES

29 20CEGST101 Applied Mathematics for Civil Engineers 57

30 20CEGST103 Theoretical Geomechanics 59

31 20CEGST105 Advanced Soil Mechanics 62

32 20CEGST107 Advanced Design of Concrete Structures 65

33 20CEGST111 Soil Exploration and Field Testing 67

34 20CEGST121 Soil- Structure Interaction 70

35 20CEGST131 Critical State Soil Mechanics 72

36 20CEGST141 Prestressed Concrete Structures 74

37 20GNGNT101 Research Methodology 76

39 20CEGSL101 Advanced Geotechnical and Structural Lab 79

40 20CEGST102 Design of Reinforced Concrete Foundations 80

41 20CEGST104 Foundation Analysis and Design 82

42 20CEGST106 Dynamics of Soil and Design of Machine Foundations 85

43 20CEGST112 Ground Water Engineering 87

44 20CEGST122 Ground Improvement Techniques 90

45 20CEGST132 Applied Soil Mechanics 93

46 20CEGST142 Earthquake Analysis and Design of Structures 96

47 20CEGST114 Environmental Geotechniques 98

48 20CEGST124 Advanced Steel Structures 101

49 20CEGST134 Analysis and Design of Pavements 103

50 20CEGST144 Modern Construction Practices 106

51 20CEGSP101 Mini Project 109

52 20CEGSL102 Civil Engineering Design Studio 110

53 20CEGSD101 Industrial Training 111

54 20MEMDT101 Advanced Engineering Mathematics 113

55 20MEMDT103 Theory of Vibration 115

56 20MEMDT105 Advanced Mechanics of Solids 117

57 20MEMDT107 Design of Power Transmission Elements 119

58 20MEMDT111 Industrial Tribology 121